4
ats “hn *4 ?
Stas pes
‘. +. “¥ y 2" £ pS aa ~ é
m8 ME ee nt
KS ‘ : PAS
. % ss: Bet sk SA
oo a : < . > it
oF 9< Soe se FF
"MARCH, JUNE, SEPTEMBER, AND DECEMBER
wal ef F%. y° ,
- Ae ’ x
ws yt
s , p > \
‘ o " YY
on :
7 of
»
et
3k Oe >
Pa 4
S we
’ ’ : ¥
t + . y
és a
> * " Lan”
Pa)
b er a: “ea v's Ie i
: ay s A? ff |
. eke
Dig
: Cie
Ps
: , . ,
] $ e ] Ss , ° = 7 i } ri
logical Society of America
a ‘ :
+5 ?
~~ VoLumE 23 NUMBER 3 a 4
SEPTEMBER, 1912 9 SPR ogee
: | F
‘ : ; Mv Z ‘ aa
z 4 3 | t > !
4 : ay |
; ‘ aie *
er 2 ‘; a
ee teat by aah a
> ‘ Bi et
~
‘ - : ~
: ; ca
_ JOSEPH STANLEY-BROWN, EDITOR x Sad
pe
. ? . ‘ aN %
° i 2 ad, Re "
. HAS Ce © Rae
; ~ _—
ai Se PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY po Ry? pies
CONTENTS
Progress of Opinion as to the Origin of the Lake Superior Iron Ores.
SIN Winchell =" .- - +. 2 Pte ts
By N. H. Winchell -
Differential Erosion and Equiplanation in Portions of Yukon and
Alaska. By De Lorme D. Caimes - - - - - - - -
Correlation of the Paleozoic Faunas of the Eastport Quadrangle, Maine.
By ‘Henry:Shaler Willams: -~-8- (2.0 = 2-5 ee
Development and Systematic Position of the Monticuliporoids. By
H.R.Cumings - - - - - - - - - --- - = |
By Clinton R. Stauffer - - -
Cniteria for the Recognition of Ancient Delta Deposits. By Joseph
Saponite, Thalite, Greenalite, Greenstone.
Oriskany Sandstone of Ontario.
(a Rs Pe oO, TS ENE ac SRR, Ae
A Mississippian Delta. By E.B. Branson- - - - - - - -
Boulder Beds of the Caney Shales at Talihina, Oklahoma. By J. B.
ibeiale ortho. - sey Th Sa eae SE a
Pre-Wisconsin Channels in Southeastern South Dakota and North-
eastern Nebraska. By J.E: Todd. - -+-' - - - - -
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA ~
Subscription, $10 per year to’ individuals residing in North America;
libraries and to individuals residing elsewhere than in North America.
Communications should be addressed to The Geological Society of America, care of 420 lth as b 7
Street N. W., Washington, D. C., or 77th Street and Central Park, West, New York City.
NOTICE.—In accordance with the rules established by Council, claims for non-receipt of the
preceding part of the Bulletin must be sent tothe Secretary of the Society within three months
of the date of the receipt of this number in order to be filled gratis.
Entered as second-class matter in the Post-Office at Washington, D. C.,
under the Act of Congress of July 16, 1894
PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, INC., WASHINGTON, D. C,
7
333-348 af
349-356
357-370
377-446
447-456
457-462
463-470" ;
$7.50 to institutions and as a
Pigs |
317-326%a
» nine "%
329-332
x be
eee
pe Es
—
ie ep ( TIN ibe THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VoL. 23, PP. 317-328 JULY 15, 1912
- PROGRESS OF OPINION AS TO THE ORIGIN OF THE LAKE
ae SUPERIOR IRON ORES?
BY N. H. WINCHELL
(Read by title before the Society December 27, 1911)
“5
he | CONTENTS
; = rhe report of Foster and Whitney
‘harles apes s theory of segregation
THe Report oF FOSTER AND WHITNEY
; celebrated report of Foster and Whitney on the geology of the
‘Superior land district, part Il, 1851, was written, so far as con-
Ete iron ore of the region, by Prof. J. D. Sey: It embraces
Brides ‘of iron on the walls of volcanic craters, and in clefts Bs
iti s where they could be attributed to sublimation from great heat,
led to regard sublimation as one of the two factors in the production
f “ii ores of the Marquette district. Internal, as well as volcanic, heat
with Whitney a fundamental and active postulate in much of his
logical reasoning. The other factor he supposed to have been simply
eous eruption, these oxides having been “poured out” from the interior
F the earth in a plastic state. The former factor seemed to be required
account for the minuteness of the distribution of oxides, and to explain
eir banded structure in those cases where the oxide is closely incorpo-
ted in “metamorphic products,” such as “jasper, hornstone, chert, chlo-
, and talcose slate.” It was the assumed “metamorphic” origin of
ese that made easy the assumption that the contained bands of iron
or wer due to heat and therefore to sublimation. The actual molten
—__——
7 fan script received by the Secretary of the Society January 9, 1912.
XXIII—Bvutt. Geor, Soc, AM., Vou. 23, 1911 (317)
318 N.H. WINCHELL—ORIGIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES
eruptive origin was attributed to larger masses of irregular shapes occu-
pying preexisting depressions, or inclosed between strata that had been
folded over them, or running in long dikelike lines across or among the
associated strata. Thus igneous action, with its immediate products, was
the primary agent. It is curious that Whitney, who was at that date an
assayer and chemist rather than geologist, and whose reputation and
skill placed him, in the judgment of the foremost authorities of his time,
in the forefront of his profession, should have been willing to adopt a
theory that violated so many of the principles of chemical science. The
chemical impossibilities of this hypothesis have been shown amply in a
former publication,” and the geological difficulties which it encounters
are entailed in part by the erroneous fundamental chemical assumptions,
and yet chiefly by insufficient and incorrect field observations. The errors
of structural geology into which these pioneers fell, though numerous
and sometimes vast, can be excused in the light of the newness of the
problems and the inchoate ideas of Archean geology which were then
prevalent. There was a profound non-appreciation of the importance of
careful field studies, and of detailed description of the facts as they east.
It is not intended here to discuss this hypothesis. It is necessary,
however, in justice to Whitney, to give him credit for the origination of
the primary idea of igneous forces and igneous rocks as the first cause
of the ores of the region, whatever may have been the steps he trod. to
reach it, and whatever may have been the geological and chemical history
that succeeded in order to get the oxides of iron into the condition in
which we now find them. He appealed to sedimentation in a very limited
way. He rightly rejected the idea of the sedimentary origin of the
banding seen in massive jaspery ores on the tops of the conspicuous
knobs, and rightly accepted it in the case of certain so-called “‘metamor-
phic strata,” where the beds are of various widths, but with a conform-
able range and dip; and wherever some conglomeratic beds were found to
be so interstratified, though containing traveled fragments of ore, they
were believed to be in the same formation with the ore, and to have been °
formed by convulsive outbreaks of volcanism which broke the preexisting
strata and furnished fragmental debris amenable to contemporary violent
sedimentary distribution.
As there are two great fundamental causes for the origination of rocks,
namely, igneous action and sedimentation, so, to a large extent, theories
of the iron ore have oscillated from igneous eruption to aqueous sedimen-
tation, since iron ore is one of the important components of the rocks of
the earth’s crust—not important because of its relative bulk, but because
of its economic value and its wide distribution.
*The iron ores of Minnesota. Bulletin VI of the Minnesota Geological Survey, 1891,
REPORT OF FOSTER AND WHITNEY 319
At a later date (1856), however, Whitney was more favorable to an
aqueous sedimentary origin of some of the ores of Lake Superior. While
not abating from his first view of the igneous origin of the most of. the
ore in its present condition, he said:
“There is still another form of deposit which is not infrequently met with in
the Lake Superior region. . . . This consists of a series of quartzose beds,
of great thickness, passing gradually into specular iron, which frequently forms
bands of nearly pure ore, alternating with bands of quartz more or less mixed
with the same substance. . . . These deposits seem to have been of sedi-
mentary origin. . . . The iron ore may have been introduced either by subli-
mation of metalliferous vapors from below during the deposition of the siliceous
particles, or by a precipitation from a ferriferous solution in which the strati-
fied rocks were in process of formation.” *
This suggestion of a ferriferous solution in a part of the waters of the
ocean has been widely extended and adopted and appears in most of the
iatest literature, and has been so far expanded by some that it is made
to operate even in all those ore masses in which no trace of sedimentary
action could be seen by Whitney.
From the time of Whitney to the time of Irving, but few geologists
entered thoroughly into the subject of the origin of the Lake Superior
ores. None were found who disagreed seriously with Whitney, except
Charles Whittlesey. Most of them, however, favored the sedimentary
hypothesis rather than the eruptive. But frequently some modification
or special action was found necessary in order to account for local condi-
tions which were thought to be exceptional. Thus T. B. Brooks invoked
the alkaline waters of thermal springs.* D. H. Browne would modify
the sedimentary hypothesis, so far as it required the original deposition
of crystallized siderite and calcite, by assuming that the deposit was hy-
drous oxide of iron and carbonate of hme.’ Harrington suggested that,
instead of chemical deposition and subsequent concentration, some of
the stratified magnetites were deposited at first as iron sands, “just as
they are forming in the Gulf of Saint Lawrence today, the material being
derived from the disintegration of preexisting crystalline rocks.” ® Hunt
beheved that the oxides of iron, when abundant enough to constitute ore
masses, were for the most part due to oxidation of the sulphide and the
carbonate of iron, these having been formed as constituent parts of the
stratified rocks.‘ Kimball added the idea of subsequent metamorphism
in order to account for the specular form of oxide, but suggested that
® American Journal of Science, vol. xxii, 1856, pp. 38-44.
4 Geological Survey of Michigan, vol. ii, 1873, p. 298.
5 American Journal of Science, vol. ii, 1889, p. 299.
® Geology of Canada, 1873-1874, p. 194 et seg.
7American Association for the Advancement of Science, August 28, 1880,
320 N. H. WINCHELL——ORIGIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES
the iron itself was due, not so often to direct sedimentation, but to “‘the
decomposition in situ of basic eruptives by the dismemberment of sili-
cates, followed by the concentration of ferric and magnetic oxides.” This
would exempt them from any intermediate or initial stage of sedimenta-
tion, and seems to fall in line with the laterite ores.§ This fundamental
suggestion is more important, perhaps, than Kimball imagined. Yet it
was another form of the earlier idea of Whittlesey, who had argued that
the Lake Superior ores were due to segregation and concentration under
the operation of “metamorphism.” Newberry, as well as Le Conte and
others, while assuming sedimentation as the prime agent in the accumu-
lation of these ores, appealed to the action of decaying organic matter as
the chief force that extracted the iron in soluble form from preexisting
rocks. It is evident, however, that no discussion of the ways and means
of accumulation, whether chemical or mechanical, by sedimentation or
segregation, whether by “metamorphism” or by the action of organic
matter, touches the main question unless it distinctly involves the ques-
tion of the source of the ore—that is, unless it points out the place of the
iron in its primary condition in the rocks of the crust.
CHARLES WHITTLESEY’S THEORY OF SEGREGATION
To Charles Whittlesey is due, however, the earliest amply clear state-
ment of the theory of segregation,’ as follows:
“If the metamorphism of the Laurentian and Huronian formations shall be
regarded as an established geological fact, the separation of the oxides of iron
from these rocks into veins, beds, and masses can be easily accounted for. All
sedimentary strata contain the oxides of iron, and any agent powerful enough
to change the crystalline form of the rock would bring about a concentration
of their minerals. Metals, their oxides and salts, possess an inherent quality
of segregation. Whenever the condition of the enclosing strata is such as to
allow of motion among particles having the affinity of segregation, they must
obey this affinity and become more concentrated. . . . The belief in a wide-
spread, almost a universal, metamorphism of the rocks is rapidly gaining
ground. In this mysterious but acknowledged force, which produces a new
crystalline arrangement, have we not all the required agencies to produce
masses of any mineral which existed in the strata prior to the change? Is not
something more necessary to account for the result—some cause more universal
than local chemical action?”
This suggestion of Whittlesey’s, excluding his supposed cause of such
segregation, completes the trio of natural forces and processes to which
we must appeal. However vague and insufficient was Whittlesey’s com-
8 American Institute of Mining Pngineers, vol. xiii, 1884.
® Proceedings of the American Association for the Adyancement of Science, 1867, p.
101,
—s. ss” ~ CC
WHITTLESEY S$ THEORY OF SEGREGATION _ 321
prehension of the “metamorphism,” of which he spoke, his claim that the
iron ores of Lake Superior are the result’ of segregation, under some
widespread impulse, contains the germ of one of the processes which have
proved to have been concerned in the production of the great ore masses.
This trio of nature in the production of these ore masses may be stated:
Eruption, Whitney.
Sedimentation, Whitney.
Segregation, Whittlesey.
The error has been that geologists have restricted their view, and often
have presented one only of these processes as adequate to produce the
results, and have extended their hypotheses over ore bodies, which are
utterly repugnant to their initial ideas.
Whitney, for instance, when dwelling on the eruptive origin, trans-
gressed chemical laws and the natural affinity of the elements; and, when
representing the sedimentary theory, had to ignore some of the structural
complexities. Whittlesey’s idea, broadly embraced by him under the
term metamorphism, as then understood, involved transpositions of mat-
ter in the rocks which are not known to have been caused by metamor-
phism ;. but that was due, let us believe, to the then miscomprehension,
or yagueness, of the term. His germinal thought was segregation, and
that has subsisted and has been found essential to a correct understand-
ing of the history of the Lake Superior ores. Whitney never entertained,
so far as observed by the writer, the theory of segregation, nor did any of
those who followed in his track when he urged the eruptive hypothesis.
His sedimentary hypothesis, however, has had numerous modifications,
sometimes chemical and sometimes mechanical, and when chemical they
have verged toward segregation, at least toward alteration. The most
important of these suggested modifications is that of J. P. Kimball, who
applied it, in the first instance, to the iron ores of Cuba,!® but later ex-
tended it in part to the ores of Lake Superior. Thus he states clearly
that “the large bodies of specular oxide, together with other associated
ferruginous aggregates (in part of magnetic oxide), are secondary prod-
ucts from the decomposition of basic eruptive rocks,” and “the other
great bodies of ferric oxide in North America, like the Huronian deposits
of Michigan and Wisconsin, are similarly derived from the decomposition
of highly but less basic rocks of metamorphic and not of direct eruptive
origin. Such stratified specular iron ore bodies are believed to owe their
existence to the accumulation, by precipitation, of ferric oxide from
basins of water receiving their drainage from such basic rocks.” How-
ever far this be from Whittlesey’s idea of “metamorphism,” or from the
1 American Institute of Mining Engineers, vol. xiii,
322 N.H. WINCHELL—ORIGIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES
idea of metamorphism as now understood, it contains the germinal
thought of Whittlesey’s hypothesis, namely, segregation from ferruginous
rocks that preexisted.
THE WorK oF R. D. Irvine
Irving was the first who made careful microscopical and chemical dis-
criminations among the ores themselves and the associated quartz and
other minerals. He was more exact than some of his followers, and more
correct than all of his predecessors, at least along the lines which he
investigated.‘ He did not treat of the titanic magnetites, and he did
not distinguish structurally between the formations that carry ores of
different ages. He hence reduced all the then known Lake Superior ores
not only to one geological epoch, but to one chemico-sedimentary origin.
Hence, as has been remarked already, he did not reach the origin of the
tron, although he elucidated its present mineral condition and its struc-
ture. Irving’s studies were based essentially on the jaspery hematites
of the Archean at Marquette, the Vermilion ores not then having been
discovered, and he believed the results of his work were equally applicable
to the ores of the Penokee-Gogebic region. Irving’s work proved to be
epoch-making, as it furnished the basis of an important series of publica-
tions by the geologists of the United States Geological Survey, all of
whom follow his main ideas, with the sole exception that latterly it was
established to their satisfaction that the ores are of at least two different
ages.
Irving specifically rejected eruption and metamorphism, and did not
mention segregation; and, as stated by him, “it followed that we were
restricted to some theory which should account for the precipitation of
most of them essentially in their present conditions, with perhaps some
slight internal rearrangement, or to one in which the production, from
some form of sedimentary deposit, of the conditions now obtaining,
should be assigned to metasomatic processes, carried out, in part at least,
at a very remote period.” Further examination and study led him to
conclude that “these ferruginous rocks were once carbonates, analogous
to those of the Coal Measures.” This conclusion was hailed at once as
tending to establish the Azoic as a great zoic age, in which flourished an
abundance of life of different kinds, a prototype of the Carboniferous.
This conclusion was based on the actual existence of considerable
quantities of carbonate of iron, associated with chemically deposited
secondary silica in the terranes in which some of the ores are found.
This he styled cherty carbonate, and this term figures largely in the
lu American Journal of Science, vol. xxxii, October, 1886.
WORK OF IRVING AND OF SPURR 323
works of nearly all those who have more recently discussed the iron ores
of Lake Superior for the United States Geological Survey.
J. E. Spurr’s INVESTIGATION OF THE MESABI ORES
As to the primary condition and origin of the iron embraced in this
cherty carbonate, there was but little inquiry until the work of J. E.
Spurr for the Minnesota survey on the Mesabi Range, who considered
it to have existed in a silicate form in a mineral which he thought was a
kind of glauconite, since named greenalite.1*7 This green mineral was by
him considered the source of all the iron ores contained in the formation,
whether of ferric oxide or of cherty carbonate. He described what he
considered the process of formation of the banded jaspers and the banded
cherty carbonate. ‘To this source, also, he referred the residuary clay-
like deposits of silicate of alumina, or kaolin, some of the beds of which
are from 70 feet to 80 feet in thickness. The agents that caused the
decomposition of the greenalite were supposed to be oxygen, carbonic
and other acids carried downward from the surface by atmospheric
waters. In speculating over the nature of the original rock of the iron-
bearing member, of which the greenalite appeared to be the only remain-
ing representative, Spurr at the outset assumed an “excessively basic
lava,’ but he abandoned that idea and adopted a sedimentary rock as
the foundation of his hypothesis.
SEDIMENTATION
Sedimentation, followed by profound metasomatic alteration and
segregation, therefore, was the basis of the hypothesis argued by Mr.
Spurr. In order to account for the greensand he assumed that there
was, in the time of the Animikie, abundant organic life, thus supporting
the assumption of Irving. The rocky matrix which surrounded the origi-
nal glauconite grains he presumed was largely calcareous, a composition
which rendered it liable to easy and rapid removal by descending acidu-
lated waters. In order,to account for the rounded forms visible in the
altered iron-bearing rock after the elements of the rock had been removed
by metasomatosis, Spurr appealed to a vague combination, which he
called “granular brecciation, concretionary action, impregnation, and
other forces.” Had Mr. Spurr adhered to the idea with which he started
out in his research, namely, “an excessively basic lava,” he would have
been much nearer the truth than he was. But he must be credited with
an important chapter in the history of this long investigation when he
Bulletin no. x, Minnesota Geological Survey, 1894, p. 235,
’
324 N.H. WINCHELL—ORIGIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES
discovered and pointed out the “glauconite,” or greenalite, as one of the
phases through which, as he supposed, the Mesabi iron ore had passed.
Since the date of Spurr’s work (189+) this green substance has been
the object of much study. Numerous chemical analyses have shown not
only that it is not true glauconite, such as that derived from Forami-
nifera, but also that it is a mineral having such definite chemical propor-
tions that it is deserving of specific designation. Leith gave it the name
greenalite in 1903, in his report on the Mesabi range.
DIVERGENCE OF VIEWS BETWEEN THE SURVEYS
Among the divergences which early sprang up between the Minne-
sota Geological Survey and the United States Geological Survey, that
concerning the origin of the iron ores of the Lake Superior region (espe-
cially those of Minnesota) is one of the most important. Those diverg-
ences are so numerous and so interlocked, and have become so profound,
that many of the final conclusions are widely apart, and to one who reads
either for the first time, the other appears too much lke imaginary
romance. ‘Throughout the period involved in this investigation the re-
sponsible geologists have aimed to depend usually on fact or on legitimate
inferences from fact, and, so far as the writer is concerned, he has never
knowingly misrepresented the fact reported by another, nor the state-
ments of another based on such fact. Unfortunately, however, his views
and his statements have been peculiarly lable to misunderstanding and
hence unintentional misrepresentation. This is so remarkable that the
writer’s theory of the agency of igneous rock in the origination of the
iron ores has been distorted and discarded, although nearly allied to one
that is set up in its place, and identical with it so far as they run parallel.
N. H. WINCHELL’S Strupres or Bastc Ianrous RoeKs
In 1899 the writer became convinced of the immediate connection of
basic igneous rock with the origination of the ores of Minnesota. This
was published-in 1900,"* and it was the first published statement of that
broad generalization. This connection inyolved igneous eruption, sedi-
mentation, and segregation from the parent rock of the concerned iron
ore. The igneous rock was shown to be originally in the form of basic
lava, often consolidated in the form of obsidian. This rock was con-
sidered the first carrier of the iron. It was attacked by the waters of the
ocean, torn into fragments by the action of the beach, and its debris dis-
tributed as detrital sediment. Cotemporary with this distribution, the
oceanic water probably being hot, this igneous rock, whether lava or
18 Final Report of the Minnesota Geological Survey, vol. v.
WINCHELL’S STUDIES OF BASIC IGNEOUS ROCKS O20
obsidian sand, was chemically changed, the most of the non-soluble in-
gredients being segregated into favorable locations, the soluble being
taken into the oceanic waters and removed. Silica penetrated the un-
erystallized or rhyolitic lavas and obsidian sand, giving rise not only to
the taconite and jaspilyte masses, but also to the secondary quartzose
grains, retaining their original shapes in the same manner that the silici-
fied forms of trees and other vegetation are seen to be preserved in the
alkaline, often volcanic, sediments of the Tertiary in the central western
states. From the ferriferous solution of the near-by waters of the ocean,
iron carbonate seems to have been precipitated in considerable amounts,
such deposit becoming a constituent part of the cotemporary sedimentary
strata, and in all probability, in favorable situations, ferric oxide was
also deposited, as well as silica, these three forming alternating ingre-
dients in the strata as now observed. ‘lhe existence of iron-carbonate,
however, is quite subordinate in Minnesota, so far as discovered, and
this statement here depends mostly on reports that have been made by
others as to its abundance on the south side of Lake Superior. It is
almost lacking in the Vermilion and Cuyuna ranges, and in the produc-
tive parts of the Mesabi range it is replaced by carbonate of lime; on the
eastern extension of the Mesabi, as at Gunflint Lake, it is more common.
The greensand (greenalite), which has attracted so much attention,
was shown, in 1900, to graduate in size into larger and larger masses,
and in character into the taconitic “horses” and other residual forms
of the primary lava. It never constitutes distinct strata. |
In no case and in no particular has the writer abated from this view.
Indeed within a few years past he has reinvestigated the subject, both in
the field and by the aid of microscopic thin sections, and has found
overwhelming additional evidence to confirm its correctness.1t He has
on several occasions since 1900 repeated this theory in the American
Geologist and elsewhere. He has later shown that greenalite itself is not
an oceanic precipitate, but a product of alteration of the original lava.’
In a recent publication by the United States Geological Survey'® it is
shown conclusively that the greensand could not have been derived by
weathering and drainage from preexisting basic greenstones of the re-
gion. It had previously been shown by Leith that it is not of organic
origin, as supposed by Spurr. It is also plain that as a silicate of iron
it could not have existed in such large quantities locally in the water of
the ocean without an immediate local cause. It became necessary, there-
“4 Proceedings of the Lake Superior Mining Institute, 1908, 1909, 1910, 1911.
1% Proceedings of the Lake Superior Mining Institute, 1910. ’
% Van Hise and Leith: ‘The geology of the Lake Superior region,” monograph lii,
Rell,
326 N.H. WINCHELL—ORIGIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES
fore, in the opinion of the authors, to find some other source for this
green silicate of iron more immediate and more ready to furnish it.
They reach the conclusion that the source of this green silicate of iron
as well as the iron carbonate must have been some basic igneous rock.
Basic igneous rock is specifically excluded from the cotemporary Animi-
kie, although it is admitted that it “may really not be so distant as now
appears” (page 507), and some consideration is given as to the cause of
such exemption. But in the Keewatin the association of the iron-bearing
rock with basaltic intrusion and extrusion is dwelt on at some length:
this basic rock’s agency, however, was its effect on the cotemporary sedi-
mentation. It is not recognized in any case as the early bodily repre-
sentative of any of the present iron masses.
In this result, so laboriously wrought out, the authors confirm, as far
as they go, the conclusion of the writer in 1900. They would have ren-
dered a greater service to geology, and would have confirmed every con-
tention of the writer in 1900, if they had gone a step or two further and
clearly designated in the case of the Animikie the igneous rock to which
they appealed. The writer has shown, as already stated, that the bulk
of the Mesabi formation consists of lava and fragmental obsidian. Near
the bottom this igneous matter, especially that which is uncrystallized,
was disintegrated in situ into its chemical elements, and these elements,
where insoluble or difficultly soluble, have constituted the masses of iron,
quartz, kaolin, and limestone which are found.
Some confusion and contrariety of opinion have resulted from a fail-
ure to study carefully the jaspilyte. It has been observed that the band-
ing is bent in so close folding that it is impossible to imagine that the
formation in which it hes has been so folded, and yet it is difficult to
understand how the iron ore and jasper could have been so folded with-
out an identical folding of the associated greenstone. On the other hand;
it has been observed that sometimes, and even in immediate connection
with the folded jaspilyte, there are plainly sedimentary bands of jaspilyte
alternating with thin strata of other kinds of sediment, the latter usually
being green, but sometimes of chemical silica or of hematite. This
sedimentary origin being so evident, a hasty inspection has usually led
to the idea of sedimentary origin of all the jaspilyte. The error has been
in that assumption. J.D. Whitney only distinguished the two. It will
be observed that where the contorted jaspilvte lies nonconformable in
the midst of the greenstone, in nearly all cases there is on one side or the
other (which may be taken as the upper side in the order of formation)
a belt of greater or less width composed of strictly parallel strata made
up largely of jaspilyte of identical composition, but interstratified with
WINCHELL’S STUDIES OF BASIC IGNEOUS ROCKS ay al
other kinds of sediment. These strata are much less contorted or nearly
straight and can be traced, without loss of their structural individuality
or their chemical composition, for considerable distances. This fact is
Figure 1.—Characteristic Surface of Jaspilyte: Soudan
’
illustrated by the above figure, which is from a photograph taken from
the north ridge at Soudan. Here the two kinds of jaspilyte are separated
by the irregular line of nonconformity running between the two asterisks
328 N.H. WINCHELL—ORIGIN OF LAKE SUPERIOR IRON ORES
seen in the opposite margins. ‘The massive contorted jaspilyte is that
which was formed by silicification of a mass of basic lava suddenly cooled
by contact with the oceanic water, its fluidal structure preserved. The
stratified noncontorted jaspylite is that which was formed by chemical
precipitation consequent on the disturbance caused by the extrusion of
the igneous ,rock now represented by the contorted jaspilyte. A further
inspection shows that the contorted mass itself is composed of two parts,
both of extrusive origin, one nonconformable on the other. ‘That the
stratified jaspilyte was of sedimentary origin is shown by its grading
conformably into other sedimentary strata,’ such as green schist, slaty
eraywacke, and finally into coarser grit and graywacke.
But there is a third kind of jaspilyte, which sometimes becomes al-
most merchantable iron ore. It is also of detrital sedimentary origin,
and in the vicinity of the other two kinds the individual detrital pieces
may be very coarse, even large masses of jaspilyte of the contorted kind,
as at the west end of the Lee hill at Tower, so sparsely mingled with
other sediment that they may appear indigenous. This third kind of
jaspilyte also has been the cause of perplexity to the field observer, but
on careful examination over a wider area it has been found to graduate
into finer and finer detritus and to pass into some of the stratified gray-
wackes. It is needless to remark that this third variety of jaspilyte de-
notes a nonconformity in the rocks of the region, and that it belongs
above the plane of nonconformity. At Tower, in the Lee hill, it is a
part of the basal conglomerate of the Upper Keewatin and a phase of the
Ogishke conglomerate, the great mines being all in the Lower Keewatin.
The same features and many of these jaspilitic facts have been ob-
served in the Mesabi range, but on a smaller scale and with a greater
distribution of detritus from cotemporary igneous rock.
It appears, therefore, that both on the Vermilion and on the Mesabi
range the three forces that have been mentioned were jointly or suc-
cessively in action to produce the Minnesota iron ores, and also it is cer-
tain that the ores were produced immediately after the extrusion of the
igneous rock. ‘These agents were:
1. Extrusion of basic igneous rock in immediate contact with oceanic
water. }
2. Sedimentary distribution of debris from the rock itself, and chem-
ical deposition of ferric oxide as well as iron carbonate among the other
sediments. k
3. Segregation of the iron, the silica, the alumina, and sometimes the
lime contained in the basic rock, into separate masses, making both
residuary as well as constructive sheets in the stratification.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VoL. 23, PP. 329-332 JULY 15, 1912
——E _ — —
SAPONITE, THALITE, GREENALITE, GREENSTONE?
BY N. H. WINCHELL
(Read by title before the Society December 27, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
0 Grt R traeWy. eed ig Niche is 6 z's Siena Ss SAGER mee yb v bg »alald wha een eeee
Dhalite.. 0.0.0... 6c cece ce ete e teen ees 330
Ee hc tes LE reside @Patar eA s ha wisi ee WR mae Ree wow Ale ain oe Clone sae ee
I ety hg Rie a are las xe & cod senda 0, v euaevela matwiwhe au, m's oie «ele lecn 5 9s
ENMU eit en nS ed ie ah hc ok Sock mo eed ee UB a iis Wea e's PD
SAPONITE
A soft, soapy earth, varying in color from nearly white to greenish
and bluish colors, has been known for more than a hundred and fifty
years. It has been called soapstone and porcellanous earth. It- was
found to fill cavities in rocks, and especially in those rocks that contain
little or no potassium, such as basic trap rocks. It is a hydrous silicate
of alumina and magnesia, essentially, but with a little iron and some-
times a little lime, and its optical elements have not been ascertained
(System of Mineralogy). To this mineral Dana referred several species
that were studied later and whose optical characters were determined, at
least in part, and which had a similar origin, such as bowlingite, thalite,
and some glauconite. Bowlingite was found to be derived directly from
an alteration of olivine, one of the common magnesian minerals of basic
igneous rock.” Thalite was found to have an internal vermicular struc-
_ ture and definite crystalline elements,? while glauconite as a term is
divisible into true glauconite, carrying some potassium, and a_potash-
free variety which fills cavities in igneous rocks, and can easily be affili-
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society December 13, 1911.
* American Geologist, vol. xxiii, 1899, p. 43.
* American Geologist, vol. xxiii, 1899, p. 41.
(329)
330 N. H. WINCHELL—SAPONITE, THALITE, GREENALITE, GREENSTONE
ated with saponite or with some of the species based on variations in
“serpentine.”
THALITE
Thalite was discovered and named by D. D. Owen when he examined
the north shore of Lake Superior.* It was found to be essentially a hy-
drated silicate of magnesia and alumina, formed along the shore of the
lake, from the alteration of basic igneous rock where the breaking waves
dashed over the rock. It occupies amygdaloidal and all shapeless cavi-
ties, some of the masses being several inches across, and sometimes it is
disseminated in fine granules through the mass of the decaying diabase.
Its color is usually dirty white or gray, but within the rock it frequently
is light green.? By Dana this mineral was placed under saponite, to
which it has a chemical and physical likeness and a similarity of origin.
It appears to have as much right to recognition as an independent species
as several other species of a green color and soft and greasy feel, which
are of like origin and composition, derived from the decay of basic igne-
ous rocks, several of which have been embraced under the general term
serpentine.
GREENALITE
Greenalite is a similar mineral having almost the same composition
and an identical origin. It is found to result from alteration of basaltic
glass, or obsidian, an original constituent of the rocks of the Mesabi
iron range.® It. was named by Leith in a report on the Mesabi district
in 1903,7 but had been discovered by J. E. Spurr several years before,
who regarded it as a non-potash form of glauconite. It is not only
sprinkled through the original rock, where considerable alteration has
taken place. and where the iron and the silica also have become segre-
gated into individual masses, but it also serves as a general matrix, sur-
rounding the other secondary ingredients. The original basic rock in
this case was in the form of more or less rounded fragmental grains of
obsidian, and the greenalite retains quite frequently the subglobular
shapes of the fragmental grains. Leith has supposed the greenalite to
have been a chemical oceanic precipitate, in the form of a ferrous silicate
of magnesia and iron, from the waters of the cotemporary ocean, and to
4 Geological report on Iowa, Wisconsin, and Minnesota, 1852, p. 600.
° Final report, Geological Survey of Minnesota, vol. v, pp. 162, 168, 232, 238.
8 N. H. Winchell: ‘‘A diamond drill-core section of the Mesabi rocks.” Proceedings of
the Lake Superior Mining Institute, 1910, 1911.
7 Monograph xliii, U. S. Geological Survey.
CONCLUSIONS Sol
have been the source, through alteration and segregation, of the iron ore
of the region.
SERPENTINE
Serpentine, according to the latest determinations,® is not worthy of
perpetuation as a name of a mineral species. It is rather a rock, and
embraces mixtures of various greenish and usually ferrous, silicates of
magnesia, or magnesia and alumina, combined with a large percentage
of water, such as steatite (or talc), chrysotile, picrolite, antigorite, clino-
chlore, and sometimes pennine,® with other forms of chlorite. Serpen-
tine is abundantly produced by the decay of the Archean greenstones,
whether the greenstones were of igneous and crystalline nature and
massive in structure or fragmental and stratified, in which latter case
they should rather be called greenwacke.
CONCLUSIONS
From the foregoing it is apparent that the decay of a basic igneous
rock gives rise characteristically to a group of green minerals, the com-
position of which varies from the silicates of iron and magnesia to sili-
eates of alumina, iron, and magnesia, all of them hydrated and rather
soft, and it is evident that the prevailing green color of the Keewatin
greenstones is due to the predominance of these secondary minerals
rather than to the existence of amphiboles and pyroxenes. The am-
phiboles indeed are plainly secondary after these greenish products, and
can be seen-to have been formed in microscopic spicules in the midst of
the yellowish green isotropic field or to form directly by crystalline
change from the original pyroxene.
If the question arises as to the whereabouts of the lime and soda,
which were the alkaline elements in the original feldspars of the dia-
base, it can be answered by stating that they entered into the waters of
the ocean, being more soluble, where they still remain, and that the
existence of accessory quantities of lime in several of the secondary green
minerals mentioned accounts for that portion of the lime which escaped
such removal.
While a green product is characteristic of a change of basic igneous
rocks undergoing weathering, it appears to be true also that the different
insoluble elements when present in too large quantity for the secondary
minerals are sometimes segregated by themselves. Thus were formed
§S Lacroix: Min. de France et de les colonies, part i, p. 417.
® Final report, Minnesota Geological Survey, vol. v, p. 329,
332 N. H. WINCHELL—SAPONITE, THALITE, GREENALITE, GREENSTONE
beds of iron oxide, and perhaps of iron carbonate, of silica, kaolin, and
occasionally of marble.
The idea that these hydrous silicates of iron and magnesia or any of
them may be formed by chemical sedimentation from the oceanic waters
is apparently unnecessary and impossible. If it were proven that they
are soluble at oceanic temperatures the question arises, Why would they
not be carried away by the currents of the ocean along with the soda and
most of the hme? Also, Why do they now have fragmental and, as on
the Mesabi range, globular forms? Also, Why are they not found in
distinct sedimentary sheets like marble and kaolin? And why do the
associated chemical products, such as iron oxide and silica, present the
same globular shape? It may be admitted that from an alkaline ocean
there may have been chemical deposition of silica and iron oxide under
certain conditions, but it is hard to understand why such deposit should
in any case take the shapes which they and the greenalite exhibit on the
Mesabi range. Since the iron ore and the silica, having the same origin
and date, assumed identically the same shapes—that is, forms of detrital
erains—it seems much more probable that a common cause controlled
them all. There appears to be no possible hypothesis that will answer
all the conditions but to assume that they took the shapes of preexisting
detrital grains, and it follows from this that those grains were of such
a nature that these secondary substances could be injected into them or
produced by them. No detrital substance in the form of sand is known
which is so easily altered as volcanic glass, or basaltic sand; and, in the
light of the foregoing, it seems warrantable to infer that the original
grains which gave shape to the greenalite and to the iron ore and to the ©
rounded secondary quartz grains were grains of voleanic sand. Further,
this hypothesis will not exclude the same alteration of adjacent sheets of
lava and more or less crystallized trap, cotemporary with the produc-—
tion of these minerals in the voleanic sand; and in the case of consider-
able quantities of obsidian, which was not broken and distributed as
sand, such masses would have been liable to the same change, namely,
they would be likely to lose all their natural ingredients, maintaining
their shape and their fluidal structure, and would present the banded
structure seen in jaspilyte. Such masses are found not only on the
Mesabi range, but in the ore bodies of the Vermilion and Cuyuna ranges.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 333-348, PLS. 15-18 JULY 15, 1912
DIFFERENTIAL EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN
PORTIONS OF YUKON AND ALASKA?
BY DE LORME D. CAIRNES ”
(Presented extemporaneously December 30, 1911) ©
CONTENTS|
Page
EDEN Acie are’. Mvei'c \o: a. has Sd tebe owe MOR Wale ea UL 8, waka Wea, este a Pace 333
I Eh ora a tt 2, oycah m0, ae a pep mie nmr Pa Ata REA dy disse or be 0.'e) 4 elaine abeires dia, See 334
CRE ITEEISE CLIT 5.1 yo 51a) co Gv oc eee a A ee Ele Wena s a ola 6 ele eee te on 334
RISER EO MOSIOM co.cc a sige os sn eo vie oe oc vs elven ss etek Alam «09 wralwiy 2) ae ates BOT
NURI EINE ot tee Le rales. Coad oy cha g ES eT lnew eters: © viens mee stmt ee 337
Peedine ang Gisintesrating PrOCeSSES. .. 6. cc eee se ec we vase ewes tas 339
aS MELG I CMMICRIONE A. . a) Ashi do's Sons Cale ov ee deeds w tena on elena s Pb 343
MMMEPIRMEEA Lac axa «ive o'vileeverelm om dee ve os @ ee de ge side dis oe seeds sieivae «win ae
ET OF, «a eek Ges g v8 ra Rees ons 4 eee 344
Definition......... = hs OR eee ne Ca ENN SMe ae ae choles i « ie eee 345
we SS SEILAS Cin OCS 1S (US ae a 345
INTRODUCTION
A study of the physiography of any district involves not only a con-
sideration of the surface phenomena, but an examination of the ma-
terials composing that portion of the earth’s crust and an investigation
of the subterranean forces to which they have been subjected. A steeply
inclined valley wall may merely indicate a youthful period in the topo-
graphic cycle; may be the result of glaciation; may be due to some in-
herent bedrock structure or the inclination of certain strata, or may even
have been caused by recent faulting.
In investigating any physiographic problem, therefore, all the avail-
able evidence which tends to elucidate the physiography should be con-
sidered, no matter how superficial or deep seated may be the materials
or forces involved. It is thus that the domains of physiography and
general geology encroach and overlap—but always to their mutual ad-
1 Published by permission of the Director of the Geological Survey, Department of
Mines, Canada.
Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society December 30, 1911.
2 Introduced by Percy E. Raymond.
XXIV—BUuLL. Grou. Soc, AM., Vou. 23, 1911 (333 )
334 LL. D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
vantage. Nowhere has the writer found this better illustrated than in
the district in which, during the past summer, he was engaged in connec-
tion with his regular field work for the Canadian Geological Survey.
There in a single small area two contrasting types of topography are
exhibited—one youthful, the other in a mature to old-age condition—
and the differentiation is almost, if not wholly, due to the unequal powers
of resistance which the dominant classes of bedrock in the district have
displayed toward the various erosive activities to which they have been
subjected.
The topography throughout the greater part of the area examined is
characterized by low, generally well rounded, irregularly distributed
hills and ridges, separated by wide flaring valleys; but included in this
area is a belt which exhibits a well preserved high plateau, incised by
numerous gorgelike depressions. The topography at the beginning of
the present cycle is believed to have been very similar everywhere
throughout the district, but now differs so widely in various localities,
due to differential erosion.
Forces are also at work on the already nearly flat upland surface,
tending to make this still more even and plainlike in contour than at
present by a process here termed equiplanation.
AREA
The area in which the writer was engaged during the past summer,®
and which well illustrates the greater number of the points contained in
this paper, extends along the 141st meridian (the Yukon-Alaska inter-
national boundary) between latitudes 66° 08’ and 67° 00’, or from the
Orange fork of Black River northward to within about 30 miles of
Porcupine River (figure 1).
(ZEOLOGICAL FORMATIONS #
With the exception of the Quaternary superficial deposits and a few
isolated occurrences of igneous intrusive rocks, which, however, are too
limited in extent to have had any perceptible influence on the general
topography of the district, the main geological formations are mentioned
in the following table:
’D. D. Cairnes: “A portion of the Yukon-Alaska boundary between Porcupine and
Yukon rivers.’”” Sum. Rep. Geol. Sury., Department of Mines, Canada, 1911.
*For more detailed descriptions concerning the geological formations of this district
than the one contained in this paper, see
D. D. Cairnes: “‘A portion of the Yukon-Alaska boundary. between Porcupine and
Yukon rivers.’”” Sum. Rep. Geol. Surv. branch, Department of Mines, Canada, 1911 (in
preparation),
a
GEOLOGICAL FORMATIONS 335
Age Lithological characters
RNE SOV ANVUG. SiMe eRe Bie co's ya se ee me Chiefly slates, phyllites, quartzites, sandstones,
(Probably largely Cretaceous ) shales, dolomites, and magnesites.
PP OEMTOTOUS 6s sys eden eee ey Chiefly limestones, cherts, and cherty conglom-
erates.
Ordovician-Silurian..)........... Limestones and dolomites.
The Ordovician-Silurian limestones and dolomites constitute the bed-
rock of the northern 20 miles of the area under consideration. These
beds have an aggregate thickness of at least 5,000 feet and range from
Gulf of Alaska
|
FIGURE 1.—Map of Yukon and Alaska
Showing the area along the Yukon-Alaska boundary (141st meridian) : which was geo-
logically mapped and studied during 1911, by D. D. Cairnes, for the Canadian Geological
Survey.
white through various shades of grey to almost black, and are even occa-
sionally decidedly reddish or pink in color. ‘These rocks are considerably
folded, distorted, and metamorphosed, and are characteristically massive
and crystalline in structure; but particularly in some of the darker
members the bedding planes are in places still quite apparent. Fossils
have been collected from these beds in several localities and have all been
identified as being either of Ordovician or Silurian age.
336 LL. D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
The Carboniferous beds occur only in the southern portion of the dis-
trict, where they outcrop throughout an area not exceeding 10 or 12
square miles in extent. They have an aggregate thickness of at least 1,500
feet and consist mainly of limestones, cherts, and cherty conglomerates,
all three of which occur, in places, intimately associated. The limestones
are generally quite crystalline and range from nearly white through
various shades of grey to almost black in color, occasional reddish mem-
bers being also noted. ‘The upper limestone beds nearly everywhere con-
tain chert pebbles, which, in places, constitute the cherty conglomerates
of this series, and all gradations occur from a limestone including only
occasional chert pebbles to a cherty conglomerate with a siliceous matrix
and containing no perceptible lime. The chert pebbles are well rounded,
and dominantly about the size of marbles, but some were noted as large
as 114 to 2 inches in diameter. In color most of the pebbles are grey,
but occasionally quite black individuals were noticed. Beds of pure mas-
sive chert, similar in appearance to that composing the conglomerate
pebbles, occur in places, but are not nearly so extensive as the limestone
or conglomerate members. Fossils were obtained in a number of places
from the limestone beds of this series, and all have been identified as
being of Carboniferous age.
The Mesozoic beds extend over about two-thirds of the entire area
under consideration, and consist chiefly of slates, phyllites, and quartz-
ites, with also occasional sandstone, shale, dolomite, and magnesite beds.
The slates vary greatly in color, ranging from black to various shades
of grey, green, red, or brown. They have everywhere a decidedly sec-
ondary induced cleavage, and generally break readily into thin plates
from one to several feet in diameter and as thin as one-sixteenth of an
inch, or even less. Probably the most noticeable and persistent beds are
certain beautifully banded red and green members, the alternate bands
of which are in places extremely thin and delicate and not more than
one-fourth of an inch to 2 inches in thickness, and frequently much less,
presenting thus a decidedly ribbon-like appearance.
The phyllites also vary considerably in color, but are generally some
shade of grey, although occasionally greenish, brownish, or black mem-
bers were noted. ‘These rocks are distinguished from the slates by con-
taining more mica, and being, generally, somewhat coarser textured. In
places, the phyllites are much crumpled, folded, and distorted—isoclinal
and even closed folds having been frequently noted in hand specimens.
These rocks, also, wherever found, break readily along their cleavage
planes, thus giving rise to the large thin slabs which are everywhere in
evidence where these beds outcrop.
a ee
~~
GEOLOGICAL FORMATIONS 337
The quartzites range from nearly white to dark grey in color, and are
typically massive, with a sugar-grained texture. Occasional beds, how-
ever, contain a certain amount of mica and chlorite, which, in. places, are
arranged, as the result of metamorphism, along definite planes between
layers of purer quartzite, giving to the rocks a distinctly gneissoid habit.
The sandstones and shales were only rarely noted, and are the less
metamorphosed equivalents of the slates, phyllites, and quartzites.
The dolomites and magnesites almost invariably weather rough and:-
red, due to the considerable amount of iron ore they contain. The dolo-
mite beds are, in places, as much as 200 feet or even more in thickness ;
but the magnesite beds rarely exceed 10 feet, and occasionally occur
interbanded with the slates and dolomites in layers less than 2 feet in
thickness.
An accurate estimate of the aggregate thickness of this group of rocks
has not been made, since no place was found where the uppermost beds
are preserved, and only small portions of the section could be observed
at any one place. Moreover, on account of the metamorphosed condi-
tion of the rocks, it was difficult in most places to determine the dip and
strike of the beds. The group is, however, at least 6,000 feet in thick-
ness and may be considerably more.
The only fossils obtained from these rocks are poorly preserved, and
were found within 100 feet of the underlying Carboniferous rocks; of
these Dr. T. W. Stanton, of the United States Geological Survey, says:
“My judgment is that these fossils are not older than Mesozoic and they
may be Cretaceous, though there is no definitely distinctive Cretaceous
fossil among them, and they do not seem to fall into any fauna known
to be from that region.”
Tn this paper, which is chiefly concerned with physiography, the Meso-
zoic and Ordovician-Silurian beds are mainly considered, as these are
the dominant geological terranes, and have given rise to the two extreme
types of topography exhibited in the district. The Carboniferous rocks
are of comparatively small extent; consequently the limestones of this
series, unless specifically mentioned, are not intended to be included by
the term “limestones and dolomites,” which is frequently employed with
reference to the Ordovician-Silurian beds.
DIFFERENTIAL EROSION
YUKON PLATEAU
The main area under consideration lies within and toward the north-
ern edge of what is generally known as the Yukon Plateau physio-
338 L. D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
graphic province, which in Alaska, Yukon, and northern British Colum-
bia, stretches from the western edge of the Rocky Mountain system
westward to the ranges of the Pacific Mountain system. This terrane
trends northward through central northern British Columbia and con-
tinues northwesterly through Yukon and westerly through Alaska to
Bering Sea, following, in a general way, the contour of the Pacific Coast
line. This plateau province has been described by a number of geolo-
gists,> including Dawson, McConnell, Brooks, Spurr, Spencer, and
Hayes, all of whom unite in the opinion that it represents a penepla-
nated and subsequently elevated surface ; but it is to Dawson that we are
indebted for the earlhest recognition of the baselevel character of the
Yukon Plateau region, as well as of the Interior Plateau of British Co-
lumbia, to which it is closely related.
Nearly everywhere throughout the Yukon lee there is a decided
uniformity of summit level; and in various portions of the province
numerous hills and ridges occur, with flat or gently undulating tops,
which evidently once constituted portions of a widespread surface haying
only shght relief. This surface formerly extended over the entire proy-
ince; but extensive portions of the upland have now been destroyed, and
in their place the valleys of the present erosion cycle exist.
The plateau is best viewed from a summit that stands at about the
level of the general upland. From that viewpoint the observer will be
impressed with the even skyline sweeping off to the horizon, broken only
here and there by isolated, residuary masses, which rise above the general
level. This plain-like upland, however, bears no relation to rock struec-
ture, erosion having beveled the upturned edges of the hard as well as
the soft strata; in fact, this surface is entirely discordant to the highly
contorted metamorphie rocks which make up much of the plateau; and
for this reason is considered to be an- uplifted and dissected peneplain
produced by long continued subaerial erosion, during a period of crustal
stability. The exact date of the uplift which terminated this long ero-
sion cycle is somewhat in doubt, and is by different writers considered
5G. M. Dawson: Trans. Roy. Soc. of Can., vol. 8, see. 4, 1890, p. 13.
R. G. McConnell: “Report on the Klondike gold fields... Ann. Rep., Geol. Sury.,
Can., vol. xiv. 1903, p. 6B.
A. H. Brooks: “Geography and geology of Alaska.’’ U. S. Geol. Survy., professional
paper No. 45, 1906, pp. 36-41, 286-290.
J. E. Spurr: “Geology of Yukon gold district, Alaska.’’ Eighteenth Ann. Rept., U. S.
Geol. Sury., pt. fii, 1898, p. 260.
Arthur C. Spencer: ‘Pacific mountain system in British Columbia and Alaska.”
Bull. Geol. Soe. of America, vol. xiv, April, 1903, pp. 117-132.
Cc. W. Hayes: “Expedition through the Yukon district.”” Nat. Geog. Mag., vol. iv,
1893, p. 129.
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOLE: 2371911, .Pesao
9 -
FIGURE 1.—A STILL WELL PRESERVED PORTION OF THE PLATEAU SURFACE, 3,500 FEET
ABOVE SEALEVEL
FIGURE 2.—THE GENDPRAL APPEARANCE OF THE UPLAND
Showing the steeply sloping character of the valley walls, and the decided shoulders
everywhere in evidence at the contact between these and the old plateau surface
THE ORDOVICIAN-SILURIAN LIMESTONE: DOLOMITE BELT
DIFFERENTIAL EROSION 339
to have occurred in late Miocene, Pliocene, or even early Pleistocene
time.
The present discussion, however, is not particularly concerned with
the origin of this plateau province. The purpose of the writer is to
show that an elevated surface having only slight relief at one time ex-
tended throughout the tract now known as the Yukon plateau, and that
the long, even, nearly horizontal summits, typical of many of the ridges,
and the multitude of mountain summits, which in many localities are so
characteristically flat-topped, and which everywhere rise to so uniform an
elevation, all represent remnants of this former upland. Concerning
these points, there is an abundance of positive, confirmatory evidence in
almost any locality in the region under consideration, as has been noted
by the various geologists who have studied this topographic province.
In the portions of the area along the 141st meridian here being
considered, in which the Ordovician-Silurian limestones and dolomites
constitute the dominant bedrock formation, the upland is well preserved,
and considerable stretches of flat or but slightly undulating plateau occur
at an elevation of about 3,500 feet above sealevel. This elevated surface
truncates the various limestones and dolomite beds wherever these are
unconformable with the almost horizontal upland surface (plate 15).
The upland is dissected by numerous gorgelike depressions, which con-
stitute the present day drainage channels of the area; and these valleys
have characteristically, very abrupt walls, at the contact between which
and the upland surface, decided shoulders representing topographic un-
conformities, are everywhere in evidence. It is manifest, therefore, that
this upland was produced during a former topographic cycle, and conse-
quently, previous to the entrenching of the present valleys, an unbroken,
plainlike surface, well advanced in old age, must have extended over the
entire district.
Outside the areas of limestone and dolomite beds, where the bedrock
consists largely of Mesozoic slates, phyllites, quartzites, etcetera, although
the plateau surface in many localities is almost or quite destroyed (plate
16, figure 1), still, in numerous places, ridges occur with remarkably
straight, nearly horizontal summits, which are practically all in align-
ment, and these, together with the prevailing mountain summits, present
a strikingly even skyline, showing the district to be a typical example of
the thoroughly dissected peneplanated upland (plate 16, figure 2).
ERODING AND DISINTEGRATING PROCESSES
In passing from the northern part of the district, where the bedrock is
composed prevailingly of limestones and dolomites, to the more southerly
340 LL. D. CAIRNES—-EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
portions, in which the Mesozoic rocks dominate, the change in topog-
raphy is so abrupt as to suggest faulting. A close investigation, how-
ever, revealed no evidence of any extensive movements, but on the
contrary resulted in the finding, in a number of places, of individual,
unbroken, limestone and dolomite beds, which are traceable from the pla-
teau upland out into adjoining thoroughly dissected Mesozoic portions
of the area, where they underlie the slates, phyllites, quartzites, etcetera,
thus proving conclusively that the fault theory does not account for the
rapid change in topographic types or stages.
Moreover, wherever the Ordovician-Silurian limestones and dolomites
occur at all extensively, the topography possesses the same striking pla-
teau characteristics; but in all localities, where the dominant bedrock
consists of Mesozoic beds, the thoroughly dissected upland topography is
exhibited.
An examination of the resistance which these two classes of sediments
offer to the attacks of the various eroding and disintegrating forces to
which they are subjected, and of the rate at which they succumb to these,
discloses the fact that erosive agencies work much more rapidly in the
slates, phyllites, quartzites, etcetera, than in the limestones and dolo-
mites, although the Mesozoic beds consist frequently of much harder and
more indurated materials; and further demonstrates that this differential
erosion quite sufficiently accounts for the differences in topography.
It is not intended in this short paper, however, to attempt a detailed
consideration of all the various subaerial destructive forces that have
combined to produce the present topography, but to deal only with a few
striking points concerning the leading agencies, and especially those that
have been mainly effective in accentuating the differences in the two
types of topography in the area.
Wind action, for instance, although so powerful an eroding agent in
some districts, and effective to some extent even in this northern, arctic
region, has had its influence reduced practically to a minimum, since the
greater part of the land surface is:covered with forest, moss, or tundra,
and all the superficial geological materials are frozen during all or the
greater part of the year. The greatest extent of exposed bedrock occurs
in the limestone and dolomite areas—and even there the uplands are
largely covered with superficial deposits; but the rugged, jagged, valley
walls are bared to the wind, which in such places accomplishes by abra-
sion a certain definite, although relatively small amount of erosion.
Chemical action is also more effective in areas of limestones and dolo-
mites than in localities where the slates, phyllites, quartzites, etcetera,
dominate, as the former materials are much the more soluble. Ordinary
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 16
FiGuRE 1.—IN THE FOREGROUND, THE COMPLETELY DISSECTED CHARACTER OF THE
TOPOGRAPHY
The hills rise rapidly toward the rear, as the limestones and dolomites are approached
FIGURE 2.-—A TYPICAL RIDGE WITH AN ALMOST HORIZONTAL SUMMIT LINE
It is practically in alignment with the greater numbers of the hill and ridge tops in the
district
DISSECTED CHARACTER OF THE TOPOGRAPHY IN AREAS OF THE MESOZOIC BEDS
DIFFERENTIAL EROSION 341
surface waters, on account of their purity, have practically no chemical
effect on siliceous and argillaceous sediments; but when containing even
small amounts of carbonic acid gas or certain other impurities, dissolve
limestones quite perceptibly. It is, however, to ground waters that the
effectiveness of chemical action as an eroding agent is mainly due; these
prevailingly contain various impurities that cause them to become very
active solvents. The great amount of dissolved mineral matter which is
annually carried to the ocean, either to be deposited there, or to remain
in solution, is attributable largely to the ground waters; in addition,
much of the mineral matter taken into solution is deposited either close
to the point of its extraction or along the streams carrying it to the sea.
The ground waters have no doubt played an important though largely
unknown part in the subtraction of materials from the particular area
under consideration, and in the limestone-dolomite belt, solution—both
by the ground and surface waters—has apparently constituted one of the
principal agents of destruction, as is indicated by the highly calcareous
water in the area and by the disintegrated and partly leached character,
in places, ‘of the rock exposures.
The dominant weathering force throughout the area, however, ap-
pears to be frost action. In addition, expansion and contraction, due to
atmospheric temperature changes, running water, nivation, and probably
solifluction, are important subaerial destructive processes actively en-
gaged in this district.
In this area, where throughout the greater part of the year the daily
temperature changes are considerable, rock breaking and splitting pro-
ceed with great rapidity, especially in connection with the finely cleavy-
able slates, phyllites, etcetera. In these rocks, water fills the multitude
of spaces, including those along the cleavage planes; and when frozen,
causes the rocks to break up readily into slabs, which in turn split into
smaller flaky pieces. The more massive quartzites, limestones, dolomites,
etcetera, are not so susceptible to this process, but are, nevertheless, con-
siderably affected.
All the rocks are to a considerable extent fractured and broken by
expansion and contraction due to temperature changes, and from this
cause as well, the thinly cleavable beds suffer most.
Nivation,® or snow-drift action, has also played a somewhat important
°The term “‘nivation’”’ was originally employed by Matthes and has later been applied
‘by Hobbs and numerous other writers; see
F. E. Matthes: “Glacial sculpture of the Bighorn Mountains, Wyoming.” U. S. Geol.
Surv., 21st Ann. Rept., pt. ii, 1899, pp. 173-190.
: W. M. Hobbs: “Cycle of mountain glaciation.” Geog. Jour., February, 1910, pp.
47-163.
342 LL.D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
eroding part in some localities, particularly in those areas where the
dominant bedrock consists of Mesozoic slates, phyllites, etcetera. Dur-
ing the seasons when snow only partly covers the surface, drifts tend to
gather in numerous corners, and to remain in the various, irregular, some-
what protected angles, on the mountain slopes. During the day the
water from the melting snow trickles from the lower edges of the drifts,
and tends to move outward the fine material there accumulated. With
lowering temperature during the night or on colder days, the water in
the ground is frozen, and in expanding breaks up the remaining coarser
material at the edge of the snow, and in tis way provides a further
supply of fines for the water to wash out when the snow and ice again
thaw; thus the process proceeds. The drifts tend to gradually form
steps up the mountain slopes, which, unless otherwise destroyed, yearly
increase in size and afford protection for larger drifts each year, until
eventually each replaces the one next higher. On numerous hillsides the
successive steps are well formed and present quite a striking terraced
appearance, but in most places these are removed by other erosive agen-
cies as fast as they are formed.
An estimate of the rapidity with which erosion progresses in the ates
phyllite localities may be obtained from the appearance of the hillsides
on which these rocks outcrop. In such places the surface has frequently
a streaked appearance, as if some huge rake had been drawn down the
slupes (plate 17, figure 1). The furrows represent the lines along which
the streams of water trickled, removing, in so doing, much of the more
finely comminuted rock material; the intervening ridges of unsorted
waste also become reduced as the process continues. This raking is also
often caused by melting snow, and at times, when rapid thaws or heavy
showers cause water to be abundant on the hills, the talus is rapidly
washed downward en masse, causing frequent accumulations of some-
what coarse waste to be distributed over the side hills (plate 17, figure 2).
This rapid downhill movement of the waste, combined with the slow
creep it everywhere possesses, might also be considered as a minor phase
of solifluction’ or land flowing, a process that has been so lucidly de-
scribed by Professor Andersson. : 7
By these various disintegrating and eroding processes the rocks of the
hills are being gradually broken and comminuted and moved to within
reach of the streams traversing the area, which annually convey vast
quantities of such debris downstream toward Bering Sea.
* J. E. Andersson : “Solifluetion a component of subaerial denudation.” Jour. of Geol.,
yol, xiv, 1906, pp, 91-112.
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOUT 2S, TSN s ies ae
FIGURE 1.—‘‘RAKING” IS HERE PRONOUNCED
FIGURE 2.—IRREGULAR ACCUMULATIONS OF WASTE THAT HAVE BEEN WASHED DOWN OVER
THE SIDEHILL
EROSION PHENOMENA ON A CHARACTERISTIC SLATE-PHYLLITE SIDEHILL
DIFFERENTIAL EROSION b43
In the limestone-dolomite belt the streams have, as yet, only succeeded
in trenching a few gorgelike valleys, leaving extensive interstream por-
tions of the upland still undisturbed ; but to the south, where the domi-
nant rock formation consists of the Mesozoic slates, phyllites, quartzites,
etcetera, the streams have produced wide flaring valleys, and throughout
considerable tracts have left no traces of the original plateau surface.
The almost flat valley bottom of Black River, in the vicinity of the inter-
national boundary, is at least 5 miles wide, while those of some of its
tributaries are over 2 miles in width.
The great relative difference in the amount of destructive work the
streams have been able to accomplish in the different areas or portions
of this one area is entirely due to the differences in the geological forma-
tions. The slates and phyllites, on account of their readily cleavable
nature, are very susceptible to the mechanical activities of running
water, and the intercalated quartzite beds being left exposed and often
unsupported also readily fall a prey to stream action; also the numer-
ous other disintegrating and eroding forces, previously mentioned, con-
tribute a vast quantity of already comminuted material to the streams.
Moreover, erosion is everywhere rapidly progressing except where the
slopes have become sufficiently gentle to allow of the growth of a pro-
tecting mantle of vegetation.
In the limestone-dolomite belt the upland is prevailingly covered by
debris, leaving only the valley walls exposed to disintegrating and erod-
ing activities; and even there, although freezing and thawing and ex-
pansion and contraction have played a notable part, still, on account of
the massive though not generally hard character of the rocks, these de-
structive processes have been so slow that solution appears to have been
a comparatively important eroding force.
The arctic climate has also been an important factor in causing the
topography in the different portions of this area to be so strikingly con-
trasted. A cold climate retards rock decay, rock solution, and practically
all chemical activities, which are among the main forces by which the
limestones and dolomites are affected; but rock breaking and splitting,
to which even the hardest and most indurated slates and phyllites are so
susceptible, are favored in regions where the daily temperature changes
are great, which is the case in this area during the greater part of the
year.
SUMMARY AND DEDUCTIONS
The area under consideration forms a part of what is believed to have
been formerly a peneplanated and subsequently uplifted surface. The
344 LL.D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
upland constitutes throughout its extent a gently undulating plateau,
with only occasional summits or ridges rising above the general level,
and the plateau surface truncates equally the various geological bedrock
terranes, regardless of their composition, structure, and other physical
characters.
Following the uplift of this planated tract, erosive agencies were re-
juvenated and began their work in the elevated terrane with renewed
energy. Certain belts, in which the bedrock is composed, dominantly,
of limestones and dolomites, have withstood erosive forces much better
than other adjoining areas, where the bedrock formations consist pre-
vailingly of slates, phyllites, quartzites, and related rocks, with the result
that, in the lmestone-dolomite belt, the topography is still in a youthful
stage, and the plateau surface is so well preserved as to constitute the
outstanding topographic feature of the area; whereas in the adjoining
tracts the original upland has been either wholly or nearly destroyed
and the topography is in a mature stage and rapidly approaching old age.
The reason for this differentia] erosion appears to be largely that the
limestones and dolomites are relatively massive, compact materials;
whereas the slates and associated rocks prevailingly contain innumerable
seams, cracks, and spaces of various sorts, containing water and even
allow of its circulating through them; and this water not only erodes the
rocks, but when frozen causes them to split readily into innumerable thin
slabs, rendering them an easy prey to all ordinary erosive and weathering
activities. Further, since the slates, phyllites, etcetera, are thinly cleay-
able rocks, they are readily broken, due to temperature changes. In the
limestone-dolomite belt or belts the waters either tend to run off rapidly
through a few trunk channels or are held in a nearly dormant condition
by the frost and more or less frozen debris of the upland.
EQUIPLANATION
GENERAL
In the limestone-dolomite belt there still exist occasional well rounded
monadnocks or rock residuals that rise above the general level of the
upland surface: these represent the principal topographic relief that
remained to break the monotony of this portion of the old peneplanated
tract Just previous to the uplift, which, as mentioned previously, is vari-
ously claimed to have occurred in late Miocene, Pliocene, and early
Pleistocene time. The general upland bordering these residuals is in
most places covered by accumulations of more or less frozen superficial
deposits, the surfaces of which are either flat or but slightly inclined,
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 28, 1914, PE. 18
FIGURE 1.—A LOW Rock ESCARPMENT
Shown at the contact between a typical limestone residual and one of the flat or nearly
flat areas, which are underlain by partly frozen debris, and which characterize extensive
portions of the upland.
KIGURE 2.—LIMESTONE RESIDUAL BLUFF
The flat, plainlike portion of the upland, which here supports a typically arctic vege-
tation and is underlain by partly frozen accumulations of debris, is distinctly seen to be
encroaching on the limestone residual bluff on the right of the picture.
PLATEAU SURFACE IN THE LIMESTONE-DOLOMITE BELT WHERE EQUIPLANATION IS ACTIVE
EQUIPLANATION 345
and in most places support a considerable growth of a typically arctic
vegetation. The contacts between these flat or nearly flat stretches and
the residual masses are invariably abrupt, the residuals presenting to the
debris areas rock fronts often nearly perpendicular and ranging from 2
to 50 feet, but generally only from 3 to 10 feet in height (plate 18, fig-
ure 2). The often nearly flat or but gently inclined surfaces at the top
of these abrupt rock walls have, in places, a decidedly terrace-like appear-
ance (plate 18, figure 1).
Upon investigating the relationships between the nearly flat surfaced
debris accumulations and the adjoining rock walls of the residuals it
was found that the limestones and dolomites are being slowly disinte-
grated, and to a considerable extent dissolved, to be later added to the
adjoining, generally frozen, superficial materials that fill the existing
bedrock depressions of the upland. By this process the accumulations
of debris are continually increasing at the expense of the rocky summits,
and thus the general plateau surface is becoming more and more plain-
like in contour. This process is here termed “equiplanation.”
DEFINITION
The term equiplanation (L. aequus, equal; L. planus, plain) is in-
tended to include all physiographic processes which tend to reduce the
relief of a region and so cause the topography to eventually become more
and more plainlike in contour without involving any loss or gain of
material to the area affected—that is, the amount of material remains
apparently equal or is not increased or decreased by the plain-producing
process or processes. Material may be expected from certain districts
during the time equiplanation is in progress, but this export takes place
quite independent of the equiplanation.
In the particular area along the Yukon-Alaska boundary line, de-
scribed in this paper, portions of the upland surface that are already
decidedly plainlike in character are becoming even’ more so by the ero-
sion and disintegration of the residuals, and by the deposition of the
materials derived therefrom into the intervening bedrock depressions,
with the result that the general plateau surface is becoming more plain-
like in contour, without involving any perceptible loss or gain of material
to the areas affected. |
EQUIPLANATING PROCESSES
In the area described the limestones and dolomites of the residual
masses of the upland, as previously mentioned, are being slowly disinte-
346 LL.D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
grated and to some extent dissolved and conveyed out into the debris
flats, where practically all the material held in suspension, as well as
some at least of that in solution, is deposited. On account of the almost
perpetually frozen condition of the superficial materials of the upland,
the areas in which these materials occur are poorly drained, and conse-
quently practically all sediments and precipitates deposited therein nec-
essarily remain, having no means of escape. It is thus largely due to the
arctic climatic conditions that the equiplanation process is here mani-
festly in evidence. A prolonged rise in temperature would cause the ice
of the upland to thaw, with the result that the accumulations now filling
many of the existing bedrock depressions would be washed out by the
again integrated drainage system.
The rock terraces bordering the debris areas are largely of two types.
In some cases these terrace fronts are of firm unbroken bedrock. These
appear to represent antecedent forms that existed in the old peneplain
and are still, but very slowly, being destroyed, owing largely to the com-
pact nature of the rock constituting them. The majority of the terraces,
however, are composed dominantly of talus, and are the resultant mainly
of two forces, the relatively rapid forcing of the talus downhill by the
frost and slow disintegration along the terrace front. The exposed
limestones and dolomites of the residuals become in the course of time
somewhat fractured, due largely to expansion and contraction of the
rocks themselves and to the freezing and thawing of water filling the
various open spaces they include. With further fracturing the rocks
become broken, and the water filling the spaces between adjoining frag-
ments, on freezing, forces the lowermost of these downhill. Expansion of
‘adjoining talus members, due in warm weather to a considerable rise in
temperature, also produces the same effect, only to a less degree. As the
ice melts, or, on the other hand, as a high temperature falls slightly
and the rocks contract, various blocks are left somewhat unsupported,
hence move slightly downward in adjusting themselves to gravitation.
This process continues until the various fragments are individually too
far apart for water to readily fill the intervening spaces, at which stage
the downward movement practically ceases. The talus blocks, having
been somewhat rapidly pushed downhill, present a somewhat abrupt face,
which remains practically stationary except for the slight amount of
material that is annually removed therefrom by the various eroding and
disintegrating processes previously mentioned; of which, solution, slow
as it is, is one of the most active. Thus these rock faces, in many places,
border the debris areas which are gradually encroaching on them, and if
EQUIPLANATION 347
allowed to continue undisturbed sufficiently long will include the re-
siduals. Stream action and other destructive forces are, however, alsq
engaged in destroying the uplands, and tend ultimately to again bring
the district to a peneplanated or old-age condition.
In numerous places in the upland angular blocks of limestone, 1 to 3
feet in thickness, were noted projecting through the soil and fine waste,
having been torn from the underlying bedrock and heaved into this posi-
tion by frost action. These blocks gradually decompose, and in so doing
contribute to the superficial materials of the upland, which in places
resemble slacked lime, and occasionally are not unlike marl; but where
the calcareous ingredients have been largely removed and only the im-
purities of the limestones remain, a rather typical soil or clay is exhibited.
In places calcareous precipitates were also noted, which are being de-
posited from waters that are leaching the rocks elsewhere.
The processes just described are not thought to be limited to the one
district here mentioned, but are believed to occur extensively in various
Arctic regions. In addition, however, in many other districts and coun-
tries, sets of forces and processes quite different from these may cause
equiplanation. In official reports on parts of southern Yukon* and
northern British Columbia,® included in the Yukon plateau, the writer
has described a similar process, although without naming it, which is
attributable largely to nivation, and is causing portions of the upland
there to become more and more plainlike. Also in many mountainous
areas having interior drainage, plainlike surfaces tend to be produced by
the double process of wearing down the ranges and filling up the basins.?°
The plains thus formed will consist partly of worn-down rock and
partly of built-up waste, and in their process of construction no gain or
loss of material is involved. The mean levels of many such areas are
slowly reduced by wind action, which exports, annually, varying amounts
of material; but under certain conditions there is no export of material,
and even when this occurs the equiplanation acts quite independently
of the exporting process.
The equiplanating process, here described as occurring in northern
’D. D. Cairnes: “‘Wheaton River district.” Geol. Sury., Department of Mines, Canada
(in press).
®D. D. Cairnes: “Atlin mining district.’ Geol. Surv., Department of Mines, Canada
(in press).
10 J. Walther: “‘Das Gesetz der Wustenbildung.” Berlin, 1900.
E. Passarge: “Die Kalahari.’ Berlin, 1904.
A. Penck: ‘‘Einfluss des Klinas auf die Gestalt der Erdoberflache.”
W. W. Davis: “The geographic cycle in an arid climate.’’ Jour. of Geol., July-
August, 1905.
348 LL.D. CAIRNES—EROSION AND EQUIPLANATION IN ALASKA
Yukon and Alaska, is thus only a special phase of a general topographic
phenomenon. In all its phases, however, equiplanation is characteristic-
ally different from all other plain-producing processes—such as construc-
tional planation, peneplanation, glacial planation, etcetera—since in
these, materials are either added to or subtracted from the areas affected.
Equiplanation also differs fundamentally from peneplanation in that it
operates regardless of sealevel.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 349-356 JULY 15, 1912
CORRELATION OF THE PALEOZOIC FAUNAS OF THE
EASTPORT QUADRANGLE, MAINE?
BY HENRY SHALER WILLIAMS
(Read before the Society December 28, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
PRE eat i oy dl eis oa vine) ala Ws wk a Sate ete halal hice «aware a Ow eee ee
Structural subdivision of the rocks of the Hastport quadrangle.......... 351
rie) characteristics of the sediments. ............cccccee cece tence ves 352
INTRODUCTION
The first serious attempt to work out the geology of the Eastport
region of Maine was made in the summer of 1884 by Prof. N. 8S. Shaler,
then connected with the U. S. Geological Survey. The results of his
explorations were published in a paper entitled “Preliminary Report on
the Geology of the Cobscook Bay District, Maine.” * At that time there
was no detailed map of the region; the Coast Survey map did not appear
until the year 1893. Shaler prepared a small map, giving the outline of
the shores, bays, and inlets. In his paper the general northeasterly dip
of the sedimentary beds was shown and the general succession of the fos-
siliferous beds along a line from the southwest to northeast across the
area was established. A large amount of material, mostly in large pieces,
was gathered ; the fossils in most cases are casts of the interior or exterior
and more or less distorted by compression after fossilization. The iden-
tifications were confessedly tentative, but a sufficient number of charac-
teristic species were recognized to establish correlation of the faunas
with the Clinton-Niagara-Lower Helderberg formations of New York;
the uppermost beds on Moose Island were compared with the Devonian
shale of Ohio on slender ground. No attempt was made to compare the
species with the transatlantic faunas of corresponding age.
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society March 8, 1912.
2 American Journal of Science, 3d ser., vol. xxxii, July, 1886, pp. 35-67.
XXV—BcLt, Gzou. Soc. Am., Vou. 23, 1911 (349)
350 H. S. WILLIAMS—PALEOZOIC FAUNAS OF EASTPORT QUADRANGLE
Six years later, in 1892,* Dodge and Beecher published a report on the
“Silurian formations of North Haven,” and established for them a gen-
eral equivalency with the Clinton and Niagara of the New York series.
In the summer of 1897 and 1898, I examined the formations of north-
eastern Maine (accompanied by H. E. Gregory, who studied the petrog-
raphy), and from study of the fossils* established the presence of five
formations, namely, Aroostook limestone, Graptolite shales, Sheridan
sandstone, Ashland shale, and Ashland limestone, as containing species
known in the Clinton and Niagara of New York. A sixth formation,
the Square Lake limestone, was shown to be approximately equivalent to
some portion of the Helderbergian. The seventh formation, the Chap-
man sandstone, was shown to have not only intimate relationship with
the Becrafts or Lower Oriskany fauna of the New York province, but
also to have much to connect it with the Downtonian or Tilestone for-
mations of Scotland and Wales. ‘he eighth formation, the Mapleton
sandstone, was correlated as of Devonian age on the evidence of plants,
but without attempting closer discrimination of its horizon. The ninth,
the Moose River sandstone, in Summerset County (as had already been
announced by C. H. Hitchcock in 1861)°, was correlated with the Oris-
kany sandstone of New York.
Later, 1907-1908, the Gaspé faunas were critically studied by J. M.
Clarke,® all of which were correlated by him as Devonian. The lowest of
these, the fauna of the St. Albans beds, was shown to contain “a congeries
of 51 species, of which fully one-half occurs in the Helderbergian faunas
(Coeymans and New Scotland) to the southwest,” which led him to con-
clude that there was at the time of their deposition an open channel
connecting the Gaspé with the New York basin, in which the typical
Helderbergian fauna lived. |
The Arisaig (series), since the year 1868, has been reece as hold-
ing faunas of Silurian age. Hall, Dawson, Honeyman, Ami, and others
have given tentative correlations; but lately (1909).Twenhofel and
Schuchert critically examined the faunas and correlated them as ranging
from the Clinton to a time-equivalent of the Guelph of Interior America.‘
In that paper specific relation was also recognized with transatlantic
3 On the occurrence of Upper Silurian strata near Penobscot Bay, Maine. American
Journal of Science, 3d ser., vol. xliii, 1892, pp. 412-418. é
4 Williams and Gregory: Contributions to the geology of Maine. U. S. Geological Sur-
vey, Bulletin No. 165, 1900.
5 Agriculture and geology of Maine, 2d ser., 1861, p. 369.
SN. Y. State Mus. Mem. 9; 1908, Early Devonic history of New York and eastern
North America, p. 250.
7American Journal of Science, 4th ser., vol. xxviii, 1909, pp. 161-163.
=— = ae
INTRODUCTION a51
Upper Silurian formations ranging from Upper. Llandovery to the
Ludlow.
Thug for several years the evidence has been accumulating to prove
that outside the general Appalachian axis, in the region covered by the
State of Maine and the eastern Canadian provinces, more or less con-
tinuous sedimentation was going on during Silurian and early Devonian
time. The faunas of these sediments are not identical with faunas of
New York and the interior, but they exhibit intimate relationship with
the transatlantic faunas of Paleozoic time. _
During the preparation of U. 8. Geological Survey Bulletin number
165 I was particularly struck not only with the general resemblance,
but with the fact that the faunal combinations in Maine, namely, the
generic associations of species in tlie successive faunas, bore a closer
resemblance to the terminal Silurian beds of Great Britain than to the
succession in the not-far-off district of New York. ,
From the knowledge I then had of the several faunas I concluded that
the Cobscook Bay series, described roughly by Shaler, probably gave the
best evidence of this relationship. ‘This led me to urge the director of
the Federal Survey to provide a topographic map of the Eastport region,
so that it might be possible to work out in detail its very complex geology
and paleontology. The result was that the Federal Survey, in coopera-
tion with the State of Maine, prepared a topographic map of the East-
port quadrangle, Maine, which was published in the year 1908. In the
summer of 1907, while it was in preparation, a party, consisting of E. S.
Bastin, C. L. Breger, and myself began a geological examination of the
region. During the years 1907, 1908, and 1909 we collected a full series
of fossils carefully located stratigraphically. The field work is now
complete. Mr. Bastin has the geological map in progress, and during
the past year the fossils have been under investigation.
Although the preparation of the geological map and the description
of the fossils are still quite incomplete, it has seemed to us that the geo-
logical section of the district, in its bearings on correlations between the
two continents of America and Europe and on general problems of
paleography, is of sufficient importance to warrant a brief statement of
some of the more prominent facts already established by the evidence.
STRUCTURAL SUBDIVISION OF THE Rocks orf THE EASTPORT QUADRANGLE
Structurally the rocks are a confused mixture of igneous and sedi-
mentary rocks, broken up by faults into numerous irregular blocks and
3852 H.S. WILLIAMS—PALEOZOIC FAUNAS OF EASTPORT QUADRANGLE
cut by numerous dikes and interbedded masses. Volcanic flows and ash
beds constantly interrupt the sequence of the stratified and fossil-bearing
sediments; but structurally, as well as faunally, the whole series is
divisible into four distinct masses, namely:
1. A mass of slates and metamorphosed sandstones occupying in general
the south corner of the area is separated from the rest of the series by a
profound fault, which runs from a few miles south of the town of Whit-
ing to Johnson Bay, north of Lubec. This fault has been traced across
the boundary into southwestern New Brunswick. Faunally this mass —
contains the oldest fauna of the series.
2. The area on the west side of the quadrangle, including parts of the
towns of Edmund and Dennysville, is covered by a mass of sediments
and igneous rocks which do not appear to have suffered metamorphism.
The mass is separated, however, by fault planes and probably by uncon-
formity from the next higher mass.
3. The main interior mass of the quadrangle, the sedimentary beds of
which contain a series of fossil faunas, ranging from purely marine
below to estuarine beds at the top, is separated from the fourth mass by
a distinct unconformity, as is shown by the sections in the region of the
reservoir west of Perry village, where the uppermost beds of the Silurian
rocks containing fossils are followed by the Perry sediments lying uncon-
formably on them.
4. The Perry group occupies the northeast corner of the quadrangle,
and is shown by its plant remains to be at least as young as Devonian.
It lies unconformably on the series below.
FAUNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SEDIMENTS
Faunally the series is divisible into six fairly well defined geological
formations.
Formations I and II (represented by the structural masses above de-
scribed as 1 and 2) contain few diminutive fossils. Plectambonites
transversalis (Wahln.) is found in both of them.
Zone I also contains Monograptus sp. indet., Leptena rhomboidalis
(Wilckens), Atrypa reticularis (Linné), and Spirifers of the Sp. crispus.
and Sp. radiatus types.
Zone II is known only by a single fauna in-a soft mud-shale. It is
distinguished by the presence of Plectambonites transversalis (WahlIn.),
FAUNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SEDIMENTS B00
Bilobites bilobus (Linné), Skenidum lewisii (Davidson), and Spirifer
crispus (Hisinger).
Thus faunally both of these zones are of Silurian age and probably
not younger than early Niagara or Wenlock. It is not clear in what way
they are structurally related to each other. The fossils are too few and
too imperfect for determination of close correlation with other known
formations.
Formation III is represented by a considerable number of fossiliferous
outcrops containing a rich, purely marine fauna. The lower beds of
this formation contain corals, not abundantly but frequent in occurrence,
chiefly of the genera Syringopora and Favosites. I have not up to the
present stage of my investigation discovered a trace of the genus Haly-
sites, although Breger mentions it in his field notes. The following
widely distributed species furnish the basis for correlation:
Atrypa reticularis (Linné), Leptena rhomboidalis (Wilckens), Spiri-
fer crispus (Hisinger), Pentamerus galeatus Dalman, Meristina tumida
(Dalman), Wilsonia sp., Cornulites sp., Dalmanites sp.
Associated with these cosmopolitan types are Spirifer elevatus Dal-
man, Strophonella funiculata (McCoy), Leptostrophia filosa (Sowerby),
the peculiar form called Avicula danbyt by McCoy, and Monomerella
woodwardi (Salter), giving a complexion to the fauna unfamiliar to
American paleontologists, though characteristic of certain transatlantic
Silurian faunas.
This is the fauna listed by Shaler* in his paper of 1886 as of the
“Orange Bay section.” It was again reported by me® in 1905 under the
station name of “Whiting Bay, No. 1440.” In the latter list the resem-
blance of many of the species to well known Helderbergian species led to
a misinterpretation of the correlation of the fauna. Having been strongly
impressed by the wide fluctuation of characters of species in the Chapman
fauna in northeastern Maine, I then gave too much weight to resem-
blances. Recent exhaustive study of the new material has convinced
me that in place of having here a mixture of Helderbergian with Niag-
aran forms, we are really dealing with a series of transatlantic rather
than American faunas.
Several of the British species have not heretofore been reported in
American Paleozoic beds, although closely related forms have appeared
in the Helderbergian faunas farther west. The species I listed in 1905
"Loc. cit., p. 54.
~*@G. O. Smith and David White: The geology of the Perry Basin in southeastern
Maine. U. S. Geological Survey, Professional Paper No. 35, 1905, p. 22,
304 H.S. WILLIAMS—PALEOZOIC FAUNAS OF EASTPORT QUADRANGLE
as Spirifer cf. octocostatus is Dalman’s species Spirifer elevatus. “Stro-
phedonta cf. Becki” of that list is Leptostrophia filosa Sowerby.
“Monomerella cf. ovata var. lata’ is the British form Monomerella
woodwardi (Salter).
Two of the most characteristic species of the fauna are Avicula danbyi
McCoy, found both in the Wenlock and Lower Ludlow in England (but
hitherto not reported on this continent), and Strophonella funiculata
(McCoy), which when Davidson described it was known see him only
from the Wenlock.
Meristina tumida (Dalman) is also a typical transatlantic species
closely resembling but distinct from Meristina maria Hall of the Wal-
dron, Indiana, Niagara.
The presence, also, of Pentamerus galeatus Dalman makes it clear that
the fauna is to be correlated with the Wenlock of Great Britain and the
Middle Gothland of Gothland rather than with the Coeymans fauna of
the Helderbergian series, where we are accustomed to meet that species
in American rocks. Thus the species mentioned as well as the combina-
tion of species in the fauna makes it clear that Zone III of the Eastport
series is to be correlated directly with the transatlantic Wenlock and
Middle Gothland formations.
It is probable that the Coralline of Schoharie, New York, the Decker
Ferry of New Jersey, and possibly the Selby dolomites of Clarke and
Ruedemann are its near time-representatives west of the Hudson.
Formation IV contains a pure marine fauna. It may be divided
faunally into two members. The lower member is rich in Brachiopods;
the upper member has few Brachiopods and its fauna is characterized
chiefly by Pelecypods and Gastropods.
There is a rather sharp distinction faunally between all of the ombeadel
of the lower member of formation IV and those of the underlying for-
mation, III. This distinction may be briefly described by saying that the
cosmopolitan species Atrypa reticularis and Leptena rhomboidalis have
dropped out. No. IV contains no representatives of the genera Lepto-
strophia, Strophonella, Pentamerus, or Meristina, and Chonetes of the
C. nova scoticus type, Dalmanellas of the D. lunata Sowerby type, and
Camarotcechia, not Wilsonia, are abundant in zone IV, while Wilsonias
are abundant in III. As above stated, there is an abrupt change in the
fossil contents in the midst of the formation; the upper member, though
occasionally showing traces of the same Brachiopods as below, is charac-
terized by its Pelecypoda and Gastropoda, the more frequently appearing
of which are Grammysias, of the type of Grammysia cingulata Hisinger,
FAUNAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SEDIMENTS 355
and Platyschisma helicites (Sowerby). The Ostracoda and Leperditia
are also of frequent occurrence and often in great abundance in this
upper member.
These characteristics of the generic association, the progressive change,
and the identity of certain species in the faunas are illustrated by the
passage from the Upper Ludlow into the Temeside groups of the typical
section in England described by Elles and Slater,’® but are not repre-
sented by any other series of beds on the American continent, so far as |
am at present -aware.
Formation V is distinguished from the lower formations by the entire
absence of Brachiopods except the genus Lingula and the great abun-
dance of a small Pelecypod we have previously listed as Modiomorpha cf.
subalata, which on further study appears to represent Anodontopsis
augustifrons McCoy. ‘The formation is tied to the next lower formation
by the continuance in great abundance in some beds of the Leperditias
and Ostracoda. Distinct traces of Pterygotus problematicus Agassiz
‘are also found in this formation.
This combination of characters recalls the terminal Silurian beds of
Great Britain called Downtonian and Temeside rather than anything
expressed on the interior of the American continent.
Formation VI is the Perry formation, the fossil plants of which have
already been described by Mr. David White,’ who has confirmed Daw-
son’s correlation of it with the Devonian. This formation hes uncon-
formably on the beds of formation V. :
The above statements will suffice to indicate the facts of general inter-
est which the detailed study of the Eastport faunas is bringing to light.
The description of the species is in progress, many new species are being
discovered and illustrated, and it would be premature to make any
announcement regarding them at the present time. When the faunas
are fully elaborated I hope to be able to establish the relationship exist-
ing between the Eastport faunas and the terminal portion of the Arisaig,
the Silurian faunas of Penobscot Bay, and the Ashland faunas of Aroos-
took County, Maine. The facts already brought to light, however, make
it clear that the series of beds here referred to as formations III, IV,
and V have a more intimate relationship to the series of formations of
” Highest Silurian of the Ludlow district of England. Quarterly Journal of the Geo-
logical Society, vol. lxii, 1906, p. 219.
1G, O. Smith and David White: The geology of the Perry Basin of southeastern
Maine. U.S. Geological Survey, Professional Paper No. 35, 1905.
306 HH. S. WILLIAMS—PALEOZOIC FAUNAS OF EASTPORT QUADRANGLE
Great Britain described as Wenlock, Ludlow, and Downtonian or Teme-
side than to any of the standard series at present described on the
American continent. By their fossil content and the order of sequence
of the faunas they suggest a decided community of geological events and
history for the two areas now separated by the Atlantic Ocean.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 357-370, PLS. 19-22 JULY 29, 1912
PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY
DEVELOPMENT AND SYSTEMATIC POSITION OF THE
| MONTICULIPOROIDS !
BY E. R. CUMINGS
-
(Presented before the Paleontological Society December 29, 1911)
CONTENTS
Pape
IIRICL EME PO) cet Ce ee Siete a Grd hee Po ate: Oa We be ae Dies ele eee ae a Rives oe BOT
Development of ‘Prasopora ee eh RM ait Bs Sage Shane endod erates Si teins at ES alla” Staal a: ey: CHEN
ENO MBEOPEL ID) ooo 2.6.0 te Wadh oh oS Wadne! pods. X'sy%p Reid ane. B dP. Bee ieee teeesiee yo eee Se 358
OM ECOS CT SS a Se ee a ae fg seta oe ee BEN Sipe eed 399
CN IOTIE HED SMU BCLS Ste. tcl ciid! ecole wf 6 ee a. abn re) < 6 equa ss Wiucee ae & ova Dee Oho ioee lak ee
re TRIS ENGR ET OTES SR teeth clo ae isa) ahd ahcie yam aaTd shioKod Slvieleale esis g 360
MIE Ce PCMOMONUN «5.0 5 os cv cv ow eds cine bie ae ae se we eee ee bee nee 361
SNA RESEES TAU OR ENOL NST 100 aT clea ag. 60S a o's) a bie alg vm eye eee wie aes 4 ANG we Slee bcd se Qe 361
EEE CRIRINRN SH SD Oh aicl'a tata ieee eo eis bla ce Ne a eee aie ee alate Swe 361
IEEE ETRE CALCOT Ue od iy anc bin 6 4/08 wives. noe adbela Oude ev eu weasldes 362
REMC SOTINEDN GS hot Ra siitetc las sie at's divi vin wid bY KS Od Se ere es ie ageibiths abe 362
(CM Ie 0 i ee etc tefeees ee Hig eae Gans ne la Gi Cinta: a! ohn et a 362
RE PUTT TUS PRTRCES Gots tr in) Suceen Sain chet IALS Ue Fe or sackel Oe Be God ae kaos 363
Development of Phylloporina corticosa.............. Dae aT ee Rae 363
NPTLITIE 1401, POMIGUUOLTUNDU . 6 = siarc.cw sas oa alan cles cec ge Owe eee ea ee cee es 364
Peveopment of other genera. ..... 2... cee cee ees trata a ot ta is Std weg 364.
Mipeuseion, and CQNGHISIONS... 2.0... ec cee ei Tet teh hers” tytn ty 364.
EE LOU NS atate ee oh iS nape aaa € aladt al clscgid' Suv tO AGI GAS Biss «ewes 366
SMEETE ELSE OE OUTED oc a ca icin sac ose ce eae ae ve eee Five AMR ae Ae edhe, x 367
INTRODUCTION
In my paper on the development of Paleozoic Bryozoa (6), published
in 1904, I stated that the results brought out in that paper regarding
the budding order of the initial growth stages of the bryozoan colony
would afford a solution of the systematic position of the Trepostomata,
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Geological Society of America February
28, 1912.
XXVI—Boutw. Grou, Soc, AM., Vou. 23, 1911 (357)
308 EB. R. CUMINGS—POSITION OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
or Monticuliporoids. In a second paper (7) I showed that the protoe-
cium, or first exothecal stage of the primary individual of the colony, is
very persistent in the primitive order of the Cyclostomata, and that it is
also very strikingly developed in the Cryptostomata (Fenestella, Poly-
pora, Thamniscus, etcetera). The exact form and morphological and
developmental significance of this feature of bryozoan development were
discussed at length in the latter paper.
During the past six years I have succeeded in obtaining the desired
evidence in regard to the development of the T'repostomata, and have
worked out in detail the development of a number of genera. In the
case of Prasopora, Phylloporina, and Callopora the evidence leaves noth-
ing to be desired. In Peronopora, Rhombotrypa, Amplexopora, and
Homotrypa the protoecium has not been seen, but the budding order is
definitely known. ‘The methods of study have been described in my 1905
paper (7) and need not be repeated here.
DEVELOPMENT OF PRASOPORA
THE PROTOECIUM
The proximal portion of the primary individual of colonies of Praso-
pora conoidea Ulr., when perfectly preserved, consists of a circular disk
of the type seen in the Cyclostomata and in Fenestella, etcetera (figures
1, 9, and 25). Its diameter is about 0.08 millimeter. As seen on the
under surface (figure 9), there is a slight constriction between this disk
and the remainder of the primary individual. When the section cuts
through the upper portion of the protoecium and ancestrula, no such
constriction is noted. In longitudinal sections (figure 23) the protoe-
cium and ancestrula are seen to be continuous, although there is some
evidence of a diaphragm between the two (figures 23, 26). There is a
definite, very thin wall separating the protoecium from the substratum.
_The lateral and superior walls of the protoecium are thickened and pre-
sent an appearance in the sections noticeably different from that of the
walls of later zooecia. This same peculiar wall structure characterizes
also the posterior. walls of the ancestrula and primary buds. It is pos-
sible that the wall material of these primitive zooecia may have been
different from that of later zooecia, although on this point the evidence
is not satisfactory. In recent bryozoa, according to Barrois (1), the
investment of the protoecium is actually different in texture from that
of later zooecia. The appearance of this primitive wall substance in the
Trepostomata, as seen under high magnification, is precisely the same as
that of the proper wall of the initial portions of colonies of Fenestella,
oe? ee
DEVELOPMENT OF PRASOPORA 359
It is clear and structureless, with no evidence of fibers, lamin, or any
of the characteristic features of the walls of ephebastic zooecia.
THE ANCESTRULA
The ancestrula is a tubular zooecium of the familiar type seen in the
Cyclostomata. At first it is prone, lying along the surface of the sub-
stratum. Rising with gradual curvature from the substratum, it be-
comes straight, and at right angles to the base of the colony and extends
directly to the upper surface of the latter. Diaphragms and cysti-
phragms make their appearance very near the point of origin of the
ancestrula (figures 21, 23). It is evident that in the case of the Tre-
postomata only the lower portion of the long tabulated tube, seen in the
figures, can represent the true ancestrula, since this tube was undoubt-
edly occupied by a succession of superimposed buds. In this feature
consists, par excellans, the prime characteristic of the Trepostomata.
’ The point of origin of the primary buds probably represents the distal
end of the ancestrula, sensu strictu, since, after the analogy of recent
Bryozoa, these buds should have arisen from the neck of the ancestrula.
The posterior wall, and possibly the entire wall of the ancestrula, has the
same peculiar texture as the wall of the protoecium (figures 1, 21, 22,
and 23). The ancestrula has about the same diameter as the protoecium
and is from one-half to two-thirds the diameter of the zooecia superim-
posed on it. No definite plane of demarcation between the ancestrula
and the protoecium exists in the Trepostomata, such as is to be seen in
Fenestella and the Cyclostomata. ‘Their relations are altogether more
intimate and primitive and seem to bear out my speculations in this
regard published in my paper on the development of Fenestella (7).
THE PRIMARY BUDS
The position of the buds adjacent to the ancestrula (figures 1-6, 9,
25-27, 36, 37) is such as to make it certain that two lateral buds and
one median bud arose from the latter. Two other buds (e and f in the
figures) also lie adjacent to the ancestrula, but by a careful inspection
of the figures it will be seen that the proximal ends of these buds are not
in contact with the ancestrula, and that therefore they could not have
arisen from the latter. The arrangement of these primary buds is pre-
cisely the same as in recent Bryozoa (cf. figures 10 and 28, and figure 40
of my 1904 paper).? These two buds (e and f) are also directed pos-
iIn figure 10 (after Barrois) the left lateral bud is suppressed, only the median and
right lateral buds being present. Otherwise the plan of budding is the same as that
shown in figure 9. The buds surround the ancestrula somewhat more loosely than in
Prasopora (cf, figure 17).
360 E. R. CUMINGS—POSITION OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
teriorly, whereas the other three are directed anteriorly—that is, in the
direction of the ancestrula. In some of the sections another bud is seen
between e and f, and probably originated from one of them. In the ver-
tical sections (figures 20-24, 33, and 35) the fact is revealed that these
two buds (e and f) arise at a level somewhat above the substratum, and
- serial sections show that they lap well past the ancestrula and arise to
one side of it. As they attain the vertical ascending position, they swing
in toward each other and ride over the superior surface of the protoecium
(figures 3-6).
All of these buds give rise, as in the case of the ancestrula, to vertical
successions of superimposed zooecia—the zooecial tubes of the colony.
The upward extension of bud e (or f) is beautifully shown in figure 21
(also figure 35). Diaphragms and cystiphragms begin very near ‘the
point of origin of the tube. ‘The wall structure of e and f is different
from that of the ancestrula and like that of all later zooecia. The wall
structure of the posterior portions of the lateral primary buds (2 and 3)
is similar to that of the ancestrula and protoecium. In fact these buds
and the protoecium are very sharply set off by this characteristic thick-
ened wall from all of the buds posterior to them (cf. figures 14-16); I.
believe that the only interpretation of this feature is that this portion of
the young colony was exposed while the lateral buds of the second and
third generations were developing and before any of them came into
eontact with it. During this interval the exposed wall became more or
less thickened and covered with foreign particles. This last fact is dis-
closed by the presence frequently in the sections of minute opaque parti-
cles lying in this region of the infantile zoarium (nepiasty), such as are
commonly seen in sections through the surface portion of Trepostomata.
‘The thickened posterior wall of the nepiasty is a very constant and emi-
nently characteristic feature in sections of all the genera in which the
initial region has been studied. Where the lateral buds of later genera-
tions envelop the nepiasty loosely, as shown in figure 17 (Callopora ?),
this whole region is filled with foreign material. 3 )
THE SECONDARY BUDS
The exact origin of the two buds e and f can not be ascertained. From
the analogy of recent Bryozoa they might come from either buds 2 and 3
or from the buds lying to the right and left of them (2-2’, figures 25-27).
These two possibilities are shown diagrammatically in figures 26 and 27,
where the solid arrows show the most probable arrangement and the
broken arrows the alternative interpretation. The direction and charac-
A — —— !.
en ee ee ae
DEVELOPMENT OF PERONOPORA 3
teristics of these buds have already been described. Similar doubt exists
as to the exact derivation of the buds marked a, b, c, and d in the figures.
The most natural supposition is that a@ and b came from bud 1. The
buds z and 2’ turn abruptly backward and inward toward the antero-
posterior axis of the zoarium, in exactly the same manner as similarly
placed buds in the recent Bryozoa.
DEVELOPMENT OF PERONOPORA
THE PRIMARY BUDS
It will not be necessary to take up in detail the development of this
genus, since in all essential particulars it is identical with Prasopora.
The protoecium has not been seen. Only two specimens showing the
initial region of this genus have so far been obtained. The best of these
is shown in figures 13-15. It is a nearly entire basal expansion and
shows not only the initial buds and ancestrula, but the manner of origin
of the median lamina that characterizes the genus. ‘Three buds arise
from the ancestrula, as in Prasopora, and are bounded by the character-
istic thickened, structureless wall (a-a’). There appears to be an addi-
tional bud between the buds corresponding to e and f, as is also the case
in some specimens of Prasopora. The beautifully symmetrical arrange-
ment of the zooecia is shown in the diagrammatic drawing, figure 13.
THE MEDIAN LAMINA
The initial region of Peronopora for some distance from the ances-
trula is identical with Prasopora. At a distance of 2 or 3 millimeters
from the ancestrula, however, the zooecia in Peronopora begin to diverge
more and more from an imaginary line, and a little farther out are sepa-
rated into two juxtaposed regions by a definite median plate. This plate,
the median lamina, is encountered at about the same distance from the
ancestrula whether the section cuts vertically or horizontally through the
initial region—that is, the zone in which the lamina makes its first ap-
pearance arches over the initial region in the antero-posterior vertical
plane. A young colony a few millimeters in diameter may therefore be
said to be substantially a minute Prasopora. The lamina itself seems to
represent the suppressed axial region of an otherwise flabellate zoarium,
In other words, instead of having a well developed axial region, consist-
ing of the thin walled immature portions of many longitudinally directed
long zooecial tubes, Peronopora has reduced the axial region to a double
lamina, consisting of the juxtaposed proximal ends of oppositely directed,
short zooecial tubes standing at right angles to the lamina. It is clear
362 E. R. CUMINGS——POSITION OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
that this lamina does not consist of a basal membrane or epitheca that
has risen up into the colony.
DEVELOPMENT OF CALLOPORA
THE PROTOECIUM
The protoecium of Callopora has the same form and appearance as
that of Prasopora, described above. It has been seen in several speci-
mens, two of which are figured (figures 7 and 8=Callopora dale).
Both of these zoaria were growing on the shells of brachiopods, attached
to the plicated outer surface of the shell, as shown in figure 39, where
one of the shell plications is seen at the bottom of the figure. This
accounts for the somewhat irregular arrangement of the primary buds,
since they were not all developed on the same plane, but on an uneven
surface. The protoecium in figure 7 was attached to a plication, most
of which was, of course, ground away in sectioning down to the protoe-
cium itself. The striated appearance of the section to the left of the
protoecium is due to the presence of an excessively thin remnant of the
brachiopod plication. This serves to call attention to the fact that the
section reveals the absolute point of attachment of the primary individual
of the colony. A similar feature is shown in figure 8 of another speci-
men. The relations of the protoecium and ancestrula are exactly the
same as already described in Prasopora. 'The wall structure is also of
the same type as in the latter genus.
THE ANCESTRULA
The ancestrula is well shown in figure 7. It is long, tubular, and very
prone on the substratum. There is a very slight constriction between the
ancestrula and the protoecium. As seen on the upper surface of the
section, the walls of the two are perfectly continuous. The section
shown in figure 8 was purposely left thick in order to show this feature.
The surface shown in the figure is the lower surface, which was attached
to the substratum. An exceedingly thin remnant of the brachiopod
shell to which the protoecium and ancestrula were attached is present.
By focusing up and down on this section the relations of the two can be
very satisfactorily made out. The ancestrula is seen to be an obliquely
placed, simple tube, with a disk-shaped proximal portion—the protoe-
cium. The two have the same diameter, which is about 0.08 millimeter.
As seen in figures 7, 8, 16, and 38, the initial zooecia in Callopora are
all at first very nearly parallel with the substratum—that is, they lie, as
in Prasopora, prone. For this reason the ancestrula is cut obliquely in
b
DEVELOPMENT OF CALLOPORA 363
figures 16 and 38. These sections cut at about the same level as the
section of Peronopora (figure 14) and present a very similar appearance.
THE PRIMARY BUDS
The lateral and median buds are shown in figure 8. Some sections
indicate that the median bud sometimes failed to develop. This I be-
lieve to be the case in figure 16. The lateral buds were attached to the
under side of the neck of the ancestrula, as in the recent Cyclostomata
(cf. figure 30), and at once diverged rather widely from the ancestrula
and from each other—that is, the radial arrangement of the zooecia,
seen in cross-sections of the stems of Callopora, is very quickly attained
(figure 38). The posterior wall of the ancestrula and primary buds has
the same appearance and structure as in the case of Prasopora and
undoubtedly for the same reason.
The section shown in figure 17 is from a specimen which could not be
definitely referred to any genus, owing to the fact that the mature por-
tion of the zoarium had been entirely broken away. It was a small
ramose form, with rounded zooecia, diaphragms, and mesopores, found
associated with Prasopora and Phylloporina corticosa at Cannon’ Falls,
Minnesota. It is interesting in the fact that no buds whatever are in
contact with the posterior portion of the ancestrula, and also in the fact
. that evidently four buds rather than three issued from the ancestrula.
DEVELOPMENT OF PHYLLOPORINA CORTICOSA
The initial stages of this species are so nearly identical with those of
Prasopora that they do not need extended description. A comparison of
figures 29 and 25 will satisfy any one of this. The protoecium is large,
and beautifully shown in figure 29 (see also figure 18), which is drawn
with the utmost possible fidelity to the original section. The ancestrula
and primary buds are all very prone, more so than in any other form
studied. The arrangement of the primary and secondary buds is the
same, point by point, as in Prasopora.
The chief interest attaching to Phylloporina corticosa is in the com-
plicated fenestriate zoarium which it builds. So aberrant is it in this
respect that Ulrich very naturally referred the species to the Cryptosto-
mata, placing it in the genus Phylloporina. In 1904 (6) I stated that
the species belongs to the Trepostomata. In 1905 (7) I figured the sec-
tion of the initial region, shown here again in figure 29, and called
attention to the presence of the protoecium. The identity of the initial
growth stages with those of Prasopora is sufficient to show that the spe-
cies is a true trepostome, In figure 19 of another specimen is indicated
364 E. R. CUMINGS—POSITION OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
somewhat diagrammatically the manner of origin of the remarkable
Fenestella-like branches or rays. The first indication of these rays is
the tendency of certain zooecia to arrange themselves in parallel pairs
at rather regular intervals, between which the arrangement is still some-
what irregular. The interzooecial walls of these parallel juxtaposed
zooecia next become somewhat thickened, giving rise to the ill defined
vertical median Jamina of the sinuous anastomosing branches of the
colony. A young colony in which the infundibular superstructure has
not begun to arise presents a curious resemblance to one of the star-
shaped macule of a Constellaria. The remarkable features of this spe-
cies indicate very impressively how tenuous after all is the line between
the Trepostomata and the other orders of the Bryozoa. Ulrich (13, 14)
has pointed out at sufficient length the affinities of the species with the
Cryptostomata. Its affinities with the Trepostomata are conclusively
shown by its mode of development.
DEVELOPMENT OF RHOMBOTRYPA
Figure 40 shows a transverse: section cutting somewhat above the pro-
toeclum of a young colony of Rhombotrypa quadrata. 'The general ar-
rangement of the zooecia is the same as in the other genera studied.
The ancestrula gives rise to two buds. The primary buds and ancestrula
are set off from the posteriorly directed buds by a thickened wall, as in
all other genera. A noteworthy feature of this section is the presence
of acanthopores in the initial region. They are not present in the ma-
ture portion of colonies of this species. This may be taken to indicate
the affinities of this genus with Amplexopora.
DEVELOPMENT OF OTHER GENERA
Several sections have been obtained of Amplexopora septosa, showing
the initial region. Their appearance is the same in all essential respects
as that shown in figure 40 of Rhombotrypa. Acanthopores are present .
in abundance, even in the primary buds.
A few sections show the initial region of what appears to be a species
of Homotrypa. ‘The arrangement and budding order are the same as in
Prasopora, and the thickened posterior walls of the ancestrula and pri-
mary buds are exceptionally well shown.
DiscussIoN AND CONCLUSIONS
The form and structure of the primary zooecium of the colony of the
Trepostomata and the arrangement of the buds and their derivation
DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS 36.
have all been shown to be in strict-agreement with undoubted Bryozoa.
The presence of the protoecium alone is practically conclusive on this
point, since it represents a definite stage in the metamorphosis of the
larva, not represented in the corals. In the latter the development from
the instant when the planula becomes sedentary is direct. Again, the
restriction of budding to the neck region of the ancestrula finds no
counterpart in the corals, where buds come off symmetrically all around °
the primary individual of the colony (cf. figures 9 and 12). This feature
of coral budding is beautifully shown in the figure of Plewrodictyum,
reproduced herewith, and still more clearly in the diagrams of Michelinia
given by Beecher (3). It also characterizes the recent red coral (Coral-
lium), according to Lacaze-Duthiers (8), and Renilla, as described by
Wilson (15). Bernard mentions symmetrical budding in T'urbinaria
(4) and in Montipora (5). No doubt it oceurs generally in corals, as
the construction of the coral polyp would lead us to expect. The litera-
ture of corals is, however, for the most part singularly silent on the
subject of early colonial development.
In view of this conclusive evidence from development in regard to the
systematic position of the Trepostomata, it is scarcely necessary to re-
vamp the evidence variously presented by Ulrich (12), Lindstrom (9),
and others on this point, or to review the adverse opinions of Nicholson
(10), Sardeson (11), and others. Lindstrém’s views do receive a new
interest from the present studies. While I do not believe with him that
there is any direct relation between Ceramopora and Monticulipora, he
should receive the credit for having attacked the question of systematic -
position from the right direction and for having made suggestions of
great value. Had his suggestions been carefully followed up, the mystery
of the Trepostomata would have been cleared up long ago.
Ulrich has given a powerful preseitation of the evidence of mor-
phology bearing on the systematic position of the group, and recent
studies of Bassler (2) and myself have materially strengthened this class
of evidence. I lave, for example, found that communication pores are
present in a considerable number of genera, as Dekayia, Batostoma,
Bythopora, Callopora, Hridotrypa, Monticulipora, Nicholsonella, aud
Peronopora in addition to the long known cases of Homotrypa. The
evidence on this point is now in press.
A word may be said with reference to the views of Sardeson. First of
all, he stakes his case on the proposition that the Trepostomata and
Cryptostomata are very intimately related. This is perhaps more than
the most devoted students of the Bryozoa would be willing to grant.
But, accepting it at its face value, his case for the coral affinities of the
366 E. R. CUMINGS—POSITION OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
two groups vanishes with the certain evidence presented by me in 1904
and 1905 as to the intimate relations between the Cryptostomata and
the Cyclostomata. The wonderfully typical development of the protoe-
clum in Fenestella, together with the typically bryozoan order of bud-
ding and the morphology of the ancestrula and primary buds, leave no
doubt on this point.
The morphology of the primary individual of the Trepostomata colony
suggests interesting relationships with the Cyclostomata. I believe, how-
ever, as I stated in 1905, that the two orders are cognate and do not
stand in a linear relation one to the other.
In figure 32 of the present paper is shown the interesting fact that-in
Prasopora the arrangement of the zooecia in the macule is the same as in
the initial region of the colony This section cuts at the level m-m’,
figure 20—that is, far enough above the ancestrula to show the normal
ephebastic characters of the colony. This arrangement of zooecia in the
macule has not yet been fully investigated. It lends some support
to the view that macule and monticules are suppressed or aborted
branches—that is, there is a rhythmic tendency to branch—but usually
the process stops with the establishment of the appropriate arrangement
of the zooecia, which is the same as the arrangement at the base of the
primary stock of the colony. It may go slightly further and give rise to
an elevated group of zooecia, or monticule.
REFERENCES
1. J. Barrois: Recherches sur l’embryogenie des Bryozoaires. Lille, 1877.
2. R. S. Bassler: Proceedings of the U. S. National Museum, volume xxvi,
Washington, 1903, pages 565-591.
3. C. E. Beecher: Transactions of the Connecticut Academy of Science, vol-
ume viii, New Haven, 1891, pages 207-220.
4. H. M. Bernard: Catalogue of the Madreporaria of the British Museum,
volume ii, London, 1896.
: Idem, volume iii, London, 1897.
6. E. R. Cumings: American Journal of Science, volume xvii, New Haven,
1904, pages 49-78.
: Idem, volume xx, New Haven, 1905, pages 169-177.
8. Lacaze-Duthiers: Histoire Naturelle du Corail. Paris, 1864.
9, G. Lindstr6m: Annals of Natural History, series iv, volume xviii, 1876.
1G. H. A. Nicholson: On the structure and affinities of the Genus Monticuli-
pora. London, 1881. '
11. F. W. Sardeson: Journal of Geology, volume ix, Chicago, 1901, pages 1-27,
149-173,
AM.
BULL. GEOL. SOC.
VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 19
\ \. ON Fe x c
eo
DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS:
REFERENCES 367
12. BE. O. Ulrich: Journal of the Cincinnati Society of Natural History, vol-
ume v, Cincinnati, 1882, pages 121 et seq.
13. ———: Geological Survey of Illinois, volume viii, Springfield, 1890.
14. ———-: Geological Survey of Minnesota, volume iii, part i, Minneapolis,
18938.
15. BE. B. Wilson: Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London,
volume 174, part iii, London, 1884, pages 723-815.
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 2
PLATE 19.—DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
FiauRES 1-6.—T'ransverse serial Sections of a Colony of Prasopora conoidea
UI’.
Figure 1 is the finished section, and is at the level indicated by the line
r-r’, figure 20. Figure 4 is about the level p-p’, figure 20, and figure 5 is
at the level n-n’, figure 20. Figure 6 is slightly higher. These figures are
selected from a set of 18 drawings, representing 18 successive levels be-
tween r-r’ and m-m’, figure 20. 10.
I'IigGuRES 11 AND 12.—Side and basal Views of a young Colony of the coral
Pleurodictyum lenticulare, after Beecher.
Showing the totally different form and arrangement of the initial indi-
vidual of the colony and the primary buds from that shown in figure 9.
The buds appear in the order of the numerals. Note that seven buds arise
from the initial individual and are symmetrically arranged about it.
x 1%.
Figure 13.—A diagrammatic Drawing from a Photograph of a Section through
the initial Region of Peronopora pavonia (D’Orb.).
Showing the ancestrula and primary buds and the arrangement of the
zooecia in the basal expansion of the colony. The origin of the median
lamina is shown at / and l’. «9. Cut No. VIII, Tanner’s er. Upper
Lorraine. (104-1.)
PLATE 20.—DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
Figure 14.—IJnitial Region of Peronopora pavonia (same Specimen as Figure
13).
This section is too high in the colony to cut the protoecium, but shows
the ancestrula and primary buds. The conspicuous thickened wall bound-
ing the ancestrula and primary buds is shown at z-”’. x 45. (104-1.)
Figure 15.—Semi-diagrammatic Drawing from Figure 14.
Figure 16.—Transverse Section through the initial Region of Callopora ramosa
(D’Orb.).
At a level similar to that of figure 14. % 45. Cut No. VIII, Tanner's
er. Upper Lorraine. (106-17.)
Figure 17.—Transverse Section through the initial Region of a Callopora (?)
from the Phylloporina Bed, Cannon Falls, Minnesota.
In this specimen there was a void immediately posterior to the protoe-
cium as in the recent Discoporella (cf. figure 41). This clearly shows that
no posteriorly directed buds arose from the ancestrula. x 45.
Figure 18.—Semi-diagrammatic Drawing from Figure 29. x 43.
Figure 19.—Diagrammatic Drawing of the initial Region of Phylloporina cor-
ticosa Ulr.
Showing the origin of the Fenestella-like rays. The section cuts at a
higher level than figure 18. x 48. Phylloporina bed, Cannon Falls, Min-
nesota. (56-6.)
FIGguRE 20.—Vertical Section through the Ancestrula, etcetera, of Prasopora
conoidea, with Lines m-m’, etcetera.
To show the level of various transverse sections, (Same specimen as.
figures 21, 22, and 35.) x 30. ;
VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 20
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM,
>
Hit TT
WA VA
WU JIB ete
We
eS
NOOO
24
ee
Whe
A
DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
ia
\orer
Pie cele
debate
~~
te ie ST ae a
weet
y
%
‘ 1 ig : , h
‘ : NR A
r i a - . \ L i ia is
, = ir ea.
# a hs \ , ty f “4 7
’ > — | s
- > F Pe
i =
,
: 4
'
~ :
2 n My
id i> > i
‘ 2 i
r
a
*
3 }
—- 7 gtd ~
7 é
, > =
r - a © =
P =
" = -
+ == Sy js . =
é \
= +
mS =
: \
= ”
= he
3 ys
~
—
$ =
‘
.
u * a
vg 3 le eli
a ss i
i i
j yay co
' f
= a y
‘
. P
’ 4 -
= m v
La .
\
‘
. i
-
i
1 ’ j
‘
%
3) Vi
¥ r J !
_
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOLE 23, 1911, Ewes
(i
Pat /
Ga
foo
y
=
ot
al
eS
aq
Ei
Sei
ZN
eas
Fa}
S
a
DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
EXPLANATION OF PLATES 369
PLATE 21.—DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
Figure 21.—Vertical Section through the initial Region of a Colony of Praso-
pora conoidea.
Showing a portion of the protoecium and the ancestrula. Most of the
protoecium has been weathered away (cf. figure 23). The bud e arises to
one side of the angestrula and not from the ancestrula. The peculiar
thickened wall of the ancestrula is also well shown. » 43. Phylloporina
bed, Cannon Falls, Minnesota. (104-14.)
FigurRE 22.—Semi-diagrammatic Drawing from Figure 21.
Figure 23.—Vertical Section through the initial Region of another Specimen
of Prasopora conoidea from the same Locality.
The entire protoecium is shown in this specimen. Its perfectly circular
outline (cf. figure 9) could be seen on the base of the colony before the
section was cut. x 43. (106-14.)
Figure 24.—A Section of the same Specimen as Figure 23.
Made in a plane parallel with and slightly to one side of the latter sec-
tion. This section shows how the bud e arises well to one side of and
laps over the ancestrula and protoecium. Its tip is also elevated con-
siderably above the substratum. » 45.
Figure 25.—Transverse Section through the initial Region of Prasopora conoi-
dea at the Level r-r’, Figure 20.
Showing the protoecium, ancestrula, and primary buds. Note that the
tip of the bud f is not in contact with the ancestrula. 43. Phyllo-
porina bed, Cannon Falls, Minnesota. (104-21.)
FIGURE 26.—Semi-diagrammatic Drawing from Figure 25.
FIGuRE 27.—Semi-diagrammatic Drawing of a sintilar Section of another Speci-
men of P. conoidea from the same Locality.
In figures 26 and 27 the probable derivation of the buds is shown by the
arrows. The broken arrows indicate an alternative interpretation of the
derivation of the buds e and f. x 438. (104-16.)
FiguRE 28.—Portion of a young Colony of the recent Bryozoan Membranipora,
after Barrois.
To show the identity of the budding pattern with that of the Treposto-
mata. x 7%.
FIcuRE 29.—Transverse Section through the initial Region of Phylloporina
corticosa.
Showing a beautifully ireseeued protoecium, ancestrula, and primary
buds. Note the striking similarity to similar sections of Prasopora. x 43.
Phylloporina bed, Cannon Falls, Minnesota. (56-7.)
Figure 30.—Drawing of the recent Bryozoan Tubulipora, after Barrois.
For comparison with figure 29 and figures 7 and 8. x 40.
Figure 31.—Transverse Section through an Adult Colony of Prasopora conoi-
dea at the Level m-m’, Figure 20.
Same section as figure 32. 43. Phylloporina bed, Cannon Falls, Min-
nesota. (104-24.)
370 E. R. CUMINGS—POSITION OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
PLATE 22.—DEVELOPMENT OF THE MON‘TICULIPOROIDS
FIGURE 32.—Photograph of the same Section as Figure 31.
The arrangement of the zooecia in the macule is the same as in the
initial region. » 18.
FIGURE 33.—Vertical Section through the initial Region of Prasopora conoidea,
from Cannon Falls.
Note the position of the tip of the lateral, posteriorly directed bud—in
this section directed to the left. 18. (106-3.)
FiguRE 34.—Vertical Section through the initial Region of Prasopora conoidea.
In a plane at right angles to that of figure 33 and figures 21, 22, etcetera.
«x 18. (106-9.)
- Figure 35.—Same Section as Figure 21. 18.
FiguRE 36.—Same Section as Figure 25. « 18.
Figure 37.—Same Section as Figure 1. 18.
Figure 38.—Same Section as Figure 16. 18.
FIGuRE 39.—Same Section as Figure 7. 28.
Figure 40.—Transverse Section of the initial Region of Rhombotrypa quad-
rata (Rom.), cutting a little above the Protoecium.
Note the acanthopores. 18. Cut No. XVI, Tanner’s cr. Liberty for-
mation. (106-22.)~
FicuRE 41.—Base of a Colony of the recent Bryozoan Discoporella.
Note the great similarity of the budding plan to that of the Treposto-
mata. 18.
VOLS 25, Jotiy Pie oe
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM.
DEVELOPMENT OF THE MONTICULIPOROIDS
i ee ee
_— a eC
Jt ad
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 371-376 JULY 29, 1912
PROCEEDINGS OF THE PALEONTOLOGICAL SOCIETY
ORISKANY SANDSTONE OF ONTARIO?
BY CLINTON R. STAUFFER
(Presented before the Paleontological Society December 28, 1911)
CONTENTS
n Page
m_reeaneG. conclusions Of other investigators. ........6..60. esc ce ee eecee 371
Peeeenposures in Haldimand County, Ontario...........0c0c cece eee eens 373
1 =]
i. an ae
CU He co GO
~
_eanaorone of North Cayuga township... .... cece eee e cee ee a eeaae :
sero Oren Cayurd tOWNSDID:. «2.6 ccc cee cece cae ucac scenes
Sete NY ALIOIG TOWTSUID . eco cla saa as ne te bbe a ces dann ae oldies
PRT VY CLIN OLE. COWIIGIINP)! <6) eccjare cad salve aed dalde eave des meenecens
MN reals cde ents Aver Oo Se a et’ Cia eink valet yaa a, crate Owe oe awit
SSS eT her SRNR Hie) Gis te eae whe Bie Sie eee Pars
-
~~
-1 <1 -1 -~1 =] ~
iret im
Co eo
=
|
wu
i |
WorRK AND CONCLUSIONS OF OTHER INVESTIGATORS
Few horizons in Ontario are of more geological interest than that of
the Oriskany sandstone. ‘This is largely because of its abundance of
well preserved fossils and the-relation which it bears to the preceding
and succeeding formations. Apparently, on the authority of Billings,
Logan gives a list of thirty species from the Oriskany sandstone? of
North Cayuga township, in which ten are characteristic Oriskany forms,
and the remainder are among those usually found in the Onondaga
(Corniferous) limestone. About ten years later Nicholson writes, “The
fauna of the Oriskany sandstone of Canada is, with very few exceptions,
identical with that of the Corniferous (Onondaga) limestone. All the
typical and characteristic forms of life in the former pass up into the
latter, and it is thus impossible to draw any paleontological line of sepa-
ration between them.” * He says further, “I have myself detected no
fossils in the so-called Oriskany sandstone which I have not also recog-
1 Published by permission of R. W. Brock, Director of the Geological Survey of
Canada.
Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Geological Society of America February
28, 1912.
1Sir William E. Logan: Geology of Canada, 1863, pp. 360-361.
®H, C, Nicholson: Paleontology of the Province of Ontario, 1874, p. 8,
(371)
372 Cc. R. SLAUFFER—ORISKANY SANDSTONE OF ONTARIO
nized in the overlying Corniferous (Onondaga) limestone.” * Schu-
chert’s list of Oriskany fossils, made up from Hall’s collection, indicates
a mingling of Oriskany and Onondaga fossils in the Ontario outcrops.
Out of seventy-six species listed for the Oriskany of Canada, fifty-two
are reported to pass from it into the Onondaga limestone.? Somewhat
later, in referring fo the above mentioned list, Schuchert says, “When
this work was in hand it was apparent that there had been some mixing
of Corniferous (Onondaga) corals with those of the Oriskany fauna
and a number of species were then eliminated. It now appears that
more of these corals must be removed from Professor Hall’s Oriskany
collection.” ® He then gives a revised list, dropping ten species, but still
retaining forty-two as common to the two formations. It is interesting
to note, as indicated by Whiteaves,’ that most of the collection from the
Ontario Oriskany, now in the museum of the Geological Survey at
Ottawa, was made by Mr. John De Cew, a civil engineer and amateur
geologist. It seems that Hall’s collection, on which Schuchert’s list was
based, came from the same gentleman, and any one whio has visited the
field in question knows how easily a person might confuse his collections.
While discussing the Oriskany and Onondaga faunas in their paper on
“Paleozoic Seas and Barriers in Eastern North America,’ Ulrich and
Schuchert state, “The Oriskanian invasion attained the last locality
(near Cayuga, Ontario) about the same time that the Onondaga inva-
sion, coming in from the southwest, arrived there, the result being that
the Onondaga and late Oriskany faunas, originally very dissimilar in
character, became one, making together what is now known-as the east-
ern Onondaga fauna. The blending of these two different faunas (Oris-
kany and Onondaga) can be seen to best advantage in the townships of
Oneida and North Cayuga, Ontario, where there is a sandstone filled
with late Oriskany fossils. ‘The sandstone rapidly passes into a sandy
limestone and then into the typical Onondaga limestone. . . . Out of
seventy-two species found here (in the Oriskany) not less than forty-
two pass up from the lower horizon into the Onondaga.” * Still later
Weller writes, “The mingling of the Onondaga and Oriskany faunas in
western Ontario . . . suggests that this was the first point of contact
between the immigrant fauna (Onondaga) and the preexisting Oris-
kany.” ® Others might be quoted, but these statements are sufficient to
*H. C. Nicholson: Idem, p. 8.
5 Charles Schuchert: Sth Ann. Rept. N. Y. State Geologist, 1888 (1889), pp. 51-54.
® Charles Schuchert: Bull. Geol. Soc. Am., vol. xi, 1900, p. 324.
7J. F. Whiteaves: American Geologist, vol. xxiv, 1899, pp. 228, 229.
'E. O. Ulrich and Charles Schuchert: N. Y. State Museum Bull. 52 (Pal. 6), 1901
(1902), pp. 652-653.
*Stuart Weller: Journal of Geology, vol. xvii, 1909, p. 261.
SANDSTONE OF NORTH CAYUGA TOWNSHIP ake
make it evident that there is a rather general impression that the Onon-
daga and Oriskany faunas are mingled in the deposits of the region
mentioned above. Hence some of the results of work recently done in
that vicinity may be of interest.
.
THE Exposures IN HALDIMAND CouNnTY, ONTARIO
SANDSTONE OF NORTH CAYUGA TOWNSHIP
In Ontario the Oriskany sandstone is represented in Welland and
Haldimand counties (the two counties lying along the north shore of
Lake Erie immediately to the west of Buffalo) by remnants of a much
more extensive formation. ‘The largest and most important of these
remnants hes under a very thin mantle of drift and covers a considerable
portion of several square miles just west of Decewsville, in North Cay-
uga township, Haldimand County. The center of the area thus desig-
nated is the location of the De Cew quarry of former days, but the
sandstone has been taken out at more than a dozen localities and, on a
small scale, is now quarried at three or four places. At the Oneida
Lime Company’s quarry, 2 miles west of Decewsville, the Oriskany
is composed of 20 feet of coarse grained friable white to yellowish
sandstone.. At some horizons, especially in the upper part, there occur
occasional concretion-like bodies of sand which have been cemented into
masses resembling quartzite. This sandstone hes unconformably on a
weathered buff to yellowish brown, somewhat porous, magnesian lime-
stone of Silurian age, and the lowest layers often contain subangular
fragments of the underlying formation, while at other places the sand
has penetrated the cracks and crevices of the Silurian and now appears
as thin veinlike seams cutting the rock in all directions or filling pocket-
like holes in it. The thickness of the sandstone varies much from place
to place, owing to the marked unevenness of the surface on which it lies.
The Oriskany is overlaid unconformably by about 4 feet of arenaceous
chert and cherty limestone. These upper beds often contain a consider-
able amount of sand, which sometimes gives them the appearance of
mortar beds. Good sized pieces of the sandstone, containing character-
istic Oriskany fossils, may be found embedded in the lower part of the
cherty limestone, while at other places not far distant the Onondaga
rests directly on the Silurian, with only here and there remnants of the
Oriskany lying between.
FOSSILS FROM NORTH CAYUGA TOWNSHIP
The coarse sandstone carries an abundance of such forms as Spirifer
arenosus (Conrad), Spirifer murchisoni (Castelnau), Hatonia peculiaris
XXVII—BULL. GHOL. Soc, AM., Vou. 28, 1911
ORISKANY SANDSTONE OF ONTARIO
374 C. R. STAUFFER
(Conrad), Rhipidomella musculosa Hall, Hipparionyx proximus Van-
uxem, Meristella lata Hall, Leptostrophia magnifica Hall, Leptostrophia
magniventra Hall, Rensseleria ovoides (HKaton), Rensseleria cayuga
Hall and Clarke, Platyceras nodosum Conrad, Platystoma ventricosa
Conrad, etcetera. In fact about all of the most. characteristic forms of
the central and western New York Oriskany occur here.
During the course of a half dozen or more days collecting at this
place, some of the time with the assistance of Mr. Walter A. Bell, a fair
collection from all beds was made. A single specimen of Strophonella
ampla was found occurring in such relation to Spirifer arenosus as to
make it seem probable that the two species lived at the same time. How-
ever, since this find was made at or very near the top of the sandstone,
it may not be significant of anything. Then, too, it is to be remembered
that Spirifer arenosus has been found in the Onondaga limestone and ~
Strophonella ampla at least as low down as the Schoharie grit. In the
sandstone there was also found a coral belonging to the genus Favosites
and resembling quite closely Favosites turbinata of the Onondaga lime-
stone. A study of this form, however, has made it seem more than prob-
able that it is a different species. The arenaceous chert and cherty
limestone overlying the sandstone carry a pure Onondaga fauna with
not a single species, other than long range forms, properly belonging in
the Oriskany. It is true that many specimens of Onondaga fossils can
be obtained from rock which is more sandstone than limestone, but in
every case where these have been obtained in place they have been found
to occur above the Oriskany and never mingled with that fauna.
SANDSTONE OF WALPOLE TOWNSHIP
Ten miles farther west, near the village of Springvale, Walpole town-_
ship, there is another outcrop of sandstone resembling very closely that
just discussed. It occurs as a narrow surface outcrop, extending for a
distance of several miles, and consists of about 8 feet of coarse white to
yellowish sandstone, with hard white masses resembling quartzite, as at
the previous locality. This sandstone usually rests on several feet of
cherty material, which at places where the base is exposed is found to
rest unconformably on the Silurian limestone. ‘This latter shows the
sand penetrating cracks, etcetera, as previously mentioned—that is, the
base of the Devonian and the horizon of the true Oriskany sandstone
apparently lies below the chert. The sandstone near Springvale is over-
laid by arenaceous chert and cherty limestone, which appear to be the
same, both lithologically and faunally, as those beds overlying the Oris-
kany sandstone 10 miles farther to the east. One difference, however,
WELL RECORDS 370O
deserves mention. No evidence of unconformity was discovered at the
top of this sandstone, and certainly there are no masses of sandstone
included in the limestone, although much sand is mingled with the
calcareous sediments for 2 or 3 feet above the true sandstone.
FOSSILS FROM WALPOLE TOWNSHIP
Among the common fossils of this sandstone are Centronella glans-
fagea Hall, Spirifer divaricatus Hall, Meristella nasuta (Conrad), Am-
phigenia elongata (Vanuxem), Pentamerella arata (Conrad), Reticu-
laria fimbriata (Conrad), Pholidostrophia iowaensis (Owen), Spirifer
macrothyris Hall, Spirifer duodenarius (Hall), Zaphrentis gigantea
Lesueur, Michelinia convera WVOrbigny, Zaphrentis prolifica Billings,
Favosites turbinatus Billings, etcetera. This fauna is truly that of the
Onondaga limestone and in it was found none of the characteristic
Oriskany, species.
WELL RECORDS
Well records at Hagersville, about half way between the two localities
under discussion, give no evidence of sandstone at the base of the Onon-
daga, although some of the wells to the southwest do strike sandstone at
this horizon, while others do not. These outcrops of sandstone are,
therefore, not continuous and he at different horizons, as their faunas
and stratigraphic relations show. Moreover, a mingling of the Oriskany
and Onondaga faunas at this locality does not exist. What seems to
have happened is that the Oriskany Sea withdrew entirely from Ontario
and that a land interval followed it. With the transgression of the
Onondaga Sea the Oriskany sandstone suffered severely from erosion,
and the arenaceous materials thus obtained were incorporated into the
lower layers of the Onondaga limestone. Locally, as at Springvale, this
sand was of sufficient quantity to form considerable beds of sandstone.
The subsequent changes which have increased the similarity of the two
deposits, namely, the formation of the quartzite-like masses, have prob-
ably been brought about at a much later date.
CONCLUSIONS
Near Syracuse, Onondaga County, New York, there are numerous out-
crops of the Onondaga limestone and of the Oriskany sandstone. At
some of these places the basal portion of the Onondaga contains a con-
siderable amount of sand. The outcrop in the gorge just west of Manlius
shows a stratum between 2 and 3 feet in thickness, in the lower part of
which “the sand predominates over the lime, but toward the top the lime
376 C. R. STAUFFER—ORISKANY SANDSTONE OF ONTARIO
increases at the expense of the sand and gradually the top of the stratum
becomes entirely lime.” ?° This stratum of sandstone and arenaceous
material carries an Onondaga fauna and forms the basal layers of that
formation. It rests directly on a sandstone which contains the charac-
teristic Oriskany fossils. The stratigraphical evidences of unconformity
in this case are apparently wanting, but the Paleontological evidences
are rather marked. And thus it appears that the conditions which pre-
vailed in Ontario during early Middle Devonian were identical with
those which existed in portions of New York at the same time, and the
“Decewsville formation,’ *? in which the mingled Oriskany and Onon-
daga fauna has been supposed to occur, is not an independent unit.
10 ¢, J. Hares: Letter of February 9, 1912.
1 —&. O. Ulrich and Charles Schuchert: Loc. cit., p. 653.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 377-446 SEPTEMBER 12, 1912
a
CRITERIA FOR THE RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA
DEPOSITS
BY JOSEPH BARRELL !
__ (Presented before the Society December 29, 1911)
CONTENTS
Gait Page
ee Ie 5 iin on: una ofa Henke h Ginretnial en As Set aca are pl a we Olek 378
See TITPCE TEIATIONS Of GEILAS. 5. oon. ie ce ec epee eice es aesie 381
Deere OF 0. Geli, aNd its parts... +... ydscc wae ve ve ces dawe cat 381
eee he, Pe ENIEES 0 A COLED «oi. Sie, oe. done eine © Cale pe ee lee 3 eles 0 eo 381
(he factors in delta construction and destruction. .......0....... 383
mae hotvomset beds... .......<... PT C7: Bhat. teas Pa Ls a Bas 385
CER MIELE eas a tr SI EPS ns ak cham, wig’ Dia ae wae Paeue W's. cake 385
MR Eee Pee Sa ote acacia Wok in 5 a i eo eo ae ae 385
UME RCS ES CURES SMMC rier ve) sad ee Sa. ep poiale 9 SP alte P Weta oad 6 hile 385
mimmershore face and littoral adne............:..be.escss vue 385
28SEC UE Ta sie he ed ge ee ee en ae ee 386
moeeae and Rhine deltas as examples... ... 0... cic eww cence 387
Variations and blending in the component parts of deltas............ 389
i anRS PE SUCRE ie a |e Wied ate'a:s aie oui a sain a ee siesta a bmdee ee 391
TERED TOS eS RS) 72S pl PR RR Sa re ee mn 391
MMEe SVC OVETAD o 525 5 ees ws ele el Cele ee nee eek ee ee ee aes 392
. verap away trom the source of Supply... 2... 0. ncn cece ae eweee 393
The delta cycle and its use as a criterion of origin................... 395
Comparison of the erosional and depositional theories............ 395
We MOLE SU EPOUIAT Y CPTISD ov. ww sme asin wo 0m ws even ¢ BS wes wee 397
Beet OC a fOCVEMeNt OF SUDSIGENCE. . 2. ek ses og Seca ewe ee ese 399
Imperfect application to present conditions. ..................00. 401
Effects of recent crustal movements.................seeeeee 401
Resulting overemphasis of estuarine conditions.............. 402
Modern illustrations of ancient interior deltas............... 403
The late Mesozoic delta cycle of the Atlantic Coastal plain....... 405
Contrast of Mesozoic and Paleozoic delta conditions in the Appalachian
Re ge EES 6p ee ES pete Ege «OO aa 411
ere 21.—hvaluation of stratigraphic criteria. ............cccsnncncueves 414
I CA Uo ae Oe ee 414
PE AU ee ta gu! oa wie wis. 0,9 9a, © ly aun inns eleva 415
Color of sediments and the relative influence of location and climate
NE reset ere Pees 2 da alee hv old a ts eek Gem h eave es 416
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 10, 1912.
XXVIII—BvuLL, Grou. Soc. AM., Vou. 23, 1911 (377)
378 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
Page
Varierated Tormatious. . ... 6. ss ces. a SEs a St wee Aid 2 eee ee 417
Green shales and red sandstones. ... 0. 2c... 26ue. - oe eee . 417
Recent example, the basin of eastern Persia................ 417
Ancient example, the Oreadie basin of Scotland............. 418
Red shales and green sandstones.:. ... .....4.200222 =~ + eee 419
Subrecent example, the Siwalik formations of India........ 419
Ancient example, the Catskill formation. ........ 2) ao5e0en 421
Lateral and vertical variegations in‘clays............. we Seer 422
Regular. banding in mudstones: 22s 222. ow ee eee Sos etn 425
A climatie record in bottomset beds... .......<.4 6G 423
Banded slates of the Orange group, by D. D. Cairnes........ 424
Relations of bedding to mode of sedimentation............cceeeeeeen 425
Method of presentation... 0.6.0. .20 soe oe ee oe eee 425
Lamination of mudstones... 2.0.6.5 6.50.05...-0 0002 eee 425
Effects of subsidence from suspension. ....:.!2. 522.52 eneeee 425
Hirects ‘OF Wavese. $050.02 oc ek oe bee De eats ee ie ope 426
Effects of subaerial actions..:..........2..1..6. seen 426
Stratification of sandstone$...... 2.00.0. .22 54.45 05 oe ee 427
HWMfeECtS OF WAVES... i... weer ea cancer te wawes 0s ee en 427
Bifects of “currents... 2... 02228 See. ws a ole ce ee 430
Contrasts of. marine and. fluviatile action®..... 2... 2232 eee 432
Effects of sheet-flood déposition:.............. 2. oe 433
WiifectS of wind i . 22006 seca ee oe ee we ee 434
Relations of texture’ to sedimentation. ..........) 0.0... 2 sete eee 435
Degree of sorting a negative criterion. ......... ... 2.2. eee 435
Effects of wind-in shaping’ sand. .......,5% ...5 0. ~» se eee 435
Combinations of wind and water action...°......%...... 00 «eee 456
Kinds of combined structures and. textures..;....°.... 22a 436
Relative association of eolian action with fluviatile and marine
GEPOSITS:. 56 SRA was Sais Gt ewes @ wie wb we 8 alan pol eile eee 456
Climates implied: ty eolian action...............2.0.., J. <0 pe 438
Desert climates and dominant dune structures.................. 438
Semi-arid climates and dominant combined structures............ 438
Breadth of eolian action as a criterion of fluviatile deposits.......... 440
Significance of conglomerates. ...... 0... ..ce enue wee cet ts ee 440
Mud cracks and rainprints. .. 2... 2... ce oe ae ots 2 = clade le 442
Terrestrial fossils as evidence of terrestrial deposits. ..............-- 4438
Free terrestrial fossils, plants and animals........... 22. 5eeeenee 448
Fixed terrestrial fossils, plants and animals.............. ..sses ddd
General conclusion on criteria for delta deposits...............ecesucees 445
INTRODUCTION
On the earth’s surface, ranging from mountain crests to oceanic deeps,
are wide gradations in geologic process and organic environment, but the
line which most sharply draws division between two worlds of process
and of life is the strand. In the study of the sediments, holding as they
INTRODUCTION 379
do the record of earth history and organic evolution, a fundamental
question is therefore whether the strata were laid down in contact with
the air or beneath the level of the sea. If fossils are present they com-
monly give an answer, but the absence of fossils from many formations
leaves the problems of origin to be solved by other methods of attack.
It is important that the criteria which are used for such purposes should
be always subject to scrutiny in order that inherited errors may be de-
tected and further progress made toward refinements of discrimination—
refinements which though concerning small details may yet result in a
disproportionately large increase of knowledge in the interpretation of
the sediments. It is in delta deposits especially that the line of the
ancient strand is difficult to draw, since it is not here coincident with
the limits between erosion and sedimentation and the same formation is
made in part above, in part below the level of permanent water. It is
the purpose of this paper, therefore, to review the validity of the criteria
which have been employed to discriminate between terrestrial and sub-
aqueous sediments—criteria whose use is preliminary to a knowledge of
the physiography or climate of those former periods where knowledge is
drawn from the stratigraphic record; since building on an insecure
foundation results in danger to the whole superstructure of knowledge.
But before a discussion of such criteria is given it is important that
the view should be accepted that at certain geologic times deltas may
have been of widely different character and have varied greatly in im-
portance from the rather limited place which they now hold in the
physiography of the lands. ‘The field of progress in science is hedged in
by the limits of the mental angle of vision, and the range of hypotheses
should therefore be made broad before examining in detail the possibili-
ties of a problem. The rise of geology as a science depended on the
establishment of the principle of uniformitarianism—that the present is
the key to the past. But applied too rigidly it narrows the visual angle,
since the scale or rate at which various processes work may vary greatly
im successive periods and their changing dominance is now believed to
have resulted at times in great climatic and geographic contrasts. The
highly variable importance of glaciation in geologic history may be used
as an illustration of a similarly possible wide variation from period to
period in delta-building. No a priori limit can therefore be set safely to
the maximum area and thickness which under favoring conditions deltas
may attain. In fact, as the successive geologic periods differ from one
another in character, it should follow that the importance of delta-build-
ing will vary from age to age according to the physiographic stage-set-
ting of the continents. A direct application of the growth of glacial
380 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
theory during the past half century may be made to the problem of the
relation of continental and marine deposits. The rise of geology in
western Europe, where mountain glaciers and river deltas though inter-
esting are relatively small and inconsequential factors at the present geo-
logic time, and where marine erosion on the other hand is an impressive
phenomenon, gave an initial trend to geology which underestimated the
possibilities of continental glaciation and continental sedimentation. A
truer perspective regarding glaciation has been attained by the study of
the polar regions and of sedimentation by the study of other continents ;
but the records of delta deposits and their distinction from other forms
of sedimentation are not so clear as are the marks of glaciation, with the
result that the criteria for the recognition of delta deposits are still open
to discussion and further elaboration.
But glaciers have their cycle of inception, growth, and retreat, and in
any refined application of the criteria of glaciation they must be dis-
cussed from the standpoint not only of the part of the glacier which is
concerned but of the stage in the glacial life. The erosion by rivers like-
wise passes through its cycle of youth, maturity, and age, and the charac-
teristics of the river valley and river waste change with the distance
from the headwaters and with the progress of the erosion cycle. There
must also be a delta cycle, and it is to be expected that the size of the
delta and the character of its deposits will depend not only on the origi-
nal relation of the other physiographic elements of the continent, but on
the progress of the cycle of erosion on the one hand and of the eyele of
deposition on the other.
— Consequently the first part of this paper is largely deductive in its
mode of presentation and deals with the definitions of a delta and its
parts, followed by an analysis of the delta cycle, dependent on river ero-
sion and the changing level of the sea, The conception which it gives is
then applied to a certain sequence of formations as an example of its use
and tends to ascribe to delta-building a kind of deposition which has
heretofore been assigned to an estuarine origin.
The second part of the paper is inductive in its method, and consists
of a review of all those stratigraphic criteria which have been used within
recent years as evidence by which to separate continental and marine
formations. Some are concluded to be of negative value; others may
indicate either mode of origin, according to their character and domi-
nance. Still others are positive criteria for the parts of the formations
in which they occur. Although the method is inductive, yet in the
absence of observed facts in regard to some modern conditions of sedi-
\
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 381
mentation, deduction from known principles of action is needed to
supplement the conclusions from partial observations.
Part I.—LaArcer RELATIONS oF DELTAS
DEFINITIONS OF A DELTA AND ITS PARTS
Essential features of a delta—A delta may be defined as a deposit
partly subaerial built by a river into or against a body of permanent
water. The outer and lower parts are necessarily constructed below the
water level, but its upper and inner surface must be land maintained or
reclaimed by river building from the sea. A delta, therefore, consists of
a combination of terrestrial and marine, or at least lacustrine strata, and
differs from other modes of sedimentation in this respect. Its place in a
classification of modes of origin may be given as follows:
All sedimentation is continental, littoral, or marine. Continental |
sedimentation may be in turn subdivided into terrestrial, paludal, and
lacustrine; terrestrial formations comprising deposits made by wind,
rain wash, rivers, or land ice; lacustrine including fresh-water and salt-
water lakes. Paludal sediments form a transitional type between terres-
trial and lacustrine, but in the playas of desert basins and the swamps
of deltas they are quite distinct in character and in life content also
from either the more or less permanent lakes on the one hand, or, on
the other, the river plains which are only temporarily flooded. Marine
sediments are either of terrigenous or pelagic origin. It is with the
division of terrigenous sediments—sediments directly born of the land
and restricted to within a few hundred miles of shore—with which we
have here to deal. They are deposited over a wide range of conditions,
in the open sea or in partly landlocked bodies of water, at abyssal depths
and on shallow bottoms lighted by the sun, agitated by the waves. In
bays and estuaries gradations toward fresh-water conditions may occur,
but the littoral, that zone alternately covered and laid bare by tides,
separates the waters of the oceans from those of the lands. he distinc-
tion between the waters is drawn geologically by means of the faunas,
but from the structural standpoint no such line can be drawn between
the deposits of lakes and those of shallow seas. Sedimentation with its
record of earth history may take place under all these environments, but
delta deposits alone cross the shore. The presence of a strand zone
within the formation is the distinctive feature, and in this paper, there-
fore, delta deposits will be spoken of as terrestrial and subaqueous, and
the conditions of deltas built into continental waters will not be discrimi-
nated from those built into the marginal waters of the oceans. ‘The
382 J.BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
blanket of sediments which extends across the shore may pass outward
into deposits of the open sea and must be classified into zones according
to the changing conditions of deposition. All those zones which con-
tribute to the building of a delta are parts of it as a complex physio-
graphic structure. Those which do not aid in the outward or upward
growth of the delta should be ruled out of its membership. For greater
clearness of view a table is given showing a classification of sedimentary
deposits and those divisions which may contribute to delta growth.
Classification of Sedimentary Deposits
DEPOSITS OFJMIXED
CONTINENTAL AND
SUBDIVISIONS MARINE FORMATIONS
(DELTAS FACING; &
SEAS) gt -
a
Epicontinental
limestones
Oozes
Abyssal red clay
Glacial
: Eolian
Terrestrial Plugial
Continental Fluvial
(Above tidal
reach ) : Intermittent
rou { Perennial L Subaerial topset beds
| (mostly fluvial)
| Lacustrine Shore
| (fresh and salt) Bottom (The littoral and
fluvial zones are not
Littoral Tidal marsh sharply separated
(Between ti- Lagoon in deltas. )
dal limits) Beach The shore face
Offshore (Steeper slope pro-
(Breaking waves, duced by wave
undertow ) action )
Subaqueous topsel beds
Estuarine or bay | (Gently sloping
(Brackish water) L surface produced
Terrigenous 4 r by wave action)
Ee Shallow sea | Foreset beds
eae Gast | ( Epicontinental (Steeper slopes
nies : sea) 7 below wave base)
Oceanic Bottomset beds
(Also Mediterra- (Flat distal slopes
nean ) below wave base)
|
L Pelagic
The dominance of river action over the opposing sea is expressed by a
broad but irregular convexity of shoreline, though confluent deltas may
give rise to an extended coastal plain of fluviatile origin and conform to
the regional trend of the shore, either concave or convex toward the sea.
A delta is typically built in front of a river valley, not within its walls.
A drowned valley, however, is reclaimed by the river readvancing into it
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 383
under temporary delta conditions. A basin is a structural depression
surrounded by uplands, and if rivers maintain a land surface, notwith-
standing subsidence, then deltas do not result. If, however, a rapid sub-
sidence gives temporary lacustrine conditions the rivers work to reclaim
the land, partly by supplying sediment to the lake bottoms, more largely
by building out deltas into the lake, but on the margins of the basin the
deposits differ in no respect from those accumulated under purely fluvia-
tile conditions. If subsidence is progressive the rivers build upward, but
deltas exist only in so far as the rivers keep flowing into bodies of per-
manent water.
From the shore front the river-built plains may extend landward many
hundred miles, as seen at present on the great delta plain of China. In
the other direction may extend a still wider reach of sea. The determi-
nation of ancient delta conditions from the study of the strata requires,
therefore, the demonstration of evidence that both subaerial and sub-
aqueous sediments were deposited. The nature of each part may not,
however, be different from that of formations which were wholly sub-
aerial on the one hand or subaqueous on the other, so that a broad study
of the formations will commonly be necessary to prove the synchronous
and contiguous development of both kinds of strata and hence the exist-
ence of deltas.
Deltas indicate a somewhat balanced contest between the constructive
rivers and the opposing lake or sea, but the relative aspects are con-
tinually changing; deltas if now building ‘rapidly outward show by that
fact that but recently subsidence brought the sea inland. The problem
of the shifting conditions through time as recorded by successive strata
is therefore much more complicated than the study of the surface of the
existing stage.
The factors in delta construction and destruction.—Rivers excavate
their channels and undermine their banks during times of flood, and
although in this manner they act locally as degrading agents and con-
tr:bute to the sea rather than to the land, yet the delivery of this material
to the offshore sea bottom builds it up and weakens the effect of the
waves on the coast. Indirectly, therefore, erosive work of the channel
waters advances the work of delta-building. The overflow waters, on the
other hand, deposit a large proportion of their waste on the floodplain
and directly build it upward and outward. With the draining away of
the flood waters the work of aggradation is shifted to the channel, the
excess of sediment diminishing its cross-section and maintaining the
velocity of the current until the latter is able to carry through the balance
of its much diminished load,
3884 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
Strong tides scour the lower channels, keeping them large and open.
But the inrushing tide has greater carrying power than the ebb unless
the latter is assisted by a strong river current. Consequently, although
there is great channel scour, sedimentation is all the more rapid in the
two zones of slack water, that of the salt marshes on the one hand and
the adjacent shallow sea bottom on the other, and the greater strength of
the flood tide tends to keep even the marine sediment near the land.
The carrying of material in suspension until deep water is reached pre-
vents to that degree the building of deltas. But the silt deposited over
the salt marshes at full tide tends on the other hand to build rapidly
upward the floodplain to the level of high tide, so that tides serve in this
respect to extend the subaerial plain. If the river empties into a shallow
sea the sediment which is dropped from suspension where the tidal cur-
rent weakens will commonly be within the reach of the waves and the
deposit, like that from the river currents proper, diminishes the shore
action of the waves, thus doing indirectly its part toward extending the
delta. The strength of the tidal action in itself does not therefore con-
trol ultimately the presence or absence of deltas, though the contrary
view is commonly expressed in text books, based on observations on the
scouring power of tides in estuaries. ‘The Indus delta, for example, is
built in the presence of a tidal range of 10 feet and that of the Ganges
against a tide of 16 feet.
Waves are the more real destroyers of the delta front. They plane
back the shore, and by keeping the finer material in suspension it is
swept out to deeper water. If it were swept radially out from the land,
and if the hmiting depth of wave action were soon reached, the effect
would be chiefly to build outward the subaqueous platform of the delta
at the expense of the subaerial plain, thus modifying the form but not
destroying the individuality of the delta. But the lateral component of
wave action works the material along shore for indefinite distances. Cur-
rents parallel to the shore aid in the dispersion and, cooperating with
strong wave action over a shallow sea—as, for example, in the North
Sea—the sediment may be widely distributed both along shore and away
from the land. Thus wave action aided by lateral currents, either of
tidal or non-tidal origin, tends to destroy the delta by redistribution of
its material. The waves work most strongly against the shore, and by
piling up beaches and by excavating the foreshore serve to differentiate
more sharply the subaerial and submarine portions of the delta.
From this brief statement of the parts played by the several factors in
delta construction and destruction it is seen that the two directly oppos-
ing processes are, first, those of floodplain aggradation, building the land
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 385
upward and outward, giving convexity and unity to the delta; and,
second, marine planation, carrying the sea inward and downward and
tending to maintain the straightness of the shoreline. River and tidal
currents greatly modify the outline of thé delta and the place of growth,
but do not control the existence of the subaerial and subaqueous plains.
Delta-building is thus due to a dominance of fluvial over marine action.
The bottomset beds.—A delta consists typically of several parts, as
shown in figures 3 and 4, pages 396 and 399, and are more or less dis-
tinctly unlike in nature. The outermost deposits consist of materials
which have settled slowly from suspension in water, making an extended
mantle of gradually diminishing thickness. These are the bottomset
beds, and do not differ in any easily recognizable way from those deposits
of similar depth where waves and currents have prevented the formation
of a delta. Stratigraphically they are, therefore, not to be discriminated,
and the demonstration of deltaic conditions must rest on other lines of
evidence.
The foreset beds——Nearer shore is the steeper delta face or foreset slope,
made by the accumulation of that coarser material swept outward by
currents and waves until the depth of wave base is reached, the carrying
power disappears, the material finally settles, and being built out at the
top tends to develop the front at a relatively steep angle. Where the
sediment is dominantly coarse and but little of it carried in suspension,
the steepness of the foreset slope approaches the angle of repose. But
where, as is the case with large rivers, the detritus is mostly fine in tex-
ture the foreset beds are built largely by material settling from suspen-
sion. Both in slope and texture there is less distinction from the other
parts of the delta, the foreset beds grading especially into the bottomset —
beds, the greater steepness being due to the greater rapidity of settling
near the limit of wave action.
The topset beds—Subaqueous plain.—The inner part of the delta con-
sists of the topset beds, whose upper surface slopes gently seaward at
such a grade as is necessary to convey that detritus which is swept along
the bottom to the edge of the foreset slope. The topset surface consists
of two distinct portions, the subaqueous and subaerial plains, separated
by a narrower transition belt—the shore face and littoral zone. The
subaqueous plane is the outer part permanently beneath the water level.
Across it material is transported by wave action and currents of the open
water. It is characterized by being the home of marine organisms,
affected by waves rather than currents, and never exposed to the air.
The shore face and littoral zone.—The shore face is the relatively
narrow slope developed by the breaking waves, a slope which separates
386 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
the subaerial plain above from the subaqueous below. Vigorous wave
action develops a pronounced shore face and separates more sharply the
two parts of the topset surface, but in protected situations it may cease
to be a distinct feature of the delta. The shore face is geologically a line
of greatest importance, yet it is seen to be in places a somewhat in- .
definite demarcation, the beds deposited on the two sides of the strand-
line showing approaches toward each other. This is especially true
of lagoons within the subaerial plain and of islands thrown up by the
waves on the surface of the subaqueous plain. On small deltas of coarse
material built into lakes, with weak wave power, the shore face is prac-
tically coincident with the upper edge of the foreset slope and the dis-
tinctions between the two parts of the topset plain are not emphasized.
It is such small deltas, however, which are commonly used as text-book
illustrations of delta structure. But in the large deltas—for example,
in that of the Mississippi—broad areas are covered with shallow water,
and consist structurally of topset beds as closely allied with the land
surface as with the deep-water portions of the delta. From the stand-
point of living things, however, the shore face dividing the topset beds
into two parts is the zone of fundamental importance, the strand which
separates the two worlds of hfe—the regions of continental and marine
sedimentation.
The littoral zone is that belt of shore alternately covered and laid bare
by tides, or where these are insignificant in range, by the effects of power-
ful onshore or offshore winds. Special faunas and floras dwell in this
narrow belt adapted to alternate exposure to air and salt water. For that
reason the definition of the littoral should be restricted to the vertical
limits affected by the maximum range of the water level as recurring
once or twice per month and not extended as an indefinite term to in-
clude what may be near the shore, yet belongs wholly either to the sea or
land. 'The steepness of the outer shore face causes the littoral to be there
a narrow belt subject to wave action. It attains a greater breadth in the
Jagoons and salt marshes which lie behind the beach, and reaches a maxi-
mum development under the flat and swampy condition attending delta
growth. Here there may be all gradations into fresh-water swamps of
the subaerial plain, but, as shown in previous studies, the breadth of the
littoral zone does not increase proportionately with the tidal range and
occupies normally but a small part of the entire delta surface.*
Subaerial plain.—The inner parts of the delta are covered alternately
by air and river water. The carrying agents comprise channel currents
° Barrell: Relative geological importance of continental, littoral, and marine sedimen-
tation, Journal of Geology, vol. xiv, 1906, pp. 448-446,
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 387
and broad flood waters, and in arid or semi-arid climates the wind may
take its part, but the direction in which it moves the waste is not deter-
mined by that slope which governs the movement of water. It is the
subaerial plain which in popular thought constitutes the delta, but it is
seen that in the process of delta-building it is but one facet of the larger
surface of construction which reaches from the upper valley to the bottom
of the water body. The outer parts of the subaerial plain of larger deltas
are broadly flooded at longer or shorter intervals either from the river or
the sea, but the distinguishing feature is that the surface is periodically
exposed to the air, and marks of such exposure may be recorded in the
accumulating sediments. Lacustrine and lagoon deposits, ranging from
fresh to salt water conditions, are also intercalated, but the life of the
plain as a whole is more of the land than of the sea. c
The word delta is taken to refer more especially to the low-lying and
projecting portion of the river deposit, but this grades with no line of
demarcation into the materials of the river plain, which may reach far-
ther inland. In ancient formations all parts of a fluviatile deposit which
hie beyond the walls of the valley and face a body of permanent water
must be regarded as essentially parts of a delta. From this standpoint
the delta plain of China reaches westward more than 300 miles, and the
deltas of the Ganges and Indus can not be set apart, so far as their strata
are concerned, from the Indo-Gangetic floodplain, which completely
separates the peninsula of India from the Himalayan mountain system.
The Nile and Rhine deltas as examples.—In order to give a propor-
tionate view of the several parts of deltas as seen in actual examples,
drawings are given of, first, the delta of the Nile, and, second, the com-
bined deltas of the Rhine and Meuse and that of the Ems. In both ex-
amples the shore face is pronounced ; strong wave action developing well
marked barrier beaches, behind which are shallow lagoons dotted with
islands and muddy flats. On the Nile delta the shore face extends to a
depth of 6 to 10 meters or thereabouts, as shown by the closeness of the
6-meter contour to the land and the considerable distance of the 20-
meter contour, not shown on the map. The 50-meter contour averages
about 50 kilometers from shore and is especially developed on the east
side of the delta, since this is the direction in which the dominant waves
and currents carry the bottom material. The slope of the subaqueous
plain is seen to be less than one in a thousand. From 50 to 200 meters
in a transition zone to the foreset slope, 50 kilometers wide in front of
the delta, but much narrower on the sides. Below 200 meters waves
have no effect, and in a width of 30 kilometers there is a rapid descent
to 1,000 meters depth. This, then, is the foreset slope. It is seen to
388 J. BARRELL
RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
Scale
Kilometers
Scale
Kilometers
Ficurp 2.—The confluent Delta of the Netherlands
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 389
have a grade of about 26 per 1,000, a slope of 1 degree 30 minutes ; steep
in comparison with the other parts of the delta, but flat in comparison
with angles generated by material rolling or sliding down a slope. Be-
low the foreset slope and mainly to the eastward is a wide bottom, much
flatter, and constituting the bottomset beds of the delta, between 1,000
and 2,000 meters deep. The convexity of the contours about the shore
face down to 1,000 meters shows that these under-water parts are really
a construction from the river-borne detritus and not the original profile
of the Mediterranean basin. ‘The Nile delta has not only given to
modern tongues the word delta as a generic name, but all its parts are
seen to be displayed in regular development, as befits a genotype. In the
Netherlands, on the contrary, a confluent delta fringe has been built
facing the North Sea by several rivers. The heavy northwest storms
have constructed a strong shore face, behind which is a broad band of
tidal flats 4nd lagoons. The latter have been in part developed by a
movement of subsidence pronounced during the past 800 years.. he
war of the inhabitants against the North Sea has prevented the inroads
which the ocean might otherwise have made as a result of the subsidence,
but has also banished a large part of the lagoons and swamps which
- would naturally mark the country. Outside of the guarding reefs the
shore face descends to a depth of 10 and in places to 20 meters, beyond
which a broad subaqueous plain stretches out and forms the bottom of
the North Sea, the 50-meter contour lying 300 kilometers distant from
the shore except over limited areas which are subject to excessive scour.
Over this bottom the sediment is moved chiefly by wave action; it does
not settle quietly from suspension, and the delta of the Netherlands can
not be said to have either foreset or bottomset beds. Although the sub-
sidence which has brought the North Sea into existence is known to be
geologically recent, the land and bottom profiles show that sedimentation
has already brought the subaerial and subaqueous plains into normal rela-
tion to each other. Erosion although dominant against the British coast
ean have had but minor effect in the vicinity of the Netherlands.
VARIATIONS AND BLENDING IN THE COMPONENT PARTS OF DELTAS
The relative importance of the several components of a delta varies in
different examples within wide limits. First, fine waste and strong ocean
currents result in an extended development of the bottomset beds ; second,
deep quiet waters of constant level permit a large proportion of the waste
to accumulate as foreset beds; third, strong wave action, breadth of delta
front, fineness of waste, and crustal subsidence favor the development of
a wide subaqueous plain; fourth, weak waves, coarse and abundant sedi-
390 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
ment, separate rivers converging toward a shallow sea, and stationary
crust favor great breadth of subaerial deposits.
Deltas may, furthermore, vary from miniature examples built into
small lakes to deltas of subcontinental size. It is, consequently, mis-
leading to discuss delta structure and delta growth chiefly from the
easily studied small examples, with but brief mention of the larger deltas.
In the interpretation of ancient delta deposits a similar or perhaps
greater range in variations of structure must be anticipated, but that
departure from present conditions which was most common was in the
direction of shallow interior seas, whose bottoms for indefinite distances
were nearly level and worked on by the waves. This physiographic set-
_ ting eliminates the presence of bottomset and foreset beds, the clastic
material of the subaqueous plain growing progressively finer in texture
and smaller in quantity with distance from shore. Under such condi-
tions the waves may spend their force on the bottom before teaching the
shore, and the shallow sea fades out into shallow brackish lagoons and
the fresh-water lakes, swamps, and playas of the river plain. Thus even
the dividing line between the subaerial and subaqueous plains may be-
come impossible to delineate and the deposits of a river floodplain grade
through a delta into the contrasted deposits of an open shallow sea.
Widespread limestone deposits, thinning out gradually against the
lands, imply high sealevels and low surrounding lands of such small
relief as not to supply much clastic material to the water. Under such
conditions, also, the sea must have shallowed out indefinitely, the waves
spending their force on the bottom rather than the shore. If, however,
as during the formation of the coal measures of the Pennsylvanian, ero-
sion was vigorous on the land, then alluvial deposits must have replaced
large parts of the sea. But on indefinite outward growth the deltas must
have been developed over wide areas at such a low gradient as to result
in stagnant drainage. The Yangtse River, for example, at the present
time is said to have a fall of but an inch per mile for 200 miles from its
mouth. Under such conditions large areas, shifting from time to time
and corresponding on a larger scale to the border swamps of existing
deltas, would be covered with permanent river water, giving rise to asso-
ciated lacustrine conditions. During the time of river overflow the flood-
plain may be viewed as a temporary lake, with a sea instead of a land
boundary on its outer side. With such flat gradients, shallow offshore
waters, and consequent weak wave action, the shiftings of the shoreline
will be more largely controlled by crustal movement and river-building
than by marine action, and the horizontal movements of the strand
through each succeeding stage will be at a maximum,
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 39]
Under present physiographic attitudes of high continental relief the
marine, lacustrine, and fluviatile phases are abnormally sharpened.
Under the physiographic states of low relief, which have been more usual
through geologic time, this sharpness of separation is seen to have been
absent. This blending together of unlike parts in connection with a
tendency to interpret sedimentary formations as marine or lacustrine has
permitted an unjustified assignment of certain delta deposits to other
modes of origin, with the result that the idea of delta formations is
almost absent from the interpretation of the stratigraphic record, In
approaching the subject of the criteria of ancient delta deposits, it is
therefore to be held in mind that the several parts of a delta may vary
in importance; they may vanish, or they may become blended into each
other and lose their individuality. Nevertheless, the distinction of parts
in the ideal delta is a necessary analytical step and serves as a basis for
discussing the application of criteria.
At the beginning of this section a delta was defined as a formation
built by rivers against a permanent body of water and maintained partly
as a land surface. The discussion has served to show the great variety
of conditions under which this may take place and the non-essential
character of certain features which have been regarded not uncommonly
as essential marks of deltas. This is especially true of the foreset beds,
which assume great dominance and marked steepness in the case of small
deltas built by torrential streams into deep lakes. From Gilbert’s classic
studies of deltas of this type* and the common occurrence of similar dis-
sected deltas connected with Pleistocene glaciation, this particular variety
of delta has become commonly accepted as the standard type, and the
specific criteria by which it is identified have been unwarrantably broad-
ened into generic value.
NEGATIVE VALUE OF OVERLAP
Preliminary statement.—The successive strata of a formation if pre-
served to their original limits will be found to have different horizontal
extents. The higher beds may overlap farther toward the regions of
erosion than the lower, or they may be more restricted; or, turning to
the opposite direction, they may extend to greater distances from the
source of material. Grabau has discussed these three types under the
titles of marine transgressive, marine regressive, and non-marine fluvia-
tile progressive overlap. Certain exceptional cases he further classifies
* The topographic features of lake shores. 5th Ann. Rept., U. S. Geol. Sury., 1885,
pp. 104-108.
8392. J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSI‘'S
as irregular overlap.* ‘The discussion in that paper develops the princi-
ples that during the advance of the sea in any cycle of inundation a
similar lithologic facies marks the relation of the sea to the shore, and
in the case of transgressive overlap the facies farther inland represents a
higher geologic horizon. On a retreat of the sea such a shore facies will
also retreat while still ascending in the time scale. In the building out-
ward of a river fan, Grabau points out that the upper beds extend beyond
the lower and their outer parts rest in turn on the underlying formation.
These principles are used, however, not only in discussing the discordance
between the lthologic facies and the chronologic succession and in sepa-
rating the several types of overlap, but as definite criteria for distin-
guishing marine from terrestrial formations. It is this question of the
positive or negative value of overlap, not as general principles of rela-
tion, but as definite criteria for separating marine and fluviatile deposits,
_ which it is desired here to discuss.
Transgressive overlap.—tlt is held in the present paper that transgres-
sive overlap is most commonly marine, but may also be fluviatile and
may arise from several causes: first, progress in the normal erosion cycle,
especially through the stages of youth and maturity; second, subsidence
of the whole region, producing a rise of the ultimate baselevel; third,
relative subsidence of the fields of erosion, producing a landward aggra-
dation by rivers, even if there is no invasion by the sea; fourth, a climatic
change of such a nature as to steepen the grades of the upper parts of
the rivers. A brief discussion of each of these causes is needed, and the
citation of examples will make the conclusion more evident.
In the progress of the erosion cycle the waves plane inland to a greater
or less extent, save where dammed out by the sediment of powerful
rivers, They are eroding and only incidentally depositing agents: If
rivers are able to build deltas outward, however, against the sea the in-
land parts of the delta must also build upward and backward. As the
river grade grows flatter and lower with advanced maturity, however, this
process is limited and finally comes to an end. With stationary sealeyel.
therefore, transgressive overlap is unimportant and exceptional, but may
be either marine or fluviatile.
A rising sealevel may be due either to marine sedimentation or to
crustal changes, lowering the land or raising the sea bottom. The first
is a Slow and world-wide effect, accompanying the progress of the erosion
cycle during a period of quiet. The second is usually more rapid and
regional. In either case there will be transgressive overlap. The first
commonly but not necessarily results in marine overlap.
‘Types of sedimentary overlap, Bull, Geol. Soc, America, vol, 17, 1906, p, 569,
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 393
Where rivers flowing from high or broad lands are more than able to
keep pace with the rising sea and build up their deltas, there will result
the construction of continental deposits on the margins of the lands,
illustrated by the transgressive overlapping of the fresh-water Potomac
formations onto the crystalline floor of the Piedmont plain. Even local
and profound subsidence of a geosyncline may not be able to admit the
sea, provided the sediment is sufficiently abundant, as seen during the
Tertiary history of the Indo-Gangetic plain. Here more than 15,000
feet of fresh-water sediments accumulated and are now exposed through
becoming involved in the Himalayan mountain movements.
In the great majority of cases, however, subsidence of the land has
resulted in marine inundations and marine transgressive overlap, the
waves working directly against the land. This was favored when the
lands were low or small in area and the rivers consequently were unable
to dam back the rising sea. Such sediment as they have supplied, sup-
plemented by that from marine denudation, has been distributed by
waves and currents in the form of marine deposits.
The results of local changes in baselevel are seen in interior basins,
where the upper beds extend farther toward the mountains. Among
older deposits which have become generally accepted as continental in
origin may be cited the Newark formations of New Jersey. Kimmel
has shown that the basal formation, the Stockton, does not reach north
to the limits of the basin, and he regards the coarse northern beds as
belonging probably entirely to the uppermost or Brunswick formation,
which in the more southern parts is normally a red shale.®
River grades are sensitive indicators of crustal or climatic movements.
Any change which causes that part of the river bed between the head-
waters and the mouth to fall below grade will cause the building of
river deposits which will give the appearance of transgressive overlap.
Any change which causes that part to be above grade will result in a
shifting downstream of the deposits and give rise to regressive overlap.
Illustrations are seen in the alternate filling and cutting during the
Pleistocene of rivers flowing across Piedmont slopes. ‘T'ransgressive or
regressive overlap toward the source of supply consequently can not be
used in itself as a criterion of either the marine or continental origin of
deposits. The nature of these must be determined by other criteria, and
then the nature of the overlap takes on great significance in regard to |
the conditions which supplied the waste.
Overlap away from the source of supply—Overlap away from the
source of supply, which Grabau regards as establishing the fluviatile ori-
5 Annual Report of the State Geologist of New Jersey, 1898, p. 48.
XXIX—BULL. Grou. Soc. AM., Von, 23, 1911
394. J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
gin of the strata beyond contravention,® occurs where a certain facies—
for example, the Catskill facies of the Upper Devonian—advances pro-
gressively farther from the direction of supply, the higher beds gradually
displacing the Chemung facies from New York and central Pennsyl-
vania. But the Catskill facies began in fact in the Oneonta formation,
and in the upper part of this it can not be said that overlap away from
the source of supply was exhibited. The Oneonta is separated from the
overlying Catskill by a landward retreat of the non-marine beds, an
accompanying incursion of the marine beds, the basal Chemung. Sub-
sidence for a time gained on sedimentation, and the direction of overlap
is seen to be due to the relative dominance of opposing factors. These
must be more fully discussed under the topic of the delta cycle.
Mud and sand may be worked by waves and currents to indefinite dis-
tances from shore, the only condition being that the bottom must be
sufficiently shallow to be affected by waves. In the case of epicontinental
_ seas this is commonly true for much of or even the whole area. Mud
settles from suspension for some distance, also, beyond these limits, and
at the present time gives rise to the blue muds which mantle the slopes of
the ocean basins to distances of from 100° to 200 miles beyond the limits
of the wave-worked bottom.
In the Arabian Sea such muds in fact are carried from 700 to 800
miles from land, owing to the character of the ocean currents. Further,
it has been noted that in the direction of the prevailing winds desert
dust is carried from the Sahara and from Australia for hundreds of
miles from land and to such an extent as to visibly affect the air and the
color of the water. Applying these observations to the past, it is seen
that where uplift of an old land takes place without a shallowing of the
sea, marine sands and clays will be spread over areas where previously
there was a development of limestones. ‘This does not carry any impli-
cation in regard to a movement of the shoreline and, provided the water
is fairly deep and the waste is fine, deltas may not be built seaward in
marked degree. If the sea was originally so deep that its bottom was
but little affected by waves, the shallowing of the sea by uplift or sedi-
mentation may cause a progressive advance of marine clastic sediments
away from the source of supply. This is to be noted, for example, in the
Upper Ordovician, where the deposition of argillaceous sediment grad-
ually displaced that of limestone toward the west.‘ Grabau cites the
Pottsville of the Appalachians as a group of formations whose conti-
°Op. cit.; p. 636.
7H. O. Ulrich: Revision of the Paleozoic systems. Bull, Geol. Soc. America, vol, 22,
1911, p. 296.
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 395
nental origin as a whole he regards as demonstrated from the fact that
the higher formations overlap northwestward.* But that this is not
proved is indicated by the existence of a brachiopod fauna in the Middle
Pottsville (Horsepen) as far north as Sewell, on New River, and less
conclusively by the occurrence of Naiadites and Spirorbis in the Lower
Lykens group of the Anthracite region.? David White also reports other
localities and horizons which contain marine invertebrates. ‘The present
writer holds that the beds of coal and the heavy conglomerate horizons
are clearly continental, and this implies that some part of the remainder
is also fluviatile. In the north and east this is thought to apply to prac-
tically the whole of the formation; but the marine faunas, more abun-
dant in the south and west, prove at least a considerable proportion of
marine beds in that region. The great thicknesses which the Pottsville
attains in the southern Appalachians, from 2,000 to 6,000 feet, clearly
indicates that the level of the upper surface was as much controlled by
subsidence, which tended repeatedly to bring in the sea, as by river up-
building, tending to raise the surface above sealevel.
From these examples it is seen that overlap away from the source of
supply can not be used as a criterion of continental or marine origin any
more than transgressive or regressive overlap, but may be due to regional
subsidence or tilting or a climatic change which shifts clastic material
of a certain kind progressively farther from the source of supply.?°
THE DELTA CYCLE AND ITS USE AS A GRITERION OF ORIGIN :
Comparison of the erosional and depositional theories —Previous to
the recognition of the principle of baseleveling and the key which it
offered to the erosional history of the lands, the processes of river erosion
as elaborated in geologic texts were essentially detailed descriptions,
unrelated to a law which should connect the sequential stages into a
cycle of erosion. The recognition of that principle has raised the subject
from the descriptive and qualitative to the quantitative and predictive
plane and permits the erosion history to be read in terms of time and
crustal movement, modified by the factors of climate and rock structure.
But a graded river consists ideally of three parts: its upper waters are
erosive agents, its middle waters are fully engaged in transportation of
the rock detritus, and its lower waters deposit part of the burden before
8 Types of sedimentary overlap, pp. 634, 636.
®David White: Deposition of the Appalachian Pottsville. Bull Geol. Soc. America,
vol. 15, 1904, pp. 277, 280.
. The relations of climate to overlap have been more fully discussed by the writer in
another paper, “The relations between climate and terrestrial deposits,” part III. Jour-
hal of Geology, vol. xvi, 1908, pp. 363-384.
396 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
the river merges into the sea. The whole is epitomized in the waste-
laden waters which converge into the mountain gorge and then, escap-
ing and diverging, deposit a part of their burden on the alluvial fan.
The recognition of the erosion cycle and the separate processes of valley
deepening and valley widening has stimulated wonderfully the science
of physiography, but it is to be noted that no corresponding deposition
cycle has been elaborated to a similar degree to connect the successive
stages in the work of the lower parts of the river, the descriptions of
deltas being still essentially in the state in which they were left by
Charles Lyell.
mel Subaérial topset beds SSS Foreset beds -
feu Subaqueous topset beds Bottomset beds
Vertical scale magnified several hundred times
FIGURE 38.—Diagrams showing Stages in the Delta Cycle of a large River during a
Period of stationary Crust
In studying the surface of the land the need for the formulation of a
delta cycle has not been felt, since the successive stages are concealed by
burial, but for the interpretation of the sedimentary record it becomes of
considerable importance. As a preliminary step for the evaluation of
the criteria of ancient delta deposits it is desirable, therefore, to formu-
late such a deposition cycle in reversed terms to the erosion cycle of tha
upper waters,
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 397
The river is assumed to begin its work on a tilted continental surface,
which slopes gently beneath the sealevel and gives a wide area of shallow
bottom. This is an initial attitude, which has resulted frequently from
periodic diastrophism through geologic time, and the majority of forma-
tions open to observation have been deposited near the shores or on the
bottoms of interior shallow seas, where waves and currents were conse-
quently less effective than on the outer slopes of the continent. ‘The
delta cycle may then be divided into two phases: first, the normal cycle
dependent on deposition with a stationary crust, and, second, the modifi-
cation imposed by vertical movement of the bottom—normally subsidence,
abnormally elevation. The subject of the relations of deltas to sedimen-
tation has been previously discussed by the writer,"t so that a condensed
formulation will here suffice, bringing out more particularly the principle
of the cycle.
Delta cycle with stationary crust (see figure 3).—In the stage of vouth
before the drainage system has become well developed the detritus de-
livered at the river mouth is somewhat smaller in amount but coarser in
texture. The subaqueous wave-cut profile is also undeveloped, the bot-
tom still inheriting its original slope. If this initial slope is gentler than
the subaqueous profile of equilibrium” the waves have at first less power
of erosion at the coast line. If the initial slope is steeper they will pos-
sess an initially greater power. Assuming, however, that the river is
dominant over the sea, the delta is rapidly built outward, and on account
of the coarse waste, the steeper river grades, and shallow bottom near
shore, the initial proportion of subaerial topset beds is relatively high.
During maturity the quantity of waste is larger, as all parts of the
drainage system now supply sediment, but as the river is graded and its
gradient is also flattened the waste is finer in texture. The delta is
extended outward and the greater deposit is on the outer portions. Tt
grows inland also for a time, but owing to the flattening grade the beds
in this direction show decreasing thickness. The maximum rate of out-
ward growth is reached early because of the increasing surface area, which
requires a greater volume of sediment to give a unit thickness, and the
increasing depth of the water, which involves a continually deeper fill.
Furthermore, the increasing shoreline and greater exposure to the waves
increase the power of the latter to carry away the waste, which with the
progress of the cycle becomes finer in texture and more readily removed
1 Relative geological importance of continental, littoral, and marine sedimentation.
Journal of Geology, vol. xiv, 1906, pp. 336-354.
@N. M. Fenneman: Development of the profile of equilibrium of the subaqueous shore
terrace. Journal of Geology, vol. x, 1902, pp. 1-32,
398 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
by the sea. But although the rate of advance falls off, the outward
growth will continue during the progress of maturity in the cycle of
erosion and deposition. In old age, however, on account of the ever
slackening supply of waste and the larger proportion carried in suspen-
sion and solution, the sea at last gains the mastery and begins to plane
inland across the low-lying and unconsolidated materials projecting into
the sea. Rapid headway is finally made against the weakened river; the
territory conquered by the river in its youth is reclaimed and the sea at
last will beat once more against the margin of the old land. Thus far
the assumption which has underlain the discussion is that a constant sea-
level has prevailed. But in so far as the initial land uplift was far ex-
tended there will follow a resultant simultaneous erosion of the land and
filling of the sea by river waste from many lands. During the progress
of the cycle there will result therefore from erosion of the lands, even
with a stationary crust, an appreciable rising of the sea, as pointed out
by Suess and Chamberlin. This conclusion from deduction is in accord
with the observations in regard to the characteristic transgressive over-
lapping of marine formations laid down during a period of crustal quiet.
Because of the ratio of land to sea the elevation of-the sealevel may
amount to about one-third of the lowering of the average land level.
The elevation of sealevel without diastrophic cause may therefore readily
be an amount greater than the depth of wave base. Consequently such a
condition should be added to the discussion of the delta cycle with sta-
tionary crust. This is illustrated in the figure, where it is seen that not-
withstanding the final destruction of the upper beds of the delta by ma-
rine planation a certain amount of subaerial beds may be preserved
below the wave base. From the factors which control delta growth and
the nature of that growth as a warfare between the rivers and the sea, it
is seen that in periods of quiet and low-land relief deltas might nearly
disappear from the physiography of the earth. At other times, when the
relief of the continents, especially through mountain-making move-
ments, was greatly increased and erosion quickened without elevation of
ihe negative elements of the continent, the building of deltas may have
risen to a dominant mode of sedimentation rivaling in volume the ma-
rine deposits. Such physiographic conditions characterized especially the
Upper Devonian and later periods of the Paleozoic. They are found
in connection with the late Cretaceous movements of western North
America. In Eurasia they became pronounced in the Oligocene and early
Miocene, when mountain-making prevailed and the great regional up-
lifts of the Neocene had not yet begun. The application of the principle
of the delta cycle brings into truer perspective many fresh-water deposits
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 399
of those geologic periods with their marine intercalations and offshore
equivalents.
Result of a movement of subsidence-—Movements of subsidence, per-
haps attended farther inland by elevation, rather commonly, however,
rejuvenate the delta cycle before it has passed beyond the stage of ma-
turity, causing new beds to be built on top of the old and burying the
older part below the reach of surface agencies. Where the delta surface
is very large and the movements of subsidence are intermittent but pro-
gressive, each downward movement will bring in the sea, each pause will
witness it crowded back. The result on the whole will be an upbuilding
rather than an outbuilding of the delta. Figure 4 shows in such a case
how dominant the topset beds become, constituting the greater part of
the delta volume, whereas in outward growth with stationary water level
the foreset beds because of their steeper slope are volumetricall y of more
importance, sharply distinguishing the two modes of delta-building.
The great depth of fresh-water beds and old soils in the greater deltas
Foreset beds
| Subaqueous topset beds Bottomset beds
Vertical scale magnified several hundred times
FicurE 4.—Relations between Mode of Delta-building and Subsidence
First stage.—Delta built out into water of constant level; basin deeper than wave
base. Nosubsidence. Dominance of foreset beds. Increasing importance of topset beds,
shallowing of basin, and decreasing importance of foreset beds.
Second stage.—Intermittent subsidence balanced by deposition. Delta built upward,
not outward. Dominance of topset beds.
Third stage.—Subsidence at a faster rate, maintaining a larger ratio of subaqueous
topset beds.
of the present period, extending in many cases hundreds of feet below
sealevel, shows that this is a common feature of delta growth. It is
natural, furthermore, that such should be the case, since the great rivers
tend to drain toward subsiding areas and their sediment promotes fur-
ther subsidence. It is a mode of delta growth which is wholly lacking
Where small deltas are built into lakes of stationary level. This feature
of the larger modern deltas indicates how the great depth of certain
fresh-water deposits of the older geological periods may be interpreted as
delta formations, shading off into the contemporary marine deposits of
epicontinental seas,
400 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
Observation of river valleys and shorelines shows that crust movements
are relatively rapid between longer epochs of quiet. Stages in subsidence
will therefore result in wide and geologically rapid transgressions by the
sea over the subaerial delta plain. But such individual downward move-
ments are commonly small in amount, so that the volume of sea water on
the delta surface is correspondingly small and is soon excluded by the
readvance of the subaerial plain of the delta. The effect of individual
movements of subsidence is therefore to greatly extend for a short time
the subaqueous portion of the topset plain and result in an extremely
unstable shoreline. From this argument it follows that evidences of
either marine or continental origin of a certain stratum carry but little
implication in regard to the origin of inferior or superior portions of
the formation. This is illustrated by the Illinois coal measures, where
limestones holding abundant marine fossils are found repeatedly and
closely to overlie coal beds. Furthermore, a definite criterion of origin,
such as roots or mud cracks, if scattered vertically through a whole for-
mation, is seen to be much more significant of the dominant mode of
origin than is a unique stratum which nevertheless may be rich in eyi-
dence. ,
In order to bring the idea of the delta cycle to a workable agreement
with nature there must be considered the presence also of uplifts in the
crustal movements. Field investigations of the past decade have been
giving a continually larger place to disconformities, stages of lost record,
The Paleozoic seas were shifting water bodies and many times receded
from the land. Detailed work on the Mesozoic of the coastal plain shows
breaks representing long time intervals which separate the several late
Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous fresh-water formations. The Pleistocene
crustal oscillations also involved repeated reversals of the dominant trend
in the movement. |
Applying the idea of upward phases in downward crustal movements
to the problem of delta growth, it is seen that in the case of a delta with
distinctive foreset and topset beds a slight upward movement should re-
sult in a disconformity over the inland portion of the delta. The erosion
plane may vanish to seaward, giving place to land beds overlying parts
of the former subaqueous plain. A slightly greater movement, however,
will carry the disconformity to the foreset edge. In either case a great
increase in the volume of the marine foreset beds for a certain stage
marks the uplift of the delta and corresponds with the erosion and lost
record on its topset plain. If, as seems to have been a rather common
condition, the epicontinental sea was so shallow as to prevent the forma-
tion of a distinct foreset slope, then the slight regional uplift would
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS A401
merely shift the topset beds farther seaward and, owing to the rapid
movement of unconsolidated material, produce possibly a lens of terres-
trial deposit when previously the sedimentation of that zone had been
wholly marine. Oscillation, therefore, will shift the zone of maximum
deposition back and forth. Slow subsidence favors great depths and
volume of topset beds, a considerable percentage of which is, however,
marine, although the absolute amount of terrestrial deposits is at the
same time greatly increased. Small uplifts favor great volumes of fore-
set beds and tend to shift farther seaward the zone of terrestrial sedi-
mentation.
Imperfect application to present conditions—KHffects of recent crustal
movements.—A crustal uplift which interrupts an erosion cycle and
initiates a new baselevel brings about a destruction of the former base-
level forms, but only in a time interval comparable to that which devel-
oped them. A long cycle, for example, reduces hard rocks to a peneplain,
remnants of which persist for another long period of time. This per-
sistence of topographic forms permits the study of the physiographic
history of the upper parts of the river systems backward through several
erosion cycles of increasing time. intervals. It is not true to the same
degree with delta growth. Such structures are built against the sea and
feel immediately the effects of crust movements. They consist of uncon-
solidated materials and rapidly suffer from erosion or burial under
changed conditions due to crust movements. The subcycles which inter-
rupt the orderly progress of surface processes are thus peculiarly magni-
fied in the case of deltas and the sequence of successive stages can best
be studied in the upturned and partly eroded older formations rather
than in the delta which still lies beneath our feet.
At the present time, as a result of the great Pleistocene uplifts, fol-
lowed by the Recent oscillations and partial subsidence which mark the
later Cenozoic as a period of world-wide crustal unrest, the rivers are out
of adjustment with the present sealevel. The streams are intrenched in
inner rock gorges, most piedmont alluvial slopes have become dissected,
river valleys have been turned into estuaries, lakes have arisen in in-
land basins, many deltas have been partly drowned, and, as seen espe-
cially around the shores of Asia, the rivers are just beginning to again
reclaim their subaerial plains from the last submergence. Certain ones,
however, like those of the Ganges, Indus, and Nile, have maintained their
fronts at the limits set by the deep water of the ocean. Since the early
Tertiary, furthermore, the interior shallow seas which in the earlier geo-
logical ages were the favored regions for delta growth have been very
largely excluded from the warped and uplifted continents, For all these
402 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
reasons the deltas of the present time are in a peculiarly disordered state.
Without the aid given by a deductive analysis of the delta cycle they
give but little clue to the place held in the scheme of sedimentation by
deltas during the earlier geologic ages.
Resulting overemphasis of estuarine conditions.—The impress of. re-
cent broad crustal disturbances on the present surface forms of the world
was not fully perceived until after the principle of baseleveling by fluvia-
tile erosion had become accepted. Then it was seen that though pene-
Jains in various degrees of preservation existed in many regions, they
were out of adjustment with the present baselevels and were being de-
stroyed instead of perfected by the newly initiated cycle of erosion. This
fact, which was at first used as an argument against the competence of —
streams to produce peneplains, was shown by Davis to be, on the contrary,
an evidence of recent profound crustal disturbances. Other evidences of
the present physiographic youth of the lands are seen in the existence
of basin lakes of non-glacial origin and in estuaries. It has become well
recognized that lakes are impermanent geological features, and that
fiuviatile deposition is a more normal mode of continental sedimentation
than is lacustrine. In the literature of paleontology and stratigraphy,
however, the estuarine idea still plays an unduly large part in the inter-
pretation of the past.
An estuary, according to the dictionaries, is an enlargement of a river
channel near its mouth, in which the movement of the tides is very
prominent. The principal existing estuaries—such, for example, as the
Saint Lawrence and the Thames—are all the result of recent coastal
subsidence and the drowning of the lower river valleys. The same move-
ment that resulted in the Gulf of Sait Lawrence has produced Long
Island Sound, Delaware, and Chesapeake bays; bodies of water which
show various degrees of salinity. They all bear the common marks of
being old river valleys trenched within uplands, and represent a reversal
from erosion to deposition so recent that the sediment carried in by the
rivers has not been sufficient to fill in the ancient valley. Tidal action
tends to keep open larger channels and maintain a greater depth of
water than waves alone could do, but tides do not account for the origin
of the present estuaries and will not prevent infilling with sediment. On
the contrary, the tides are effective agents in the restriction of broad
estuaries by building up tidal marshes. In the most striking example,
the Bay of Fundy, Lyell speaks of the rapid growth of tidal marshes
from the sediment precipitated on their surfaces at flood tide. In what.
were once smaller estuaries, as at the mouth of the Savannah River, with
a tidal range of 7 feet, the coast chart shows how the estuary has been
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 403
converted into salt marshes, drained by a network of tidal channels.
Thus the present complexities of the coasts broken by bays and estuaries
is a phenomenon as abnormal and geologically as temporary as the
warped and elevated peneplains which are beginning to be dissected.
They can not be safely used as illustrations for the interpretation of
ancient deposits, many of which were made during stages of crustal quiet
and low-land relief.
In most of the so-called estuarine deposits of earlier geologic periods
there is in reality no evidence of tides nor of deposition within sub-
merged valleys previously eroded by rivers. Where modified marine
faunas indicate brackish water conditions, the present knowledge of the
physiography of earlier periods would point more commonly to partially
isclated bodies of shallow water existing because of downwarps of the
land, similar to Hudson Bay and the Baltic Sea. In other cases, how-
ever, it is probable that depauperated marine faunas associated with
fresh-water material may represent that combination of lagoon and
fluviatile conditions which marks the flat outer portions of large deltas.
Such lakes, bays, and sounds are well developed on the margins of the
Mississippi delta. The shifting of river channels and the pouring in of
flood waters serve to change greatly and suddenly the salinity of such
restricted water bodies and must produce environments especially vari-
able and trying to their inhabitants.
It would seem from the discussion of the delta cycle and its relation
to diastrophism and sedimentation that the term “estuarine deposit” is
very poorly chosen, and as a term of broad application should be avoided.
It must be confessed, however, that there is no entirely satisfactory sub-
stitute, since the words lagoon, bay, sound, and sea are in the English
language without sharply defined meaning. The word bay properly used
is, however, the best of these terms. Bays are smaller and more inclosed
water bodies than seas. Shallow seas and bays are normal physiographic
features of those continental elements which lie near sealevel. Bay for-
mations may therefore be Jaid down in irregular invasions by the sea
over a land of no relief or in the partially inclosed water bodies which
result from delta-building, an invasion by the land against the shallow
sea.
Modern illustrations of ancient interior deltas.—During the Paleozoic
the rivers commonly flowed into wide and shallow interior seas. The
latter no longer exist save in such restricted examples as the Baltic and
Hudson Bay, and into these no large rivers pour abundant waste. But
the recently submerged margins of certain deltas, or other conditions
inaugurating broad shallow waters, do bring about locally and tem-
404 J. BARRELL
RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
porarily these common ancient conditions. The Hoang Ho, now push-
ing out rapidly into the Gulf of Pe-Che-Lee, faces a water body less than
40 meters deep. The Terek, loaded with waste from the Caucasus, is
building into the Caspian in waters less than 20 meters deep. The
Jaxartes and the Oxus are rapidly filling the Aral Sea, a shallow rem-
nant of the recently large interior Eurasian Sea. In all of these the
shore face is 5 meters or even less in depth, and a highly irregular shore
line testifies to the dominance of the river over the weakened wave
action. In the more protected parts of the shoreline the water shallows
without a definite boundary, but there is an absence of lagoons behind
barrier beaches.
Another excellent example which illustrates conditions of waste-bear-
ing rivers pouring into very shallow waters is seen within the central
Andes, in Lake Titicaca, for details concerning which the writer has had
the advantage of personal discussion with Prof. Isaiah Bowman.* This
body of water is 100 miles long by 30 broad and in the central part
ranges from 350 to 900 feet in depth.+ But at the two ends of the lake
are broad areas averaging from 15 to 30 feet in depth. The Bay of Puno
at one end and Lago Pequeno at the other are so nearly isolated that the
maintenance of such shallow water in them can not be ascribed to wave
action from the open lake, especially as rivers bearing a moderate amount
of alluvium flow into these bays. The striking feature about the shore
of Titicaca is the meagerness of shore erosion in general and its com-
plete absence on much of the shores which face these broad shallow
waters. Here, where the old alluvial plains slope under water, a belt of
clear quiet water is succeeded at a depth of several feet by a broad thick
belt of water grasses, within which, during the seasons when the land
pasturage is scant, the cattle revel like amphibious creatures.
The grasses grow only on shallows which are permanently covered by
water and protected from heavy wave action. On the northwest shore
they are found facing the open lake only where protected by the shallow
water of the drowned delta plain of the Suchis River. Thus from the
evidence of Titicaca it is seen that facing shallow bottoms subaqueous
vegetation, at least in fresh waters, may effectively hold river muds from
attack by waves.
Even where water grass does not protect the shore the waves, where
the adjacent bottom consists of broad shallows, show but little power of
erosion, for the road along which the prehistoric builders of Tiahuanaco
* See a forthcoming paper by him on Lake Titicaca and the ruins of Tiahuanaco.
+ For map see Geographical Journal, vol. 37, 1910, map on p. 512. See text on pp.
398-404.
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 405
carried the stone for their buildings at a date estimated at thousands of
years ago (placed by Professor Bowman at probably 5,000 to 6,000
years) is still in existence, though in skirting around the south shore it
obviously kept close to the water.
An excellent example of a delta which has been -built into shallow
water of constant level is that of the Saint Clair River.f Lake Saint
Clair has a maximum depth of 22 feet, and except on the side of the
delta the water deepens within a mile of the smoothly curved shore to
2 fathoms, the mark of the local wave base. The delta is built of fine-
grained waste derived by wave action on the shores of Lake Huron and
current action on the banks of the Saint Clair River. Its front does not
show the crescentic reefs due to wave action. Shoal water of less than
1 fathom in depth extends outward from 2 to 4 miles from the main
area and from 1 to 2 miles beyond the mouths of the distributaries. The
lagoons thus arise from inclosure between growing distributaries rather
than behind a shore barrier. Thefe is less water completely shut off,
however, than in the case of strong wave action. From the margin of
the shallow water the front slopes rapidly to 2 fathoms, the normal
depth of the lake. :
This forms a good measure 7 the limits of shoal water between the
land and the shore face in a delta built under conditions which make
this transition zone a maximum, since here the waste is fine, is not floc-
culated by salt water, and the wave action is weak.
These marginal conditions of deltas built into shallow waters with
weak wave action may be contrasted with those described for the Nile,
the Mississippi, and other large deltas built out against the oceans. In
earlier ages at stages of stationary crust and constant water level the
deltas of interior es would build out until shallow protected waters
would disappear and they would invade a region of constantly stronger
wave action. ‘The sea would more and more tend to limit their growth.
Such a stage is now seen in the deltas facing the North Sea. Following
a movement of subsidence the contrary phase would occur; shallow
_ waters would pass far inland and the delta conditions would come for
the time to resemble those of the Yellow, Aral, and Caspian seas. hus
there would be expected a cyclic oscillation in the character of the delta
front.
The late Mesozoic delta cycle of the Atlantic Coastal Plain.—The de-
termination of the conditions of origin of a particular formation or part
of a formation depends in the first place on the study of the strata and
the application to them of detailed criteria; but after this is done the
$l. J. Cole: The ‘delta of the Saint Clair River, Geol. Surv, Mich., vol. ix, pt. I,
1903,
406 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
conclusion as to the larger relations and the decision as to an estuarine,
delta, lacustrine, or other mode of origin should be tested further by
another set of criteria derived by comparing the broader relations of
sedimentation under those different conditions. The previous discussion
has pointed to the large place which delta formatious should occupy
under conditions which have not uncommonly occurred through geologic
history, and it is to be concluded that in statements as to mode of origin
conditions of lacustrine and estuarine deposition have been too freely
invoked. and without adequate proof. On the other hand, fluviatile depo-
sition on deltas or in basins has not received proper recognition, qualify-
ing this statement, however, with the corollary that the shallow pans of
more or less permanent water on floodplains give minor lacustrine phases
connected with fluviatile aggradation.
The principle of the delta cycle may, accordingly, be used as one eri-
terion of the mode of origin, and, as an illustration, it will be applied to
the late-Mesozoic deposits of the Atlantic Coastal Plain. It will be seen
to bring forth different conclusions from those stated in the publications
regarding these formations. It is possible to discuss the problem of
origin only because of the excellent and authoritative stratigraphic work
done in recent years by Darton, Clark, Kiimmel, Shattuck, Miller, Bib-
bins, and others. Their field work is here wholly accepted and the dis-
cussion turns merely on the interpretation as to origin.
Sedimentation began near the close of the Jurassic* as a result of a
crust tilting, which brought the old crystalline floor somewhat below
baselevel. Repeated movements of partial uplift alternated with con-
tinued depression, so that the formations are separated by unconformities
which may represent longer intervals of time than the deposition of the
sediments. The conditions of sedimentation remained much alike, how-
ever, through late Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous time and resulted in
the formation of the Potomac group, which recent studies have separated
into four formations—the Patuxent, Arundel, Patapsco, and Raritan.
These and the succeeding deposits are well described in the Patuxent and
Philadelphia folios, so that a full description may be omitted from the
present paper. There is preserved throughout the group a diversified
land flora. Less abundant remains of a land fauna are present, but
no marine fauna. Above the Potomac group occurs the Magothy forma-
tion. It is characterized by the occurrence in places of a marine fauna,
as in the vicinity of Raritan Bay, New Jersey, but no marine fossils have
been observed to the southward, extending from Burlington County,
New Jersey, into Maryland. The Magothy contains also, however, a
* By some geologists regarded as earliest Comanche,
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 407
land flora, and in its sedimentary character is transitional between the
fresh-water deposits below and the typical marine formations of the
Upper Cretaceous which overlie it. A summary statement of these
Mesozoic formations is repeated here from the columnar section of the
Patuxent folio.
UPPER CRETACEOUS
Monmouth forniation, 40 to 50 feet.
Reddish-brown and greenish-black sand, with many irregular iron
crusts.
Matawan formation, 45 to 50 feet.
Gray and black micaceous sandy clay carrying glauconite.
Unconfornuty
Magothy formation, 0 to 40 feet.
Thinly laminated sand and clay, with much lignite and occasional
_ferruginous sandstone.
Unconformity
LOWER CRETACEOUS
Raritan formation, 100 feet.
Variegated clay, sand, and gravel, with some lignite.
Unconformity
Patapsco formation, 100 feet.
Highly colored variegated clay interbedded with sand and gravel.
Unconformity
JURASSIC
Arundel formation, 0 to 125 feet.
_Drab, red, and black clay carrying lignite and iron ore.
Unconformity
Patuxent formation, 340 feet.
Light-colored, arkosic sands, with clay lenses and gravel bands
Unconformity
ARCHEAN
In regard to the interpretations given as to the conditions of sedimen-
tation the following statements are quoted from the Patuxent folio, pages
9 and 10, published in 1907:
408 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
“Potomac history.—The earliest of the known unconsolidated deposits lying
upon the floor of crystalline rocks belong to the Patuxent formation of the
Potomac group. . . . It indicates a submergence of the Coastal Plain in
this region of sufficient extent to cover the whole area with shallow water. The
cross-bedded sands and gravels furnish evidence of shifting currents, as do
also the abrupt changes in the character of the materials, both horizontally
and vertically. The presence of numerous land plants in the laminated clays
shows the proximity of the land.”
The Arundel formation was deposited within stream yalleys which had
become eroded into the Patuxent. The Patapsco and Raritan are, how-
ever, like the Patuxent, widely developed formations and were deposited
under similar conditions. These four formations constitute the Potomac
group.
“The widespread development of shallow-water deposits, everywhere cross-
bedded and extremely variable in lithologic character, and the presence through-
out these deposits of land plants furnish some evidence that the Potomac sedi-
mentation took place not in open ocean waters, but in brackish- or fresh-water
estuaries and marshes that were directly connected with the ocean, which may
have at times locally broken into the area. Some land barrier to the east of
the present shoreline probably existed and produced these conditions, but its
position and extent can not be determined.
“The period during which the Magothy deposits were formed was one of
transition from the estuarine or fresh-water conditions of Patapsco and
Raritan time to the marine conditions under which the Matawan, Monmouth,
and Rancocas were laid down. . . . The probability is that over most of
the area where Magothy deposits are now present Potomac conditions pre
vailed during the greater part of the period, and in some places perhaps during
the whole of it, but that occasionally, through the breaking down of the land
barriers which had kept out the ocean, there were incursions of sea water,
bringing in marine forms of life. Thus far there is no evidence that such
incursions took place anywhere except .in New Jersey.
“Later Cretaceous history.—Not until late Cretaceous time did a downward
movement occur of sufficient extent to permit the ocean waters to transgress
widely over this region. During the Matawan, Monmouth, and Rancocas
epochs probably all of the quadrangle was depressed beneath the ocean waters.”
From these statements it is seen that an estuarine origin is invoked as
far as possible, though marsh conditions are granted for the Arundel
formation, which was discontinuous in its original development and de-
posited apparently in river valleys cut through the older deposits, That
the estuarine interpretation for these formations is dominant in geologic
thought is illustrated also by quotations from the Philadelphia (Pennsyl-
vania, New Jersey, Delaware) folio, page 18, under date of 1909. Here
the possibility of marsh conditions is not noted, and it is merely stated
that
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 409
“toward the close of Jurassic time and at the opening of the succeeding
period—the Cretaceous—estuarine conditions are known to have prevailed.
About the middle of Cretaceous time the barrier between the Dela-
ware estuary and the sea disappeared and the Paleozoic crystallines bearing a
cover of early Cretaceous deposits were submerged beneath the Atlantic.”
In the statements as.to the mode of origin of these formations there
has thus far been no pro and con discussion as to the possibility of a
terrestrial and fluviatile as opposed to an estuarine and subaqueous ori-
gin. Rather the assumption of earlier times as to the accumulation of
all sediment in bodies of standing water has been carried forward to the
present. That of lacustrine origin has apparently been ruled out by the
gradation which occurs in the Upper Cretaceous from fresh water into
truly marine formations. The assumed existence of a land barrier lying
to the east of the present Coastal Plain rests merely on the initial hy-
pothesis of an estuary from which the sea must be barred save at the
mouth.
As defined in standard works on the English language, an estuary is
that part of the mouth or lower course of a river flowing into the sea
which is subject to tides, and as argued in a previous section is the result
of a recent marginal subsidence affecting lands of considerable relief.
The late Mesozoic deposits of the Atlantic coast in contrast to these con-
ditions began to be deposited on a fairly developed peneplain. The
formations outcrop parallel to the Appalachian system from Massachu-
setts to the Mississippi Valley and are thicker toward the sea, giving no
hint of a barrier to the southeast, but indicating rather that subsidence
of the coast was accompanied by upwarp of the interior. These for-
mations, furthermore, according to all observers, give evidence of shallow
_waters, with an absence of marine faunas through late Jurassic and
Lower Cretaceous time. They were deposited therefore not in drowned
valleys radiating away from the mountains, but as a marginal fringe,
where the old land was depressed below baselevel. There is none of the
physiographic setting of estuarine conditions. On the contrary, terres-
trial and fluviatile deposition is suggested by the following features:
The individual strata are markedly discontinuous, beds and lenses of clay
and gravel occurring in sandstone and vice versa. Highly variegated
clays are abundant, in which the state of the, iron oxide varies from
stratum to stratum and laterally through the same stratum, indicating
varying facilities for oxidation, both vertically and laterally. Segrega-
tions of iron ore are abundant at many horizons, and the writer has noted
the patterns of shrinkage cracks in certain of. the plates of ore. The
abundant leaf impression, the lignitized and silicified wood, and the ap-
XXX—BULL. GOL, Soc. AM., Vou, 28, 1911
410 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
parent absence of marine, brackish water, or even lacustrine faunas from
nearly the whole group show deposition in the vicinity of plant growth
and the presumed absence of permanent water bodies, In the Arundel
formation gypsum has been found. ‘The bones of dinosaurs, turtles, and
crocodiles are fairly abundant, and occasionally large stumps are discov-
ered standing in the position in which they grew. Asvending through
the formations, however, the suggestions of fluviatile and terrestrial
sedimentation weaken in the Raritan, where logs of lignitized conifers
exhibiting teredo borings have occasionally been found, and in the over-
lying Magothy, as previously noted, the first clearly marine fauna occurs.
The value of these stratigraphic characters as criteria of fluviatile depo-
sition is discussed in the second part of this article, but they are men-
tioned here to show that the suggestions derived from the strata as well
as from the larger relations are those of a fluviatile rather than an
estuarine origin.
The review of these characters permits the application of the princi-
ples discussed under the delta cycle as an explanation which connects the
physiographic relations of the Appalachians and the Coastal Plain with
the sequence of the formations and the final passage into marine condi-
tions, A new interpretation may then be given as follows: At the begin-
ning of sedimentation broad interior uplift was more pronounced than
subsidence of the Coastal Plain. This resulted in a dominance of sedi-
mentation over marine transgression and a maintenance of the coast line
beyond the present limits of observation. ‘The rivers were spaced at
sufficiently short distances, so that the deltas were confluent as a flat
Piedmont Coastal Plain, probably with a highly irregular and shifting
shoreline; but the entire absence of marine incursions between the larger
delta units or across their upper surfaces and the recurrence of uncon-
formities suggest that what is now exposed was the landward side of a
great alluvial plain and the shore was continually maintained farther
seaward. If it were possible to follow the evidence beneath the present
sea the unconformities might be found to pass into terrestrial beds of
equivalent time value and the intervening formations which make up the
Potomac group might be found to pass seaward into marine topset beds
between the terrestrial intercalations. If there were in reality an axis of
no subsidence on the southeast during the Mesozoic, where now is open
water, to serve as a barrier, the deposition took place in a basin rather
than an estuary and maintained the region as the alluvial plain of the
trunk river which flowed through it. But of such a barrier there is no
structural suggestion nor theoretic need.
During Cretaceous time subsidence became more marked than tilting,
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 411
as shown by the overlap of the Patapsco formation on the ancient rock
floor north of Philadelphia. Erosion was therefore weakening and the
sea was gaining more power. Consequently by the beginning of Upper
Cretaceous time the shoreline had advanced inland, oscillating over the
present limits of the Coastal Plain and laying down the Magothy forma-
tion. Then the sea, gaining headway, planed still farther inland and
gave rise to the marine formations of the Upper Cretaceous and Eocene.
These, if they could be restored to their original shoreward limits, might
possibly be found to contain at certain horizons restricted terrestrial
deposits. The marls, glauconitic sands and clays, and diatomaceous
earths suggest, however, that sedimentation became so slack that the sea
probably planed inland and closed completely the delta cycle. The oscil-
lations and subsidence shown by the stratigraphic record follow the
outline previously given for the theoretic delta cycle, but there is here
imposed as a further condition a tilting; uplift accentuating erosion in-
land, while toward the margin of the continent subsidence made more
room for deposition of terrestrial beds. This condition is a not uncom-
mon one in crust movements, tilting without regional subsidence acting
to prolong the life of the delta cycle. In this case it lasted through late
Jurassic and all of Lower Cretaceous time. |
If the interpretation here offered shall be found to be an advance on
previous conceptions it will justify to that degree the use of the theory
of the delta cycle as a criterion of interpretation.
CONTRAST OF MBSOZOIC AND PALNOZOIC DELTA CONDITIONS IN THE
: APPALACHIAN PROVINCE
During the Paleozoic the zone of uplift of the Appalachians, rejuve-
nated by successive movements, lay over the present Piedmont Plateau,
the Coastal Plain, and doubtless still farther east over a region now coy-
ered by the sea. The regional uplifts were doubtless varied in nature
but were several times of an orogenic character, mountain axes being
separated by such intermontane depressions as the Narragansett and New
Brunswick basins. To the west of this ancient land of Appalachia lay a
great axis of subsidence which, as a result of the transformations wrought
through geologic time, has since the Paleozoic, and especially in the
Cenozoic, assumed the position of maximum uplift. No evidence is
available as to the distance to which the land extended toward what is
now the open ocean, and the sediments swept from it in that direction
are lost to observation. The formations which are accessible are those
laid down to the west and represent that portion of the Appalachian
detritus which was swept inland, largely trapped within the adjacent
412 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
geosyncline, but spreading to some extent beyond it over the continental
interior. :
By the late Mesozoic the conditions had become reversed. The old
land of Appalachia now became a region of deposit, and a fraction of the
sediment was transferred back to it which ages before had been swept
westward from its uplands and mountain ranges. But not only were the
regions of erosion and sedimentation reversed; the physiographic condi-
tions were also different. In the late Mesozoic a gentle and limited sub-
sidence due to tilting of the continental margin permitted fluviatile out-
building, but the subaerial delta plain faced the powerful waves of a
deep and wide ocean. In the Paleozoic by contrast it was the sinking
bottom of the geosyncline which gave the rivers tasks of infilling which
they were usually unable to accomplish; but the action of the interior,
sea was relatively weak, for its waters were shallow, shifting, and at
times drained away by slight continental movements.
Thus in the late Mesozoic the outbuilding of the rivers was opposed
by powerful marine planation which at last gained the mastery. In the
Paleozoic they contested rather against a zone of downsinking which
crossed their paths. The character of the sedimentary formations of the
two eras was controlled by these different geologic conditions. In the
Mesozoic there developed a wide but thin mantle of detrital deposits, of
which a broad outer part must always have been marine. In the Paleo-
zoic the clastic sediments formed deposits more remarkable for great and
variable thickness than for width, and the proportion of marine beds was
determined by the varying rates of subsidence and erosion. The condi-
tions for river work during the Paleozoic were more highly variable and
gave rise to greater extremes than during the following era, When up-
lift of Appalachia and resulting erosion were the dominant features the
interior sea may have been largely or wholly displaced. At other times,
when Appalachia had been worn low and could not supply its rivers with
abundant land waste, slight regional subsidence brought the sea east-
ward over the geosyncline and against the eroded mountain base.
Where rivers maintain a land surface against a sea, delta conditions
are implied, In the case of the Upper Jurassic and Lower Cretaceous
deposits the landward margin of the subaerial beds has been ‘eroded and
the corresponding seaward or subaqueous beds are concealed to the south-
east. Erosion exposes at the present time only a certain belt of the
ancient deltas, and the conception of the whole has to be supplied by
deduction from the principles of sedimentation. In the case of the Ap-
palachian geosyncline the portions of the sediments which are preserved
instead of thinning out against the old land are seen to diminish in
LARGER RELATIONS OF DELTAS 413
thickness away from it—that is, the maximum thicknesses of the Paleo-
__ goic clastic formations are commonly seen in their easternmost outcrops
in the Great Valley—those outcrops nearest the old land from which the
sediments were deriyed. This means that they are now eroded from the
whole eastern part of the original geosyncline. Instead of restoring the
boundaries of the Paleozoic uplands at the present limit of the pre-Paleo-
zoic rocks, this zone of the Appalachian Mountains and the Piedmont
Plateau are to be looked on rather as the eastern side of the ancient
geosyncline and bordering a broad land farther to the east. At times this
intermediate belt was overflowed by the sea; at times it was subject to
folding, uplift, and erosion ; but at other times it was a Piedmont plain,
the seat of river aggradation. In the Paleozoic Appalachian geosyncline,
unlike the late Mesozoic coastal formations, it is the seaward and not the
landward half in which the section has been preserved. But exactly as
the late Mesozoic fluviatile deposits imply a seaward phase farther from
the land, so in the Paleozoic the dominantly marine character of thick
sand and mud formations deposited in shallow water imply the former
existence of the fluviatile beds of deltas on the landward side. At times
_ the delta conditions doubtless disappeared owing to low relief of the lands
and the widespread seas planing inland against its shores. At other
times the delta conditions disappeared because of the entire retreat of
the sea; but much of the time they were present, and in the Upper
Paleozoic, when clastic sedimentation became more dominant, the sub-
aerial beds éxtended into the western half of the geosyncline and their
outer portions are therefore still preserved, interfingering with marine
beds farther to the southwest.
For a complete conception of ancient einditions the imagination must
restore to a sedimentary system those parts which are destroyed as well
as those which are buried, and not invest them merely with the charac-
ters exhibited by the visible portion, but rather ascribe those characters
which would pertain to them as the several members of an organic whole.
The borders of the Appalachians have been used as an example of the
varying development of delta conditions. But other uplands bordered
by geosynclines or facing slightly submerged parts of the continental
platforms have supplied similar physiographic settings. To simply de-
termine in such regions some formations as fluviatile and others as ma-
rine does not complete the conceptions of the larger relations of each to
the other, which is em by the theory of the growth and retreat of
deltas.
When such a conception is attained, the mind may look back at the
completed geosyncline and view it as made of beds laid down on the one
414 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
side by the land and on the other by the sea, each advancing into the
other and dovetailing in intricate fashion, though one or the other may
much of the time be absent, and when present seldom of equal develop-
ment. Looking down through the depths of the solid rocks the surface
of separation is seen to be generated by the ascent of the strand-line
through the geologic ages, oscillating back and forth and often com-
pletely across the zone of sedimentation.
From the historic aspect the process of sedimentary infilling may be
viewed as the record of a contest between land and sea. The strand-line
separates the territory of the opposing forces—Poseidon, the god of the
ocean, warring against the earth-born Titans. For a time the field may
be held by each; the contest oscillates back and forth, recorded by delta
conditions, Then, owing to an advantage gained by the sea, the strand-
line may be pushed far inland and victory rests with Poseidon. But at
other times the strand is driven back to the margin of the continent, the
Titans in their turn are temporary victors, and the lord of ocean is com-
pelled to rule within his proper realm.
Part I].—EvALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA
COMPLEXITY OF THE PROBLEM
The strata of ancient deltas are now exposed for study as a consequence
of uplift and partial erosion, and the broader concepts in regard to their
original naturé are derived from a synthesis of the observations on indi-
vidual outcrops. Increase of knowledge rests on an accurate interpreta-
tion of the conditions of origin of the strata as seen in these outcrops.
But, as noted in the introduction, it is the strand-line which separates
the two widely contrasted zones of life, and the most fundamental use of
criteria is therefore to distinguish deposits accumulated on the land sur-
face, either by wind or water, from those originating under permanent -
bodies of water. As applied to deltas the initial problem is in conse-
quence to determine the distinctive stratigraphic characters of the sub-
aerial plain as contrasted to all the other parts of the delta, but espe-
cially to the rather closely related subaqueous portion of the topset plain.
In order to prevent undue reliance from being placed on indeterminate
criteria it is necessary to discuss the degree to which they may occur in
various situations and to find if possible in such cases minor distinctions
which may be of determinative value. In general it may be remarked
that considerable caution must be used in drawing distinctions between
water-made structures of the land and sea. Evidences of exposure to the
air, on the other hand, as shown by special structures or by fossils, are
inherently of higher value.
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 415
Beyond the initial problem of the separation of the subaerial from the
subaqueous portions, however, many subsidiary problems arise. ‘The very
complexity of chemical composition, of structure, and of fossil content
make possible by their variations and combinations a highly significant
geologic record. The stratigraphic characters of land deposits especially
bear the impress of climate and topography. ‘The subaqueous deposits
are related in their nature to life, depth of water, temperature, salinity,
tide, and currents. According to the quality of this evidence will rest
the conclusions as to the marine, estuarine, or lacustrine nature of the
deposition.
It is evident that many criteria are subject to gradations in nature and
in clearness of development,,and in the following discussion of strati-
graphic characters the method will be to pass from those of less to those
of greater determinative value.
ABSENCE OF FOSSILS
This is a purely negative criterion, which by itself is of little value in
distinguishing between subaqueous and fluviatile terrestrial deposits.
The absence of molluscan life over considerable tracts of shallow sea bot-
tom has been pointed out recently by Kindle.** Even if life of some sort
has existed there are processes of abrasion and solution which may de-
stroy all evidences of it on the shallow sea bottom as well as on the land.
Oxidizing decay and solution are normally more effective in land de-
posits, owing to the circulation of air and ground water; but mechanical
destruction, through movements of surface materials, is more broadly
effective on a wave-worked bottom. The limestone muds of coral beaches
show how effectively a mass which originally was entirely composed of
organic remains may.by abrasion, solution, and redeposition come to be
almost barren of fossils. As a result of these agencies, unfavorable to
life or destructive to its remains, sandstones of either continental or
marine origin are the formations most apt to be without fossils.
Examples of such sand deposits accepted as continental may be cited
in the Triassic sandstones of both east and west and the sandstone mem-
bers in the Tertiary of the Rocky Mountain region. Casts of tree trunks
or silicified wood may reward careful search and calcareous phases tend to
protect animal skeletons from solution. But considering the abundance
of the past life which was associated with the deposition and the enor-
mous dominance of unfossiliferous beds, it is seen how accidental is the
preservation of fossils. Of marine sandstones, barren examples may be
1%, M. Kindle: Cross-bedding and absence of fossils considered as criteria of conti-
nental deposits, American Journal of Science, vol, xxxii, 1911, pp. 225-230,
416 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
cited in the beds which commonly underlie the Cambro-Ordovician lime-
stones; also of many Upper Paleozoic sandstones, which because of asso-
ciation with fossiliferous beds and distance from the sources of erosion
imply a marine origin. |
In mudstones of continental origin absence of fossils is especially asso-
ciated with red beds, implying a completeness of oxidation and solution.
Carbonaceous shales of land origin if of post-Silurian date commonly
preserve some plant remains. In marine beds, however, carbonaceous
shales are not so favorable to the existence of fossils, apparently owing
to the absence of plants with fibro-vascular tissues and of stagnant bot-
tom conditions. Calcareous shales of continental origin are more apt to
be barren of fossils than marine shales of the same composition.
Skillful search and the accident of exposure have resulted, however, so
frequently in finding rare fossils or special kinds of fossils associated
with apparently barren formations that absence of fossils in connection
with the kind of beds should be used merely as a criterion suggestive
and not conclusive of the mode of origin.
COLOR OF SEDIMENTS AND THE RELATIVE INFLUENCE OF LOCATION AND~
CLIMATE THEREON
Sediment carried by rivers is subjected to oxidation both while in
transit and after deposition on the surface of the floodplain, until its
burial by overlying layers carries a stratum below the level of ground
water. Where the ground water level is coincident with or higher than
the surface, organic matter accumulates and deoxidizing processes take
place. A certain fraction of delta deposits, depending on the proportion
of back swamps and coastal swamps, therefore show colors ranging from
green to blue, according to the state of the iron oxide, and from white
through gray to black, according to the amount of carbon. But over the
larger portion of the delta the iron of the soil is more or less completely
oxidized during the seasons of dryness, and the corresponding colors—
yellow, orange, red, or brown—are in evidence. The ratio of these oxi-
dized and deoxidized sediments varies with the flatness of the delta and
the character of the climate. Color is therefore in itself no criterion by
which to distinguish between terrestrial and subaqueous deposition, but
yellows, reds, and browns are the dominating colors of continental de-
posits save in certain geological periods, A red shale which grades later-
ally into a green, gray, or black shale gives therefore strong indications
of terrestrial origin for the red portion. Such a relation is found in the
Wamsutta Red Beds of the Rhode Island basin. The other portions may
be swamp deposits of deltas or, so far as the color goes, of subaqueous
origin, This evidence from red beds is especially strong when found in
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 417
formations which are dominantly black, as in coal formations, but unless
the transition can be traced is not a positive indication; as seen, for
example, in the Lower Barren Coal Measures, where at Pittsburg a
‘marine fauna may be observed in a limestone band 2 to 3 feet thick,
resting on red shale and succeeded by 1 foot of black shale, passing again
into red shale.** The evidence thus shows a time of red shale deposition,
of possible marine origin, intervening in the Pennsylvanian when even
- the land muds gave normally a black shale formation. ‘Taking the
contrary case, lenses of gray or black shale in a formation which is
dominantly red, such as the black shale bands in the Triassic rocks of
Connecticut, is a suggestive though not positive indication as to the sub-
aqueous accumulation of the dark bands, perhaps as swamp deposits if
black ; as lacustrine deposits if gray or olive in tone and associated with
thin and regular bedding.
With respect to very early geological times, such as the Keewatin and
Huronian, the absence of red is of doubtful significance, owing to the
unknown composition of the air of those early periods and its possible
ineffectiveness as an oxidizing agent. |
Turning to the sea deposits, the dominant color of bottom muds at the
present time, omitting the abyssal red clays, is seen to be blue or gray to
black. There are, however, relatively small areas of red muds off the
shores of certain tropical lands. In other localities, as the Red Sea,
yellow muds occur. The dominance of blue muds corresponds with the
known deoxidizing influences of the sea bottom, but at other times the
oxidizing conditions which now give local areas of red muds may have
been widely prevalent. Consequently in other geologic periods the domi-
nant color effect may be reversed. In the Pennsylvanian, for example,
the bulk of both terrestrial and subaqueous shales are dark with carbon.
In the Clinton formation, on the contrary, the deposits of the shallow
sea are brilliant with ferric oxide.
The influence of climate and the kinds of bacterial or inorganic reac-
tions which it favors is therefore a factor of stronger control than condi-
tions of continental or marine deposition. It is only in mean climatic
states, such as the present, that the place of deposition exerts a domi-
nating influence on color.
Special examples of complex color relations are discussed in the follow-
ing topics.
VARIEGATED FORMATIONS
Green shales and red sandstones—Recent example, the basin of eastern
Persia.— Variegated formations offer special problems which may be
4 Seen in the “brilliant cut off” of the Pennsylvania Railroad at East Liberty,
418 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
divided into several cases. First are those variegated beds, consisting of
clays intercalated with silts or argillaceous and ferruginous sands, in
which the clays show an absence of ferric oxide as contrasted to its pres-
ence in the other strata. Such a formation, now in process of origina-
tion, has been studied by Huntington in the delta of the Helmund and
the lake of Seistan, of eastern Persia. The latter is a shallow and vari-
able water body in the center of the waste-filled bas. The margins of
the lake support a dense growth of reeds and the bottom deposits consist
of a fine greenish or white clay. Over the subaerial plain the deposits
range from a silt near the head of the delta to a more clayey nature near
the lake. The upper parts of the delta are well drained and the soil well
aerated. Over these areas light brown is the dominating color. The
flat swampy clay land near the lake may have been partly deposited as
lake beds and are now through considerable periods of time overflowed
or at least saturated with water. In these places the browns fade out and
light-colored soils with black areas prevail.’° The relation of the present
surface deposits to the past accumulations are well shown where part of
the lake bottom has been uplifted by recent voleanic action and erosion
has exposed the sequence of beds. From these Huntington has inter-
preted the Pleistocene history. The significant feature from the present
standpoint is that the fine sands and silts are in nearly all cases pink or
brown, representing former fluviatile deposition, and the lower beds
show more intense pink and reds. This transition in color from the
recent to the ancient deposits is to be attributed to the ready partial
dehydration which limonite undergoes with time, warmth, and pressure.
The clay bands which recur frequently through the section, though in
part pink, hold many green members. As shown by the present condi-
tions, the green clays mark the presence of former lacustrine conditions
and point to the significance of clay bands of these colors in red silts or
sandstones of other formations.
Although the climate is arid and the lake occasionally dries up, saline
deposits are absent, since the lake when at high level overflows into a
lower basin. In general, however, saline deposits would be associated
with sedimentation under the climatic conditions which prevail in Persia,
and deoxidation of lacustrine deposits would be less effective. |
Ancient example, the Orcadie basin of Scotland.—An example of the
application of these color relations to an ancient deposit may be made as
follows: In the Lower Old Red Sandstone formations of the Orcadie
basin of Scotland the sandstones and non-caleareous shales are domi-
% The basin of eastern Persia and Seistan, Carnegie Institution Publication, No. 26,
1905. (Also personal communication. )
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 419
nantly red, but some 10,000 feet of the middle part of the series are
characterized by flagstones and shales, with more or less calcareous
matter. Gray, green, and blue are prevailing colors in these, but no
marine fossil is known and mud cracks are remarkably developed. These
beds, therefore, represent the lower, poorly drained parts of an interior
fresh-water basin which was, however, dried out at repeated intervals.
The absence of saline deposits in these playa beds indicates that outflow
took place at times of high water, and the climate would seem, therefore,
to have been characterized by an alternation of dry and rainy seasons
rather than by a truly arid condition, such as has been conceived by cer-
tain British and Scotch geologists. This interpretation differs from
those commonly offered in that the basin is here thought to have con-
sisted of fluviatile plains and playa lakes rather than a great basin lake,
under whose waters all the sediments were deposited.
Red shales and green sandstones—Subrecent example, the Siwalik for-
mation of India.—The second case of variegated beds consists of color
relations the reverse of those just considered. In place of deoxidized
shales and oxidized sandstones there are formations in which the shales
are oxidized and are interbedded with deoxidized argillaceous sandstones.
An example of such shales and sandstones which have accumulated under
conditions concerning which there is general agreement may be cited in
the Siwalik formations of the sub-Himalayas. These are Neocene de-
posits upward of 15,000 feet in thickness skirting the southern side of
the Himalayas. They were laid down as fluviatile outwash from the ris-
ing mountains and have become exposed through being themselves up-
turned and eroded in the latest movements. Medlicott and Blanford
describe the Siwalik formations as follows :1°
“Sandstone immensely preponderates in the sub-Himalayan deposits, and is
of a very persistent type from end to end of the region and from top to bottom
of the series. Its commonest form is undistinguishable from the rock of cor-
responding age known as Molasse in the Alps, of a clear pepper and salt gray,
sharp and fine in grain, generally soft, and in very massive beds. The whole
Middle and Lower Siwaliks are formed of this rock, with occasional thick
beds of red clay and very rare thin, discontinuous bands and nodules of earthy
limestone, the sandstone itself being sometimes calcareous and thus cemented
into hard nodular masses. In the Sirmur group (below the Siwalik group)
generally, and locally in the Lower Siwaliks, the sandstone is thoroughly
indurated and often of a purple tint, while retaining the distinctive aspect.
In the Upper Siwaliks conglomerates prevail largeJy ; they are often made up
of the coarsest shingle, precisely like that in the beds of the great Himalayan
torrents. Brown clays occur often with the conglomerate, and sometimes
18 Manual of the Geology of India, part II, 1879, pp. 524-526.
a
420 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
almost entirely replace it. This clay, even when tilted to the vertical, is
undistinguishable in hand specimens from that of the recent plains deposit:
and no doubt it was formed in a similar manner, as alluvium. The sandstone,
too, of this zone is exactly like the sand forming the banks of the great rivers,
but in a more or less consolidated condition. Thus it was suggestive, and not
titogether misleading, to say that the Siwaliks were formed of an upraised
portion of the plains of India. ©
“The fresh-water origin of the Siwalik formation seems almost as indisput-
able as the marine origin of the Subathu beds; yet, until lately (1879), it has
been usuai to consider the Siwaliks marine. The notion was probably a relic
of the opinion that a water basin was an essential condition of the extensive
accunulation of deposits. and that a sea margin would be required for such a
great spread of shingle as that of the Siwalik conglomerates. The same opin-
ion, on the same grounds, has been extended to the plains deposits themselves.
“The continued experience that the fossil remains in these Tertiary strata
are exclusively of land or fresh-water organisms, made this view untenable;
and in time it came to be realized that the deposits themselves bear out the
same opinion; the mountain torrents are now in many cases engaged in laying
down great banks of shingle at the margin of the plains, just like the Siwalik
conglomerates ; and the thick sandstones and sandy clays of the Tertiary series
are of just the same type of form and composition as the actual deposits of
the great rivers.
“Beds of this character alternate with the upper beds of the Subathu
xroup; so it seems probable that from early Tertiary times the sea has been
excluded from the sub-Himalayan region, and that the whole of the sub-
Himalayan deposits. above the Subathu group, are fresh-water and fluviatile,
and formed on the surface of the land. They are in fact subaerial formations,
like the river alluvium and bhabar deposits of the present day.”
!
Speaking of these formations as they occur in the Salt Range in the
Punjab, Wynne makes the following statements :**
“Everywhere from one end of the range to the other, and always on its
northern and eastern aspects, the uppermost rocks of the Salt Range series
are innumerable alternations of gray or greenish sandstones, of not great
hardness, with red or light-brownish orange clays, more rarely with conglomer-
ates, but frequently with harder fine-grained sandy beds of peculiar concre-
tionary pseudo-conglomeratie structure. . . . The alternating bands of
sandstone and clay are from seventy to a hundred and twenty feet in thickness,
being very frequently about a hundred feet each, but some zones are much
thicker.” '
It is the Middle Siwalik which especially shows the association of gray
or green sandstones and red clays. All parts contain the bones of mam--
mals and fresh-water reptiles. It is seen from this description that such
combinations of red clays and gray or green sandstones are features of
fluviatile deposition under certain intermediate climatic conditions. The
17 Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, vol. xiv, 1878, p. 108.
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 42]
contrary case, however, still remains to be shown,—that other examples of
such red shales and green sandstones may not be marine. Fortunately,
an illustration from the Devonian of eastern North America shows that
this combination of colors is there approximately restricted to an ancient
terrestrial formation and the colors become more uniform and show a
greater deoxidation where the deposit becomes clearly marine. Marine
action, therefore, tends to eliminate these variegated color relations. The
details are-as follows:
Ancient example, the Catskill formation.—The Catskill formation of
New York and Pennsylvania consists typically of thick members of
poorly laminated red shales interbedded with olive green or gray sand-
stones. Some reddish argillaceous sandstones also occur. In the Catskill
Mountains of southeastern New York the formation has a thickness of
3,000 feet and thickens to twice that amount farther southwest in Penn-
sylvania. In the eastern outcrops it represents the whole of the Upper
Devonian, but in passing west the Catskill is seen to overlap on the
Chemung, and only the uppermost Catskill occurs in western New York
and Pennsylvania. The Catskill and Chemung occupy the same time
interval, but represent landward and seaward facies in the sedimenta-
tion, the Catskill conditions gradually advancing westward . This forma-
tion 1s very poor in fossils, and such as occur are partly if not wholly of
fresh or brackish water forms. In the Chemung grays and olive greens
are the dominating colors of the whole formation, shales and sandstones
alike, and marine faunas occur at many horizons. The variegated color-
ing of the Catskill is thus seen to be correlated with the absence of ma-
rine fossils and to disappear in this case where marine conditions clearly
prevail. The indications of mode of origin which have been published
hitherto are, however, mostly of indeterminate value, the chief one being
that regarding the contrast to the marine Chemung, which has just been
pointed out. The writer has, however, studied closely a number of sec-
tions from the Hudson to the Potomac River and has found scattered
proofs of subaerial exposure at the time of accumulation. These are
to be observed, however, only under exceptionally favorable conditions,
and it is clear from this that they imply a far wider existence of sub-
aerial conditions. It is not the place here to describe these evidences nor
to discuss the problem of the Catskill in detail, but it is to be noted that
mud cracks and root-marks were found near Cumberland, Maryland,
extending through about 120 feet of strata close to the base of the Cats-
kill. On the Schuylkill River is exposed the southeasternmost outcrop
of the Catskill of the Appalachian geosyncline. This is the outcrop
which lies nearest to the sources of the ‘sediment, but that it was some
422 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
distance from the margin of the original formation is shown by the
enormous thickness which the Catskill has here. Well defined mud
cracks and rainprints were found ranging through about 100 feet of beds
and lying about 1,000 to 1,200 feet above the base of the formation—
that is, in its lower part. The upper part shows a thick series of transi-
tion beds, largely sandstones with some red shales, grading into the
Pocono sandstone. In these red shales mud cracks were found ranging
through a thickness of 1,200 feet of beds and thereby showing character-
istic exposure of the clays to drying in the air. More doubtful evidences
of subaerial exposure were found in other parts of the section. The
Catskill formation may then be tentatively regarded as of truly fluviatile
and terrestrial origin. The climatic conditions were intermediate be-
tween the aridity of the Upper Mississippian period, which resulted in
salt and gypsum deposits, and the moister Pennsylvanian giving rise to
coal measures. Hither extreme offers the conditions for a good record of
subaerial exposure; in the first case by means of mud-cracked shales; in
the second by means of vegetation preserved in situ. The intermediate
condition shown by the Catskill deposits prevents a good record of either
sort, but is marked by the variegation in colors—fully oxidized flood-
plain clays alternating with deoxidized sands.
Such a relation of red shales and gray or green sandstones may then
be taken as presumptive evidence of subaerial river deposition. It should
not, however, be taken by itself as positive evidence, as the number of
cases studied on which the conclusion rests is still somewhat limited.
Lateral and vertical variegations in clays——The third case of varie-
gated beds consists of those in which a great variety of colors are found
and in which the colors are variable along the stratum. Such variations
and mottlings are especially developed in the late Mesozoic formations
of the Potomac group, discussed as an illustration of the delta cycle, and
are especially suggestive of the local variations of soil drainage which
are found on the terrestrial surface of certain deltas. Where the ratio
of flowing water to transported sediment is large and the sediment is
carried chiefly in suspension the grade of the lower part of a river may
be very low, in many cases but a few inches per mile. The local inequali-
ties of the floodplain determine the presence of lakes, swamps, or dry
land. A forest cover in such a region supplies organic acids and favors
partial leaching and concentration of the iron and leads to development
of such high contrasts in coloration. The far greater uniformity which
prevails at the bottom of permanent water bodies does not favor this
effect. Other reasons were shown for regarding the Potomac group as
consisting of delta formations. Such variegated beds are then highly
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 493
suggestive of terrestrial deposition, and indicate, furthermore, a large
development of swamp and pond conditions under a normally humid
climatic condition.
Regular banding in mudstones—A climatic record in_ bottomset
beds.—The fourth case of variegated beds consists of uniform fine-
grained shales in which the strata show marked variations in color.
Bedding may be practically absent save as marked by color. The yaria-
tions are due either to changes in the carbon content, low carbon being
apt to be associated with more siliceous bands, or changes in the state of
the iron oxide, green and red bands making up the rock. Such varia-
tions are best observed in slates which cleave across the bedding and
thereby show the latter as bands of darker and lighter colors. The ma-
terial was originally clay, which settled slowly from suspension on a
bottom presumably not affected by waves. ‘They are typically marine
deposits, and the rhythmic character of the alternation may be due to
changes in currents or in the shifting of river mouths, but the regularity
of the recurrence in many instances and its dependence on a varying
state of oxidation is suggestive of a climatic rather than a geographic
cause. In bottomset beds such a climatic rhythm may be expected to
record itself by a variation in color. In open seas the alternation is
marked more commonly by a change in the proportions of shale and
hmestone. The rhythm is usually from a few inches to a few feet in
thickness, and such oscillations are of rather characteristic occurrence in
shaly limestones through geological time. They are to be sharply sepa-
rated in significance from those variegations related to the physiographic
controls of shifting channels and swamps in delta and floodplain depo-
sition. If a climatic origin for such regular banding shall become defi-
nitely established the phenomenon is of high interest, for in that case
there is seen to exist a detailed though fragmentary record of short
period climatic fluctuations running back through the geologic ages and
indicating that oscillations about the average for the place and time are
and always have been characteristic features of terrestrial climates. Such
rhythmic changes of shorter and longer periods are indeed suggested by
the behavior of modern glaciers and the retreatal moraines left by the
extinct ice-sheets of the Pleistocene.
A striking example of such red and green rhythmic color banding in
slates has been recently studied by Dr. D. D. Cairnes, of the Canadian
Geological Survey, who has kindly furnished the following description
of them for incorporation into this paper:
424 | 3. BARRELL
RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
Banded slates of the Orange group, by D. D. Cairnes.1*—These red
and green banded slates or metamorphosed mudstones are included in a
group of sediments provisionally named the Orange group, which is at
least 6,000 feet in thickness and occurs extensively along that portion of
the 141st meridian (the Alaska-Yukon international boundary) between
latitudes 66°00 and 67°00, which was geologically studied and mapped
by the writer’? during the past season (1911). Terranes that probably
correspond to, and that at least closely resemble this group both litho-
logically and stratigraphically, also occur on the Upper Macmillan and
Upper Stewart rivers and have been briefly described by both McConnell
and Keele.?° Triassic fossils were found by Keele in slates underlying
the banded mudstones in the Upper Stewart River region; and a con-
siderable number of imperfect invertebrate remains were collected by
the writer along the 141st meridian from the lowest beds of the Orange
group, and these remains have been identified by Dr. T. W. Stanton as
being of Mesozoic and in his opinion probably of Cretaceous age.
On account of the somewhat highly altered character of these Orange
beds and the general scarcity of their outcrops, no complete section of
the group has been obtained at any one point, and the lithological char-
acters of the members composing it vary considerably throughout the
areas in which they have been identified. At one point banded slates
200 to 250 feet in thickness occur, occupying a central position in the
Orange group; these pass downward into dark gray to black slates and
phyllites and are overlain by greenish gray sandy shales. Approximately
25 miles farther north, however, the banded slates are at least 1,800 feet
in thickness; there they directly overlie Silurian limestones and dolo-
mites and are in turn overlain by black slates. In no place was any
gradation noted from the red and green banded mudstones to other beds,
the change being invariably abrupt.
The color bands range from those that are scarcely perceptible to
others several feet in thickness, and in places either the red or the green
persists for 50 to 100 feet or even more to the complete exclusion of the
other color. In general, however, the bands are from one-fourth to 2
inches in thickness, and throughout several hundred feet of beds the
18 By permission of the Director of the Geol. Sury. Branch, Dept. of Mines, Canada.
12D. D. Cairnes: Summary Rept. Geol. Surv., Dept. of Mines, Canada, 1911 (in
preparation).
20R. G. McConnell: ‘‘The Macmillan River, Yukon district.”” Ann. Rept. Geol. Sury.
of Canada, vol. xv, pp. 31A-34A.
J. Keele: ‘“‘The Upper. Stewart River region, Yukon."’ Ann. Rept. Geol. Surv. of
Canada, vol. xvi, pp. 13C-18C.
J. Keele: ‘“‘A reconnaissance across Mackenzie Mountains on the Velly, Ross, and
Gravel rivers, Yukon and Northwest territories."’ Geol. Sury., Dept. of Mines, Canada,
No. 1097, 1910, pp. 338-36, 39-40,
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 425
color rhythm is remarkably regular, but in other places numerous fine,
delicate, and even hairlike green bands are distributed at very irregular
intervals throughout red beds. Everywhere the individual bands are
strikingly persistent.
At one point a number of dolomite beds were noted to occur inter-
calated in the banded mudstone series, and throughout a thickness of 50
feet the formation consists of alternating slates and dolomites, the dolo-
mite bands ranging in thickness from one-fourth of an inch to about 2
feet, and the slate bands from one-eighth of an inch to several feet in
thickness. |
RELATIONS OF BEDDING TO MODE OF SEDIMENTATION
Method of presentation.—The preferred method of science is induc-
tion, the accumulation of such a variety of observations, covering all the
possible cases of occurrence, that from their classification the laws which
control the phenomena may be determined; but induction is unsafe if
based on partial observations. Where the principles which control the
operations of nature are better known than their results, deductive rea-
soning, on the contrary, is the safer guide to conclusions, but is a method
which needs to be checked as much as possible by appeals to observation.
For a study and comparison of the characteristics of bedding as con-
trasted in the deposits of the subaerial and subaqueous plain, the induc-
tive method calls for observations to be made on modern sediments of
the two regions now in process of deposition, and on ancient sediments,
whose conditions of origin are known from other criteria. Such observa-
tions are, however, as yet so insufficient in variety and usually so qualita-
tive in character as to be unsafe when used alone for the inductive deter-
mination of distinctive criteria. For example, cross-bedding is known to
occur in both fluviatile and marine deposits and no convincing distine-
tions have been drawn between the two by an observer who has fully
studied both. This section of the subject, therefore, can best be treated
deductively, drawing the distinctions which should result from the prin-
ciples which control wave and current action and checking the conclu-
sions as far as possible by citation of the known facts of stratigraphy.
Lamination of mudstones—Effects of subsidence from suspension.—
Lake or estuarine clays, if deposited below the depth affected by waves
and currents, are characterized by a very regular lamination which is
commonly closely spaced and may give rise to paper shales. The ma-
terials are wholly derived from suspension in water and are not marked
by the intercalation of sand lenses. The same is true of marine mud-
stones, but the more powerful waves of the open seas are able to affect a
greater depth of water and restrict to such depths the areas free from
XXXI—BULL. GEOL. Soc, AM., Vou, 28, 1911
496 J. BARRELL
RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
wave action. The preservation of perfect and fine-grained lamination in
many ancient fossiliferous marine muds seems to show that the muddy
ooze of deeper waters is not stirred by the bottom life to the same extent
as is true within similar sediments on the land. The smothering nature
of the deep, soft ooze is in fact unfavorable to most kinds of invertebrate
bottom life and may be correlated with the sparingly fossiliferous char-
acter of thinly laminated non-calcareous marine shales.
Effects of waves.—Where muddy sediment is supplied to shallow waters,
as off the mouth of the Mississippi, the coast charts show intermixtures
of sand and mud, some parts of the bottom soft and others hard. The
waves of storms stir up such bottoms and shift its materials. The water
becomes discolored with sediment and considerable thicknesses must settle
on the subsidence of wave action. The stratigraphic result to be antici-
pated is a destruction of the fine and regular lamination of clays and
their intermixture with sand and silt. Such a massive structure in clays
is observed in certain fossiliferous marine formations—such, for example,
as the Merchantville clay of the Upper Cretaceous of the Atlantic Coastal
Plain, where bedding is characteristically absent except in the presence,
of lamine of sand. Where two materials of unlike nature, such as clay
and sand, are both present the results are quite different than in mud
deposits alone.
Effects of subaerial actions.—On floodplains extensive pelitic deposits
are laid down in backwaters but little affected by currents, in shallow
lakes, and on the frontal parts of the delta. Where such clays are ex-
posed to the air various agencies tend to destroy the original lamination.
The effects of earthworms and roots are well known, but over regions
where the clays become mud-cracked a still more effective agency is in
operation. The cracks break across the bedding and in thick clays may
extend to depths of some feet. The next flood waters sweep more sedi-
ment into these cracks, the edges of the polygons slack and crumble and
the cracks become obliterated. The following period of drying opens
them again, but on more or less independent patterns. ‘Thus the clay is
subjected to a thorough vertical mixing through a period of time re-
quired for an accumulation equal to the depth of the mud cracks. Where
the character of the sediment remains uniform, the filling is of the same
material as the dried polygons and there results massive clay formations,
in which both lamination and the evidence of mud cracking are absent.
The latter are commonly revealed only when sand or sandy clay has been
swept over the mud-cracked stratum, filling the cracks and protecting the
stratum from further action. It is consequently the bottom of sandy
strata resting on beds of shale which most commonly show the pattern
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 427
of the mud cracks. This poorly laminated bedding is especially charac-
teristic of the thick red shale members of the Catskill formation, which
there is reason to believe is largely fluviatile and contrasts with the better
lamination in the olive shales of the Chemung which represent the off-
shore deposition.
Thus, to sum: up the previous discussion, it is seen that highly perfect
lamination in pure pelites is characteristic of quiet subaqueous deposi-
tion, but an absence of such lamination is no proof of subaerial condi-
tions, though most extensively developed in such situations, It is to be
noted, however, that studies on the character of lamination in modern
sedimentation is a subject which has received but little attention.
Stratification of sandstones—Effects of waves.—The transporting
agencies of marine sands are primarily waves, secondarily currents. In
fluviatile work, on the contrary, currents are the controlling agency and
the work of waves is limited. In neither region, however, is either one
entirely absent and locally the minor activity may dominate the resulting
structure.
Normal wave action tends to sweep sand in a direction opposite to that
oi the surface wave motion,” but where the bottom shallows the wave
becomes to some degree a wave of’ translation and carries the coarser
bottom material which it can move with the water toward the shore and
recults in the building of bars. Waves over a broad bottom which is flat
tend therefore to maintain an even depth of water and develop a regular
bedding, the sand being swept under normal wave action from the
slightly higher places to the quieter water of greater depth. The differ-
‘ing direction and force of storm winds tends also to shift the bottom
_ materials. The action near the shore is different in character from that
on the flat offshore bottom, since the material tends to be moved partly
to deeper water, partly to shallower water, and the shoreward slopes are
steepened, the outer slopes flattened. The shifting of bars results, fur-
ther, in a continual cutting out and redeposition elsewhere of the sand
beds. This is well illustrated off the New Jersey and Maryland coasts,
irregularities of the bottom extending to depths of 10 fathoms at dis-
tances up to 15 or more miles from the coast.
It is important, however, that a quantitative estimate of such effects be
given, and a study of the coast charts shows that the maximum slopes of
the submerged sand banks off the open coasts, where waves and not
currents are the controlling forces, is not over 15 feet in 1,000. Where
*tN. M. Fenneman: Development of the profile of equilibrium of the subaqueous shore
terrace. Journal of Geology, vol. 10, 1902, pp. 1-82,
428 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
the bottom profile is in better adjustment to the waves the inequalities
are much less. For example, south of Long Island the bottom profile
deepens smoothly to 30 fathoms and beyond. In small bays free from
tidal races the same smoothness of bottom is noted, but in much shal-
lower water. It is seen, therefore, that sharp channeling and flow and
plunge structures are not features of wave action, but of current action,
and tend to be smoothed out in open-water bodies. Although the profiles
of sand beds on the subaqueous plain tend to be smoother in detail than
those of the subaerial plain and of gentler slope, there are, nevertheless,
decided inequalities over larger distances. The sediments are dominantly
swept in certain directions and concentrated bottom currents are thought
to prevent deposition in others, Such effects are not, however, to be
studied from the shores. The conspicuous effects of an ocean surf on the
shore impress the imagination, but have little direct relation to the mak-
ing of sedimentary structures on the floor of the water body. Where
waves drag on a shallowing bottom and throw up bars a cross-section of
the resulting bedding would show sandstone lenses whose upper surface
is convex upward with gentle slopes and cross-bedded structure. Chan-
neling by currents, on the contrary, cuts into the beds below and under-
cuts the sides, giving curves which are convex downward. Currents also
build shifting bars with convex upper surfaces in places of slack water.
The slopes of channels and river bars are, however, steeper and the de-
posits in the slack water are more local and irregular.
It is one of the important principles of sedimentation that the beds of
sand which are laid down, and not later disturbed, are the results of the
heaviest storms. These churn up the shallower bottom, loading the
water with sediment and moving part of it to a greater depth of water
whither minor storm waves can not transport the sand. Here the sand
is laid down gently and without indication of the commotion which is
reigning elsewhere. A sandstone bed may thus be deposited during a
single storm and give the appearance of rapid sedimentation, when in
reality years may elapse between the deposition of successive coarse beds.
During such storms, although the sand is worked out to unusual depths,
the silt of those depths has also been greatly stirred and is in part worked
farther seaward, in part settles back in place. The resulting bed from a
single storm, owing to this stirring, will show a sharply defined surface
to the sand, frequently ripple-marked, witness to the culmination of the
storm, on which another bed of mud or silt will come to rest and record
the following period of lessened wave action. This is normal flagstone
bedding.
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 429
The most striking effect of waves is in the production of ripple-mark*?
as distinguished from current-mark. The size of the ripples is some
function of the wave length, but the relation is not a simple one, and it
is not possible at present to determine from the ripples the depth of water
in which they were made. It is known, however, that ripple-marks may
occur in depths of several hundred feet of water,?* and it may be pro-
duced by broad smooth currents of water affecting the bottom below wave
base, and which by their evenness and breadth of movement may prevent
the lack of symmetry which is especially characteristic of current-mark
as contrasted to ripple-mark. The regularity of ripple-mark produced
by wind action illustrates the possibility of currents simulating the
effects of waves. River currents, however, tend to prevent regularity of
bedding and symmetry of ripple-mark. It appears, therefore, that typical
water-made ripple-mark associated with regularity of bedding in sand-
stones is especially associated with the subaqueous plain of deltas and
the bottoms of shallow seas. It is developed, however, to a limited extent
also over the subaerial portions of deltas, where shallow waters unaffected
by strong currents have stood for a time before being drained away.
Consequently it is not the presence of ripple-mark, but its dominance
and association with other features which suggests offshore deposition.
The question may now be raised as to the types of cross-bedded struc-
ture which marine action will impose on a sand formation. Experience
shows that many marine sandstones show cross-bedding on a moderate
scale, and even limestones are known to exhibit in some instances the
same structure. Kindle has recently called special attention to this
feature.** Gilbert, furthermore, has studied the type of cross-bedding
which may result from the superposition of successive beds of ripple-
marked sand, and has described the giant ripple-marks of the Medina
sandstone in western New York.?® Gilbert puts forth, merely as a sug-
gestion, the hypothesis that these giant ripples may imply correspond-
ingly enormous waves in the Medina Sea. The explanation should, how-
ever, be sought apparently in some other direction, since ocean waves of
the present time are not observed to construct true ripple-mark on this
scale, and the general evidence of the shallowness of the epicontinental
seas, and especially of those with sandy bottoms, would seem to preclude
22 For a paper which gives the bibliography in addition to later observations, see Cor-
nish, Vaughan, On the formation of sand-dunes. The Geographical Journal, vol. ix,
1897, p. 278.
% Sir A. Geikie: Text-book of Geology, 4th edition, 1903, p. 562.
* American Journal of Science, September, 1911, pp. 225-227.
* Ripple-marks and cross-bedding. Bull, Geol, Soc, America, vol, 10, 1899, pp. 135-140,
430 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
definitely waves even as great as those of the present open oceans. The
explanation should rather be sought in some nodal effect, or the drag-
ging, partial breaking, and recovery of waves of translation in very
shallow water, or perhaps some relations of waves to undertow currents.
Whatever the explanation may be the fact remains, however, that such
structures are presumably formed on the subaqueous plain, and their
migration across a bottom on which sand was accumulating could give
rise to a moderate degree of cross-bedding, but one presumably distinct
from the steeper and more irregular cross-bedding due to current action
where the latter becomes a dominating action.
If cross-bedding in a sandstone or limestone, presumably marine,
occurs on a large scale it is possible that it may be due to wind action on
material abandoned by the sea or blown inland. Grabau has called atten-
tion to an instance on the shores of the Red Sea where an eolian lime-
stone of foraminiferal tests is accumulating many miles inland,” and
the eolian limestones of Bermuda blown inland from beach materials are
well known. Such cooperation of wave and wind action is favored in
shallow waters and makes more uncertain the direct interpretation of
ancient formations and calls for a closer study of modern sedimentation
under analogous conditions.
Effects of currents.—Currents as carrying and depositing agents are
especially characteristic of fluviatile action. In estuaries scoured by
strong tides current action is also dominant, but. they are in fact en-
larged river channels alternately invaded by sea and river waters. In
connection with irregularities in the coastline, waves also produce cur-
rents, as the result of concentrated undertow or obliqueness to the coast-
line. Such effects in seas and lakes are, however, local and exceptional as
compared to the broad areas where wave action is dominant. The results
of marine currents may be seen on the coast charts which show the en-
trances to Delaware and Chesapeake bays and also off Cape Hatteras.
The conditions which give rise to wave-formed currents are connected
especially with the inequalities of coastline resulting from a_ recent
crustal movement and are rather closely restricted to shallow water and
the vicinity of coasts. The waves and the currents which they generate
are, however, in continual opposition, the one tending to fill up, the
other to scour out. The leveling effects of strong wave action prevent
in consequence such sharply defined and undercut channels as are devel-
oped by rivers. The slope of their sides probably does not average more
than one in twenty-five, but the great volumes and consequent large
2 Oral communication, Washington, D, C., December 29, 1911.
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 431
cross-sections of water carried by shore currents permit of local excava-
tion to depths of several fathoms. Where progressive subsidence permits
such features to become preserved, there may result lenses of marine
sandstones some tens of feet in thickness and marked by cross-bedding.
The slopes are not so steep, however, nor the cross-bedding on so large a
scale nor so dominant as in either river or dune structures. The marine
bars and channels are also relatively fixed and do not migrate over, the
surface so freely as do river channels and desert dunes.
In rivers where sands are being deposited the channel is subject to
meandering. It cuts laterally into the banks and scours down into older
floodplain deposits. The sands of the abandoned channels cut across the
bedding of the floodplain deposits on the convex sides of the meanders
and on the concave side are interlaminated with them. The river works
across the floodplain and buries channel structures widely in the fluvia-
tile deposits. The river bars work regularly downstream, being con-—
tinually cut out above and deposited below. From these characteristics
of river action it is seen that the resulting sandstone lenses tend to scour
downward through the beds below and are marked by dominant cross-
bedded and flow and plunge structures. Gravel tends to be especially
concentrated along such channel bottoms. Lateral discontinuity of the
sandstone lenses is also a feature, the ancient channel deposits forming
a meshwork and giving sandstone courses rather than sandstone strata.
Where the course of the river is relatively fixed during progressive subsi-
dence, these channel sands and the sands of the natural levees may com-
bine into a dominant sandstone facies, which may correspond in geo-
logical horizon to a shale formation at no great distance. Such local
changes in facies mark the Siwalik formations and indicate the places
of exit of the Tertiary streams from the Himalayas. Wave action, on
the contrary, tends to spread out such a sand deposit over the zone where
the bottom is sufficiently shallow.
River currents roll and jump material along the bottom in but one
direction—a movement contrasted to the to and fro oscillating effects of
waves. ‘Typical ripple-mark is therefore exceptional, but in time of les-
sened velocity current-mark, an effect approaching it, is produced. The
sand is caught between small back eddies on the bottom and the forward
current, which is slightly higher, The result is the formation of cres-
cents with gentle slopes facing upstream and steeper slopes facing down-
stream. ‘The plan is more or less irregular and the individual ridges are
limited in length. Current-mark is in fact analogous to dune structure,
known as barchanes, rather than to the ripples made on the surface of
432 J.BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF -ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
the dune or the ripple-mark made by the oscillations of waves. As waves
and currents may operate together, there are, however, all gradations
between ripple-mark and current-mark. In the papers which treat of
the theory of ripple-mark no distinction has commonly been made be-
tween the effects of waves and currents, both producing back eddies along
the bottom. It seems, however, to the writer from repeated observations
that where made clearly by a single cause the two structures can be sepa-
rated, waves producing a symmetrical system of ridges; currents, on the
other hand, resulting in ridges which are unsymmetrical in both plan
and section.
The cross-bedded structures of fluviatile sands are the result of the
cutting out and filling in of channels and the downstream migration of
bars; the slopes of the cross-bedding are commonly steep, from 15 to 30
degrees. Although showing considerable variation, they tend to slope in
one direction. 'The character of the cross-bedded strata of alluvial fans
has been described by Hobbs,?‘ and several illustrations of cross-bedding
ascribed to current action are given by A. Geikie.** Such cross-bedded
strata are especially discontinuous and indicate broken currents and
shifting channels. The effects are presumably much more striking than
the cross-bedding produced where waves are a powerful factor. On the
other hand, the thickness of a single cross-bedded stratum of fluviatile
origin is normally limited to a few feet, and in that respect is distinct
from the cross-bedding which results from the migration of dunes.
Contrasts of marine and fluviatile action—The modes of action of seas
and rivers on sand have been discussed at some length, as much to serve
as a guide to further observation and to prevent premature generaliza-
tion as to develop what is at present known. Under this heading will be
drawn briefly a comparison between the two.
In marine deposits the coarser material is carried and deposited as the
result of great storms; the finer interbedded material is the mark of les-
sened activity. In river action, on the contrary, the finer grained deposits
of the floodplain are made as the result of the waters of great floods or the
winds of dry seasons; the channel sands represent the silting up of
diminished streams in the stages of lessened activity. The sands of the
natural levees are spread out in sheets, however, at times of high water.
The sea is dominated by wave action; the river and its sand-bearing
floods are dominated by current action. The waves tend to spread sand
in even sheets with evenly ripple-marked surfaces and a minute cross-
* Guadix formation of Granada, Spain. Bull. Geol. Soe. America, vol, 17, 1906, p.
291.
*8'Text-book of Geology, 1903, pp. 636-638,
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 433
bedded structure, giving flagstone bedding, but excessive wave action on
a shallow bottom by developing waves of translation throws up bars and
islands, beyond which the waves reform with lesser amplitude. In such
eases beach action, shown by marked and irregular cross-bedding and
even eolian effects, may be expected to become developed in places within
the more regular formations of the flat bottom. The river currents, on
the other hand, give an elongated structure to sandstone lenses, and tend
to develop current-marked surfaces and more pronounced cross-bedded
structures, instead of evenly bedded and ripple-marked sands, as the nor-
mal accompaniments of deposition. Waves tend to restrict the coarsest
material to the zone of the shore, but finer gravel may be spread over the
contiguous bottom in smooth even sheets. Rivers tend to concentrate
such gravels into discontinuous courses.
Lenticular thickenings of marine sands should normally be convex
upward and show flat cross-bedding. Channel sands, on the contrary,
are more irregular, and although convex on the upper surface are more
commonly convex at bottom, cutting through the underlying deposit
and showing steep cross-bedding. These are the extremes of difference ;
but, on the other hand, evenly bedded almost structureless sands with
minor cross-bedding may arise from the action of either sea or rivers.
Although in extreme cases it is thought that sandstones of marine and
fluviatile origin may be distinguished, it is clear that comparative studies
of the two need to be carried out with a greater refinement than has
heretofore been done, and that it is the character and dominance of a
particular type of cross-bedding which is of significance rather than the
mere presence of the structure.
Effects of sheet-flood deposition—Many agerading streams overloaded
with sand exhibit at low stage shallow braided channels within the main
channel. At higher water the main channels may likewise form a
braided system, and at- highest water the whole floodplain may be cov-
ered by a shallow moving water body, simulating on a larger scale the
effects seen in the channels at low water. The effect is well illustrated
in miniature by the waste banks from coal or ore washing plants. It
seems to be emphasized over those piedmont slopes or deltas where aggra-
dation is actively going forward and where the streams are always over-
loaded. In such cases the channel becomes an unimportant feature and
sheet-flood effects arise.
It is such conditions which seem to be required to produce the great
depths of regularly bedded and widely extended sandstones which mark
certain continental deposits. The beds may vary from thin to thick.
They succeed each other without interlamination of clays and commonly
434 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
show neither structure nor fossils. False bedding oblique to the even
regular bedding is occasionally observed, but the homogeneous material
conceals its frequent presence. Ripple and current marks, however, are
rare or absent. Similar formations may possibly also be of marine ori-
gin, but it seems probable from the normal presence of wave action that
ripple-marking should occur more commonly in the latter. It would
seem unsafe, however, to assume in the present state of knowledge either
a fluviatile or marine origin for a formation on the basis of such struc-
tures alone.
Effects of wind.—Cross-bedding and ripple-mark of most noteworthy
development occur as the result of wind action on river or beach sands.
In semi-arid or arid climates during the dry season the shrunken streams
lay bare large areas of loose sands which are swept to leeward for indefi-
nite distances. The delta of the Indus furnishes an example of such a
fluviatile deposit greatly modified by wind action. The dunes of such
regions advance by the deposition of successive layers of sand on the
leeward face. With each change of wind some shifting of the dune takes
place. The marching of the dune involves the continuous destruction
and construction of the bedding, but in regions of aggradation the basal
parts of the dunes remain and become permanently buried. Huntington
has called attention to the fact that cross-bedding of eolian origin attains
a much larger scale than cross-bedding by water currents. He shows
also that eolian cross-bedding is furthermore deposited on curved sur-
faces which approach tangency to a horizontal plane at the bottom.*®
Aqueous cross-bedding, on the other hand, is commonly developed as
plane slopes at a distinct angle to both the horizontal planes whieh limit
the structure. These distinctions have been forcibly urged as evidence
that the Triassic, and especially the white Jurassic sandstones of north-
western Arizona, are ancient desert sands.*° If gravels occur in connec-
tion with such wind-blown sands certain of the pebbles may be expected
to show the smoothed facets and sharp edges which are developed by
wind action, giving rise where carried to perfection to the form of peb-
bles known as dreikanter. Ripple-mark on marine sands is best deyel-
oped on nearly horizontal surfaces, since the action of the waves is closely
limited by depth. Winds, however, are not so restricted in action and
develop ripple-mark on the long sloping sides of dunes. Furthermore,
*» Some characteristics of the glacial period in non-glaciated regions. Bull. Geol. Soc.
America, vol. 18, 1907, plates 36-38, pp. 351-388.
* Ellsworth Huntington and J. W. Goldthwait: The Hurricane fault in the Toquer-
ville district, Utah. Bull. Mus, Comp. Zool,, Harv, Col., vol. xlii, 1904, pp. 214-216,
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 435
Cornish states that in wind-made ripples the coarser grains rest at the
erest of the ripples—in water they remain in the troughs. These dis-
tinctions should be of aid in separating eolian and therefore terrestrial
from water-laid sands.
RELATIONS OF TEXTURE TO SEDIMENTATION
Degree of sorting a negative criterion.—On the whole, waves are more
effective agents for sorting than river currents, but since rivers wear
down gravel to sand in moving the bottom material downstream, all
degrees of wear and sorting may be found in their deposits also, and
distinctions founded alone on the degree of sorting are likely to lead to
false conclusions. It is rather criteria drawn from the shape and asso-
ciation of the particles which must be invoked to separate fluviatile and
marine material, But such distinctions if they are definite must await
field study, and in this place the discussion may be restricted to the
special case of the influence of wind in shaping material which enters
finally into fluviatile and marine deposits.
Effects of wind in shaping sand.—This topic has recently received
such full treatment by Sherzer,* who also gives abundant illustrations
and references to the literature on the subject, that discussion may begin
on the basis of his paper. Sand grains subjected to either wind, water, or
glacial wear continued for a sufficient time come to consist almost wholly
of quartz, and each type of abrasion gives characteristic forms, Wind
wears fine sand much more rapidly than does water, moderate subjection
to wind action giving a high degree of sphericity, which extends to grains
which are less than a tenth of a millimeter in diameter, a size but little
affected by water action. Subaerial exposure of loose sands is thus soon
recorded in the form; but, as Sherzer notes, Sorby in 1880 called atten-
tion to the necessity of distinguishing between the age of the grains
themselves and the age of the deposit in which they may be found.**
The same caution regarding age applies to the mode of origin of the
deposit as distinct from the mode of origin of the grains. The sands
which enter into both river and marine deposits may at some time in
their history have been subjected to the wind, and this may happen in
rather close relationship to the final deposition. The relative oppor-
tunities for wind action in these two classes of deposits must therefore
be discussed and the problem raised of separating true desert deposits
Criteria for the recognition of various types of sand grains. Bull. Geol. Soe.
America, vol. 21, 1910, pp. 625-662.
*2On the structure and origin of the non-caleareous stratified rocks, Proc. Quar.
Jour, Geol, Soc. London, vol, xxxvi, 1880, p. 58.
436 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
which imply aridity from those other deposits where the wind has been
merely a cooperating factor and has but minor climatic significance.
COMBINATIONS OF WIND AND WATER ACTION
Kinds of combined structures and textures.—The character and occur-
rence of such structures have been discussed elsewhere** and they need
here be enumerated only. First, dune structures and dune textures pre-
vail over the delta of the Indus, the material being derived from the
river sands; second, facetted pebbles in sand deposits are common in the
Great Basin of the United States from the fluviatile intermixture of
sand and gravel, the latter being then subjected to wind scour by the
sand; third, somewhat etched pebbles and millet-seed sand grains show
a lesser degree of the same combined action in formations which are
dominantly fluvial or pluvial; fourth, subangular pebbles, showing a
dominance of disintegrating rather than decomposing activities in
weathering, and exhibiting, furthermore, a lack of sorting in transporta-
tion characterize the local alluvium of semi-arid to arid climates, such
as in the alluvial fans of the mountainous parts of Arizona and New
Mexico; fifth, mud cracks made by the drying out of the floodplain clays
may be filled by wind-blown sand and have been recorded as existing at
the present time in both South Africa and South America.
Relative association of eolian action with fluviatile and marine de-
posits—Dune structures bespeak a dominance of wind action, but in
ancient formations appear to be relatively rare. Much more usual are
the other marks of the wind which are subordinate to wave or river
action. The more common of these are seen in the unsorted wash de-
posits, marking the local deposits of basins, in which wind may haye
played a very minor part; and the mud cracks filled by wind-blown sand
extensively developed over semi-arid or arid floodplains. These strue-
tures in their modern examples are typically associations of river and
wind action rather than shore and wind action, and are not by any
means restricted to truly desert climates.
Those combined structures which are now found to an appreciable
extent associated with the margin of the sea are the millet-seed texture
and dune structures. The latter, however, are restricted to limited belts
of what are chiefly submarine sands. Since the form of the sand grains
persists after the dunes are destroyed, it is a much more pervasive phe-
nomenon and is the feature which is more likely than the others to be
developed in sands associated with the ancient epicontinental seas.
* Joseph Barrell: Relations between climate and terrestrial deposits. Journal of
Geology, vol. xvi, 1908, pp. 279-284.
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 437
Modern examples outside of truly desert regions are found in the
southwestern part of France, in the vicinity of the coasts, on the shores
of Denmark and Prussia, and along certain stretches of the Atlantic
coast of the United States. These are sands which have been thrown up
by the waves or left by the retreat of the sea and show the widespread
character of wind action under climates far from arid. Ancient exam-
ples of wind-worn sands which have received recent study are the Saint
peter sandstone** and the Sylvania sandstone.*° Of the origin of the
Saint Peter sandstone Berkey says:
“The surface over which the Saint Peter sands were deposited was appar-
ently very uniform. If it had departed far from a low-lying plain, we should
doubtless have many marks of it in erosion forms characteristic of such
elevation. On that plain, on its retreat, the sea spread great quantities of
sand and left the marginal supply (Basal sandstone margin) exposed to all
the transporting agencies. This the wind began to carry as dune sands along
the shore. Into these sands the rivers sank as they coursed toward the retreat-
ing sea, accomplishing little in erosion. At the maximum retreat of the sea,
it is the writer’s belief that the Saint Peter sands presented the aspect of a
shifting-sand plain, perhaps akin to a desert in this one feature ut least,
though not necessarily arid; so the sands were washed out by the retreat of
the sea and thereby assorted, then worked many times over by the wind in the
absence of the sea, and thereby still more perfectly assorted, and finally in the
readvance of the sea much of it was again worked over a last time, thereby
reaching its present remarkable condition of purity. 3
“That the Saint Peter sandstone was deposited in water and preserves chiefly
such structures as are common to (water laid) sediments is certain; that its
grains fall within the range of wind transportation and show characteristic
wind-worn surfaces is equally clear; that the formation relationships argue an
extensive retreat of the sea and an erosion interval is well supported—these
factors alone are sufficient to account for all the peculiarities and remarkable —
characters of the Saint Peter, without any special agency.”
Concerning the Sylvania sandstone, Sherzer states that
“This sand in its purity, degree of rounding, and assortment has attained a
degree of perfection that is being constantly approached, but never attained by
any known modern example. It out-Saharas the Sahara! This perfected
character of the Sylvania granules can be understood when the probable his-
tory is known, a lengthy and repeated buffeting with wind and wave, with no
opportunity for the accession of new material and with a mineral substance
inert to residual action.” *
*4#C. P. Berkey: Paleogeography of Saint Peter time. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol.
17, 1906, pp. 229-250.
= W. H. Sherzer: Op. cit.
%C. P. Berkey: Op. cit., pp. 246, 247.
WwW. H. Sherzer: Op.. cit., p. 651.
438 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
In the case of such formations, it is clear that other features than the
wind-worn character of the sand must be relied on to determine the
mode of origin of the final deposit, but on the basis of the structure
Sherzer considers that much of the Sylvania is a truly eolian deposit.
Notwithstanding the examples just discussed, it is seen that under
modern conditions eolian action modifies terrestrial and fluviatile de-
posits much more broadly than it does wave-worked sands. Rivers are
efficient carriers of sand; thick deposits may be made over subsiding
areas and much of each stratum is in turn broadly exposed to the air.
Where the sedimentation is slow the wind is given fullest opportunity
for work. On the other hand, sands which reach the sea are spread as
widely as wave action is effective on the bottom, and it is only on the
shore or on the upper portions of sands abandoned by a retreating strand
that wind action can come into play. The associations of eolian action
furnish, therefore, criteria of considerable value for separating forma-
tions chiefly marine from those chiefly fluviatile and should occur much
‘
more commonly in the latter.
CLIMATES IMPLIED BY EOLIAN ACTION
Desert climates and dominant dune structures——There is necessarily
no sharp distinction between the combined wind and water structures of
arid climates and semi-arid climates, especially as surrounding uplands
may possess a semi-arid climate and furnish water to the true desert
below, or great rivers like the Nile may flow from well watered zones
through regions of arid climate. The following general distinctions
may, however, be drawn: In the true deserts wind is the dominating
activity. It not only shapes the sand but is the agent which abrades the
rocks and which sorts and transports both dust and sand. Where thick
sandstone formations show dominant dune structure and wind-worn
texture, as in the Jurassic white sandstones of Arizona, the inference is
strong that ancient deserts probably prevailed.
Semi-arid climates and dominant combined structures—It would ap-
pear that the degree to which wind action may modify the fluviatile or
marine sands in semi-arid or even in humid climates has not been appre-
ciated by some who have written of past conditions, nor that sufficient
distinction has been drawn between semi-arid and arid climates, widely
different in their terrestrial development and their relations to life. Red
color, feldspathic sands, and the presence of some wind-worn material
have been taken as evidence of desert conditions in the Torridonian pre-
Cambrian and the Old Red Devonian sandstones of Scotland, although
saline deposits are not present and the bulk of the material is such as
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 439
rivers and playa lakes could lay down. The writer has argued else-
where that red as a color of consolidated formations may arise by dehy-
dration of the iron during the diagenesis as well as during the deposition
of the sediment and is liable to be produced in rocks as the result of any
climate which permits occasional aeration of the alluvial soil.** Fur-
thermore, the study of modern examples readily shows that fine-grained
sandy alluvium may be modified by wind within the same broad climatic
‘limits and does not necessarily imply desert climates. This is owing to the
fact that a desert condition may be related to a barren sandy soil as well
as to an excess of evaporation over precipitation. A sandy alluvium which
permits the rain to run through it and which is too coarse to permit
eapillary retention of water may give rise to a local desert even with a
high rainfall, and it is clearly erroneous to describe such conditions as im-
plying a desert climate. For example, under the semi-arid climate of
western Kansas and Nebraska the fine sands Jaid down by the Tertiary
rivers are broadly reworked at present by wind and the surface of the land
is ridged with dunes, yet the land supports great herds of cattle and was
but recently the home of myriads of buffalo. In central Kansas sand is
swept by wind from the bed of the Arkansas over the plains to the east
to such an extent that the region is used as an illustration of dune topog-
raphy by Chamberlin and Salisbury in their Geology.*® This is in a
region in which the mean annual rainfall is between 20 and 30 inches
per year, with a maximum in early summer, but dry late summer. Still
more significant are the sandy barrens of such regions as northern Prus-
sia.and Long Island and other areas of sand which were laid down as
fluviatile outwash deposits from the Pleistocene glaciers.*° The rainfall
and temperature of these regions is such that if the loose sand can be
protected from wind and sun action until a vegetable cover is established
it will become reclaimed. Under the conditions of river building, con-
nected with wandering channels and a continual supply of sand derived
from them, the reclamation would apparently be more difficult. In
earlier geologic ages the vegetation was presumably less specialized for
such conditions and less effective in preventing wind action. Although
its presence in moving and rounding the sand shows local desert condi-
tions, it does not necessarily imply that such existed outside of the region
of the deposit nor that there was a deficiency of rainfall.
Eolian action in arenaceous river deposits is thus seen to be peculiarly
38 Relations between climate and terrestrial deposits. Journal of Geology, vol. xvi,
1908, pp. 285-293.
eomol, i, 1904,‘ pl. Ii, fig. 2, p. 31.
“For an illustration from Connecticut see Bowman. Forest Physiography, 1911, p,
661, John Wiley & Sons,
440 J. BARRELL
RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
favored by the nature of the material. It is especially characteristic of
semi-arid climates, but extends beyond to a more limited degree into
both arid and subhumid climates. It is commonly marked by such
minor wind activities as the rippling of sandy surfaces and the filling
of mud-cracked plains by sand. The latter is driven forward in a thin
stratum without the development of dune structure unless the sand is
very abundant and the winds are strong. The great quantity of animal
life existing at present in the semi-arid districts of Africa and the great
number and variety of footprints in the Triassic strata of Connecticut
associated with these evidences of semi-aridity show how widely such
climates differ in their life relations from true deserts, and a study of
the rainfall maps of the world shows how characteristic are such climates
of continental interiors and, in certain latitudes, even in the proximity
of the ocean.
BREADTH OF EOLIAN ACTION AS A CRITERION OF FLUVIATILE DEPOSITS
The preceding sections have shown that river sands are much more
broadly exposed to the air than sands of subaqueous origin; that sands
where so exposed are subjected to wind action under climates which now
widely prevail and support great quantities of life, and that certain com-
bined structures of marked character not uncommonly arise. The condi-
tions for the preservation of such evidences by burial are, furthermore,
much more favorable in the case of aggrading rivers than for the de-
posits which fringe the shore. The arguments are therefore of cumula-
tive force which show the value of partial wind action as a high but not
absolute criterion of fluviatile origin and suggest the importance of
careful search for such structures in ancient formations.
SIGNIFICANCE OF CONGLOMERATES
Gravels are transported by ice, by rivers, and by waves, giving rise to
conglomerates of glacial, fluviatile, and marine origin. Glacial gravels
may be eliminated from the discussion, leaving the distinctions between
marine and terrestrial conglomerates to be considered.
W. D. Johnson pointed out that in the Tertiary deposits of the High
Plains the gravel courses where exposed to observation are greatly elon-
gated in the direction of the streams*'—that is, in the direction leading
away from the source of supply. Mansfield has noted that shore grayels,
on the contrary, are extended in courses parallel to the margin of the
deposit.*? Ancient conglomerate formations, however, are commonly
41The high plains and their utilization. 21st Ann. Rept. U. S. Geol. Sury., part IV,
1901, p. 634.
“The characteristics of various types of conglomerates, Journal of Geology, vol. xv,
1907, p. 554,
—_ ———: wee ———) ee se eS =
se ee 7 ee ee.
EVALUATION OF 8TRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 44]
folded or tilted, and it is seldom that a bed can be studied in two direc-
tions to a sufficient extent to determine the relations of the gravel strata
to the direction of sedimentation.
Statements have been made regarding the characteristic shapes of
river as contrasted to shore gravels. But these have been founded on
few observations and without an analysis of the factors which determine
the forms of the pebbles. Walther is certainly more safe in his conclu-
sion that no distinction in form has been shown to exist between river
and shore gravels.** |
The subject of criteria between gravels of marine and terrestrial origin
was considered by the present writer in a paper before the Geological
Society of America in December, 1908. The pressure of other work and
the extensive problem into which this subject developed have prevented
thus far the final preparation of that manuscript for publication. As
much of it, however, is nearly finished the subject will not be here redis-
eussed. In that paper “the problem was approached by studying the
effects of shore, as compared with subaerial, activities on the production,
transportation, and deposition of gravel. It was determined that the
truly terrestrial forces produce vastly more gravel, spread it far more
widely, and provide more opportunities for deposition than do the forces
of the littoral zone. Conglomerate formations, therefore, should be
dominantly of terrestrial origin. In order to determine, however, the
mode of origin of particular examples, definite criteria must be drawn
’ between the two classes. It was shown that the thickness was one of the
most important of these, marine conglomerates, except under local and
special circumstances, being limited to considerably less than 100 feet in
thickness ; terrestrial conglomerates, on the other hand, being frequently
measured in hundreds and occasionally in thousands of feet.
“Attention was next turned to the significance of the intercalated non-
conglomeratic beds and the relations to the under- and over-lying forma-
tions, with the conclusion that the characteristics of the associated strata
are frequently of high supplemental value for determining the mode of
origin.” ** Especially where the finer textured beds carry evidences of
terrestrial origin the argument is strong that the associated coarser beds
are also terrestrial. Where finer beds carry marine fossils the contigu-
ous coarser beds are presumably in part if not wholly marine. Where,
however, marine shales or sandstone are intercalated between conglom-
erate beds which are a hundred feet or more in thickness it is to be ex-
pected that at least the middle part of the conglomerates are terrestrial.
48 Hinleitung in die Geologie, 1893, p. 757.
Bull. Geol. Soc. America (abstract), vol. 20, p. 620.
XXXII—-BULL. GEot, Soc, Am., Vou, 28, 1911
442 J. BARRELL—RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
Exceptional cases are known where these rules fail, chiefly on account of
local accumulations of gravel through proximity to a bold shoreline, but
it is thought that they have a high degree of generality. Thinner con-
glomerates may be either marine or terrestrial and their mode of origin
must be determined on other grounds than that of thickness. The limit
which has been rather arbitrarily drawn between sand and gravel by
most writers is that of a diameter of two millimeters. For the applica-
tion of these rules it should probably be raised to five millimeters.
Intraformational conglomerates made by wave action on shallow bot-
toms and not at the shore are readily discriminated, owing to the local
origin and soft character of the pebbles and are not included in this dis-
cussion regarding the significance of thickness.
MUD CRACKS AND RAINPRINTS
In an earlier series of papers the writer has discussed** the relative
proportions of continental, littoral, and marine sedimentation and
reached the conclusion that deposits of the littoral zone, limiting that
term to the land alternately flooded and laid bare at short intervals, are
now and always have been small in area in comparison with the areas of
marine and continental sedimentation. Furthermore, it was shown that
littoral deposits were much more subject to destruction before being in-
corporated in the geological record. But mud cracks and rainprints are
formed in any argillaceous or calcareous mud when dried either on river
floodplains, over playa lake bottoms, and on the shores of either lakes or
seas. Of these several situations the river plains, however, offer the most
widespread and favorable surfaces for the development and preservation
of mud cracks in argillaceous muds. Where the mud-cracked shales
possess both a great horizontal and vertical range through formations
the evidence is particularly strong for a fluviatile origin, as has been
argued in the case of the Mauch Chunk shale of the anthracite coal
basins.*®° The same argument applies to the Triassic formations of the
eastern United States and certain pre-Cambrian formations. Under
such conditions of characteristic occurrence through an argillaceous
formation it is to be concluded, therefore, that mud cracks form one of
the surest indications of continental origin. Several years of observations
since these papers were written have served to strengthen the belief of
the writer in this criterion. A few cases of mud cracks in shales, asso-
* Relative geological importance of continental, littoral, and marine sedimentation.
Journal of Geology, vol. xiv, 1906, p. 550 et seq.
46 Joseph Barrell: Origin and significance of the Mauch Chunk shale. Bull. Geol. Soe,
America, vol. 18, 1907, pp. 449-476,
———
— EE
EVALUATION OF STRATIGRAPHIC CRITERIA 443
ciated with a marine or brackish water fauna, have been noted, but they
are rare and limited in development.
In regard to mud-cracked limestones, however, the case is quite differ-
ent. They are hardly to be explained by modern world conditions, and
in 1906 they were purposely excluded by the writer from the discussion
on mud cracks, as not sufficient data had then been accumulated to treat
them. Since then numerous observations have shown the common occur-
rence of mud-cracked limestones in a number of Paleozoic formations,
and leads to the conclusion that the seas of those particular epochs were
essentially marine playas, extremely shallow pans of sea water. ‘These
were repeatedly emptied, not by the rapidly recurrent ebb and flow of
tides, but possibly by monsoon winds or at longer intervals by extremely
slight changes in the relative elevation of the playa bottom with respect
to the sealevel. A related feature necessary to postulate in order to
permit of such a condition was that the lands were so low or the rainfall
so light that land waste and fresh water were not supplied in large quan-
tities to these basins and the lime sediment was carried into them in
solution by the sea. Land waters supplying almost wholly material in
solution may also have contributed to certain formations. If waste had
been supplied by the land in considerable quantities subaerial deltas
would more or less completely have displaced the abnormally shallow sea
and mud-cracked argillaceous deposits of continental origin would have
been laid down.
TERRESTRIAL FOSSILS AS EVIDENCE OF TERRESTRIAL DEPOSITS
Free terrestrial fossils, plants, and animals——Marine organisms are
not washed inland by any usual process, but, on the contrary, rivers
may carry river and land dwelling forms into lakes or seas. The prob-
lem is raised, therefore, To what extent are free terrestrial fossils safe
criteria of terrestrial deposits? No discussion will be given here of what
groups are to be safely regarded as terrestrial, but rather granting a
terrestrial nature, To what extent may their remains become entombed
in the deposits of permanent water bodies?
As to plants—trunks of trees and coarse vegetation are carried to sea
in abundance by all large rivers whose channels are bordered by such
plant life. Delicate parts, such as fronds of ferns and leaves, can not,
however, be carried many miles without maceration, and their perfect
preservation in abundance argues for the presence of swamps or small
lakes.
In regard to the limitations in the occurrence of the bones of terrestrial
animals, the most definite observations have been made by Hatcher. The
444 J, BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
White River formations of Oligocene age which skirt the eastern base of
the Rocky Mountains and extend outward for distances of from 200 to
300 miles are subdivided into, first, the Titanotherium sandstones and
clays, overlaid by, second, the Oreodon clays, including the Metamynodon
sandstones, and these in turn by, third, the Leptauchenia clays, includ-
ing the Protoceras sandstones. Hatcher gives reasons on structural
grounds and apart from the fossils for regarding the Oreodon and Lep-
tauchenia clays as of floodplain origin. The clays hold, furthermore,
thin layers of limestone which mark the former presence of small ponds
and lakes. The included Metamynoden and Protoceras sandstones are
the deposits of the river channels. Each of these subdivisions holds a
distinct fauna and flora. The clays contain numerous remains of giant
land tortoises and the scattered and fragmental skeletons of such great
mammals as the Titanotheres. The limestone lenses within the clays
are rich in the remains of fresh-water plants and mollusca, whose habi-
tats are swamps and ponds. The sandstones are more sparingly fossil-
iferous, but contain the remains of aquatic turtles, fishes, and crocodiles,
and in one locality the casts of unios were observed in great numbers.
Hatcher comments, further, that the bodies of animals will only be swept
into lakes or the sea while they are intact and distended by gases and
will ordinarily become buried as complete skeletons.** It would seem
possible, however, that even large terrestrial animals might be preserved
intact within the zone of terrestrial deposition, seeking shelter in groups
in the lee of cliffs, or dunes, or mired in water holes. A priori it might
be expected that but little significance could be attached to the place of
burial of a large mammal; but, considering the truly terrestrial fauna,
the observations of Hatcher and general geological experience point to
the conclusion that their fossils are but rarely found entombed in ancient
lake or sea bottoms.
Fized terrestrial fossils, plants and animals.—These are evidences of
the highest value as to terrestrial conditions of origin. Progress in
paleobotanical studies has shown that the great majority of coal seams
consist of the debris of fresh-water swamps in place, though in the case
of bogheads and cannels the seam represents metamorphosed sapropelic
deposits of lacustrine origin, and some deposits of coal may be due to
material drifted into large lake basins by river agency.*S No salt-water
adaptations of coal plants have been demonstrated, so that these as well
‘7 Origin of the Oligocene and Miocene deposits of the Great Plains. American Phil,
Soc. Proc., vol. xli, 1902, pp. 113-131.
“F. E. Weiss: Address to the Botanical Section, Brit. Assoc. Adv. Sci. Science, n. s.,
vol, xxxiv, 1911, p, 475.
4
’
‘
b
GENERAL CONCLUSION 445
as stumps and roots in place show the fresh-water and continental origin
of the beds, As the swamps are in large part, however, on the seaward
portion of the subaerial delta beds, a large part of the associated strata
is normally marine. This is true, however, of the outer parts of the
coal measures only, and on the landward side the whole series may be of
terrestrial origin.
In most of the red bed formations oxidation has destroyed all plant
tissues, but in the Catskill of the Upper Devonian and the Mauch Chunk
of the Mississippian the writer has found the casts of deep-seated branch-
ing rootlets in situ,*® evidence of terrestrial origin of a positive nature,
and especially valuable in such formations on account of the usual
paucity of evidence.
The footprints of land animals, and especially herbivorous land ani-
mals, are most commonly made on the margins of fresh water. Am-
phibians at the present time avoid salt water as a fatal environment, and
a similar antipathy has doubtless existed in the past. Footprints are,
therefore, evidence of terrestrial origin and fluviatile deposition of the
same degree of probability as that furnished by plants. As exceptions
to this rule it should, however, be noted that a marine mollusk (Nucu-
lana) is preserved on the same slab with the oldest known footprint,°°
and footprints of vertebrates in the coal measures of Kansas are pre-
served in shales which hold a few marine shells.**
GENERAL CONCLUSION ON CRITERIA FOR DELTA Deposits
From this review of the criteria which serve to separate the terrestrial
portion of delta deposits from those of subaqueous origin several con-
clusions may be drawn. First, it is seen that it is more commonly the
particular form of a feature, such as cross-bedding or the thickness of
conglomerates or the mode of preservation of bones, which is of dis-
tinctive value, rather than the mere presence of cross-bedding or con-
glomerates or fossils; second, a single criterion is in many cases not
absolutely decisive, and it is the convergence of evidence which makes
strong the conclusion in regard to the origin of strata of a particular
horizon; third, it is unsafe to extend the conclusion beyond the limits
of the evidence to other portions of the same formation. Notwithstand-
4 Origin and significance of the Mauch Chunk shale. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol.
18, 1907, pp. 460-462.
599. C. Marsh: Amphibian footprints from the Devonian, American Journal of Sci-
ence, vol. ii, 1896, p. 375.
10. C. Marsh: Footprints of vertebrates in the coal measures of Kansas, American
Journal of Science, vol. xlviii, 1894, p. 81,
446 J. BARRELL—-RECOGNITION OF ANCIENT DELTA DEPOSITS
ing these limitations, it is thought that the criteria are sufficiently varied
and numerous to determine the conditions of origin of the great majority
of delta deposits. Finally, there should be emphasized the need of much,
broad study of a quantitative nature regarding modern conditions of
sedimentation to determine minutely the characteristics which become a
recognizable part of the buried formation as distinct from the passing
surface features. The development of distinctive criteria must be
studied, furthermore, in relation to the physiographic and climatic con-
ditions of origin. This is a line of progress begun in the early days of
geology, but then essentially of a qualitative nature, and by Lyell made
the basis of the interpretation of earth history. Having grasped this
idea the centers of scientific interest were transferred to the- geologic
record, and the interpretations made by the generation of Lyell were
carried forward without material improvement till near the close of the
nineteenth century. It is clear, however, that a more accurate and
quantitative knowledge of that earth history which is now being recorded
is needed in order to obtain in turn a more accurate knowledge of the.
past. Many of the criteria which in this paper are considered somewhat
indefinite may become definite through a wide and more discriminative
study of the sedimentation now in progress.
}
:
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 447-456 SEPTEMBER 25, 1912 |
A MISSISSIPPIAN DELTA’
BY E. B. BRANSON
(Read before the Society December 29, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
Ee Sele ra 5.65 we a aia iei's) 0 ee Ok Se AGE oh eal ee a ea wk Eve aie ef oe wiiel ape € ale 447
Comparison of Mississippian in Cloyds Mountain and north of Narrows.. 448
Section of the Mississippian in Cloyds Mountain... Bh erik BARE NEE HS
SED SUSI cee eer ge Oe Par ee Ons mare ECad pipe ated 450
IE MEER SENDING 00 oo Vere x atic aps de aka ie ew Reena es Ae oe Ls ar ats ao 450
Section of the Mississippian in the Narrows region................-+.06. 451
Pee TTROMISEE VEN GION oo. sm 2k joc S Soe CA ee ce ws ele abs ev ole aye ees Git d. < via Maas 451
RNIN EBECEET eT GEO TH 5.o ce cie oo <2. Soa oe xed) ath e,'s, o.0-aiie wieletd Qia.s lene SLRs Fis, 8 2 ete ie 451
MRED TIMES TAINS oo Sooeieics oak hed co's Bale k's no aeRO aaa open tear: e's
SIMMER EET ETRE SMILE re core nee dclaieis «wien sd eceiela sess eis ca 's sels mii G,ai eles © 452
IE SEIMEI e as, Aa cs te Selene was um dale ca Ros. wo mma NURS eo aces 0 453
Pe MES TUNE TCE OCONO i. < fs a ceics caw ie cele ces aha de Caeeleuaweenwes 454
The thinning of the Mississippian away from the Cloyds Mountain area... 454
SOLO OL. ENE TCONMIGIONS 0.9) oS kee e cee ale cee wens Be ca ted es 454
EES een at ree a anerraldiacat wei gl ela ge Sak ab bbe eo Wee dae wees 455
INTRODUCTORY
During the summers of 1907, 1908, and 1909 the writer investigated
the geology of parts of Bland, Giles, Pulaski, and Montgomery counties
of northern Virginia. Four weeks of 1908 were spent north of Narrows,
on New River, and two weeks 12 miles south of Narrows, where the
Dublin-Pearisburg road crosses Cloyds Mountain. In the former region
most of the Mississippian formations can be studied and in the latter a
fine section is exposed. The sections are so strikingly unlike that some
time was spent in attempting to account for the differences. The out-
crops occur in parallel belts striking northeast-southwest. ‘The dip is
generally above 45 degrees, and between the two lines of outcrop all
rocks younger than the Devonian have been removed by erosion. As
near as can be determined from available data, the regions were about 36
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society February 26, 1912.
(447 )
448 E. B. BRANSON—A MISSISSIPPIAN DELTA
miles apart before folding and faulting took place, and the drawing that
accompanies this paper is an attempt to represent the original structure
and relations of the formations.
COMPARISON OF MISSISSIPPIAN IN CLOYDS MOUNTAIN AND NORTH OF
NARROWS
The formations in Cloyds Mountain consist of 757 feet of Price?
sandstone overlain by 2,578 feet of Pulaski shale, but the total thickness
is undetermined, as the top of the Pulaski is faulted out. The Narrows
section shows 200 to 300 feet of Price sandstone, 20 to 30 feet of Pulaski
{
83° 82° §1° Scale 1[n. = 40 Mi.
FIGURE 1.—Virginia West of Roanoke
1. Narrows 3. Section line 5. Pulaski
». Pearisburg 4. Dublin 6. New River
shale, 1,180 feet of Greenbrier limestone, 1,350 feet of Bluefield lme-
stone, sandstone, and shale, and 1,200 to 1,300 feet of Hinton sandstone
and shale. The measured thickness at Narrows is about 4,000 feet and
in Cloyds Mountain 3,338 feet, but as the top is missing in the latter the
total thickness may be as great or greater than at Narrows.
SECTION OF THE MISSISSIPPIAN IN CLoyps MOUNTAIN
PULASKI SHALE
The Pulaski is a variegated shale ranging in color through various
shades of pink, yellow, green, blue, and purple. The colors change fre-
2These formation names are used by M. R. Campbell, in folio 26 of the U. S. Geo-
logical Survey, for the Pocahontas area, which lies 10 to 15 miles west of the area under
discussion. |
In his map of the Cloyds Mountain area M. R. Campbell shows no Pulaski along the
Dublin-Pearisburg road, but its outcrops are excellent for nearly a mile across the strike.
The road crosses the mountain about half way between the western end of the Pulaski
outcrop and “Cpr,” at the northern edge of Campbell’s map.—Bull, Geol, Soc, America,
vol. 5, pl. 4.
PULASKI SHALE
quently along the strike of the same beds.
Four or five beds of sandstone, 2 to 15 feet
thick, occur with the shales. No fossils
were found in the ‘formation, though care-
ful search was made for them. ‘The meas-
ured thickness along the Dublin-Pearisburg
road is 2,578 feet, but, as explained above,
this is not the total thickness. The top of
the Pulaski of the southern line of outcrop,
which occurs typically in Little Walker and
Cloyds Mountains, is faulted out wherever
the writer has examined it, and this seems
to have been the case wherever measure-
ments were made by Campbell, Stevenson,
and Fontaine. Occasional presence of mud
cracks, absence of fossils, and variability of
sediments in character and color indicate
subaerial origin.
Feet
Fault with Shenandoah limestone
against Pulaski shale.
Variegated shale, with many shades
of red, pink, yellow, blue, and
_purple. Much like number 4......
. Greenish yellow sandstone, weather-
12.
§. Purplish red, sandy shale...........
S. Like-number 4.....-..............-
7. Fine-grained, friable, brick-red sand-_
7 ES TE a ee 7
Yellow to pink shale........
6. Pink to yellow shale........
Pee shale............... 2
Greenish yellow shale....... 3
5. Greenish yellow, hard, sandy
oe TE Le
Greenish yellow shale...... 5
Purple to pink shale........ 5
BeeOW SHGIC) 25 oe cc ee cee f
a ET 3
Pink to yellow shale........ 12
Purple shale,. 2
BoP Ae OA See 6 0)8
a[[ur 9uUO s[Tenbe Your J[ey-auo : apvos [e}UOZTIOPT
pvol Zinqsieeg-ul[quq ey} UO ULRyUNOJ, spfo[H Jo ylwMUWNS oY} OF ‘RTUISATA ‘SMOIIGN JO YAOU Soll F WOAT vaTT v Suoly
: [BOS [RVOT}AGA
19293 OOO'E STVubs Yout suo
Owp10og a1ofag vzD.4.8 LO WwoUrtpuog WwoYyay,odiR—Z ANAdI
ee Pee et UE NAP RAY OOD PED Fe ME SEE IOP ER
i
! : ie
A i
: i|!
ia
449
SMOIIBN
uleyunoy spAo[D Jo rauing
450 E. B. BRANSON——A MISSISSIPPIAN DELTA
Feet. In.
Red and yellow shale (partly covered) <5... 00... seeelee 85
ark Shaler ji Say oe hata oes fase Nts 373 eee ae ke Pe ee 5
med and yellow sandstones ...é<:4.. a2. << ae eke eee ee 10
Mellow ‘to ‘pink? shale: 32e ee ec ie a oe ee Nha 29
Yellow to ;green: shale... cos woe oak oe 2 hee eae ee ee 10
Pinks shales osc cc ow cig eee eee tls Re Se ee fs wage
4, Green: Shale}: 2c soe eee as. es Oe ee eee ye
Y Gllaiw SHAG ys oa. ea oe eens Bee wae Oe a ee 20
Pink: to ‘yellow. shales. 0 nel at 2 ws welt eee eee 18
Greenish yellow, Shale. ot ann scmar st Vee ie oe en 5
FA: Shales) eek ie eee aie ese eee the ee ae dee 9
Yellowishs.creen (Shales. ....<0 deeec cence oes es oe eee ‘
Red Ashalees ss GS. 6 Oa eh Peete abare a ome ee ee 2:
YeHow Shade e225 ones 5.2 aes eee ee es See ete
Pink. toagreen “shale oe oo ind Sans aan ee Dee ee eee oe ©
Red-Shale. cof lS Se Se iat as Boa acetate oe che eee ee 2 *%
Pink yshale (stam kick nd shang Stale one ete ne eee ee lets
CCR SMANE Riser tee evace ce! clay create eta e J iidle U aictie eit eae res
Brick-red) “SaMdstOne 2). ....10. cine ee ees ee ee foes ns Stes eee 18 le
Pale-ereem to: pink ishale. 2 Ape ieee ee Oe a
Green iSHale oy wos oe Satins 4 ee ee ke oe ee 2G
Red SamdStOMes. Re ake het igre coe &, lle ace Oak Guhl Sheed cee 5 aes
Purple:and ,2reen:.shale:,. . 05. <% cscaeeed: . oe ee eee 2 «dt
PT, (SHAVE VA tite ee oe Ee ileus ug ire te ce eke gee ee S: ves
Greenish shale« (oe 5 snctea os a esc Bettas eee Bee eee 2
: 322
3. Red. to yellow sandstone, friable... 0.6. 522s. os 2.05 os mee ee 12
2. Like mutmiber’ 4 ic oS ics Sic Soe Rapain Goes es ate. 5 eae es 224
1. Hard, greenish yellow, sandy shale.....:...:........ 2.8) oaeeeee sea 40
Total thickness of Pulaski from the bottom to the level,
where it is truncated bya fault......:..:..2..e20eeeee mae
PRICE SANDSTONE
The Price consists mainly of cross-bedded coarse sandstone, with sey-
eral thin beds of conglomerate near the bottom and shales alternating
with the sandstone near the top. The measured thickness is 757 feet.
Three beds of coal, with a total thickness of about 7 feet, occur near the
middle of the formation. No marine fossils were found excepting in
the lowest beds, but plant remains are abundant in connection with the
coal. Lepidodendron scobiniforme Meek,* a characteristic Pocono plant,
is the most common form. The presence of coal, the absence of marine
fossils, and the character of the sediments indicate subaerial and fresh-
water origin. The Price grades into the Pulaski above and Kimberling
below without distinct planes of demarkation.
4 Identification by David White.
= =.
PRICE SANDSTONE 451
Feet
29. Yellow to reddish, in places brick-red, friable sandstone............. 53
NRT T1G SEG) Pree SINNO cso, «os suajeitin Cee uieee © We a hslnis Glee’ wie eames dbl vied ss 5
US ITGES SST Ras so Wats MIR 1 Sa a 9 ee a ee ei nr tra ae 8
TSR SPS Sig CCST Ct (ca eee ee, ne ee ee ee cee Ce ea 6
meaeine-erained, friable, yellow Sandstone..’........ 0c... cceccvcssscens 15
ES TEREST IY SF SUIGUI OS SS 5's ca ni aeaecteeey ane wast ata’ aie mie aun ve Wisle nike aie a a's wie’ 12
ATs VOLO. SIG... .crceoeusttaatond Witter asm ade, score ale baie dy wae 16
ACTIONS HUIOULE £9. clays air a cure Stemepemneiecale vies @itaielere ale w Aa wel ew ag oe ss 12
21. Bituminous shale, with thin bed of coal. Plant remains abundant.... 10
neta, DEICK-TeEC. SANGStONES <. Chiave x sein ke Odo a elie 6 Sleue ee A wine ms et aiaue s 100
19. Bituminous shale, with about 3 feet of coal. Plant remains abundant. 10
ELEN STEN. USAT CS TONG «sc sso cvaiecapeve ace chow Glere Clase a oie tiara deal eels eevee 6
ANSE IS IMIS crc a Ss coh, vt yieiees or cine SZaIC oe ee AOR heaT an oa a aie ee 8 ets 1
eer inely laminated SHAle: 25 se ase wc nee wc wise creed caw nee 24
Poinaminous Shale. Plant remains at bottom. .............0002-s060. 12
5 SE Yas n'a. i04t Eve agnhane’ ifs o aioe wig ©. Whedarenw v smundemierete mpa'e. vibinca pee as 4
18. Coarse-grained, gray to yellow sandstone, very firm................. 19
12. Coarse-grained, friable, yellow to pink sandstone..................00- 23
11. Gray, thick-bedded, concretionary sandstone. Concretions up to 5 feet
7 SE VTELE YET w aS ili Ne IRIS a eee oe nS a ne a br
10. Thick to thin bedded, friable sandstone, some almost shally: gray,
UE RGSTL OS sR SR ee a cr ee Ce 195
9. Coarse-grained sandstone, thick-bedded, firm, yellowish gray......... 10
8. Yellow to pink sandstone, very friable, with a few thin beds of firm
ee URIS EE ER ce Me tN OS oly rane heb ar dal caw il opi ,.0. mee of a wierd pleats! Sne.ara © es
feepanastone made up largely of concretions. .........6 0. cc ween ccenes 3
Seams mostone,. yellow, Stay, PIDK, Ted... . ccd. hoe. eee ne eens 88
moray. Laiek-pedded, conglomeratic sandstone. :...... 0.26.0. cone cesaes 11
MISE TITK (SATION: SUAIGL ois core vol tis bine © etre ee ws me v0 cus wlan awe 1g
PESTS Wao ots. ontop Siem ae ease iene es aieiw: oval dea, a & sole shee be ?e a sknd.m emia gee le wale 4
EA TIN CSAIL Y (SHALE, fe 3. lots as Zonet id eelsh alee wsiels Su, alc wivivleis » o wlaelas ay
1
. Gray conglomerate, pebbles up to more than an inch in diameter.... 6
PRTG KMNOSS = Oly SPEC oh. 3k. Wins otic 's oid a HaletmlereS de Rhuwe ogee 757
SECTION OF THE MISSISSIPPIAN IN THE NARROWS REGION
AREA OF OBSERVATION
Most of the observations on this section were made about 4 miles north
of Narrows along New River, and wherever the Narrows area or section
is mentioned reference is to this place.
HINTON FORMATION
This formation was not measured or described in detail by the writer.
In the Pocahontas region west of Narrows, M. R. Campbell describes it
as consisting of a “variety of beds of calcareous shale, impure limestone,
red argillaceous shale, sandy shale, and sandstone” 1,250 to 1,350 feet in
452 EK. B. BRANSON——A MISSISSIPPIAN DELTA
thickness. ‘The variegated shales would be emphasized to a much larger
extent in describing the formation in the Narrows area. During the
early part of the work in this region the writer believed that these were
the Pulaski shales, basing his belief on the published descriptions, to-
gether with the rather deceptive fact that some of the Mississippian
strata are reversed, owing to an overturned fold. Marine conditions
seem to have given place to nonmarine at the opening of Hinton time,
but recurred for short periods several times before the close of the age.
Evidences of subaerial origin are amphibian footprints preserved in the
lower part, variegated colors of the sediments, presence of partly decayed
tree trunks, and absence’ of marine fossils excepting at a few horizons.
BLUEFIELD FORMATION
It was found impossible to obtain a complete description of the Blue-
field in the Narrows region, but at Peterstown, 2 miles to the east, the
entire section is present. The Bluefield grades gradually into the Hinton.
Feet
15. Dark bituminous shales, with occasional 1 to 2 inch beds of very
fossiliferotis limestone. yi... 65 oi 6 bce oan sc ele ele 0 6 es eer 170
14. Dark limestone and shale alternating. Limestone beds thin above
and: ‘thick “DelOW . v6.60 0c c60 oc alee sw oe os a eubie sa 4) eee) oie 235
13. Dark shaly limestone appearing to be in thick beds................. 148
12. Light-ereen ‘shale. i... e0 oe ved cle on ale « ntahe oe’n bu a nee oe cles 11
11. Bluish to greenish shaly limestone and sandy shale............... 1
10. Reddish to purple sandy shale grading to light green above........ 11
9. Greenish to brownish compact thin-bedded sandstone.............. 91
8. Biwe» limestone «oy.0 5.02. ee 35 oe 6 SS we a fe fe wee bg 15
7. Shaly limestone, blue: to yellow... 5.3.........5..0.+s eds eae 115
6. Light-blue shaly limestone... 0.7000 5006 600 vans oe se 51
5. "Thick-bedded coarse blue limestone... ...*. ..<....005 «06 0 eee 37
4. Green calcareous shale to shaly limestone..... ae eee ae 6 ane 100
3 Green thin-bedded shales... 0... o's ca des ae eels oe ere! 0 oe 192
2. Alternating black and yellow shale... .. 0... 2... 4s... «ene 15
1. Soft ‘yellow, shales. i.c 05 ess cn c's ecele cescae die'e aw em eiky ee ne 15
Total thickness of Bluefield formation’ ............suneneee 1,218
GREENBRIER LIMESTONE
The Greenbrier consists of limestone with more or less chert below
and alternating limestones and shaly limestones above. It is not sharply
differentiated from the Bluefield above. |
Feet
41. Alternating greenish gray to blue limestones and calcareous shales. . 24
40. Blue “Time@sPOMe el sce dale EA ca lete we Sim ete m alieie Wk saite ebyns a aatte ek 160
39. Thick-bedded gray limestone): vices eden vib lew sig ee ys 0p 9
GREENBRIER LIMESTONE 453
Feet
ee eee eI... sc ER a ee ond clo ae nea eee eeeues 7
Ee NER REE ha, Gas co ca mE ia wi hod tis wie wislg le Pe ey ahd ee bierere wtate 16
ion re. TENGE... iat civia Ghia Be sinc a deen av re wtle ve o eb 24
ae. Gray calcareous shale to shaly limestone................c0cc0e0e% 9
mere cee ye MMn ly -FmestOne conde ilele ot wi es RSs de ce cede wae 28
ET CEO a oi nau" a CME etaeele Was wal Maa tee es Gee aa 9
_ 382. Greenish gray shaly limestone (partially covered)................ 172
31. Covered, but grading into thick-bedded green limestone at top...... 28
' 30. Probably like 7, but partially covered.........0....0..ceeceeeeee 80
Seeaike 35 ............... PRP tet oe a oe ne oe ee 40
nar tra Ps VETERE CONUS? oo or he 1D oi ooat Shale eh ak eee ess a alba e eso em 6
a ct Pt ee ne gt heh OS ot Aa Cet ay ate’ ota 21
rete na! Poco ho ooo e te a See etree niow ec e% be kee aeee 12
ee cre A we wrk dv Bin Ges ew while a Bain pd ae ae be ee Sm Se 3
IE Ia io os os wa inlet peo alae hs, we Sak Cee oe ewe 6a 2
RS Ni HS cs tt a enh «owen eels Vag okene Cevteww sy 4
a cg Ls nn ae ea Go Wn Wilesimyptinlg, aici e emg MGM x eek 9
IRE Sa SN) Sco 5 kod WLS Khe gm o RE bw slaw aw @ w.bre WeMy yis'd Be 9
et ee alates a’o a Wr weld, eh orncee buxes sms 12
EE Rey eS a ee a ay a oe a wnt meee aes Din sate ee wh 12
IE Ree Woh r ne te ee adie fale ace ee es ew bhad ee tdaecs 1
17. Coarse-grained blue limestone, crinoidal, cherty near the top........ Pp:
Taree Cee ee Se ee A, hdc e edad. Da gd oe wie 28
RPE Me Sa toa oe eh hak: Gis bu nd a wld ole ode wiKiiel d's 2
eT Ae eg tk oans ok ear'erai wim mare din «be eiwin ws Q giantess’ 30
13. Bluish gray medium-grained limestone.................. eee eees 14
12. Light gray to yellow shaly to thick-bedded limestone............... 7
miter bine LMESIONE... 26... ce cece cece ieee ae weces 45
ese hs ts kes Ey pteline cae ale Sea ac wie e @ aed oe 19
® Grayish blue coarse-grained limestone.................0.22ceceees 19
ME Sete cdc, Gatos wi ca aS aoa de nek Senne So w ula n wins wiih gold oc 48
En a ia eds ee Vee a ew neo hwo o ed aene wn bee yew ees 9
eee Ery Sniy: WMmeNTORE 22S So ale eR Oe es ee She we lg wae eee 14
IERIE Sod Soc rel he ute Soke cgi Sh 3 eid eels he Se BS Hee dws 2
ES iS i a ee Saeco Si aaa atlas aioe at «da bideat pein 36
3. Blue limestone PERI CORI POEE ee dew care ea awk gle « @ 112
=aemeriy Dine limestone, chert black...........0.0.cc ccc cece cca cteces 32
= very dark blue thin-bedded limestone. ...............ccccccecceee 54
eR SS eS a 1,240
PULASKI SHALES
The Pulaski is 22 feet thick here compared to nearly 3,000 in the
Cloyds Mountain section. It consists of the same kinds of shale as in
5 This section was measured by Mr. H. E. Wilson 3 miles west of the Narrows area,
along the Norfolk and Western Railway. The writer examined the section after Mr.
Wilson had described it.
454 E. B. BRANSON—A MISSISSIPPIAN DELTA
the southern area, but bears some coal. The change from the Pulaski to
the Greenbrier is abrupt.
Feet In.
9. Light gray to blue gray, thin to thick bedded, calcareous shale.... 11
§; Greenish gray Shale. 2 o....4 20oes os eos se be eee eee Bi Ry
7: Compact, red ‘shale?.:2..¢sa0. 0030020) ee eee 1 oe Sa it
6. Greenish gray shale, slightly micaceous, streaked with carbonaceous
material. and limonite. A. few inches to...) >.-les. 9... eee eee — 1
De Maik. Tess 6G EE Ces Bleek f Denkeneena tener one Se we i
Be Ta) 6 oho ie bw ae Ric oe bitaigns ol gyal s, © ieee ttle, es Se ee tor
Be Like 0 5 ceec Se wile a Sees, cea me Demo eee ee ee By ae
Ber MaKe GSS svc ee as etn aie wie le ble wales spews wastes Panter Pee 5
1. Carbonaceous. shalé to coal... 25.42.00. oh.cc ees eee Dee eee 4
Contact with the Price sandstone. 22
PRICE SANDSTONE (POCONO)
In the Narrows section the Kimberling shale is faulted up against the
Greenbrier limestone and no Price outcrops. Three miles to the west
along the Norfolk and Western Railway an outcrop occurs, but part of
the formation is faulted out. The thickness is estimated at 200 to 300
feet, but the estimate is not based on sufficient data. Well data to the
north give no aid, as it is impossible to determine the bottom of the
formation from such data.
THE THINNING OF THE MISSISSIPPIAN AWAY FROM THE CLOYDS
MountvAIN AREA
The Pulaski thins to the northeast, north, northwest, and southwest
from the Cloyds Mountain region and is absent east and southeast. In
the Max Meadows region, 30 miles southwest, the Greenbrier rests on
the Price and the Pulaski is absent. In the area described in the Poco-
hontas folio, which begins about 15 miles west of the Cloyds Mountain
section, the Pulaski is 30 to 300 feet thick, apparently being thickest
nearest the Cloyds Mountain area and thinning away from it. Fifty
miles northeast it is 200 to 300 feet thick, but the top may be absent.
The Price sandstone thins in the same directions as the Pulaski, gener-
ally falling from 757 feet to 200 or 300 feet within a few miles.
INTERPRETATION OF THE CONDITIONS
The following is presented as an interpretation of the history of these
regions in Mississippian time. With the close of the Devonian or early
in the Mississippian the sea basin from north of Narrows to south of
Cloyds Mountain was filled above sealevel and coastal swamps in which
INTERPRETATIONS OF THE CONDITIONS 455
abundant vegetation grew prevailed. Sinking incident to the consoli-
dation of fhe underlying 5,000 feet of Devonian sediments and to crustal
warping kept the land near sealevel while the Price was being deposited.
During Pulaski time subaerial sedimentation continued in the southern
area and the southern shoreline of the Appalachian Sea lay north of
Cloyds Mountain.
In the Narrows area, originally 30 miles to the north, subaerial con-
ditions of sedimentation ceased after 300 feet of sandstone, shale, and
coal had been formed. The sea then advanced from the north and lime-
stone-forming conditions began. During the deposition of 1,200 feet of
limestone of the Greenbrier sedimentation was nearly uniform, but fol-
lowing this the shoreline again retreated from the south, the water be-
came turbid at intervals, and alternating sands, muds, and calcareous
deposits about 1,300 feet thick were deposited. With the beginning of
Hinton time the shoreline retreated to north of Narrows and subaerial
sedimentation began. Most of the 1,200 feet of sandstones and shales
of the Hinton in the Narrows region were deposited landward from the
sea margin, but the sea advanced to the southward and again retreated
several times during the age and thin layers of marine strata interwedge
with thick beds of continental.
The Price and Pulaski of the Cloyds Mountain region are assumed
to be part of a great delta because:
1. They reach their maximum thickness here and thin rapidly north,
east, and west. }
2. For the most part they are clearly subaerial deposits.
3. The margin of the sea was only a few miles to the north during
most of Pulaski time, and conditions here must have been similar to
those of the present Mississippi delta near the sea margin.
According to this hypothesis the Pulaski, Bluefield, Greenbrier, and
Hinton of the northern area are to be correlated with the Pulaski of the
southern. Stevenson believed this to be true, but M. R. Campbell®
thinks that conditions in the Cove region in Wythe County entirely dis-
prove such a correlation. In this region the Greenbrier rests directly on
the Pulaski, but the evidence is entirely negative as to whether any of
the Greenbrier is of the same age or younger than the Pulaski.
CONCLUSIONS
1. During Mississippian time the region of Cloyds Mountain, Vir-
ginia, was part of a great delta and was generally the site of subaerial
deposition.
* Bull, Geol. Soc. America, vol. 5, p. 178,
456 E. B. BRANSON—A MISSISSIPPIAN DELTA
2. Thirty miles north of the Cloyds Mountain region the Mississip-
pian began with the land emerged, but the sea soon advanced* from the
north and initiated limestone-forming conditions, which were succeeded
by marine sandstone and shale forming conditions, which were followed
by subaerial conditions.
3. The Pulaski shale, Greenbrier limestone, Bluefield formation, and
Hinton formation of the northern region are equivalent to the Pulaski
of the southern.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 457-462, PLS. 23-24 SEPTEMBER 25, 1912
BOULDER BEDS OF THE CANEY SHALES AT TALIHINA,
OKLAHOMA ?
BY J. B. WOODWORTH
(Presented before the Society December 30, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
RS on oa kn ba atts Oe geet RIE amd aie amis nel aim elpbaln a of 457
CRAMER EET: NEOHCS (9 nc ete cin Foe e ae/aea an aw ek bo wa ees wG bes 458
ete Carey Shale Pepbles, «us... 0. a cae nwa te can ea eeee newes ewes 459
merememes Of Dlrich........2.0.2.2008 De wind cis Ria Ne Cd aie Rie nee tev Iota e are 459
eT ELCll © GCOMMMENES. | 6440 02 0 Se lee ee be ae beat EON ee 460
re ree MOR NEY PUIG SCA). ob. os sb ccc we wd wb wae big lei cle wes eas 461
Remarks on Carboniferous climate........ sty Be Coe cca aeRO, chat erates 462
INTRODUCTION
The Caney shales, described by Taff? in 1904, were later characterized
as a formation by Girty? in the following terms:
“The Caney shale occurs in numerous exposures through the Arbuckle and
Ouachita Mountains, in the central parts of the Choctaw and Chickasaw na-
tions, respectively. It consists of black and blue argillites, with local sandy
strata in the upper part, and has a maximum thickness of more than 1,000
feet. While most of the Caney is a black shale, the upper portion comprises
beds of a lighter color which may have a different fauna.”
The fauna of the Caney shale is marine. Girty very guardedly re-
ferred the beds to the Pottsville, which reference Ulrich* later proved to
be correct on stratigraphic and faunal evidence.
In 1909 Mr. Taff, in a paper read before this Society,® called attention
to a remarkable boulder bed occurring in the lower part of the Caney
shale. In three localities in the Ouachita Mountains, limestone and flint
boulders were described as bearing grooves and striz, the origin of which
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 4, 1912.
2Joseph A. Taff: Preliminary report on the geology of the Arbuckle and Wichita
Mountains in Indian Territory and Oklahoma. Professional Paper No. 31, U. S. Geol.
Survey, 1904, pp. 33-34.
* 8George H. Girty: The fauna of the Caney shale of Oklahoma. Bull. No. 377, U. S.
Geol. Survey, 1909, p. 5.
£In a note to the author commenting on the paper read before the Society.
5 Joseph A. Taff: Ice-borne boulder deposits in mid-Carboniferous marine shales. Bull,
Geol. Soc. America, vol. 20, 1909, pp. 701-702,
XXXITI--Bvtt, Gror, Soc, AM., Vou, 23, 1911 (457)
458 J.B. WOODWORTH—CANEY SHALES AT TALIHINA, OKLAHOMA
was discussed and the inference drawn that the boulders were transported
by floating ice.
Ulrich,® who shared the investigation of these erratics with Taff,
stated his conclusion regarding the transportation of the boulders in a
brief footnote in 1911 as follows:
“The assumption of locally frigid conditions in the early Pennsylvanian is
based primarily on the fact that erratics of all sizes, some as much as 20 feet
i
across and 5 or 6 feet thick, occur in the Caney shale of eastern Oklahoma.
‘These were transported not less than 50 miles, and many probably were eéar-
ried much farther. No other competent means of their transportation than
ice—presumably heavy shore ice—has been suggested.”
~The doubt expressed by Mr. Taff concerning certain of the strizw and
a desire to compare the striated rocks with known examples of Paleozoic
glaciated stones led the writer, in August, 1911, to visit the most prom-
ising locality for striated boulders in the railroad cut northeast of the
hamlet of Talihina.*
CRITERIA OF GLACIATED STONES
As the question at issue is the nature of the strie in certain of the
stones, the criteria of certain groups of strie may first be set forth.
Glacial striz on rock fragments held between the bottom of a glacier
and the rock-floor or between that floor and a boulder through which
the weight of the moving ice is transmitted are typically scratched, how-
ever deep, by a process ift which the material of the striated stone is
crushed under pressure and removed as powdered rock or fine particles.
In the case of consolidated rocks undergoing glacial striation the re-
sultant strie show no trace of flowage of the rock in the process. This
is for the reason that, however great the weight of the overlying ice, the
crushing strength of ice is less than that of the weaker consolidated
rocks, and the ice will yield before the pressure in the zone of striation
of rock fragments reaches the pressure at which the shearing and recon-
solidation of crushed rock particles takes place. Moreover, the ice,
owing to its property of flowage under pressure, readily permits the
crowding of the stones and boulders used as striating tools into new
positions. In the case of very great pressure it is held by some physicists
that pressure-melting of the bottom ice takes place, and consequently
striation at this point would cease because of the deposition of the rock-
matter in the subglacial zone of pressure-molten water. For these rea-
6. O. Ulrich: Revision of the Paleozoic systems. Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 22,
1911, p. 352, footnote.
7T am indebted to Mr. Robert W. Sayles, curator of the Geological Section of the Uni-
versity Museum of Harvard University, for personally defraying the field expenses in-
curred in visiting Oklahoma,
BULL, GEOL. SOC, AM, VOL. .23; 1911, PE. 23
FIGURE 1.
BOULDERET, SHOWING SLICKENSIDED SURFACE AND PRESSURE CRACK
Ordovician limestone in Caney shale: Talihina, Oklahoma. Photo by Turpin
FIGURE 2.—CHEMICALLY PITTED PEBBLE OF ORDOVICIAN (FOSSILIFEROUS) LIMESTONE
Showing slickensides on protuberance (above ‘Inch’ on scale) where intersected by
plane of gliding in the Caney shales: Talihina, Oklahoma. Photo by Turpin
SLICKENSIDED PEBBLE AND BOULDERET FROM CANEY SHALES AT TALAHINA, OKLAHOMA
~<_
>
a
OE —
CRITERIA OF GLACIATED STONES 459
sons glacial striation never partakes of the schistose structure subparallel
to faulted surfaces whose motion has taken place under earth pressures.
In the case of glacial striation the striw are normally single and those
on the movable rock fragment take diverse directions owing to the fre-
quently changed attitude of the fragment. Only in the case of the rock-
floor or of large blocks lying at the side of the glacier do striw normally
develop in parallel groups, and in these instances the striz retain the
character of single successive scratches made by passing rock particles
held in the moving ice.
STRLE OF THE CANEY SHALE PEBBLES
The striz and scratches on the boulders and pebbles in the Caney
shales are characteristically in groups of parallel striated grooves, in
which the intervening ridges are ribs the counterpart.of the grooves in
appearance. A sort of flowage structure or cleavage pervades the struc-
ture of the rock for a slight depth, showing that the striation took place
under conditions of great pressure, as in deep faulting with slickensides.
In the case of some striated pebbles fragments of a different. rock
remain in contact with the pebbles at the end of a surface of ghding and
striation, showing that the striation has been accomplished by rocks in
motion within the shale body. |
The surface of some of the limestone blocks displays a flowage contour
hike that of clay under pressure. All the phenomena of striation and
flowage of the rock fragments in the Talihina cut coincide with the con-
tortion and slickensiding of the Caney shales at this locality in suggest-
ing the conclusion that the striz on the pebbles and boulders are an
effect of interstitial motion and displacement subsequent to the deposi-
tion of the Caney shale. An ironstone concretion formed in the con-
torted shales displayed the broad striated grooves such as are displayed
on the limestone boulders and pebbles (see figure 1, plate 23).
CoMMENTS OF ULRICH
In commenting on my verbal communication before the Society,
Doctor Ulrich made the following pertinent statement concerning the
occurrence of striated pebbles in the Caney shales far south of the crushed
beds near the Choctaw fault:
“The best of the many striated boulders found by Taff and myself was found
in the middle portion of a gently folded structural canoe far to the south of
the Choctaw fault. The boulder is of flinty chert, its outer surface rather soft
and partially decayed to a depth of one-fourth inch or so. The strive are deep,
though confined to the relatively soft outer shell, and the edges of the grooves
raised as though plowed in a plastice mass; and yet the inclosing shale is
460 J.B. WOODWORTH—CANEY SHALES AT TALIHINA, OKLAHOMA
here nearly horizontal and most certainly not contorted as it is in the Talibina
cut. Your criteria, therefore, do not account for this example. The raised
edges bordering some of the grooves in this specimen are hard to explain. The
only explanation that has suggested itself as possibly competent is that the
surficially decomposed boulder was covered by soft mud when some heavy mass
of shore-ice, studded beneath with fresher chert pebbles, plowed through the
cover of mud and into the soft surface of the boulder. The material thus
gouged out of the boulder might, under the circumstances mentioned, be pushed
aside under the cover of mud and be preserved in this position when the mud
again settled into the plowed furrow.
“Regarding the great majority of the striated boulders seen by me in and in
the vicinity of the Talihina cut, I agree thoroughly with you in ascribing their
furrows to scratching by associated pebbles during the course of movements
within the contorted shale itself. The evidence favoring this conclusion, as
agreed on the ground by Hayes, Taff, and myself, was in several cases con-
clusive. But even here occasional boulders bore strize that could not be satis-
factorily explained in this manner. Your figures 1 and + suggest examples of
the latter class. At any rate your interpretation of these instances does not
seem to me altogether satisfactory. Essentially the same kind of grooving
would have resulted if the pebbles had been embedded in the bottom of fioat-
ing ice and dragged over the rough silica-studded surface of previously
dropped boulders. I have frequently observed boulders in the Caney, some of
them 6 to 10 feet across, whose surface was studded with small projecting
silicified fossils that must have scratched any relatively soft limestone that
may have been dragged over them under the weight of a floating mass of ice.
They would have plowed furrows into the prominent parts of faces of the
moving pebble just as an iron planer cuts the projections off the mass of
evenly moving steel as they come into contact with the stationary cutting
tool.”
REMARKS ON ULRICH’S COMMENTS
As to the striated grooves in figures 1 and 4, which appear from their
photographs to Doctor Ulrich not to be of the nature of slickensided
stones, it should be stated that in both cases the markings differ from
glacial striz in that from point to point the striated surfaces display the
same striation pervading for a slight depth the structure of the rock, as
is the case with the incipient cleavage accompanying slickensides. This
seems not to me to be a characteristic of the ice striation of hard rocks,
such as these Ordovician limestones must have been when transported.
I do not see how these limestone boulders could have been softened by
decomposition without being dissolved. As for the striations on boulders
at other localities in Oklahoma, I have not seen the localities nor the
materials, and can only suppose as does Doctor Ulrich that where grooved
and striated stones occur in undisturbed horizontal beds that the striation
was accomplished by some form of ice action prior to the final deposition
of the erratics. I saw no stones in the Talihina cut which at the time
of my visit struck me as scratched by ice action.
BULL. GEOL. SOC, AM. VOL.- 28, ASTi PE 2s
FiGURE 1.—SLICKENSIDED FRAGMENT OF ORDOVICIAN LIMESTONE, WITH INDENTED
PEBBLE
From Caney shales: Talihina, Oklahoma. Photo by ‘Turpin
FIGURE 2.—SPALL FROM EDGE OF LIMESTONE BLOCK
Showing striation and pressure-cleavage of surficial layer of the limestone. Cane)
shales: Talihina, Oklahoma. Photo by Turpin
SLICKENSIDED AND STRIATED ORDOVICIAN LIMESTONE FRAGMENTS FROM TALIHINA, OKLAHOMA
REMARKS ON ULRICH’S COMMENTS 461
In many cases the striations on the stones are surfaces of gliding in
the shales grazing the side of the erratics. Thus in figure 1 of plate 23,
the grooves and striz spring out from the air, so to speak, the upper
right-hand portion of the boulderet there shown having been covered at
the time of striation by shale, in which the continuation of the striation
must have taken place. The same characteristic is illustrated in the two
grooves crossing the protuberance in the middle of the pitted pebble
there shown. Indented pebbles of small size are common at Talihina
and may be seen at the end of striated grooves on the larger blocks in
a manner to show that the shoving of small pebbles past the larger stones
in the interstitial and other movements of the contorted shales was a
common method of producing the strie and grooves. Figure 1, plate 24,
shows one of these indented pebbles with a prominent groove or trail.
The plastic appearance of the surface of the limestone spall, figure 2,
plate 24, shows how closely the matrix was pressed to the con‘our of the
limestone, and the minute cleavage flakes of the limestone indicate that
the surficial layer of the limestone was like many slickensides walls of
faults in a thin zone of flowage, resulting in an imbricated cleavage, a
feature unknown in the case of indurated rocks under glacial pressure.
Lenticular beds of limestone breccia occur in the railway cut at Tali-
hina, and blocks of such beds occur weathered out on the surface. These
blocks are, of course, not transported erratics. The brecciation of the
limestone has apparently taken place in situ from crushing boulders and
drawing out the crushed and comminuted mass into bedded form.
From the Choctaw fault, as shown on the State map of Oklahoma by
Doctor Gould, southward to Talihina in the railway cut, the Caney
shales are highly contorted and crushed.
FLOATING IcE IN THE CANEY SHALE SEA
As Mr. Talf points out, it is reasonable to consider the boulders and
smaller stones as having been transported by some kind of ice action
from the nearest known exposure of the Ordovician limestones in the
Arbuckle Mountains. Floating ice is naturally suggested as the prob-
able agency, notwithstanding that to have pan-ice at sealevel demands a
greater degree of cold in this latitude than would be demanded for float-
ing detached portions of mountain or plateau glaciers entering the sea
in their zone of melting.
The Caney shales are known to be marine from the occurrence of the
fossil shells in their basal portion, mentioned by Taff and described by
Girty. At no part of the section north of Talihina did I observe beds
resembling the tillite of typical Permian glacial formations.
462 J.B. WOODWORTH—CANEY SHALES AT TALIHINA, OKLAHOMA
REMARKS ON CARBONIFEROUS CLIMATE
The occurrence of isolated boulders in the coal measures of North
America has long been commented on and usually referred to the action
of trees entangling boulders in their roots.* The abundant evidence of
glaciation in the Permian and more remote periods now make it quite
as reasonable to suppose that ice formed on the fresh waters of the Car-
boniferous, and the boulders of the Caney shale, regardless of their striz,
greatly strengthen this view. The Roxbury, Dighton, and other con-
glomerates of the Carbonic system in Massachusetts and Rhode Island,
for which Professor Shaler postulated a glacial origin, appear to be tor-
rential fan deposits laid down in a valley or valleys of aggradation at the
side of a now eroded mountain mass. It may well be admitted that local
valley glaciers. were best calculated to produce the erosion of so much
coarse granitic and quartzite material, the rolled state of boulders and
pebbles being due to the action of glacio-natant streams. This view be-
comes a strong probability in the light of the remarkable breccia described
by Messrs. Sayles and La Forge in the Boston area, where a bed at the
top of the Roxbury conglomerate has all the mass characters of tillite,
including a few discoveries of pebbles with markings which the authors
named have not without many considerations in favor of their claims held
to be of glacial origin. This presumable tillite bed is possibly of Permian
age, but its association with the underlying conglomerates and similar
thick water-worn conglomerates of known Carboniferous (Alleghany) age
in the Narragansett area points to the correctness of Shaler’s theory of
the glacial origin of the conglomerates as a whole.
The modern amphibia, described as “cold-enduring,” “patient of
cold” by zoologists, underwent their first great development in the Car-
honiferous coal measures, and, if organic structure at so remote an epoch
carries any significance as to climate, would lead us to expect that the
Carboniferous climates of middle latitudes in the northern hemisphere
were cool rather than warm. Ulrich’® infers cool waters for the formation
of marine black shales, but these are more in evidence in the Devonian.
Similarly in Europe, Julien has advocated the glacial origin of the
coarse Carboniferous breccias of central France, and Kalkowsky has
argued for the glacial origin of a pebbly shale in the Carboniferous
rocks of the Frankenwald.®
In conclusion, it would seem possible to state that there is evidence for
presuming that the Permian glacial period was preceded in the Car-
boniferous by a degree of cold permitting of floating ice in continental
bodies of water and also in the sea in middle latitudes.
8J. D. Dana: Manual of Geology, 4th ed., 1895, p. 664.
® See A. Geikie: Text-book of Geology, 4th ed., 1903, vol. ii, p. 1060, with references,
10 Revision of Paleozoic Systems, pp. 352 to 361.
Sree “a ee.
451% ae
; €
, Pont
+ A y
hh je
j
4 as od
+ ee : f
oe
Ps hele “~ ‘ ie Be tant - > 3 “ 4 os
reg WV fn is iM4ah ou
4 s Ar Peake
. mente
- ae a
@: rg é be ss) UN ibe
~ = if We We
}
‘ a Y Lie
See ee men ee ee ee
: i ¢ : Pa
a hae LNs
NN" ST PPENS /* y ly
“Seyi a Ot >
. wt, ; a ae J Sa j
LA PS. Hie > anders oat
: , « i : 7 ‘ » >
( } a, \ 4 ™% re : . \ OP in
‘ ak ae VE pat aa ee ee. oe pe, Go
= | Weng sh Vin Willan t “ a
“ "i a Th er - bles 4 en ele Cates io
mia | tf Mi ’ be thy a th, r ; 7 i] gat ‘
7 ' )
a4 mf tT PD! . ms i h, : : . It ©
: as ale” t . | Zf
" eis Ped a f\/
ee RR cat f é
aaa 2 { vs eee te .
¥ " , ‘ \ iN 4 ’
'
i
ve -
—
Oe ee
bY
A
re)
¥
-
SOUTH DAKOTA AND NORTHEASTERN NEBRASKA
VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 25
ho es oe
Feed ee
eh
‘2
Ly J.-E. Todd, /9/).
EXPLANATION
dee ge Altttudes from raitreaal
Su se-+ | barometer. rea
on tavela ana
dings. Contokrs, /0oR,
“ Edge of Wisconsin Iee Shest,
irae Sé
TH? Chensel sf Mspeecasatter
above Migeourt
ee
loc,
_
‘
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 463-470, PLS. 25-27 SEPTEMBER 26,1912
‘PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN SOUTHEASTERN SOUTH
DAKOTA AND NORTHEASTERN NEBRASKA?
: al BY J. E. TODD
(Presented before the Society December 28, 1911)
CONTENTS
VPage
Et ct cachet ewe Se cfcid vints Hn wid shee Od'4 Eee ce Sees So 463
Suemarnnels of the earlier stage..................000ceeececeeee ce WE lage . 464
eee r ainview Channel. ... 6.2... oe eee cece eae 464
acer erineton-OColerigge Channel... 2... cae ee cee we cece eee 464
Channels of the later stage............ ti EIR ee PU ATG Scag ee ei, gba 466
: PeMEMNETIIEOTINONS Ac. emi ens evens ss cele eee neck eaa seats Pee . 466
: 0 ETE BP INUCO) Dect Rp Se Pans oars a 466
| RRM UMS ete 8) at wa oc) d c.fova/e «Wave enim ec o/® Ss = wl cuee Me's tg Se tp 467
3 ESE Maer hes a iene ee UES Ie. ea OER 468
a EE CRONE etree ee ee ts Ne ww dine 0 oo 469
MeiG@onciusions............... ET CAS ie SI Re ak See RO Aa ae ae, aan 470
GENERAL RELATIONS
_ Nearly 30 years ago it was discovered that in the early Pleistocene the
master stream of the southeastern South Dakota region followed the
valley of James River to its present mouth and then the Missouri below,
and also that the present course of the Missouri above Yankton was out-
lined around the edge of the great ice-sheet as late as the Wisconsin
stage.
Later studies made in preparing the Elk Point folio led the writer to
the conclusion that there had been an earlier advance of the ice-sheet
down the James River Valley at a time when the drainage level was
about 100 feet higher than at present. Whether this was during the
Kansan stage or the Iowan stage has not been determined, but probably
it was during the Kansan. At that stage the Dakota lobe extended as
far south as West Point, Nebraska, and the drainage from the west side
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 10, 1912.
(463 )
BULL, GEOL. * . bee
hii = eee Be 8 ie Si ES
; Wag fer $3
‘ Silt VR ot
Deca p . = oS MS oes fy
aan
ff ik ae
Be
rH WW at of)
. Dit th
(
| y
r,
fe? % 4 «
, LH
a\ a
a
ae a | SE EE:
as
MAP OF PRE-WISCONS!N CHANNELS IN SOUTHEASTERN SOUTH DAKOTA AND NORTHEASTERN NEBRASKA
464 J. 8. TODD—PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN DAKOTA-NEBRASKA
of the ice and of the country west flowed south through a channel pass-
ing near Creighton and Plainview into north fork of Elkhorn River.
This old channel is now at an altitude of about 1,700 feet.
As the ice receded the main drainage outlet shifted eastward to a
lower valley which passes near Hartington and Coleridge and connects
with the valley of Logan Creek. This channel now has an altitude near
1,600 feet. Still later the drainage flowed along the present course of
the Missouri, where the altitude is 1,200 feet. During the following
interglacial epoch the channels about Elk Point were deepened about
100 feet—that is, nearly to their present level. At that time the valley
of the Missouri River above Yankton was not in existence, and the Nio-
brara crossed the line of the present Missouri Valley east of Springfield,
South Dakota, and entered the James River Valley a few miles north of
Yankton. Ponca Creek also crossed the Missouri Valley and after a
northward bend joined the old Niobrara near Springfield. A stream of
similar size came past Fort Randall—whether from Pease Creek or Lake
Andes has not been ascertained—passed several miles north of Green-
wood, South Dakota, crossed Choteau Creek near its mouth, and joined
Ponca Creek a few miles farther east. |
The following facts are the evidence on which the above statements
are based. The events are considered in chronologic order:
CHANNELS OF THE EARLIER STAGE
THE CREIGHTON-PLAINVIEW CHANNEL
The principal evidences indicating that an ancient stream flowed past
Creighton are the existence of a shallow valley connecting the upper
portion of Verdigre and Bazile creeks with the upper portion of the
north branch of the Elkhorn and the relations of this valley to the
earher drift. It is about a mile wide and 30 or 40 feet deep near Plain-
view, where it is least affected by erosion. It les between the till-
covered area to the northeast and the area of Tertiary sands to the
southwest, ou which there is but little drift. Traces of the channel
northward have been obliterated by the erosion of present streams and
by the effects of the Wisconsin ice.
THE HARTINGTON-COLERIDGE CHANNEL
That a stream flowed past Hartington and Coleridge is clearly indi-
cated by the extensive gravel deposits shown on the map, plate 25.
This gravel is first prominent a few miles east of Niobrara, Nebraska,
415 to 450 feet above the Missouri, and extending eastward across Bazile
j
he
:
r
%
*
4
eas
a &
*
*
. s
r
- .
. >
n
—*r .
SEMESTER
,
ne
¢
Nat
n
a>
of Su
~~"
-
-
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 23;°19715-PL. 26
FIGURE 1.—BHRODED GRAVEL STRATUM IN BOTTOM OF ANCIENT CHANNEL
Looking east from point FE on the map
FIGURE 2.—-GRAVEL OVER VOLCANIC ASH STRATUM
Four miles south of Santee, Nebraska, looking west-southwest from point D. The
shoulder marks the gravel stratum and the white spots in the road the yoleanic ash
FIGURE 3.—VIEW BPAST-NORTHEAST ACROSS THE HARTINGTON-COLERIDGE VALLEY
PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN NORTHEASTERN NEBRASKA
CHANNELS OF THE EARLIER STAGE 465
Creek to Weigand Creek. It forms a distinct terrace in places and there
are also numerous gravel-topped knobs. South of Herrick a portion of
‘it has either been let down by the undermining of the Tertiary sands
below or been rearranged at a lower stage of the stream.
Some years ago? I regarded these gravels as remnants of a high ter-
race of the Missouri and not part of the Coleridge channel, an interpre-
tation based on a record of elevation at Coleridge which was given 100
feet too high. Later when the gravel was traced past Hartington its
relations were made clear. In places where the deposit has been cut
through by later drainage the gravel remains as a cap on adjacent bluffs
and knobs somewhat resembling moraines,? and they were so regarded
by Aughey.* A view of such is given in figure 1, plate 26.
South of Santee agency the gravel is underlain by a stratum of vol-
canic ash several feet thick, which lies on laminated clay containing
fresh-water shells.°
This ash is shown in figure 2, plate 26, from a photograph taken at
D on the map, plate 25.
At Coleridge, where the Coleridge-Hartington channel passes through
the divide at an altitude of 1,550 feet, it is represented by a valley 3 to 4
miles wide, with its floor about 150 feet below the adjoining loess plain.
This wide valley includes two or three subordinate channels or intervales
20 to 30 feet deep, with broad, flat ridges intervening which may have
been bars or islands in the ancient streams. A view across the valley at
Coleridge is given in figure 3, plate 26. Some features of these old
channel gravels suggest that they may have had a similar history to that
of the Aftonian gravels, lately described by Professor Shimek,® as exten-
sively developed in western Iowa. No correlation can be offered, but the
difference in altitude appears to show that they are not contemporaneous.
It is likely that at the time of deposition of the gravels in the Coleridge-
Hartington channel the drainage to the south was farther west than the
present Missouri River, and probably passed into a lake or series of lakes
in eastern Nebraska which may transiently have drained southward into
Big Blue River.‘ It seems not impossible that both formations are to
be connected with the Kansan ice-sheet, and that the thin deposit of till,
which is found overlying the Aftonian in places, may belong to the
2 Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 158.
% See also U. S. Geol. Survey, Geol. Atlas U. S., Elk Point folio, No. 156, p. 5.
4 Physical Geography and Geology of Nebraska, p. 256.
5 Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No. 158, p. 70.
6 Towa Geol. Survey Reports, vol. 20, and Bull. Geol. Soc, America, vol, 21, p. 81,
7 See Trans. Kansas Acad. Sci., vol. 22, p. 107.
466 J. E. TODD—PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN DAKOTA-NEBRASKA
Iowan stage, the occurrence of which is so problematical, especially in
western Iowa.
CHANNELS OF THE LATER STAGE
GENERAL CONDITIONS
As already stated; the other channels considered belong to the drain-
age of a later epoch when the conditions were considerably changed.
The Kansan ice had disappeared and the larger streams were running
much as before its advent. For convenience these channels are named
after present streams which occupy portions of the old channels. They
will be described in the order of their size, namely, the Niobrara, Ponea,
Mosquito, and Choteau.
THE ‘ANCIENT NIOBRARA
There will here be considered only the old course from Niobrara, Ne-
braska, to the James. Presumably its former course elsewhere was the
same as that of the present stream.
The reasons for believing that the Niobrara formerly crossed the line*
of the present Missouri Valley east of Springfield and flowed over the
divide at Tabor and down Beaver Creek to the James are briefly as
follows:
1. The most obvious evidence is the topography, for the general slopes
from the south as well as from the north converge toward the old valley,
which has now an altitude of about 1,350 feet. The Ighland west of
Yankton rises to altitudes more than 1,500 feet and declines regularly
toward the old Niobrara Valley, and the slope is deeply covered with
drift clays. To the south hes the gorge of the Missouri, much younger
in appearance and exposing older rocks everywhere.
2. There are continuous chalk cliffs on both sides of the Missouri above
Yankton excepting for an interval filled with stream deposits, extending
from a point below Springfield to a little east of Bonhomme. The west
bank is well defined, but the east bank is less clear, perhaps partly on
account of a thicker deposit of till on that side. The interval is about 3
miles wide, but as the stream may cut the bank obliquely the minimum
width is somewhat less. A section of the old river channel deposit in
this gap as exposed in a perpendicular cliff facing the river is as follows:
Feet
Black “Som sesh he oes oe i ee Kine es ce 2
Dark ’ buff. Joess-likke SITs .'c%<,cies vans © ates Asap en ee 12
Darker .‘sou-like . lasyerot. J Cees «occ clas Sane tee 1
Typical .yellowish till... v.sa84% <45 54.08 eee DS
”
CHANNELS OF THE LATER STAGE 467 ,
the last extending down to level of bottom land, which is about 10 feet
above the Missouri River.
Three or four wells along the line of this valley from Missouri River
to Tabor show that the older rocks are about 100 feet below the surface,
which is at an altitude a little less than 1,350 feet.
3. Another evidence of minor importance is the occurrence of boulders
_ of green quartzite of the Loup Fork group at the south end of a gravelly
ridge north of the junction of Beaver Creek and James River. The
source of these boulders probably is to the west, for green quartzite is
extensively exposed west of Niobrara and, on the other hand, it is absent
to the north.
. THE ANCIENT PONCA
The evidence of a former channel of Ponca Creek north of the Mis-
sourl is very similar to that already given for the old Niobrara. Its
_ course was from section 36, township 93 north, range 62 west, northeast
q past Perkins nearly to the valley of Emmanuel Creek, with which it
swings around south for some distance. It left that valley west of
Springfield station and finally entered the Niobrara near where Em-
~ manuel Creek now joins the Missouri. |
1. The topographic evidence of this channel is similar to that of the
_ Niobrara, especially in the fact that the general surface of the region
slopes toward it rather than toward the Missouri. The intervening
divide is about 500 feet above the Missouri, while the ancient Ponca
channel is less than 200 feet above.
2. There are old stream deposits, notably at a locality just east of a high
hill, on the east side of the junction of Choteau Creek and the Missouri.
_ Here there is quite a clear cross-section of the old stream deposits about
ahalf mile wide, with its bottom about 35 feet above the Missouri River.
The east bank of the old channel is well marked at this place, being
partly excavated in chalk; the west bank is obscured by the erosion of
recent streams. The channel is filled with 10 to 15 feet of gravel over-
lain with sand and clay and a capping of loam, which extends to a height
140 to 150 feet above the river.
A ravine cutting the side of the old channel deposit a few rods form
the river has the following section:
Feet
PEPIN “RATIO ATO CIAY. oocis. oe ss we vice ew ele cee eke 24
Coarse gravel, with no northern boulders............... 4
CR NN Rae at Eo ak Pick ase. ing oe 9 tre wie etwas Aces 2
ERIE L 2 oo gm 2x, a cro, Pvtaluidialwie w 06, ux poe ee a we 6
_ The top of the chalk is about 30 feet above the river. On the opposite
_ side of the same creek the chalk rises about 65 feet above the river, while
468 J. E. TODD—PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN DAKOTA-NEBRASKA
a half a mile farther northeast, in the bottom of a watercourse, a cut bank
showed 20 feet of gravel.
There are deep wells in southwest one-quarter of canad 21, northeast
one-quarter and northwest one-quarter of section 28, and northeast one-
quarter of section 29, township 93 north, range 61 west, which show
much sand, while farther east deep wells show only chalk. Northwest
of Springfield, where the broad valley in which Perkins is located merges
into Emmanuel Creek Valley, the bluffs on the west side are less abrupt,
and they are composed of till above and of sand below, while on the east
side the chalk bluffs are prominent. Farther south, in southeast one-
quarter of section 21, township 93 north, range 60 west, an isolated hill
near the creek shows chalk extending high up its east side, while its west
side is a thick mass of sand. Below this place there are chalk cliffs on
both sides of the creek valley, and opposite Springfield depot the chalk
cliffs rise 90 feet above the creek, or to an altitude of 1,300 feet. About
half a mile west of Springfield the surface of the chalk passes under a
thick deposit of sand and gravel. Springs at an altitude of about 1,245
feet probably mark the bottom of the sand in this locality. The sand-
filled valley was traced only a little farther south, and the point where it
crosses the chalk cliffs adjoining the Missouri Valley was not ascertained.
THE ANCIENT MOSQUITO
The ancient Mosquito Creek flowed through the fertile valley north
of Greenwood and along the upper portion of Slaughter Creek. This
valley and the low divide separating it from the Missouri River was
first® regarded by the writer as forming a high terrace of the Missouri,
but later observations have led to the view that it was an old channel.
1. The topographic evidence of the Mosquito Creek channel has not
been obscured by glacial action, as in the case of some of the other
channels, because it lies outside of the outermost moraine. On the other
hand, however, the divide between it and the Missouri is less prominent,
only rising about 100 feet above the old channel, or about 300 above the
Missouri. The channel reaches the edge of the Missouri Valley near
latitude 40 degrees in a col about 190 feet higher than the river. It
follows Mosquito Creek to the junction with Slaughter Creek, then con-
tinues southeast through a slough to the lower course of Cold Springs
‘Creek, which has the same direction, and finally it opens into the bottom
lands of the Missouri. Instead, however, of uniting with the present
river channel it extends across the lowlands to Choteau Creek Valley
and, crossing that valley near its mouth, passes up a small tributary
§ Bull. U. S. Geol. Survey, No, 158, p, 132, Washington, 1886,
oh
* a a ae
‘ “rik
;
"
- :
»v
.
-
~~
Vv a
nd
J
y
~
.
cs
de
7
os
1
Z
2
=
: ie "
}
“
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 2d, 1911, PES re
FIGURE 1,—-VIEW ACROSS THE OLD CHANNEL BETWEEN MOSQUITO AND COLD SPRINGS
CREEKS
South 48 degrees west from point A on the map
FIGURE 2.—ERODED ALLUVIUM OF THE ANCIENT MOSQUITO CHANNEL, WITH THE MISSOURI
IN THE BACKGROUND
View southeast from C on the map
PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN SOUTHEASTERN SOUTH DAKOTA
—— Se CS
CHANNELS OF THE LATER STAGE 469
from the east to join the channel of the old Ponca Creek about 3 miles
east of Choteau Creek.
A view across the Mosquito Valley from the northeast is given in
figure 2, plate 27, from point A on the map, plate 25.
2. Geological evidence is as follows:
Slaughter Creek shows chalk and shale throughout its southwesterly
course as far up as the old Mosquito Valley, where the shale gives place
to alluvial material.
Near the southwest corner of section 2, township 93 north, range 63
west, or about one and a half miles west of the point where Cold Springs
Creek comes out on the bottom lands (point B on the map, plate 25),
there is a fine spring in a deep ravine about 10 rods back from the face
of the chalk wall. The sides of this ravine show that a channel has been
cut 25 to 30 feet into the shale and underlying chalk. This is inferred
from the level of the spring, which is about 60 feet above the bottom
land opposite. ‘The channel, which merges into the river valley about
20 rods farther east, is filled mainly with silt closely resembling loess
and showing but little trace of stratification. It contains widely scat-
tered pebbles. Probably the lower part is sand, although no clear ex-
posure was found. ‘The spring is highly charged with iron.
Chalk banks appear along Cold Springs Creek north of the line of the
north bank of this old channel, which may be a third of a mile in width.
Hastward from this point for several miles the channel is marked by
numerous knolls which have been carved out of the silt which originally
filled it. A view of some of these is given in figure 2, plate 27, from a
photograph taken at point C on map, plate 25.
The crossing of Choteau Creek Valley by the old Mosquito Creek
channel is not clearly marked, but the valley of a small eastern tributary
of the Choteau shows that the chalk has been removed to the proper
depth in a valley north of a high hill just east of the mouth of Choteau
Creek. This feature is indicated on the map, plate 25.
THE ANCIENT CHOTEAU
The course of the ancient channel of Choteau Creek has. not been
traced so clearly as the others and the principal evidence is topographic.
Inside the principal moraine, which here lies on a high ridge of pre-
Glacial or at least pre-Wisconsin age, there is a practically continuous
_ depression extending from the upper valley of Pease Creek across the
southern end of Lake Andes and along the middle portion of Choteau
Creek, running east of that stream for a few miles above its junction
with the Dry Choteau. Below that place it may have run southeast to
+ ‘ x
a POY =i #
“e rs ¥ mi 7
470. J. E. TODD—PRE-WISCONSIN CHANNELS IN DAKOTA-NEBR ASK
the Ponca, as indicated on the map. Along this course the alts
from 1,400 to 1,450 feet, and there is no swell rising more than 20 or i : 4
feet above the general slope. Doubtless the configuration resulted from
the work of glaciers which overrode the region. It is reasonable to be-
lieve that the upper part of Platte Creek from as far north as White e
Lake may have all drained through this channel in the earlier and la
portions of the Kansan stage of the ice. However, no direct evide
of this was obtained from excavations or deposits. The profile of t tl
valley corresponds with the slope of the streams just described, allowi
for about 100 feet deepening during the interglacial epoch ee
Kansan or pre-Wisconsin stage, as found in the case of the James
Vermilion. Its level corresponds fairly well with that of the Hart ngta
Coleridge and later channels, which were occupied by the periphe
waters of the Kansan stage.
CONCLUSIONS
It is believed that the evidence presented above sustains the ae
tation of events as outlined at the beginning of this paper. There 1 1a
also be added with somewhat less confidence the following inferences:
1. The edge of the pre-Wisconsin ice-sheet did not extend so far
as that of the Wisconsin sheet, aot it reached considerably fa far
south. :
2. The Wisconsin ice did not reach as far south as: s the southern ¢
brara and James, were then much deeper and therefore a much -
serious obstruction to extension in that direction. Possibly, ls, |
later ice may have been thinner or of higher temperature. _ ;
3. On the west and southwest, on the contrary, the marginal dra
may have flowed just beyond the edge of the earlier ice, and by its i nt
glacial erosion is tig obstacles, so that the later ice filing the Y
present valley, which is athe west fan the one it Ree in hen pre
Wisconsin time. This was done in a way very similar to the shifti ng
the drainage from the ancient Ponca Creek and ancient Niches
to the present valley of the Missouri, as stated above and shown on |
map, plate 25.
Np os oh ane Roce | F, *,
Y hog rt ot Wan tee a eA
Tit Wes ‘ot 3 Ks are, ati i _ a et o at *
ht aia 1 Sy ae ‘
i I eo \ ~
s a4 fe hae x “ane ° a ee i. » ~~
ae " Qe eines 4 a s ”
; bey. Ane. ¢ ; * iy, of - + :
- a DS *% +h ,
ee ae <¢! >! iy i
: —. a Se
‘ oF x4 = i . ‘ \
: WY, 7 wh
a, et a a met ‘ ..
> Ne; +
‘Po - f
= THE GEOLOGICAL | SOCIETY OF AMERICA
| OFFICERS, 1912 | | Be
ms _ President: ;
‘Herman L. Fatrcutp; Rochester, N. Y.
a Vice-Presidents: - | ig has
ig . 3 pei
IsrarL C. Wurre, Morgantown, W. Va. ‘ dt
Davin Wurte, Washington, D. C. *
. a. ® Fee
“ Secretary: } Fy
is ] EDMUND Otis Hovey, American Museum of Natural History, New York i A -
| | - City is yaa
‘& ‘ ;
aS | Treasurer : ag!
Witt1am BuLLock Saran Baltimore, Md. | fe
a
Rs ‘ : Rilitor: ay: é
€
Jo osuPH Suantry-BRown, Coldspring Harbor, ne Island, N. Y. Recah *
wee” ee : ag
ee LTabrarian: me!
ie oe 5 Sap : i a t »
ay H. P. Cusuine, Cleveland, Ohio Ye
‘i. ) r f ,:
Councillors: mg
meet ae
(Term expires 1912) — mast
J. B. Woopworrn, Cambridge, Mass. N
es CO. S. Prosser, Columbus, Ohio a
%
% i ‘ E We »
aig | (Term expires 1913) ae ck
i : ;
ee J i,
es A. H. Porvur, Fayetteville, Ark. — | a fe
aa Hetwricn Ries, Ithaca, N. Y. | rh
“eas . (Term expires 1914) i ae 2
ar ny SamueL W. Bryer, Ames, Iowa Rint N
ve . Arruur Keira, Washington, D. C. | mf sare af
= ‘ ¥ VOLUME 23 NUMBER 4
DECEMBER, 1912 | Sh
PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY
, AND DECEMBER
3 as
\ CONTENTS
\
Covey Hill Revisited. By J. W. Spencer - - - - = - =
Hanging Valleys and Their pre-Glacial Equivalents in New York.
471-476 —
By J. W, Spencer. -) *- 25-8 > See ~~. 477-4862 =
The Gros Ventre Slide, an Active Earth-flow. By Eliot Black- Tr
welder <2 92-0 OR get oh ne et ee
Geological Reconnaissance in Northeastern Nicaragua. By Oscar S4 re
His Herthey- - - - ue fe te oe - ee ee
Some Tertiary and Quaternary Geology of Western Montana, North-
ern Idaho, and Eastern Washington. By Oscar H. Hershey. 517-536
Deflative Scheme of the Geographic Cycle i in an Arid Climate. By _ ae!
Charles R. Keyes - - - - ~ - - - - = = -+- \ 537-562 a | e.
Glaciation in Northwestern Alaska. By Philip S. Smith - - - 563-5 ee ,
Stratigraphy of the Coal Fields of Northern Central New Mexico.
By Willis: Ts kee -- =.= ee = - - =- +» =) 571-686:
Pre-Wisconsin Glacial Drift in the Region of Glacier National Park,
Montana. By William C. Alden - - - - - - - = 687-708
Mingling of Pleistocene Formations. By B. Shimek - - - - 709-712
Toyalane and Lucero; Their Structure and Genetic Relations to
Other Plateau Plains of Deserts. By Charles R. Keyes- - 713-718
Abstracts and Discussions of Papers not sublshed4 in Volume 23. , . Ps
: E.. O. Hoyey, Secretary - - - - = - + = = =)- JI9-J47
Index to Volume 23 - - - - -~ ~ = 749-758 a
Contents, and Preliminary Pike = Volume Eee See ee 1— Xvi ee
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
Subscription, $10 per year to individuals residing in North America; $7.50 to institutions and
libraries and to individuals residing elsewhere than in North America.
Communications should be addressed to The Geological Society of America, care of 420 lth
Street N. W., Washington, D. C., or 77th Street and Central Park, West, New York City.
NOTICE.—In accordance with the rules established by Council, claims for non-receipt of the
preceding part of the Bulletin must be sent to the Secretary of the Society within three months
of the date of the receipt of this number in order to be‘filled gratis. |
Entered as second-class matter in the Post-Office at Washington, D. Cy ;
under the Act of Congress of July 16, 1894 _—
PRESS OF JUDD & DETWEILER, INC., WASHINGTON, D. 0,
: gh ai sata ae a
Ry wu ae b eo ee, : :
- | wih
BULLETIN, OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 471-476 . OCTOBER 12, 1912
COVEY HILL REVISITED?
BY J. W. SPENCER
(Presented before the Society December 27, 1911)
CONTENTS
: hyo Page
eee teatures of Covey Hill Gulf... .. 00.0. ek eee cece canes 471.
_ Origin of Covey Hill Gulf... 0.0.0... cece cece eee eee e eee eens 474
_ The reputed marine beach of Covey Hill..... 1.6.0.0 sees cee e eee e eens 475
DETAILED ere oF Covry Hitt Gur
“ie This locality has been regarded as a ities point in the study of
fploial dams. It has been most fully described by Prof. J. B. Wood-
_ worth.”
‘The summit of the hill is 1 mile mari of the international boundary
— line and some 20 miles west of Lake Champlain. It is a flattened ridge
: _ _ 3 or 4 miles long, rising on the floor of the northeastern angle of the Adi-
~ rondack plateau. The highest point is 1,113 feet above the sea. Imme-
i ately southward is a flat depression, a rate in width, reduced in part
ite an elevation of 1,025 feet. Both north and south of the depression
gle at rock rise ano ae The adie pas Hall is like eminences
dges. This was evidently the pre-Glacial history of Covey Hill. The
Il slopes rapidly northward, descending to plains 300 to 400 feet above
1 Manuseript received by the Secretary of the Society January.31, 1912.
; —* Ancient water levels of the Champlain and Hudson valleys. Bull. 84, N. Y. State
“15 Museum, 1905, pp. 161-164, 173-174.
| ce _ XXXIV—BULL. GzoL. Soc. AM., VoL. 23, 1911 (471)
472, J. W. SPENCER—COVEY HILL REVISITED
the spillway or broad channel mentioned, now covered by a young growth
of trees succeeding great forest fires.
Its most striking feature is known as “The Gulf.” This is a canyon
with vertical walls 120 feet high, cut out of the sandstone floor of an
outer valley at 915 feet above sealevel, which has a length of nearly a
mile, thus strongly marking the former level of some lake beyond. This
outer valley heads in an amphitheater with vertical walls 50 feet high.
In it nestles a small, shallow lake (at 915 feet), barricaded by vegetable
growth (a@ on map). fi xeda Epa an
The Gulf proper in this outer valley begins as a narrow. chasm 10 or
20 feet wide. Farther on it widens abruptly to 50 feet or more. Con-
FiGuRE 1.—Sketch Map of Corey Hill
tinuing downward, and after another widening, it becomes a canyon 300
to 400 feet broad and 125 feet deep. The vertical walls are in places
faced by steps. In the descent the bed of the stream slopes rapidly, but
not precipitously, and is covered with sunken blocks of sandstone, appear-
ing to have been undermined, thus making the loose stones dip down-
ward. They are not transported blocks. Where the gorge is wider the
talus of broken rocks is abundant, and in one place it has crossed the
channel, leaving a dry basin behind it, as the drainage is underneath.
Even in the dry season considerable water is flowing here, but above this
point the streams are entirely through crevices, so that very little surface
water is seen. During rainy periods, or the time of the melting of the
snows, the torrent is said to have a depth of 3 feet. The strata are
~ dase
DETAILED FEATURES OF COVEY HILL GULF 473
strongly dissected by joints, which are opened for a width of 6 to 12
or even 24 inches.
The lower part of the Gulf contains a lakelet some 900 feet long and
200 feet wide. Its elevation is 800 feet above the sea. Its depth is
ereat, as all the abundant talus, cleaving off the walls, is swallowed up by
the waters. Its depth is probably 50 feet to the level of a lower water
plane (at about 750 feet). Immediately beyond the lake the vertical
walls are abruptly replaced by a V-shaped gorge, with the falling talus
barricading the lake. This lower section has an older and distinct
history. 3
Covey Gulf is relatively a very small trench compared with the channel
floor, of perhaps a mile in width, into which it is cut. Currents which
swept the drift from the surface of the outer channel could not possibly
have been confined within the narrow chasm, which shows a continuous
growth from its head.
The features show that the Gulf was made by a small stream, with its
broadening due to frost action, the drainage basin having perhaps been
no larger than that of the plateau above during two or more episodes,
when the baselevel below was stationary as at 915 feet, thus facilitating
the widening of the canyon. Indeed, the disintegration of the sandstone
has been very rapid. In another locality I found that a small waterfall
had been cutting back into the same kind of rock at the rate of about a
foot a year, not to speak of the frost action.
The terraces mark the abrupt lowering of the water in the higher part
of the gulf, the most important uniting to form the floor of the outer
gorge. Unlike the sharp V-shaped upper portion of the main gulf, the
head of the outer gorge is somewhat rounded, a form apparently due to
the three or more streams which enter about its upper end. This feature
is common where streams unite to form coves in hillsides. The same
might be due to waterfalls, as in this case it is unlike the sharp V-shaped
head of the inner gorge of only a few feet in width, but it is improbable
that different forces make the upper ends of the two gorges, and the
multiplicity of the streams would account for the rounded form of the
end of one of them.
The pond in the inner gorge is situated at a long distance from its
head, so that there seems to be no pronounced connection between it and
any cascade or rapids. The pond in the outer and shallower gorge is
drained by underground channels. About its lower end are slabs of rock,
absent from its upper margin. Their occurrence is easily explained, as
being due to loose blocks frozen in the ice and drifting down with the
ATA J. W. SPENCER—COVEY HILL REVISITED
spring floods. This is a very common feature about small lakes, where
boulder beaches are raised several feet on the leeward side.
Indeed, some shallow rock basins are due to ice expansion in crevices
and subsequent lifting of the loosened blocks, according to the theory of
K. Loranges.* The creviced structure is favorable for this result, espe-
cially during changing levels of water, due to floods or the impeding or
opening of the underground drainage, which was observed as obtaining.
The theory of a pool beneath falls does not seem applicable to the forma-
tion of a pond situated at a distance from the head of the gorge.
The time of the broad flood, sweeping through the depression behind
Covey Hill, was marked by the drainage from a large body of water, but
its duration may not have been long. Indeed, the conditions could only
permit of a relatively small snout of a glacier impinging against the
northern side of Covey Hill, with open water on the western side and a:
district free of ice on the eastern. At the later date of the formation of
the Gulf the glacier was situated much farther away, as shown by the
traces of terraces on the northwestern side of the hill, being the same as
mentioned by Woodworth, at a corrected elevation of 915 feet above the
sea, corresponding to the floor of the outer valley at the head of the Gulf
proper. ‘These features preclude the idea of a sweeping supply of water
from a glacial dam (which could not have been less than 1,025 feet above
the present sealevel) having formed the Gulf.
ORIGIN OF CovEY HILL GULF
H'rom observations in the field the conviction left is that Covey Gulf
was formed by the local drainage only since the time when the glaciers
left the upper part of the hill. What length of time has elapsed since
the ice epoch in this region? Difficulty is found in following and iden-
tifying the old shorelines north of the Adirondacks, although fragments
of beaches and deltas may be frequently seen. Their characteristics here
are unlike those of the Iroquois beach south of Watertown. After allow-
ing for post-Glacial deformation, the height of the Covey Hill spillway ap-
pears to be 50 feet above the plane of Lake Iroquois, the outlet of which
was by the Mohawk Valley. Accordingly, with our present knowledge,
it would seem that the floods sweeping the channel came ‘from a glacial
lake of somewhat earlier date than the Iroquois beach, which bounded
8 Geologiska Fereningens, Stockholm, 1874-1875, p. 343. My attention was called to
this theory for explaining certain shallow rock basins by Professor Bregger, who placed
high value on it.
THE REPUTED MARINE BEACH OF COVEY HILL A475
the lake of the same name. Indeed, at the head of Lake Ontario is the
Bell terrace, with which this spillway might be correlated if the body of
water were as great as that of Lake Iroquois.
THE REPUTED MARINE BEACH OF CovEY HILL
One of the lower beaches on the northern side of Covey Hill occurs at
523 feet above tide. This is the corrected height of the beach hitherto
mentioned at 450 feet, as pointed out by Fairchild, with the new meas-
urement taken from a Canadian topographic map (Chateaugay sheet).
The beach referred to has been accepted by Woodworth, on the sug-
gestion of Gilbert, as the upper limit of marine beaches, and later insisted
on by Fairchild. Of this no evidence has been offered beyond the assump-
tion that it was at the height of marine deposits elsewhere, and on ac-
count of the coarseness of the material that it could not be expected to
preserve the shells, of which none have been found. But on making
allowance for post-Glacial deformation this shoreline is found to be at
least 160 feet above the marine deposits a short distance southeastward,
near Moores Junction, 340 feet (Woodworth). The assumption that
shells should not be expected in the ill-assorted sand, gravel, and larger
stones is not supported, for east of Morrisburg, north of the Saint Law-
rence River, coarse gravels, with stones from 12 to 20 inches in diameter,
have their interspaces filled with Savicava and other shells. These indi-
cate that if the terraces of Covey Hill had been marine there was no
reason why the shells should not have been preserved.
The beach occurring on the northern flank of Covey Hill, at 523 feet,
is very strong, with much coarse materials. Crossing the plain country
for 40 miles to Montreal, marine terraces are there found, but at lower
elevations, except one deposit of different character. This is composed
of free sand with marine shells at an altitude of 575 feet above the sea,
which corresponds to Dawson’s locality at 560 (corrected to 572 feet
for change of datum from lake Saint Peter to mean tide at New York).
But it is at a different locality, where I have myself collected the shells.
These marine deposits are covered by several feet of an earthy mantle
containing stones. On the surface there is no beach structure whatever,
like that of the great shoreline of Covey Hill, at a lower altitude.
As no calculations have been made from the earth movements show-
ing that the Covey Hill 523-foot beach was formed at sealevel; as no
marine shells have been found in it; as it is higher than the marine ter-
476 J. W. SPENCER—COVEY HILL REVISITED
races at Montreal, and as it cannot be correlated with the upper marine
sands there situated, which are covered by a later deposit showing ‘no
beach structure at the surface, there appears to be no ground for assum-
ing this great beach of Covey Hill to be of marine origin.
——— ow
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 477-486 OCTOBER 12, 1912
HANGING VALLEYS AND THEIR PRE-GLACIAL
EQUIVALENTS IN NEW YORK?
BY J. W. SPENCER
(Read before the Society December 29, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
Historical notes on the rise of our lacustrine geology.............0eeeeeee 477
Prcuson concerning the-Minger Lakes... ic... ck cece cee ew eecsecvvsece 478
remciiery Of Pauehannock Falls. oc... ew ccc cn cowed watevee oy 480
Reversals of drainage at the head of Seneca Valley and its excavation... 480
Mateos Glen and its pre-Glacial equivalent...........scececesucccoes 483
Hanging valleys at the head of Seneca Lake and their pre-Glacial equiva-
eee ek es sie ech ees Soaiicra/e cl mlure) div eee, W's, owed betes mie am Rela walee 483
maneine yalleys here no proof of glacial excavation..........-.ccccccces 484
weersnone Gulf and its pre-Glacial valley.........2.....ccccccewccccens .. 484
Pecspece Falls on side of pre-Glacial gorge... .... 2.6 ee ce ccc ccc ces 485
Such hanging valleys in northern New York no evidence of glacial erosion. 485
HistoricaAL Notes ON THE RISE OF OUR LACUSTRINE GEOLOGY
The investigation of the pre-Glacial valleys of the Finger Lakes, or of
the Iroquoian Lakes, as designated by Mr. John Corbitt,? was a natural
sequel to the study of the origin of the basins of the Great Lakes. As
few persons are now remaining familiar with the beginnings of the re-
searches into the history of the lakes, some account of these may be
introduced. A generation ago the most popular explanation of their
origin was that assigning to glaciers the work of having excavated the
basins. This theory was based on the opinion of Sir A. Ramsay, of the
Geological Survey of Great Britain, who said that “the lake basins could
only, I believe, have been scooped out by true continental glacier ice like
that of Greenland,” a belief based on the one fact that the lakes occur
in ice-worn regions. The same conjecture was made in America by Prof.
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 31, 1912.
2 Editor of the Schuyler County Chronicle, Watkins, N. Y.
(477)
478 J. W. SPENCER—-PRE-GLACIAL HANGING VALLEYS
J. S. Newbury, who, to some extent, modified this view by his recognition
of a buried channel under Lake Erie at Cleveland.
DISCUSSION CONCERNING THE FINGER LAKES
At this stage my studies bearing on the origin of the basins of the
Great Lakes were begun by investigations of the buried valleys and sub-
merged escarpments. For this work I was inspired by Prof. J. P. Lesley,
whose interest was aroused by observations of my own, which he urged
should be published at once.* Even without the cause of the barrier to
the Ontario basin being discovered, he considered that the facts, then
made known, “disembarrassed us of the chief difficulty of our best pre-
served water system of the North,’ * and gave the coup de grace to the
belief in the glacial origin of our lake basins. Nor was he alone of this
opinion, for Prof. James Geikie then wrote: “I have always had misgiv-
ings as to the glacial erosion of the Great Lakes. . . . Possibly those
who have upheld that view will now give in. Your facts seem to me, at
least, very convincing. I never could understand how those Great Lakes
of yours could have been ground out of ice.”
My first acquaintance with Mr. G. K. Gilbert was when he wrote con-
cerning this first publication, saying: “The problem of the origin of the
basin of the Great Lakes has always had a great attraction forme. Had
I been able to understand its solution, my working hypothesis would
have been that which you have demonstrated so thoroughly. . . . The
matter has certainly never received a demonstration until your paper
appeared,” etcetera.
Several years elapsed before substantial progress was made by my
showing that the rock barrier, in addition to the drift obstruction, was
due to the post-Glacial warping of the region, and that the pre-Glacial
outlet of Lake Huron was through Georgian Bay and a now buried valley
into the Ontario basin ;° also that there is a buried pre-Glacial channel
between the Erie and the Ontario basins sufficiently deep to have drained
the upper basin. As the result of all these discoveries, Prof. T. G.
Bonney has declared the researches epoch-making. Nevertheless, one or
two, notably Prof. R. 8. Tarr, attempted to revive the ancient faith in
glacial erosion of lake basins.
At first Professor Tarr argued against ice erosion,’ but the following
3 Proc. American Phil. Soc., vol. 19, 1881, pp. 300-337.
4Rept. Q4, Geol. Surv. Pennsylvania, 1881, pp. 357-404.
5 Proc. American Asso. Ady. Sci., Cleveland Meeting, 1888.
°“Evolution of the Falls of Niagara.” Geol. Surv. Canada, 1907, chapters 35-37.
Here are also given references to the original publications,
7 American Geologist, vol. 12, 1893, pp. 147-152,
“ ST
’
DISCUSSION CONCERNING FINGER LAKES 479
year he recanted. Without inquiring what evidence had been found by
borings, or how much post-Glacial tilting had occurred, or if the hanging
valleys had buried predecessors, he declared Cayuga Lake to be a rock
basin. His dictum was based only on the occurrence of the modern
hanging valleys and their waterfalls. On the strength of this one fea-
ture he says: “As the tributaries of Cayuga River prove the rock basin
origin of Lake Cayuga, so also the Cayuga tributary to the Ontario
stream indicates that Lake Ontario is also rock basin.* 'To this I replied
at the time.® Later he says: “I am more than fully convinced that.
the two larger lakes (Cayuga and Seneca) are of the nature of rock
basins.” 1°
That he had not made an investigation of the pre-Glacial equivalents
of the hanging valleys is shown by his own words, writing ten years later:
“Though the existence of older gorges have been determined, in one or
two cases their abundance and their relationship to mature hanging val-
leys were not understood ;” and “The theory of glacial erosion has been
held as the most rational explanation of the phenomena of the Finger
Lakes.” 14 At this time (1904) he published a reversal of this last con1
clusion, saying: “Until the facts opposing glacial erosion are explained,
or until the possibility of the rejuvination theory is eliminated, the cur-
rent theory of glacial erosion recently revived (largely by Tarr himself)
can not be established.” 12 Again Tarr wrote: “The fact that I have been
quoted as an opponent of the glacial erosion, which has not been the
case,” etcetera; but he mentioned the occurrence of decayed rock at
Ithaca in evidence against the late glacial erosion of the Wisconsin epoch.
Now he falls back on an earlier period, saying: “There still remains some
evidence opposing glacial erosion, but none opposing erosion by an earlier
advance [of ice], unless the fact that no deposit of an earlier ice advance
are found in this region is opposing evidence.”** ‘Thus the author still
clings to his theory by falling back on negative evidence in an earlier
period, while abandoning his theory as inapplicable to the work of the
later Glacial period. Even the occurrence of one or two concordant trib-
utaries to the Finger Lakes, as mentioned by Tarr himself, should not
have been passed over, as these in themselves cast doubt on the theory of
glacial erosion, not to speak of the buried outlet at the northern end of
§ Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 5, 1894, pp. 339-356.
® American Geologist, vol. 14, 1894, pp. 134-135.
10See his Physical Geography.
11 American Geologist, vol. 33, 1904, pp. 277-291.
22 Journal of Geology, Vol. 14, 1906, pp. 18-21.
13 Tbid,
480 J. W. SPENCER—PRE-GLACIAL HANGING VALLEYS
Cayuga Lake, or of the northward warping of the earth’s crust in that
region, which show that Cayuga Lake is not rock basin.
HANGING VALLEY OF TAUGHANNOCK FALLS
I visited Taughannock Falls, in the most important hanging valley
adjacent to Cayuga Lake. The gorge is excavated out of the jointed
Devonian shales favorable for the production of vertical walls. Imme-
diately north of this stream is a partly reopened buried valley, described
by Prof. James Hall in 1842. It is plain that this was the course of the
ancient drainage of the plateau, which becoming obstructed during the
glacial period was diverted to the present course of Taughannock Falls.
REVERSALS OF DRAINAGE AT THE HEAD OF SENECA VALLEY AND ITS
EXCAVATION
Seneca Lake is even more interesting. In ascending the valley from
the lake to the summit, at Horseheads (from 443 to 914 feet above the
sea), a deep valley (more than 158 feet) has been found by borings. At
Horseheads these do not reach to bedrock, but show the valley floor to be
less than 756 feet above tide. If only 75 feet of the drift filling were
removed (at A-B on figure 1) the Chemung River, with the Cohocton,
would be turned northeastward in a broad valley and discharge through
Seneca Lake, while the present course is along a narrow rock-bound
channel to the Susquehanna. Originally the Cohocton and other streams
flowed southward at a high level, but in the early history of the Seneca
Valley the north-bound waters encroached on the plateau and robbed the
south-flowing streams. Then the drainage through Seneca Valley was in-
creased 12 or 15 fold, with a deep channel developing more rapidly than
the hill on either side could be worn down by their restricted drainage.
With the deposits of the glacial period a barrier was formed which turned
the Chemung and associated streams southward from Seneca Valley.
A word may be added with regard to Seneca Lake. The deepest sound-
ing is 612 feet, but a boring at the head of the lake was said to reach
1,000 feet below the surface. This well has been cited as the evidence of
the depth of the drift. Concerning it, Mr. John Clute, the manager of
the salt company, who caused the boring to be made, stated to me that
it was in quicksand, but no detailed record or samples were kept. The
salt wells on the side of the valley require to be cased to a depth of 1,100
feet on account of the character of the rock. These facts throw doubt
on the reported depth of the drift found in the well.
li ah Ni al Nila
SS =-6h6hc'>. +. ° °° °° °»«4«°.™
REVERSALS OF DRAINAGE 481
From the many borings, Mr. Clute found that there is a bed of pure
salt 200 feet thick, and also other beds of salt and shale, so that the
whole series is 900 feet thick. The formation extends northward and
underlies the widest part of Seneca Lake, rising at the rate of nearly 25
® Rochester
)
| Wat cf
\
\
\
\ ~
~N
Anh Aesehivad
ee iB )
Q El mira
FIGURE 1.—Sketch Map of Region adjacent to Seneca and Cayuga Lakes
Showing the pre-Glacial drainage basins
feet per mile. The overlying strata are there broken and undulating, as
if a local subsidence had occurred.
From the absence of a rock barrier as found by borings and on account
of the post-Glacial northward warping, it appears that Cayuga Lake is
not a rock basin; but no borings have been made in the line of Seneca
482
See he SPENCER—PRE-GLACIAL HANGING VALLEYS
Lake showing the maximum depth of the drift filling, beyond the fact
that it is more than 250 feet at the side of the valley. Its direction leads
Glern£ ldridge
Hector falls
Excelsior Gle
Dh el eae :
Ficurn 2.—Sketch Map at Head of Seneca Lake
to Sodus Bay, which is manifestly a continuation of the valley of Seneca
Lake, excavated through the hard strata into soft shales, so that there
WATKINS GLEN AND ITS PRE-GLACIAL EQUIVALENT 483
should be no conjecture that Seneca Lake is a rock basin until such be
proved.
WATKINS GLEN AND ITS PRE-GLACIAL EQUIVALENT
However, if further investigations should show that Seneca Lake (the
bottom of which is above that of Lake Ontario) is partly barricaded by
rock, there would be strong suspicion that its basin was partly due to the
sinking of the floor, owing to solution and removal of underlying salt,
which explanation is not needed for Cayuga Lake, nor indeed is it needed
here on account of known facts.
The high country back of Watkins Glen calls for an ancient drainage
in the direction of that of the present time, but a passing visit would not
leave the impression that such did formerly exist. The rock-walled glen
is 1.38 miles in length, rising from 443 feet above the sea to 850 feet
beneath the railway bridge (which is 1,015 feet above tide). It is a
narrow fissure in the jointed Devonian shales which has been opened by
the modern streams. Immediately above the bridge is an enlarged em-
bayment (see figure 2), the northern side and eastern end of which are
bounded by banks of drift. Above the bridge the rocky glen becomes a
wider valley excavated out of drift, with the rock appearing at only a
few points. Here is the great pre-Glacial valley of the district. To the
north of the rock-bound glen the ancient valley is not open, but it is
found by borings, which réach to 150 feet or more in depth without
encountering the bedrock (Corbitt). The reopened cove above the rail-
way bridge is a repetition of the features of the Whirlpool at Niagara.
HANGING VALLEYS AT THE HEAD oF SENECA LAKE AND THEIR PRE-
GLACIAL EQUIVALENTS
Three miles up the Seneca Valley is Montour Falls cascading over the
rocky side of the trunk valley. Its small stream has not yet cut a gorge
more than 25 feet in length. Half a mile to the north is Aunt Sarahs
Fall (named after an Indian woman), also descending over the side of the
valley. Between these falls is a dry valley in drift heading in the higher
country. Along its course, at three-quarters of a mile from its mouth,
Mr. Corbitt and others sunk a well in drift to a depth of 150 feet with-
out reaching rock. The pre-Glacial representative of both of the modern
hanging valleys is seen in dry valley between them.
At 300 feet above the eastern side of the lake is a peneplain. Here
Hector Falls, descending in cascades, has receded only a few feet in the
484 J. W. SPENCER—PRE-GLACIAL HANGING VALLEYS
rock, but Glen Eldridge is a deeper trench. ‘To the south is Excelsior
Glen, with a much longer gorge, although the stream is insignificant.
This glen owes its size to the reopening of a buried valley, where the
stream in part flows over the rocky walls of the old valley. Tug, Hector,
and Texas valleys naturally meet in one, and these in ancient times.
probably came down the now partly reopened valley near Excelsior Glen,
as pointed out by Mr. Corbitt.
HANGING VALLEYS HERE NO PROOF OF GLACIAL EXCAVATION
Thus all of the hanging valleys about the head of Seneca Lake are
found to have corresponding ones buried by the drift during the different
Glacial periods, and do not require any one to evoke the glacial erosion
Ficurn 3.—WMap of the High Platéau dissected by Whetstone Gulf and its pre-Glacial
Equivalent
of the trunk valley, which had been deepened by the accession of the
waters of the €hemung and its tributaries in the later pre-Glacial or
early Glacial days. Where difficulties appear let us go into the field and
hunt for the facts, for the region is full of interest and the details are
not yet all brought to light.
WHETSTONE GULF AND ITS PRE-GLACIAL VALLEY
Passing from western to northern New York, we find ourselves on the
high plateau west of the Black River, which separates it from the Adi-
rondack mass. The summit of the land tongue connecting this western
WHETSTONE GULF AND ITS PRE-GLACIAL VALLEY 485
plateau with the main mass is situated at Boonville, at 1,135 feet above
the sea. Northwest of this town is a well formed plain or plateau at an
altitude of about 1,300 feet. To the east the steep slope faces the Black
River Valley, some distance beyond which the country is underlaid by
erystalline rocks at a much lower level. Immediately west of this plateau
is an escarpment rising abruptly to the summit tableland, about 1,900
feet above the sea. The rocks are composed of shales of the Utica and
Lorraine series, jointed and easily eroded. The summit is swampy, with
a large area drained through Whetstone Gulf (see figure 3). Whetstone
Gulf is a magnificent gorge 2 miles long, increasing to 1,000 feet in
width and 500 feet in depth. '’wo miles to the south, at the Gulf Sta-
tion, on a lumbering road at the border of the swamp, begins an insignifi-
eant gully. The little gully soon widens out into a valley with two or
more tributaries and all, together, make a broad, deep embayment in the
escarpment more than a mile wide, from which the drift filling has been
partly removed (see figure 3). It opens to the lower plain near the
hamlet of Houseville. This was the pre-Glacial drainage valley of the
upper plateau, while that of the present day descends through the nar-
row gorge of Whetstone Gulf. Other similar indentations of the upper
plateau also occur.
Prospect FALLS ON SIDE OF PRE-GLACIAL GORGE
Prospect Falls is situated on West Canada Creek, above Trenton Falls.
lis striking feature is the broad cataract, descending some 25 feet over
the northern wall of a buried canyon, which is only 200 to 300 feet
wide, closed by drift above and below the falls. The outlet of this basin
is through a narrow chasm in the southern rock wall, which is the begin-
ning of the canyon of Trenton Falls. Until these falls had receded to
this point the present basin was filled with drift with no cataract at
Prospect; but as Trenton Falls cut through this rock wall of the buried
channel the drift was removed and Prospect Falls commenced their
descent. This was so recent that the cataract has hardly commenced to
excavate a channel for itself in the newly exposed rock-bed.
SUCH HANGING VALLEYS IN NORTHERN NEW YORK NO EVIDENCE OF
GLACIAL EROSION
Attention is called to these features, showing how that in this lately
ice-covered region the glaciers did little erosive work, and that the occur-
rence of hanging valleys is no evidence of glacial excavations, even in
Ba soft rocks; ee that buried channels may be ent ‘irely
Hee occur where no suggestion of them appears at the sur:
%
Bary: argument can be based on their apparent absence
New ane unless actually proved.
rie Tires ats:
sa
ice
#
4
~~
Wo.” Sts
rit
cay | af
or =
J
Ve
.
wl Ie 2
i pads "EA
a ae!
y
se
a
' Y
~ “
oe
‘ -
ay ms ’
ra ete, 2 ’ fa
‘ os | 3
a \
‘ > |
z
7 T Y
¥. - 12 Ltr ‘
7 ws
7
4 S C4 ut 5 04 : ‘4 "1
A)
} -
| ’
v '
,
’
»
,
*
re
.
Fr
7
-
qy1orm og} 0} AT}ae8 Salddip skvpd snovdejo1y asodxe YoryM ‘s{[Iq 91Bq 9G 71 puosaq pue ‘yy
OY} WO a[GISTA ST YW] oY} JO pus AIMOT OY, ‘SuedsSe PoMAIN}10AO YIM ‘spIqep JO SSBUI Udyog oY} Uses oq AvUT punoisa10J aq} Uy
3qIiS SYLNSA SOUS S3HL 4O ON3 YSMO1
8% “1d ‘LLEL ‘EZ “IOAN “Wy “008 “1039 ‘T1N8
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 487-492, PLS. 28-32 OCTOBER 21, 1912
THE GROS VENTRE SLIDE, AN ACTIVE EARTH-FLOW *
BY ELIOT BLACKWELDER
(Presented by title before the Society December 28, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
I ea) heh Sc ag piace ols ashe, xi navel ww eos serie aielele 0 64 0830 487
Sempemconditions affecting the slide........6...c0.ccccc een cnnececsves 487
I ey Go Shelaig chow airs diy x le'tod oak Rieter d widig’ tw via o's wyuiel sc eae es ee 489
SPTPMMBEROLCTICICS Of the SIGE... 0.00.0 cc cece cece ttes ete decceces 490
EE SEM LEN coi da sc ole wn c's wrope wie bee sie ee ae die wis wane tenes ee ce 491
ENS gL 6 ud iie,s es ss Be a att Nite oad 4 5 491
INTRODUCTORY
Most settlers and others who have recently visited the mountains south
of Yellowstone Park know “the Gros Ventre shde.” Its wide reputation
is due largely to the fact that for several years the landslide made com-
munication between the upper and lower parts of the valley of the Gros
Ventre River difficult and uncertain. Although the name which heads
this paper is the one generally used in the vicinity, it is not quite satis-
factory to the geologist, because it suggests the sudden plunge and im-
mediate quiescence which attend landslides and avalanches in general.
As the facts presented in these pages indicate, the term “earth-flow,” or
even “earth-glacier,” would be more appropriate in this case.
The position of the slide may be found by consulting the southwest
part of the Mount Leidy, Wyoming, topographic sheet, published by the
United States Geological Survey. It occupies the valley of Lake Creek,
one of the many small southern tributaries of the Gros Ventre River.
GEOLOGIC CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE SLIDE
In order to understand the phenomenon itself, it is necessary to know
the geologic structure and topography of the locality. The Gros Ventre
‘1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society January 29, 1912.
_ For the historical data in this paper I am indebted to friends in Jackson Hole and
vicinity, particularly to Mr. Robert E. Miller, Mr. S. N. Leek, and Mr. M. J. Robinson.
Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey.
(487)
XXXV—BULL, GzoL, Soc, AM., Vou. 23, 1911
488 E. BLACK WELDER—THE GROS VENTRE SLIDE
River has excavated its valley roughly parallel to the strike of a thick
series of rocks which dip gently northward. Along the south side of the
valley, therefore, the strata dip at angles of about 10 to 20 degrees away
FIGURE 1.—A diagrammatic Sketch of the Valley of Lake Creek as it is supposed to have
been before landslide Action began
from the Gros Ventre Mountains and toward the river. Locally this
monocline is gently fluted with small cross-folds, and one of these forms —
the east side of the slide. In this locality the prevailing rocks are soft
FIGURE 2.—A diagrammatic Sketch of Lake Creek Valley in 1911
These diagrams should not be regarded as faithful pictures; they merely serve to illus-
trate the general conditions
Upper Mesozoic shales with some beds of sandstone and a little lime-
stone. They range in age from the Morrison and even Sundance (Juras-
sic) formations up to horizons equivalent to the Benton. Soft shale and
clay predominate.
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 29
‘*
Seal
DETAIL OF THE SURFACE OF THE GROS VENTRE SLIDE
Showing the tearing of the sod and the uprooting of trees
es
ee,
2 Pa
hy
*
1 d ,
”
o
i.
‘
ke oe) Sieg 9 es
)
is
SJ
AOP-G}ABI 9G} JO JAVA AIMO] OY} JO d]}S]A9}IVANYS o18 aSeqJ,
SASSVASYO HLIM 3AGIIS SJYLNAA SOHD S3HL JO SAWOG ONIDING 3HL 4O JNO
O€ “Id ‘LLGL ‘ES “OA "WY "OOS ‘10439 “‘11Ng
GEOLOGIC CONDITIONS AFFECTING THE SLIDE 489
The edges of these argillaceous beds are upturned along the crest of a
spur of the Gros Ventre Mountains, and in that situation readily become
soaked with water from rains and from the melting of the snow in
spring. At the lower edge of the slope the Gros Ventre River is actively
widening and deepening its valley, and in so doing undermines the ad-
jacent slopes from time to time. These conditions together favor land-
slide action of one kind or another. What actually happened in the case
of the Gros Ventre slide may now be considered.
HISTORY OF THE SLIDE
Several years ago, before the disturbance began, the small valley now
occupied by the slide was bottomed with a hummocky sheet of old land-
slide material which originated before any of the present settlers came
to the valley. In that respect it resembled many other tributary valleys
in the vicinity. According to residents of the district, the slide first
came into action in May, 1908. So far as I am able to learn, no one
actually saw it begin; but it is believed by some that the initial move-
ment was fairly rapid if not indeed precipitate. When first observed,
the disturbance was manifested only at the head of the gulch, where large’
masses of the slippery Morrison and Sundance (Jurassic) clays had
slumped down along the steeper slopes, overturning trees and leaving a
general wreck. Hither quickly or slowly, the impulse from this upper
mass was then communicated to the old landslide debris farther down
the valley, and that in turn began to press forward, bulge, and crack.
The novel thing about this case is that the movement of at least the
lower part was very slow and yet continuous, like that of a glacier.
A man who passed along the valley of the Gros Ventre River by the
main road in the fall of 1908 said that the jumbled mass of earth, rock,
overturned trees, and undergrowth could be plainly seen half a mile or
more above the road at that time, and I infer from his description that
it presented a steep outer slope not unlike that of a glacial moraine. At
that stage the only sign of disturbance at the road consisted of a long
crevasse on the eastern edge of what is now the slide, but that sufficed to
show that the lower mass was already beginning to move. Day by day
this large crack became wider and developed subsidiary fractures, but the
only sign of movement visible to the bystander was the constant falling
of small particles of dirt from the walls of the crack.
Whether or not motion continued during the winter of 1908-1909 I
have not learned; but in the spring of 1909 the material in the lower
part of the valley slowly pushed forward and its surface bulged into low
490 E. BLACK WELDER—THE GROS VENTRE SLIDE
irregular domes fretted with open crevasses, many of which were several
feet wide. By its advance the glacier-like mass gradually obstructed the
Gros Ventre River, which soon formed a lake more than a mile in length
and several hundred yards in width. This still exists, but the rapid cut-
ting down of the outlet has already (August, 1911) lowered the surface
of the water about 10 feet.
So far as observed, the motion of the slide was not at any time rapid
enough to be actually seen. The evidence of it, however, was plain
enough. It was found impossible to keep the Forest Service telephone
line in repair more than a few days, for the poles would slowly move
down hill or be overturned and thus snap the wire. The wagon road
soon became so hopelessly twisted and broken that it was almost impos-
sible for wagons to follow it without capsizing, and it was no easy task to
cross it even on a saddle horse. Attempts to repair the damage were
almost futile, because in a few days the road would be rendered again
impassable by folds of earth several yards in height or by gaping cre-
vasses with vertical walls. In a short time the old road was completely
destroyed, so that even traces of it are now hard to find. It thus became
necessary for every one who attempted to cross the slide to pick out his
own course, and not infrequently he was obliged to spend some hours
with pick and shovel grading some of the worse places-in order to render
it possible to take a wagon over the slide at all.
According to members of the United States Forest Service, the slide
did not move as one mass, but rather in sections; the disturbance began
on the east side and manifested itself week by week at new places.
Changes progressed most rapidly in the wet spring months and declined
noticeably toward autumn. The slow but apparently incessant movement
continued through the years 1908, 1909, and 1910, but in 1911 had prac-
tically ceased.
PRESENT CHARACTERISTICS OF THE SLIDE
_ As seen in 1911, the slide was a long glacier-like tongue of unassorted
clay and coarser debris (see plate 31), much like till except for the
absence of striated boulders, lining the bottom of a tributary gulch and —
spreading out at its lower end near the Gros Ventre River. At the head
of the gulch the slopes are relatively steep and are seamed with parallel
crevasses, along the lower sides of which the material has slumped down
in waving belts. This oversteepening of the walls at the head of the
valley suggests the cirque at the head of a mountain glacier. Like a
glacier, also, the earth-flow thickens down the valley. Furthermore, in
BULL. GEOL. SOC, AM. VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 31
CLOSER VIEW OF CREVASSES OF THE GROS VENTRE SLIDE WITH DISLOCATED SIDES
The wholly unstratified and till-like character of the material may be seen in the walls of the fissures
i :
SUJABI [[VUIS B JO UOTUA}Sqo ay} AQ poulIOy SBM puOod aq,
MO14d-HLYVA AYLNSA SOUS AHL JO 3903 LSAM AHL AO NOILYOd
ZE “Id SLLGL ‘ES “OA “WY “OOS “10435 “TING
PRESENT CHARACTERISTICS _ 491
its topography the mass simulates a glacial moraine, for it is covered
with orderless humps and hollows, scattered ponds and marshes. At the
lower end the marginal slopes are relatively steep (plate 32) and rise
several feet above the adjacent surface. By obstructing transverse ra-
vines this steep edge has caused the production of small ponds. The
abundant crevasses constitute a novel feature of the surface not found in
moraines. ‘These cracks will, of course, disappear in time, but now they
are conspicuous on every hand.
IMPORTANCE OF HARTH-FLOWS
Older earth-flows or landslides issue from most of the gulches along
the south slope of the Gros Ventre Valley and have been seen at other
points in adjacent valleys. At first glance they are easily mistaken for
glacial moraines, and where both occur together, as below Dorwin’s ranch
on the Gros Ventre, only the most painstaking and critical’ study will
serve to discriminate the two types of deposits. |
In this region earth-flowage of the kind described is one of the most
important processes by which the adjacent mountains are wasting away.
It must be ranked with stream erosion, ordinary slumping and glacial
work, as an important means of getting material from the higher slopes
down into the bottoms of the valleys, where streams can continue the
deportation. That it is of great importance here and in a few other
localities, but negligible in most other mountain regions, I ascribe to the
fact that the operation of the process depends on somewhat unusual con-
ditions: very weak unctuous materials exposed along rather steep slopes,
and especially on slopes in which the strata dip downward: with the sur-
face. It is well known that in most Rocky Mountain and other uplifts
the very weak strata, such as predominate in the Jurassic and Cretaceous
formations, have generally been planed off to lowlands, leaving only the
firm sandstones, limestones, and still harder beds to form the mountain
slopes. This is believed to explain the general absence of earth-flows
from such ranges as the Wind River Mountains, the Bighorn Mountains,
and many others of the Rocky Mountain chain.
CLASSIFICATION
I find very few published descriptions of similar phenomena. In
Science? Mr. Robert Anderson is reported as having described to the
Geological Society of Washington certain earth-flows near San Fran-
2 Science, n. s., vol. 25, 1907, p. 769,
492 E. BLACK WELDER—THE GROS VENTRE SLIDE
cisco, in which unconsolidated material rendered semi-fluid by saturation
with water had been caused to flow. The earthquake of 1906 seems to
have started them.
Mr. Whitman Cross’s photograph and description® of the “Slumgullion
mud-flow,” in southwestern Colorado, suggest some points of resemblance
to the Gros Ventre slide. He thinks, however, that this flow must have
been the result of one or two sudden slumps, but finds evidence of more
recent readjustments in various parts of the mass.
The Gros Ventre slide differs from most well known landslides in that
it had a period of slow and prolonged movement, whereas landslides are
generally launched precipitately and end at once. In Howe’s classifica-
tion* of landslides it should be placed with the mud-flows, in which a
mass of earthy matter saturated with water has flowed like a stiff hquid.
’ Cross and Howe: Landslides in the San Juan Mountains, Colorado. U. S. Geol.
Survey, Professional Paper 67, 1909, p. 40.
4 Tbid., p. 55.
oo eet ie
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 493-516 OCTOBER 22, 1912
GHOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NORTHEASTERN
NICARAGUA?
BY OSCAR H. HERSHEY
(Presented before the Society December 27, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
Sa UEABEEMERT ANNE Vevey a aie coca, fee dig C0 are atw eal © aay jet Siw eee Siake ee Siete peal ela Sow Gol ee 493
STIRS T EMCEE PRR CIEL Chent nite oot se: gia) a lla wifah a) Mcautiote Micrnieatiarelele atarale mi eis lal sie. wesw biel 497
TSS E PONTE oeie-a- a Svar aieleheideere's era's. ev ere hein dove aeluic.ve"aie eee eae be 497
(LESTE SAGO VEU tg a a RU aa ti 2 ny ye a ee 507
Seen ER AREER IE BITE Soe tere co oh) ac oe iata teh ai x, recatercoetejule hs elb-e aoe d one ew sable oe a oe 5OT
2 INP PEDLTSLIST COTE) altar SERBS peste Ue RPS De A area Oren a en Oe 507
MEE PSS MN re Re ge la ee ote er ee aieieia ot ayeial'a’ Wane tale s Wieie’albse se oa A Owe 508
ae HA ETP SIR ge eran Wis fan oop se CARVE Shore Woe oie Sie cD w'acd wrelad Sivlatais pee wie 508
Te re sagen aad ieee Bh deren aera or og ides. aka: on elbhe oa’ e alain uw dniwiavele ee wie © 508°
NE oe ec tay ci ah he, agai le ce a! 6 hat foes Gio wid: wo ose hw. Halole Ware abe o.«) 512
MEE eye Caaf ee cd © eile wialial ace Dia sole chee 4s a10.0 8S oo e's, alsin eddextseee eg © 514
MIEN IM ESONLN em ce nicest ats) coer alc are sites, Sves otc avn Yoel wale SRe eis aPe wis Sielecwinck ane 514
RENEE STEC EDLC TVGE INES wots alec s\siaidials dice «eles ein vile s.er8ow aie eiedeie eee are bee wie 515
Ser IE MI PTICOUIS TOCKS . cs stlk ss ovis coals cave eaneeeciseaivas FM a Sith, ale 516
INTRODUCTION
In the spring of 1910 the writer accompanied a party of mining engi-
neers to the Pis-Pis mining district of Nicaragua. Landing at Cape
Gracias 4 Dios, we ascended the Wanks, Waspuc, and Pis-Pis rivers, an
estimated distance of 225 miles to the mines. Fifteen days were spent
in the district, and then two of us descended the Tunkey, Banbana, and
Prinzapulca rivers an estimated distance of 195 miles, to the mouth of
the latter. Several days were also spent at Bluefields. Although the
trip was too rapid to permit of detailed geological work except in the
vicinity of a few mines, a series of observations were made that seem
worthy of record.
Thomas Belt, who went to Nicaragua in 1868 to superintend the min-
ing operations of the Chontales Gold Mining Company, describes? the
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society December 6, 1911.
2The Naturalist in Nicaragua, Published in London in 1874, (493)
494 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
haysiaH “He 40989 fq ‘onbvsva~n ‘2014481 8td-8id 244 Jo dv 1va60j0ap—{ aunvrg
a? 4 a
‘ oHd7aNys{/P + 4
5 te Sig -9'd ee
DAIA * . .
. . °
. A s
.
“ ; FLITOAHY FLISIONY FAISOYLX
. ”
.
. . .
as
“FSNOH wIMOd S17T04 9
. .
.
. .
BFRON
2 >»
INTRODUCTION 495
rocks in the silver-mining district of Depilto in Segovia as consisting of
quartz and gneissoid beds which he likens to the fundamental gneiss of
Canada. They are soon succeeded, in going down the valley of the De-
pilto, by overlying, highly inclined and contorted schists, “with many
small veins of quartz running between the lamine of the rock.” The
Depilto is one of the headwater tributaries of the Rio Wanks.
He describes the rocks in the Santo Domingo district, which lies about
115 miles south of the Pis-Pis district, as “dolerytes, with bands and
protrusions of hard greenstones.” The “doleryte” is decomposed to a
depth of at least 200 feet. He says:
“This decomposition of the rocks near the surface prevails in many parts of
tropical America, and is principally, if not always, confined to the forest re-
gions. It has been ascribed, and probably with reason, to the percolation
through the rocks of rain-water charged with a little acid from the decom-
posing vegetation.”
Mr. Belt describes a ridge crossed by the road between San Rafael
and Ocotal as
“very steep, and fully 1,200 feet high, composed entirely of boulder clay. This
clay was of a brown color, and full of angular and subangular blocks of stone
of all sizes up to 9 feet in diameter. . . . This boulder clay had extended
all the way from San Rafael, and ranges of hills appeared to be composed
entirely of it. The angular and subangular stones that it contained were an
irregular mixture of different varieties of trap, conglomerate and schistose
rocks. . . . The evidences of glacial action between Depilto and Ocotal
were, with one exception, as clear as in any Welsh or Highland valley. There
were the same rounded and smoothed rock surfaces, the same moraine-like ac-
cumulations of unstratified sand and gravel, the same transported boulders
that could be traced to their parent rocks several miles distant. . . . The
immense ridges of boulder clay between San Rafael and Yales, the long hog-
backed hills near Tablason, the great transported boulders two leagues beyond
Libertad on the Juigalpa road, and the scarcity of alluvial gold in the valleys
of Santo Domingo could all be easily explained on the supposition that the ice
of the Glacial period . . . covered all the higher ranges, and descended in
great glaciers to at least as low as the line of country now standing at 2,000
feet above the sea.”
J. Crawford, the government geologist of Nicaragua, divides* the
country into five zones, the first or central zone made up of “Lauren-
tian, Taconic, Cambrian, and Silurian rocks in the form of granites,
gneisses, sandstones, porphyries, slates, quartzites, limestones, and horn-
blendes.” The second division, a narrow belt on the east of the first,
contains Carboniferous limestones, Permian magnesian limestones, red
% Abstract of a paper entitled “The Geology of Nicaragua.’’ Proc. Amer. Asso. Adv.
Sci., vol. xl, 1891, pp. 261-270.
496 oO. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
sandstones and variegated shales, Laramie brown coal, and Cretaceous
oolitic rocks and clays, gypsum, salt, and slightly metamorphosed sand-
stones. Glacial action is supposed to be indicated by low groups of hills
or ridges of unsorted, generally unstratified deposits of clays and sands
inclosing numerous stones and pebbles, some smooth and rounded,
others angular. Mention is made of a few apparently glacially striated
rocks. The Pis-Pis district lies near the eastern edge of this division,
but the supposed glacial deposits do not extend into it.
The third division extends about 250 miles along the eastern coast
and about 75 miles inland. No mention is made of the bedrock series.
It is contended that this part of the coast has subsided until recently at
a rate equal to that of the sedimentation over the delta of the rivers
Escondido, Matagalpa, Tungla, Wanta, Segoria, and of several smaller
streams. He thinks that during the supposed Glacial epoch in Nica-
ragua the land extended more than 1,500 miles farther east than at
present, and that the eastern coast ceased to subside a few years ago and
is now being slowly elevated, giving as evidences of the latter that the
corals that grew nearly into the mouths of the rivers now are dead at the
tops of their branches, due to the sediment-loaded river waters extend-
ing farther seaward than formerly; also that the atolls and barrier reefs
off the coast have the peaks of their coral formations exposed and dead
above all ordinary tides and storm waves. He also describes two river
systems in the country immediately west of the delta region, one includ-
ing the dry beds of ancient rivers and the other the present river chan-
nels. The former are from 100 to 500 or more yards wide and traceable
for many miles. !
In 1893 Crawford described* “granite outbursts” exposed on the tops
of oval-shaped cerros, and also occurring in two parallel lines of spurs
and ridges that extend northeastwardly for about 90 miles from the
Barbar Mountains to near the confluence of the Rios Wasspue and
Wanque (Wanks). He also describes so-called moutonnéd ridges as
evidence of glaciation over several thousand square miles. They extend
in a series of parallel oblong ridges 60 miles northeastward from near
the base of the tall Barbar and Pefia Blanca Mountains, the altitude of
which is over 7,000 feet above the sea. One of the “moraines” extends
farther northward, is 90 miles long, and terminates at a dike on the
sides of which are auriferous gravels, in which the Rio Wanque has cut
its channel at San Ramon. The “moutonnéd ridge” country has a width
of 25 miles from east to west and the ridges rise 70 to 400 feet above
*Recent discoveries in northeastern Nicaragua, etcetera. Science, vol, xxii, 1893, pp.
269-272,
tie) te
INTRODUCTION 497
the creeks. They are composed generally of unstratified clays, sands,
gravels, and boulders. The latter, 10 pounds to several tons in weight,
are usually angular and subangular and composed generally of aurifer-
ous quartz, granites, syenites, and other hornblendic and feldspathic
rocks. The ridges have been greatly eroded and the boulders exposed.
To my keen regret, my travels did not quite extend to this intensely
interesting “glaciated” region.
Courtenay De Kalb visited the Siempre Viva mine in the Pis-Pis
district and says :°
“The geology of the region is very simple. Along the eastern flanks of the
mountains occur carboniferous limestones, upon which lie unconformably red
sandstones and variegated shales evidently belonging to the Permian period.
Basaltic dykes have obtruded through these rocks at many places, and higher
up all traces of the Permian formations are lost sight of, the mountain masses
being composed entirely of rocks of the dioritic group, largely porphyritic, and
of metamorphosed shales. It is along the lines of contact between diorites
and shales that the veins are found.”
C. Willard Hayes, as the result of a study® of the “Nicaraguan depres-
sion,” thinks that in early Tertiary times the Atlantic and Pacific were
united across Nicaragua; that the country was elevated in mid-Tertiary
times, and this was followed by a long period of erosion which developed
a broad peneplain, above which are residual hills, most abundant at the
axis of the isthmus, where the continental divide was formerly located,
but merging northward with the mountains of northern Nicaragua;
that another elevation (of 200 or 300 feet) resulted in the erosion of
valleys beneath the peneplain, and that the latest episode has been a de-
pression of 100 or 200 feet that has drowned the lower portions of the
river valleys, and the drowned portion has been largely silted up.
W. A. Connelly has described‘ the country rock of the Pis-Pis district
as “a flow or succession of flows of andesite, much fractured and highly
altered near the surface,” and T. Lane Carter says* that it is generally
porphyry.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS
DETAILED DESCRIPTIONS
The Wanks River enters the Caribbean Sea at the end of the promi-
nent headland known as Cape Gracias 4 Dios. The headland consists
5 The new gold fields of the Mosquito coast of Nicaragua. Eng. and Min. Jour., vol.
Ivii, pp. 294-295.
6 Physiography of Nicaragua Canal route. Nat. Geog. Mag., vol. x, 1899, pp. 233-246.
7Pis-Pis district, Nicaragua. Min. and Sci. Press, vol. 100, No. 10, March 5, 1910,
pp. 350-351.
® Mining in Nicaragua, Bull, Amer, Inst. Min. Eng., No. 48, December, 1910, pp.
965-1001.
498 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
entirely of the alluvium of the river and of beach deposits. The river
has two mouths, and all the land bordering on them is very low, prob-
ably only a foot or 18 inches above ordinary high-tide level. Very little
of it is marshy, although there are a few small lagoons back of the beach.
No evidence was seen here of the recent elevation of the coast mentioned
by Crawford.
In ascending the Wanks River, on May 11, 1910, when it was prob-
ably at its lowest stage, the following observations were made: As far
up as the Indian village of Living Creek, said to be 56 miles from the
mouth of the river, but probably about 45 miles, the stream is from 100
to 150 yards wide and apparently rather deep. It winds about in great
~ curves in a broad delta plain. The banks are steep and very gradually
increase in height. At the Colimer ranch, said to be 12 miles from the
mouth, the bank is 6 feet high, of which the lower 4 feet consist of light-
brown sand, the next 8 inches of black and dark reddish material like a
buried soil, and the upper 16 inches of brown sandy alluvium. Shells of
species now living in the river are abundant in the upper stratum, less so
in the dark layer. From the edge of the bank on the north side of the
river level savannas extend back several miles.
In the vicinity of Living Creek the banks were 10 to 12 feet high.
In ordinary years the river apparently does not reach the top, but occa-
sionally it overtops them a few inches and floods the alluvial plain for a
short time. The alluvium as seen from a boat seems largely clay below,
passing to silt above. It is in bands of reddish brown, dark gray, and
light brown. Bars of light-colored sand appear on the inner sides of
curves. No gravel was seen below the village, but bars of fine gravel
appear a short distance above it. The river continued to be about 100
yards wide and to have steep 10-foot banks of banded alluvium, but
there is said to be higher ground at a distance of several miles back
from it. We had apparently passed out of the Modern delta proper into
a broad, alluvium-floored valley, in which the river winds as in the
delta. The country bordering the valley is said to consist of low ridges
and may be the dissected remnant of some older delta deposit. The
tropical vegetation on the banks and the fact that I traveled in a small
boat prevented me from seeing any part of these ridges for many miles
after we were said to have entered the valley between them.
At Sawa the banks are 18 to 20 feet high and no higher land can be
seen from the village. An extensive bar between the stream and the
bank consists of fine gravel, largely white quartz. The alluvium in the
banks is partly sand, partly the claylike banded material. Fine gravel
appears in places at the foot of the sandy bank,
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS 499
Thence upstream for many miles the country maintains the same
character. The river trench averages probably 150 yards wide and 20
feet deep. One-third of it is occupied by the fine gravel bars and the
remainder by the stream, which is relatively shallow and flows with a
good current. The banks of variegated clays or clayey silts alternate
with equally high and steep banks, consisting of fine gravel and rusty
colored sand at the base and stratified brown sand above. ‘The varie-
gated clays may be the back-swamp deposits and the sand banks the
material filling old channels or built up on the inner sides of the curves,
so that both classes, though rather strongly contrasted in appearance,
may represent the same general period of alluvial deposition.
At the village of. Ryapura there was a bar of quartz gravel 4 feet high
and 20 yards wide. The maximum diameter of the pebbles was 2
inches, though few exceeded 1 inch. Some chalcedony and brown chert
was noted. The gravel was rusty colored within 18 inches of the river
level, indicating the presence of considerable of an iron salt in the water
at the low stages. ‘The bank behind the bar was 18 feet high above the
stream; no high ground was in sight from the top, but the tropical
vegetation prevented an extended view.
_ Above a point probably about 100 miles from the mouth the river
trench is about 200 yards wide and the banks 15 to 18 feet above the
low-water stage of the stream. The gravel in the bars has become
coarser and in places has been cemented by limonite into a soft con-
glomerate. Gravel rises high in the banks and is overlain by brown
sand. ‘The variegated silts are scarcely represented. a creeks enter
the river from very narrow V-shaped trenches.
At one place the river trench passes out of the old sand-filled channel
into the variegated silts, where it is noticeably narrowed and the stream
deep. Near the water level the bank has a nearly black layer that is
probably due to the accumulation of vegetable matter in the old back
swamp. Higher there are several dark gray layers of similar origin.
Dark bluish gray and greenish layers and lenses in the fine gravel and
sand layers of the old channels are common near the low-water level and
are probably due to local deoxidation of the reddish brown material.
The dark layers in the variegated silts are more regular and I think
were originally dark in color. After several miles in which the banks
are largely gravel, brown sand appears again and is finally succeeded
by the variegated silts a short distance below Saclin.
At Saclin, which is said to be 115 miles from the mouth of the river,
we encountered the first ground higher than the Modern alluvial plain.
The village is situated on a bluff which rises 35 feet above the low-
500 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
water stage of the river. The face of the bluff presents fine exposures
of the material. At the base is a dull olive gray, claylike material which
may be a decomposed volcanic tuff. Portions near the top are stained
to an intensely red color. The surface of the claylike member is undu-
lating. It is overlain by a bed of slightly cemented gravel, which ex-
tends to the top of the bank and may be 25 feet thick in places. The
pebbles are well water-worn and average between one-half and 1 inch in
diameter (rapid estimate), though some are 5 inches in length. Most
of them consist of hard white quartz, and not sufficient time was avail-
able to determine the other rock species represented. The gravel is
white in color, with a light red stain in the cementing material. The
entire deposit is roughly stratified, but I could not determine whether
it is marine or fluviatile in character. No shells were seen in it.
Springs of water come out at the base of the gravel, as the underlying
formation is relatively impervious to water.
This bluff is the northward end of the so-called “Pine Ridge,” which
is said to extend to the Wawa River and to be represented both north of
the Wanks River and south of the Wawa River. It is described as a
broad rolling upland, in places a succession of small hills, with many
small creeks in the ravines. At Saclin the surface is distinctly but
smoothly rolling, suggesting that it is a remnant of an old dissected
plain, either a coastal plain or an old delta plain. The characteristic
feature of it is the growth of pine on it. It is said that away from the
vicinity of the streams there is no underbrush, but a great open pine
forest. The tree resembles the southern yellow pine of Louisiana. I
attribute its presence in a country which elsewhere abounds in the
tropical type of vegetation to the gravelly composition of the subsoil,
which makes the “ridge” a region of relative aridity unfavorable to the
tropical vegetation. The “ridge” country is said to have a black soil 18
inches deep and below that a great bed of white gravel.
The 35-foot bluff extends to at least a mile above Saclin. Much of
the gravel member is white in color and stands with a vertical face.
The claylike member under it resists erosion and, seen from a short dis-
tance, resembles hard rock. Then the river swings away from the bluff
out into the broad floodplain and is bordered by gravel bars or steep
banks of gravel and brown sand about 15 feet high. The river again
touches the 35-foot bluff on the south side about 10 miles above Saclin.
Bright colors appear, but the bank is largely covered by vegetation.
From the top a plain is said to extend to and connect with the “Pine
Ridge.” Several miles farther upstream the south bank of the river
exposes a section similar to that at Saclin, except that the lowest stratum
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS 501
is lighter in color and from a boat appears decidedly like a rather coarse
tuff of massive structure.
At Kissalya the tufflike stratum at the base of the 35-foot bluff rises
6 to 8 feet above the low-water stage of the river. The bulk of the ma-
terial over it is gravel, in part white, in part stained bright red. As seen
from a boat, the very bright red clays over the dull colored tufflike
stratum seem irregularly interstratified with the lower half of the gravel
formation.
At Mocoring rapids, said to be about 140 miles from the mouth of the
river, there is the first exposure of hard bedrock seen in ascending the
river. The channel at low water is studded with black rocks that may
be basalt. Similar rock appears in the river bed several miles farther
upstream. The banks are Modern alluvium. ‘Then the river swings
away from the vicinity of the south bluff, and at about 7 or 8 miles from
Kissalya it evidently reaches the north bluff. A bank about 60 or 70
feet high seems to consist largely of the light gray, massive tufflike ma-
terial. A little farther upstream a bluff may be seen on the north side
of the river beyond a narrow strip of Modern alluvium; it is covered by
a fine forest of tall straight pines. Beyond on the north is an extensive
pine-clad rolling upland, the highest portions of which are probably
several hundred feet in elevation above the river.
At Soulala (Red Bank) the pine comes down on to a lower terrace,
whose riverward escarpment is about 30 feet high and consists of strati-
fied gravel and variegated but dull clayey silts, judging from their ap-
pearance from a boat. They resemble the variegated silts seen farther
down the river and may represent an early stage of the river’s floodplain.
The banks of gravel and brown sand that represent the Modern allu-
vium are about 15 to 20 feet high. Hence we have here in sight at one
time three terranes as follows:
1. A dissected coastal (?) plain.
2. An old river floodplain partly filling a broad shallow valley trenched
across the coastal (?) plain.
3. The Modern river floodplain partly filling a broad shallow channel
trenched in the older floodplain deposit.
Next the river takes a long reach toward the south bluff and presently
exposes black basalt-like rock under the Modern alluvium and in the
channel. It swings back against the pine-clad north bluff, and thence to
San Domingo the banks of Modern alluvium alternate with high banks
in rapid succession. At the San Domingo ranch the river has cut a
channel 200 to 400 feet wide through a broad undulating ridge of ande-
site lava with flow structure. It has a black coating and resembles the
502 o.H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
rocks seen farther downstream, so that the latter may be andesite instead
of basalt.
Andesite is present in the banks for several miles upstream, but the
rock which produces the Lalacapisa rapids, where examined in the chan-
nel, is a black conglomerate with many quartz pebbles. Above the rapids
for about a mile the banks show only the gravel and brown sand of the
Modern alluvium.
Then the stream exposes on the north side a oa section of the varie-
gated silts and fine quartz gravel of the older alluvium. From the top
of the 30-foot bank a pine-clad, much-logged plain extends back from
the river. At the next good exposure of the Modern alluvium it seems
to rest on a much harder formation of dark gray conglomerate. I sur-
mise that the dark-colored conglomerates seen at many places along the
river, as at the Lalacapisa rapids, are merely portions of the Modern
gravel cemented by limonite.
Dark rocks exposed on the south side of the channel at Wirapani are
probably andesite with flow structure. More of it is exposed upstream,
but it nowhere rises higher than the floodplain, so far as can be seen from’
the river. Black rocks exposed higher up resemble basalt, even to an
imperfect columnar structure, but we did not land on them. It is prob-
ably safe to say that this country has a formation of lava sheets (and
probably some tuff beds) prevailingly andesitic, though more basic and
more acid rocks may be present in the series.
At a bend, probably about 10 miles below the mouth of the Wawa
River, we got our first view of the mountains of the interior. There
seemed to be a peak and sharp ridge rising abruptly from the low plain,
but the view could not be depended on in this respect.
In a bar of coarse gravel several miles farther upstream more than 50
per cent of the pebbles and cobbles were of white quartz. Many varieties ©
of andesite were the most abundant in the remainder. There were also
porphyries, diabase, diorite, red and brown chertlike rocks, probably a
little gabbro and basalt, some chalcedony, a hard quartz conglomerate,
an andesite tuff, a finely foliated gneiss, a black slate, jasper, and an_
amygdaloid, but no granite, limestone, sandstone, nor fossils.
Black rocks, presumably andesite, are scattered at intervals nearly to
Suhie, where the “Pine Ridge” country appears again. Here the bank
exposes white gravel (false-bedded near the river level) sufficiently in-
durated to stand in a vertical bluff and probably the same formation as
at Saclin. Then the river swings out into the Modern floodplain. The
deposit has changed very little in many miles. The gravel is moderately
coarse, of a light yellowish color, and usually rises one-third or one-half
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS 503
of the height of the bank. Above it is brown sand. The banks impress
one traveling in a boat as being 15 to 20 feet high, but may be 25 or
even 30 feet high in places. Of course, most of the year the river is 5 to
10 feet higher.
At Swabin the north bluff, at he edge of the pine country, is a reddish
bank of fine gravel and silt, suggesting the variegated silt formation.
Its surface is even, but some of tlie pine country in sight may be a little
higher. At the upper end of the bluff dull greenish and dark carbona-
ceous layers are present. Thence to the mouth of the Waspuc River the
banks, 30 feet high, are of Modern alluvium, with an occasional ex-
posure of black rock, presumably andesite. That on the south side of
the Wanks River, half a mile below the Waspuce, is a dark brown vesicular
lava of rather coarse crystalline texture. Some of it is decidedly basic in
appearance and some abounds in feldspar phenocrysts. It impressed me
as being about on the border line between a basalt and an andesite, but
the microscope would probably prove it to be the latter. The rock ex-
posed opposite the mouth of the Waspuc is a very coarse volcanic ag-
glomerate, made up of quite a variety of andesites. Near the water level
it is hard and black on the surface, but higher in the bank it is very
much decomposed. The bank is nearly 50 feet high, flat on top, and said
to become stony at a short distance from the river and in a mile to pass
into the pine country.
The trading post of Waspuc Mouth is situated on the floodplain, which
rises 30 feet above the low-water stage of the river, but has been covered
during an abnormal flood by 6 or 8 feet depth of water. No higher
ground is in sight on the south on account of the tall trees. The distance
to the mouth of the Wanks River is said to be 194 miles, but was esti-
mated by us at 145 miles.
In ascending the Waspuc and Pis-Pis rivers to the Big Falls, an esti-
mated distance of 80 miles, bedrock was frequently seen and will be
treated more fully in a later section. The Quaternary deposits consist
exclusively of the Modern alluvium and the soil. The Waspuc River at
first flows in a channel 100 to 200 feet wide, with 30-foot banks of dark
reddish brown sandy silt, with only a few small gravel bars at low levels.
Above the Yahook Falls the banks are only 10 feet high and for a long
distance the river is relatively wide and sluggish. Then narrow rocky
gorges alternate with wide, alluvium-floored sections of the valley. In
one bar the gravel consisted chiefly of andesite of finer grain than most
of that seen down the river. With it were various kinds of fine-grained
igneous rocks, including a hard greenish rock that may be an altered
andesite. The silica pebbles are generally chalcedonic. Much of the
XXXVI—BULL,. Grou, Soc, AM., VOL. 28, 1911
504 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
gravel suggests an older volcanic series than that seen down the river.
A few pieces were doubtfully identified as diorite. No sedimentary rocks
were certainly represented, certain shaly flinty rocks having been prob-
ably altered volcanic material. There were no typical rhyolites present,
though some of the pebbles appeared rather more acid than an andesite.
The Pis-Pis River for about 10 miles upstream to the Yapooketan
Falls is in a trench usually 50 to 75 feet wide, which evidently winds
about in a floodplain. The banks are chiefly the brown sandy silt of the
Modern alluvium. At the falls the river probably cuts through a small
range of hills, as the banks are much higher and more uneven than far-
ther downstream. The river may fall 20 feet within 300 yards. To the
mouth of the Guavel River the Pis-Pis is about 50 feet wide and flows
in a crooked trench largely lined with alluvium. Above the Guavel it is
reduced to a width of about 30 or 40 feet and has the usual alluvial
banks. The stream is a succession of long quiet reaches and short rapids.
The latter are so numerous that one is surprised to learn that the alti-
tude, as determined by aneroid readings, is but 472 feet at the Big Falls
bodega, the gateway to the Pis-Pis mining district.
The topography of the Pis-Pis district is that of an ancient and deeply
eroded volcanic region. ‘The more resistant rocks form the hills. The
principal valleys are generally eroded in andesite lavas and tufis, but
where traversed by hard ribs of intrusive rock the streams cascade over
them in falls from 10 to 230 feet high. The district ranges in altitude
from about 600 to about 1,700 feet above sealevel, but much higher
mountains occur at a short distance on the northeast and northwest
sides. It is a curious fact that although it is on the divide between the
Wanks and Prinzapulca river systems, much more mountainous country
occurs in all directions from it except a small section on the north and
another on the southwest. ‘There are several very low passes on the
divide.
A view toward the south and west from near the Mars mine shows an
unsystematic grouping of many uneven-crested ridges covered by the
almost unbroken tropical forest. Some of them probably rise to 2,000
feet above sealevel. Their crests appear to be narrow and their slopes
generally steep. Between them are rather broad valleys, the floors of
which, however, are not to any great extent even. They are crossed by
low ridges of hard rocks, over which the streams cascade. Looking off
toward the north, there seem to be rather broad-floored valleys along the
main streams, as the Guavel, Pis-Pis, and Waspuc rivers, and the ridges
are low for perhaps 20 miles, but beyond that there are several prominent
mountain ranges apparently trending easterly.
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS 505
A magnificent view may be had from the top of the Lone Star Hill.
Toward the northeast it is limited at the distance of 5 to 7 miles by the
“Wava Peaks,” a high, very uneven-crested ridge, whose principal peak
may attain an altitude of 3,000 feet. To the left and much farther dis-
tant can be seen several long, uneven-crested mountain ranges. Directly
north is a broad, flat-floored valley that may extend from the Big Falls
on the Pis-Pis River to the Wanks River. It seems bordered on the north
by low mountain ranges in Honduras. A little farther west of north
there is a group of high mountain ridges. Ten miles due west (mag-
netic) would take one into the heart of a group of mountains, whose
summits probably average 2,000 feet above sealevel, rising westward into
a higher range. After a group of lower mountains there is an isolated
high peak bearing about south 55 degrees west (magnetic) from Lone
Star Hill. Another high peak may be seen to the left. These are the
Cerro Salai (reputed altitude, 6,500 feet) and the Cerro Pia (reputed
altitude, 6,000 feet). In the foreground is a country of low mountains.
Over all the mountains, no matter how high and rugged, is the dense
tropical forest, except possibly at the summits of the two high peaks.
No volcanic cones are in sight. It is a rather old erosion topography
with some unusual features due to the great forest and the humid cli-
mate. The land has been reduced far below the original volcanic surface,
and if a peneplain was developed subsequent to the cessation of volcanic
activity it has been completely destroyed. In short, all the hills are
residuals, but the valleys are not baseleveled except locally by hard ribs
of rock. The topography indicates the relative resistance to decomposi-
tion and erosion of the rocks to a great degree.
In descending the Tunkey River 20 miles from Barbones, we found
the same alternation of alluvium-floored sections of valley and relatively
narrow rocky gorges. ‘The village of Tunkey is situated on the high
bank in the angle between the Tunkey and Banbana rivers. The latter
stream at about 5 miles west seems to break through a high mountain
range apparently trending north. From the village it flows southeast-
wardly in a moderately broad, even-floored valley, near which there are
several hill peaks. ‘To the south the country is evidently rolling, with-
out any prominent peaks, but northward, toward the Oconguas country,
the ridges rise higher in the distance until they culminate in a high and
abrupt range.
The Banbana River in the first 8 or 10 miles below T'unkey evidently
winds about in a rather narrow valley. The banks are generally 30 to 35
feet high, and consist in part of clay produced by the decomposition of
the bedrock and in part of the brown sand of the Modern alluvium,
506 o. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
Rocks low in the banks, seen occasionally from the boat, appeared igne-
ous. Some limonite-cemented Modern gravel occurs under the brown
sand. At a gravel bar near the landing of the Santa Rita mine it was
difficult to distinguish any rock species except a few andesite pebbles.
The gravel is largely light-colored material, probably produced by the
alteration of sedimentary rocks. here may be some chert from a lime-
stone area, some quartzite and some rock that resembles a decomposed
granite, but there is nothing definite about them. I suspect that the
region is largely one of sedimentary rocks abounding in intrusives.
Thence the river is generally winding about in a broad floodplain,
though it occasionally touches the side of the valley and exposes rock and
low hills. The Wasaki Falls is caused by an outcrop of apparently
igneous rock. The same is true of the Walpitara Falls, though none was
secured for close examination. Below the falls the stream resumes its
interminable winding in the floodplain. Presently we passed a low bank
of dark red stratified material tilted at an angle of about 70 degrees.
The coarser layers were speckled and had the appearance of an andesite
tuff. In a few hours evidences of bedrock had disappeared and we had
entered a region of deep water, winding constantly between 20 to 25 foot
banks of brown sand and silt. Next morning we passed a series of rapids
caused by reefs of rock of a nearly white to light gray color. Its general
appearance suggested a horizontally stratified fine-grained sandstone.
There were no hills near the river. The alluvial banks gradually became
lower, and gravel and even sand beds disappeared from them, being re-
placed by stratified brown silt and massive, light-colored mottled clay.
A number of small rapids passed early next morning I suspect were due
to Modern alluvium locally cemented by limonite. We had entered the
delta country and could see no hills from the bank. Near the mouth the
river is deep and sluggish, 100 to 125 feet wide; the banks, of brown
silt, are about 8 feet high, and apparently back of the fringe of bamboos,
scattered trees and bushes on the river bank there is an open country,
either savanna or swamp.
The 30 miles of the Prinzapulca River traversed is 100 to 150 ee:
wide and winds about somewhat in the apparently swampy delta. The
town. of Prinzapulca is situated on the south bank of the river between
the beach and the swamps. The Prinzapulca has not built a prominent
headland into the sea as has the Wanks. The beach deposits average
several hundred yards wide and in general rise only a few feet above
ordinary high-tide level. They consist of brown sand with patches rich in
heavy black sand, presumably magnetite. There are a few scattered small
pebbles, and fine gravel is said to appear on the beach 6 miles south,
QUATERNARY DEPOSITS 507
Behind the beach is a broad country of swamps. No hills are in sight.
Within several miles of the mouth, the Prinzapulca River has scarcely
any banks, properly so called, as a rise of 1 or 2 feet would carry the
water over into the swamps. In going inland the first high land reached
is said to be the “Pine Ridge,” lying between the Prinzapulca and Grand
rivers, reached about 60 miles up the former and 20 miles up the latter.
Another section of “Pine Ridge” country is said to lie between the Ban-
bana and Wava rivers. At Bluefields the low hill country of igneous
rocks (much of which resembles an altered rhyolite, some andesite tuff
much altered, and other dark-colored rock may be basalt) comes out to
the very edge of the Caribbean Sea, but the great delta country appears
north of the bluff.
MODERN ALLUVIUM
This includes the deposits in the broad delta region along the coast
and the younger floodplain deposits in the valleys extending back into
the mountain region. It is predominantly a brown sand, varying to silts
and clays near the coast and gravels in the mountains. The beach de-
posits and the deep red soil of the hilly country are referable to the same
_ epoch, though the soil is the result of processes that have been con-
tinuous throughout the Quaternary era at least.
SOULALA FORMATION
In the valley of the Wanks River there is evidently an older alluvium,
characterized by variegated silts and clays, with a little associated gravel
and sand. At Soulala it is distinctly higher than the Modern alluvium,
but farther down the river can not be distinguished as a topographically
separate floodplain. It is probably of about the age of the Wisconsin
drift sheet in the United States. Black carbonaceous layers may suggest
a cooler climate during its formation, but there is nothing else about it
to indicate extensive glaciation in the upper portion of the river’s basin
during its deposition. However, the supposed glaciation may have cor-
responded in age with an epoch of erosion and not deposition in the
lower portion of the basin.
SACLIN FORMATION
Pine evidently grows on several formations, but there can be little
question that the so-called Pine Ridge country owes its distinctive char-
acters largely to a deposit of fine white gravel that is distributed north
and south across the country as a fringe to the mountainous interior,
508 o. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
sending long arms far into the delta country. It is typically developed
in the bluff at Saclin. The character of its distribution points toward a
marine origin. The pebbles are predominantly white quartz, probably
largely derived from the gneissic and other old formations described by
Belt and Crawford from the headwaters of the Wanks River, although
they adjoin a region predominantly igneous. I attribute this to the
action of the sea in wearing out the softer igneous rocks. The quartz
gravel of the Lower Wanks probably comes largely from erosion of the
Saclin formation.
In short, the “Pine Ridge” country is probably an old dissected coastal
plain. The old river channels mentioned by Crawford probably emerge
from the mountains at the same level. It may also be fairly safe to cor-
relate this coastal plain with the peneplain discriminated by Hayes in
the “Nicaraguan depression.” In age the Saclin formation is probably
rather early Quaternary.
TERTIARY Rocks
_ IN GENERAL
Being in the great Atlantic forest, with an average annual precipita-
tion of about 138 inches, a minimum temperature at the Bonanza mine
of 52 degrees Fahrenheit and a common daily range of 60 degrees Fah-
renheit to 90 degrees Fahrenheit or 96 degrees Fahrenheit and a dense
vegetation, the rocks of the Pis-Pis district are near the surface most
thoroughly decomposed and the areal geology extremely difficult to study
except along the larger creeks, in the mine excavations, and at wide
intervals in the trails. The zone of oxidation probably averages 100 feet
in depth on the hills. Where the soil is stony, the rock fragments are
almost exclusively the debris from quartz veins. Accurate detailed map-
ping is impossible except in the vicinity of the best developed mines.
Furthermore, it was difficult to secure fresh material for microscopic
study. A set of thin-sections was submitted to Dr. A. C. Lawson, who
has kindly furnished me the descriptive notes printed herewith in small
type. ‘They were made by one of the students at the University of Cali-
fornia, but reviewed and amended by Doctor Lawson, who is responsible
for the names that I am going to apply to the rocks.
ANDESITE
The larger part of the district is occupied by an extrusive series of
andesitic composition. Its structure is generally obscure, but frag-
eee See eee rl
y
TERTIARY ROCKS 509
mentals were distinctly seen at three places and it is probable that they
make up a large part of the series. The fresh rock is generally of a dark
greenish gray color and fairly hard, but at most of the outcrops the
andesite lava has a dark red to purple color because of partial decompo-
sition. Weathering converts some of the rock to a soft, deep-red mass
with white spots due to the kaolinized feldspars. This is the form in
which it is generally seen in the walls of the veins. Near the surface it
becomes a mass of stiff red clay.
A specimen from the trail on the north of the Mars vein has been
identified by Lawson as andesite and described as follows:
I. In thin-section the rock shows a medium-grained structure, with feldspar
erystals of porphyritic habit, in a fine-grained and glassy ground-mass. The
rock shows signs of severe alteration, as the feldspars are full of calcite and
kaolin, and the ground-mass is full of calcite, chlorite, and epidote. The rock
is essentially composed of plagioclase feldspars of two generations; these make
up the bulk of the section. The original ferro-magnesian minerals are entirely
lacking, having been replaced by the epidote, calcite, and chlorite, which occur,
especially the chlorite in porphyritic-shaped masses. Magnetite occurs through-
out the section, but due to alteration; most of it has been altered to limonite.
Along the Mars power-line, one-half of a mile northwest of the Mars
mine, there are hard residual boulders that have weathered out of the
reddish-stained andesite, and a specimen has been described, under the
term “augite andesite,” as follows:
VII. The rock is dark colored, medium-grained, with a decidedly porphyritic
structure, the feldspars occurring as large phenocrysts in a dark glassy ground-
mass. Fine grains of magnetite give the glass the dark color. The alignment
of the phenocrysts gives evidence of a flow structure. Augite occurs as well
developed phenocrysts. There is a slight attempt at a diallage cleavage in
cross-sections of the augite prisms. The augite occurs in crystals up to one-
eighth of an inch long. A large amount of the augite has undergone altera-
tion, and has been replaced by chlorite, epidote, and magnetite. The augite
has been formed prior to the feldspars. Magnetite occurs abundantly as large
erystals of primary origin, and as small secondary magnetite, as an alteration
product of the augite. The feldspars are the most abundant mineral present.
They are perfectly fresh and unaltered. Their extinction angle shows them to
be labradorite. They occur as large phenocrysts one-quarter of an inch long
and as small lath-shaped crystals in the ground-mass.
This rock I believe to be fairly typical of the majority of andesite out-
crops seen in ascending the Wanks, Waspuc, and Pis-Pis rivers, and it
evidently has a wide distribution in northeastern Nicaragua, particularly
in the valleys and under the old coastal plain. There seems to be a
large, scarcely interrupted area of it along the Pis-Pis River above the
510 0o. HH. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
Big Falls, including the vicinity of San Pedro. It forms part of the
hanging wall of the Bonanza vein toward the northeast and the foot-wall
toward the southwest. The northeastern part of the Mars vein is largely
in it. It occurs extensively as wall rock to the veins in the southwestern
portion of the district, including the Siempre Viva, El Vesuvio, La
Leticia, La Constancia, and Santo Domingo veins. It is the rock that
De Kalb called diorite, Connelly andesite, and Carter porphyry. A
specimen representing the foot-wall rock at the Siempre Viva mine, but
secured from a boulder in the dirt back of the mill, was described as
follows:
III. In thin-section the rock is of a medium-grained porphyritic structure
with a glassy ground-mass. The original ferro-magnesian mineral is absent,
being replaced by epidote and calcite. Unlike section No. 1, there is very little
chlorite, the decomposition being more in the nature of the separation of mag-
netite. This occurs in very fine grains, shot through the glassy ground-mass,
giving it a black appearance. The rock itself is extremely magnetic. The
feldspars are in amount the most important mineral. These were determined
as labradorite. They occur as large phenocrysts and as small lath-shaped
crystals imbedded in. the glassy ground-mass. These small feldspars show a
tendency toward orientation in a general direction, indicating flow structure.
The extrusive andesites are apparently intruded by harder, heavier,
darker crystallines which resist decomposition better and are most likely
to outerop and produce residual boulders. From their tendency to ap-
pear near the surface as dark green rocks, I used for them the field
designation “greenstone.” They decompose near the surface to a stiff
bright red clay, but the decomposition does not extend nearly as deep as
in the other rocks. At the Panama mine some of the material seems to
be in small dikes cutting an andesite agglomerate.
On the hanging-wall side of the Bonanza vein there is an oval area of
“greenstone” 500 feet long and 285 feet in maximum width. It does not
quite touch the vein and on that side contacts with the ordinary ande-
site. On the west it is bordered by an acid intrusive rock. A hard
kernel from the Bonanza mill grade was identified by Lawson as holo-
crystalline andesite and described as follows:
II. The rock has a greenish color, is fine-grained and holo-crystalline. In
thin-section it seems to be made up of an intergrowth of augite and feldspar,
which are about of the same size. Also augite occurs rather abundantly as
large crystals, which are on the average larger than the feldspars. Magnetite
is an important inclusion in the augite. Considerable of the augite has been
altered to a green fibrous hornblende and to chlorite. The labradorite which
makes up most of the rock occurs as tabular crystals, of yarying sizes. The
rock seems to have a porphyritic structure, as in general there are two sets of
a
a
TERTIARY ROCKS 511
erystals of the augite and feldspar. In mineral composition this rock is
closely allied to samples I, III, and VII.
East of the Bonanza mine there is an area of “greenstone” of irregular
outline, but apparently about 2.5 miles long and nine-tenths of a mile in
maximum width; that is to say, within this area all the exposures of
partly decomposed bedrock along the North Fork of the Tunkey River,
on Ribabaones Creek, and near the Morning Star mine, in the valley of
Tunkey Ben Creek, all the residual boulders seen on two high ridges
and all the soil seen throughout it indicate that it is composed exclu-
sively of a single mass of the hard dark green crystalline. It is bordered
on the northwest by an acid intrusive and on all other sides by the ordi-
nary extrusive andesite. As it has a range of altitude of 1,000 or 1,100
feet and its contacts are apparently very steep, if not vertical, it has the
field relations of a small batholith, though the appearance of the rock
under the microscope suggests that it is not plutonic. The Venus vein
is partly in this area. A specimen from a boulder at the forks of the
ereek on the Venus trail and which is identical in character with many
residuals in the area was identified by Lawson as augite andesite and
described as follows:
V. This rock is very similar to II, except that the rock has a coarser grain,
and the augite occurs in larger crystals. The rock is holo-crystalline, and is
composed chiefly of feldspars. The augite occurs as fairly large phenocrysts
up to one-eighth of an inch long, and also as small flakes in the ground-mass.
Alteration has affected the augite, as on the edge and in the center chlorite
occurs. Secondary fibrous green hornblende occurs rather abundantly in the
ground-mass. - The feldspar is labradorite, and occurs in large tabular crys-
tals. As the rock shows an attempt at a porphyritic structure, it is probably
not plutonic.
The Lone Star vein is situated in a “greenstone” area whose main body
is about 1.3 miles long and 1 mile wide. The rock, in a partially de-
composed condition, is extensively exposed in the Lone Star mine work-
ings, and elsewhere is indicated by residual boulders, stream gravel, and
the character of the soil. Topographically, it stands up well above the
neighboring rocks and includes Lone Star Hill, about 700 feet high. A
narrow arm of the “greenstone” forms a low ridge across the valley of
the North Fork of the Tunkey River and has produced the Bonanza
Falls, 230 feet high. At the main fall the rock is well exposed and ap-
pears massive except for a little jointing. A specimen from near the
foot of the fall was identified by Lawson as augite andesite and described
as follows:
512 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
IV. In thin-section the rock has a greenish color, is fine-grained, and has a
slight porphyritic structure, with a glassy grouwnd-mass in which the small
crystals are imbedded. The augite occurs as well developed crystals and is
in an unaltered condition, except that on the edges occurs a rim of chlorite
and magnetite. The feldspars are the most abundant mineral and are basic-
oligoclase. They occur as large phenocrysts, and as small lath-shaped feld-
spars imbedded in the glassy ground-mass.
Along the Lone Star ditch there seems to be a rapid alternation of the
purple-weathering andesite and the harder, dark greenish gray rock, the
latter probably occurring as dikes. The Lone Star Falls is due to a
small area of hard, fine-grained, greenish gray rock like that at Bonanza
Falls. Thence by the trail to the old Santo Domingo arrastre only the
extrusive andesite was seen, but many hard boulders of “greenstone”
occur near the arrastre. Thence to the Constancia mine the andesite
lava probably contains dikes of the harder rock. The hanging wall of
the Siempre Viva vein as exposed in the “New” tunnel is a very hard,
fine-grained, nearly black rock that has been identified by Lawson as
augite andesite and described as follows:
VI. The rock is dark-colored and fine-grained. In thin-section it shows a
porphyritic structure, with phenocrysts of augite and plagioclase feldspar.
The ground-mass is glassy, in which occur lath-shaped feldspars, magnetite,
and chlorite. The augite occurs as large phenocrysts and as small flakes in
the ground-mass; it has been nearly all altered to chlorite and magnetite.
Green fibrous hornblende occurs as an alteration replacement product of the
augite, in long prisms in the ground-mass.
The Siempre Viva Falls is in two parts, one 90 feet high and the other
‘75 feet high, with rapids below; the entire fall is 220 feet. They are
caused by a rib of hard, massive, greenish gray, porphyritic rock, resem-
bling that at the Bonanza Falls except that many of the white feldspar
phenocrysts have a tendency to a lath shape, giving the rock a diabasic
appearance.
RHYOLITE
The northeastern portion of the district is characterized by a mass of
acid intrusive rock about 4 miles long in a northeasterly direction and a
mile in maximum width. It forms a lighter red and less clayey soil than
do the basic rocks, but it is weathered to so great depth that I only found
fresh material at two places. Both have been identified by Lawson as
rhyolite. Specimen VIII is from the face of the Banana tunnel at the
Bonanza mine and specimen IX from a boulder in a creek near the
Hidden Treasure mine.
|
:
:
]
,
TERTIARY ROCKS 513
VIII. The rock is very light-colored, fine-grained, and is composed chiefly
of feldspar and quartz. The feldspars are orthoclase and albite; these occur
as phenocrysts. Quartz makes up most of the ground-mass. Pyrite is abun-
dant, and occurs in an unaltered and fresh condition. It appears to be pri-
mary. The ground-mass is hypocrystalline, with some glass.
IX. This rock is a little coarser than VIII, and the ground-mass is not so
uniform, varying from coarse to fine in different parts. It contains glass.
The feldspars are the same, except that they have been somewhat altered, as
they contain flakes of sericite.
Where partly decomposed the porphyritic character of the rock is not
so apparent and it resembles a granite without ferro-magnesian ‘min-
erals; on this account I used the field term “acid granite.” At one place
the border has a narrow zone of very fine-grained acid rock, suggesting
aplite. Pyrite is disseminated through it, practically at the surface.
The acid rock is of special interest because Lawson says that from its
microscopic appearance it is not to be considered a plutonic rock, yet it
certainly seems to have the field relations of a small granitic batholith
that has been exposed by deep erosion. The northeastern portion of the
area is crossed by a high ridge that includes the Mars, Neptune, and
Venus peaks. By the time one has climbed the last in the warm humid
atmosphere it appears to be about 1,100 feet high, yet rhyolite extends
from base to summit. A short distance southeast of the peak the augite-
andesite described under V attains nearly as high an altitude. The con-
tact, though somewhat irregular, may be located approximately on both
slopes of the ridge and is evidently very steep, if not vertical. Neptune
Peak is in the rhyolite area, but the nearly equally as high Mars Peak is
composed of the extrusive andesite, containing large dikes of rhyolite,
suggesting apophyses from the main mass. Elsewhere near the Mars and
Bonanza mines there is evidence that the contact of the rhyolite with
other rocks is very steep to vertical and intrusive in nature. Mine
workings, residuals, and the soil indicate that the main area is free from
any other rock species, suggesting that the rhyolite is younger than the
andesites.
The rhyolite forms the hanging wall of the Bonanza vein toward the
southwest. The Mars and Venus veins are partly in it and the Neptune
vein entirely so at the surface. They are richer in quartz and poorer in
sulphides than the veins in the andesites. The Lone Star vein, though
scarcely 2 miles distant, is much richer in sulphides, particularly galena.
The veins of the Siempre Viva, Constancia, Concordia, and Trinidad
mines are characterized by the presence of a large quantity of fine-
grained specularite, and are generally rather rich in sulphides. At the
514 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
Panama mine, on the opposite side of the rhyolite area, a vein in ande-
site is unusually rich in galena and other sulphides. Thus I have gained
the idea that veins cutting the basic rocks are richer in sulphides and
other basic minerals than those in and near the rhyolite area, which I
consider an indication that the rhyolite as a large mass will continue to
a much greater depth than the present valley floors.
The Big Falls on the Pis-Pis River is caused by a narrow band of
purple gray to nearly white, hard, flinty appearing rock that seems to
rise through the andesites like a large dike trending about north 60
degrees east (magnetic). Lawson identified it as rhyolite.
X. The rock has a reddish brown color, banded appearance, and a porphy-
ritic structure. The feldspars, which were determined as oligoclase-andesine,
occur as phenocrysts, but are rare and are full of secondary sericite. The
ground-mass is glassy, with an attempt at crystallization, as it is composed in
places of crystallites. In the ground-mass occur lenses of quartz, feldspar,
aud glass, which are evidently zones of flowage. Magnetite and hematite occur
on the edges of these flow zones. The hematite gives the rock the red color.
DIORITE (7?)
The only other rock seen in place in the district is in an area 1,000
feet long and 270 feet in maximum width, forming the foot-wall of a
portion of the Bonanza vein. IJ have not seen it in a fresh condition, but
the general appearance of partially decomposed material suggests that it
was a diorite. Diorite and ordinary biotite granite occur somewhere on
the southeast border of the district, as indicated by gravels of the Tunkey
River. |
MISCELLANEOUS \
The coarse volcanic agglomerate at Waspuc Mouth extends up the
Waspuc River several miles. Beyond that it is fine grained and appar-
ently well stratified. At Yahook Falls it contains beds of very hard,
dark gray (almost black) obsidian, a thick layer of which causes a ver-
tical fall of 8 feet. A gorge 6 miles farther up is in highly altered,
rather coarse-textured, massive andesite. Five miles farther up the rock
is distinctly bedded, dipping downstream 30 degrees. Thence to the ~
mouth of the Pis-Pis River andesite lava prevails, though at one place
there was noted a fine-grained lava of more acid appearance and at
another a dark gray, rather fine-grained basic crystalline, suggesting the
intrusive andesites. At the Yapooketan Falls the Pis-Pis River is cas-
cading over a fine-grained, lavender rock that I think is an andesitic tuff
PRE-VOLCANIC SEDIMENTARIES 515
in gently inclined beds. The rock at the Little Falls below the Pis-Pis
bodega is dark red andesite lava.
In descending the Tunkey River from Barbones, at 114 miles the val-
ley is constricted and passes through a range of hills of augite andesite,
as indicated by the sudden appearance in the stream-bed of many
boulders of hard, very dark greenish gray crystalline rock. About 4
miles in a straight line east-southeast of Barbones a rock appears that
seems to be a fine-grained quartz with disseminated pyrite, possibly an
altered sedimentary rock. However, farther down the river we found
many boulders of the hard greenish andesite. High hills near the river
and many sections abounding in these boulders indicate that even though
sedimentaries may be present there is much igneous rock all the way to
Tunkey. Back of the village there is much of the hard dark greenish
rock, and also a light yellowish green rock that may be an altered lime-
stone.
PRE-VOLCANIC SEDIMENTARIES
R. B. Stanford, the former manager of the Siempre Viva mine, says
that limestone appears about 3 miles south of the mine and spreads
thence southward over a broad country. At the La Luz mine shale is
associated with it. He says that from the apparent relation between the”
limestone and lava south of the Siempre Viva mine the limestone surface
may appear 1,500 to 1,800 feet below the surface at the mine. A piece
of the limestone which Mr. Stanford gave me was among the specimens
submitted to Doctor Lawson and was described as follows:
XI. The rock is a compact, dark-colored, fine-grained limestone, composed
chiefly of large calcitic areas and a fine-grained part, which is seen to be made
up of organic tests. Pyrite occurs in scattered cubes throughout the section.
My impression is that the northern border of the old sedimentary ter-
ranes trends easterly or southeasterly from the point 3 miles south of
the Siempre Viva mine, and that all of Nicaragua north of it and west
of the old coastal plain may be occupied by the igneous rocks described
in this paper. Crawford vaguely refers to a disconnected line of lime-
stone areas between the “granite” hills and the Wanks River, but I saw
no evidence of them in the gravels of streams draining from that area,
and at best they must be very limited in size. Andesitic lavas and tuffs
are certainly the prevailing rocks in a great area. In the mountain re-
gions they have been extensively intruded by other andesites and some
rhyolites. Belt’s “dolerytes, with bands and protrusions of hard green-
516 0. H. HERSHEY—GEOLOGICAL RECONNAISSANCE IN NICARAGUA
stones” in the Santo Domingo district doubtlessly correspond to the
extrusive andesite and hard ribs of augite andesite in the Pis-Pis district.
AGE OF THE IGNEOUS Rocks
In age the rocks of the Pis-Pis district are probably mid-Tertiary.
This statement is based on the fact that similar rocks elsewhere in Cen-
tral America are known to be of that age, and on the fact that the erosion
of the country shows that volcanic activity ceased earlier than the
Quaternary era or even the latter portion of the Pliocene period.
GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 33
FIGURE 1.—SUPPOSED GLACIATED STONE FROM NEAR KINGSTON, IDAHO
FIGURE 2.——-REVERSE SIDE OF FIGURE 1
GLACIATED STONE FROM NEAR KINGSTON, IDAHO
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 517-536, PL. 33 OCTOBER 22, 1912
SOME TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY OF WEST- |
-ERN MONTANA, NORTHERN IDAHO, AND
EASTERN WASHINGTON?
BY OSCAR H. HERSHEY
(Presented im abstract before the Society April 1,.1911)
CONTENTS
Page
Glaciation in Deer Creek Valley, Montana..... 0... 0c... cccccccccacccees 517
Gicenen in-the Coeur d’Alene district, Idaho. 22... 26.2 cee ccle cece acces 518
erat Oi MEVOCT STCELAGCES <0 6.6 a0 sis Sosa ca cae cucueduocala cceesceccs 519
8 OP ea anche abate fea! are, Gk ameiada 2 a's wave eae wise a 519
MRIS Ng eS ha nec edn wh i ccc uw tw hewewcedsctwwsadese 519
ER ere rn at ce wos dais sw ake a aeaidealcevacectees 519
EEE eee 2 bi ccls civ ws s alc's avis Gd ewcbecueetaccadns 520
EEN LEEENCE. Lice ecco wi cic sek dbase asec tuaeeecet utes 521
TEER POUT NGCE ho a aac cic wis ois oko ws asin ck ce adoceesecccuus 522
Pee -MMeTed-AnG-tiiLy-TOOL. TETTACE. . 2... ce ce ew eee cw ees sanes 523
rrr PIG PECION oc ce acne cece e cet eencccctane 524
ee tise FCCTOSE: TEFION: —. w/c ei cc cc ee cece vueceecnccen 525
I RISTIMET: HOTEMCTT TUANO 6. occa k lea ccc cc wee uc e ce eeacccces 530
emnmemmodee OF Coeur 0 Alene ‘Lake... ice cc ccc cece e weet ences 531
ster water COUNLTY, [dalo.. 0... cnet eee dence nce eeducces 532
Pigeon valleys Of eastern Washington. .. 0.0... cccc cen cccecccewrnces 533
MES ok oc wc os W's bos oe Re ak, Sires ik tei oie ete OM ek 535
GLACIATION IN Deer CrEEK VALLEY, MoNTANA
The valley of Deer Creek is a deep, heavily timbered gulch heading at
about 7,000 feet of altitude in the Bitter Root Range and extending
about 7 miles to the Saint Regis River near Deborgia, Missoula County,
Montana. Streams of ice flowing from the Chief, Diamond, Crystal,
and other cirques, two of which contain typical moraine-dammed glacial
lakelets, coalesced in the main valley into a glacier that during an earlier
stage extended almost to the mouth. It ground the Belt quartzites and
preglacial gravels into a ground moraine of light-colored clay, with
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society December 6, 1911.
(517)
518 0. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
boulders, cobbles, pebbles, and sand grains heterogeneously distributed
through it; this is locally known as “white clay.”
After the ice had melted back to near the head of the valley, Deer
Creek eroded a broad shallow channel in the surface of the white clay
and floored it with stream gravel. Then in a later glacial stage the ice
advanced and formed a terminal moraine across the valley about 4.6
miles above its mouth. Above this point, on account of the high grade
of the valley and comparative recency of the glaciation, the creek has
merely cut a narrow trench into the glacial deposit. This later glacial
stage probably corresponds in age to the latest Wisconsin stage recog-
nized in the northeastern States. It is the stage whose products are. so
pronounced throughout the western mountains. Evidences of earlier
elaciations are usually obscure and generally either overlooked or thrown
in with the phenomena of the later stage.
Of the stream gravel below the moraine, the first 3,020 yards aver-
age 64 yards wide and 2 yards deep, the next 4,250 yards average 91
yards wide and 2 yards deep, and the remaining half mile averages about
100 yards wide. The first section, as evidenced by shafts, is underlaid
by white clay; the distribution of the gold in it supports the idea that it
is of glacial origin. The last section is bordered by strips of glacial
material that is disposed in the form of terraces, the lower ones hum-
mocky and the highest one even. Probably this material was largely.
deposited by water beyond the end of the glacier. The older glacial de-
posit is certainly of considerably greater age than the deposit above the
moraine, but I am inclined to think it represents an early Wisconsin
stage rather than a stage as old as the Iowan drift sheet of the north-
eastern States. At any rate it is comparatively recent.
The glacial phenomena of the Deer Creek Valley are doubtless re-
peated in all the valleys heading high on the eastern side of the Bitter
Root Range. There is a fine development of gravel terraces in that part
of the valley of the Missoula River which has the summit of the range at
a short distance southwest, and they are probably connected with glacia-
tion in the short steep gulches coming down from the high mountains.
GLACIATION IN THE Ca@ur D’ALENE District, IDAHO
In “The geology and ore deposits of the Cour d’Alene district,
Idaho,” ? Mr. F. C. Calkins has briefly described the terrace gravels and
glacial deposits of the region, and the reader is referred to the map
accompanying that report for their distribution. Nearly all the peaks
, * Professional Paper No, 62, U. 8S. Geol. Survey Pub., 1908.
GLACIATION IN DEER CREEK VALLEY, MONTANA 519
and ridges that attain altitudes of about 6,000 feet have cirques and
often tarns on their northern and eastern sides. The main glacier in
Canyon Creek Valley had a length of about 5 miles, as indicated by
Calkins’ map, and one nearly as long occupied the valley at the head of
the Saint Regis River in Montana; a portion of it flowed through a pass
into the Coeur d’Alene Basin. There appear to be no prominent terraces
of extra-glacial material leading down the valleys from the glacial de-
posits. The disappearance of the small alpine glaciers has been quite
recent, as the postglacial erosion has been insignificant near the head of
the valleys. Although I am not able to state so from observation, it is
doubtless true that the deposits include the products of the two glacial
stages recognized in the Deer Creek Valley in Montana. The most con-
spicuous feature of these late glaciations is their confinement to rela-
tively high altitudes. No mountain whose altitude does not exceed
5,500 feet gave rise to a glacier, and Calkins has not mapped any glacial
deposit below 3,200 feet.
KELLOGG SYSTEM OF RIVER TERRACES
IN GENERAL
The vicinity of Kellogg, in the valley of the South Fork of the Coeur
d’Alene River, has the most complete system of river terrace remnants
in the Coeur d’Alene district. Moreover, the writer has resided at Kel-
logg for over two years and has had opportunity, in connection with
other work, to study these terraces in considerable detail; for these rea-
sons they will be first described and then the terrace system traced up
and down the valley.
MODERN ALLUVIUM
From the mouth of Milo Creek at Kellogg west for about 314 miles
the floor of the valley averages about 800 yards wide. Before being
largely buried under tailings from the concentrating mills of the great
lead mines of the district, the floodplain was apparently a bed of moder-
ately coarse gravel overlaid by several feet of dark brown sandy silt.
The coarsest gravel along the present channel has few boulders 12 inches
in diameter. Igneous material is very inconspicuous, probably not ex-
ceeding 1 per cent of the gravel. I suppose the depth of the alluvium
to be not more than 20 to 50 feet. The fall of the valley is about 30
feet per mile near Kellogg.
THIRTY-FOOT TERRACE
This terrace is developed along the south side of the valley from near
the mouth of Milo Creek to near the mouth of Deadwood Creek, a dis-
XXXVII—BULL. GEOL. Soc. AM,, Vou, 23, 1911
.
520 0. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
tance of 1 mile. These streams have built their alluvial fans of coarse
gravel on it, but between the fans it remains in a finely preserved condi-
tion. The north border is a steep bank with lobate outline produced by
erosion by the Modern river. The height varies from 27 to 29 feet above
unburied remnants of the Modern floodplain, and the-width of the ter-
race varies from 80 to 150 yards. It descends westward down the valley
at a rate only a little less than the Modern floodplain.
No bedrock appears in the bank, and this terrace is apparently en-—
tirely built of unconsolidated materials, chiefly brown stratified gravel
like that of the Modern alluvium except that it has few cobbles 6 inches
in length and practically no boulders. The unique feature is the upper
deposit, a structureless bed of non-pebbly light brown silt 2 to 6 feet
thick. The line between the gravel and silt is rather sharp and appar-
ently undulating. The silt is composed of angular and subangular
grains of quartz and other minerals occurring in the rocks of the region
and was probably derived from the soil of the district and deposited by
the river at flood stage. It is relatively impervious to water and gives
rise to a thin and rather sterile soil, contrasting strongly with the fertile
dark brown soil at the surface of the Modern alluvium.
There is probably a small remnant of the terrace at the mouth of Elk
Creek, 1144 miles above Kellogg, and another at the mouth of Govern-
ment Gulch, 2 miles west of Kellogg. In both the gravel is overlaid by
2 to 6 feet thickness of pebbleless silt.
The age of the deposits in this terrace is indicated by the subsequent
erosion. Opposite the terrace at Kellogg the river has eroded a valley ,
900 yards wide and at least 35 feet in average depth, and except for the
few small remnants described above it has practically destroyed the de-
posits for many miles above and below the terrace at Kellogg. They
belong to a relatively late epoch of the Quaternary Era, but are much.
older than the glacial material in the cirques of the high mountains. It
is my impression that this 30-foot terrace is of the same age and due to
the same conditions as a low terrace at the mouth of Deer Creek Valley
in Montana, belonging to the earlier glacial stage there recognized.
SIXTY-FOOT TERRACE
At a small remnant of this terrace at a railway cut between Deadwood
and Government gulches the bank to a height of 27 feet is Prichard
slate overlaid by 8 feet thickness of coarse river gravel abounding in
cobbles and small boulders. The original terrace surface is present far-
ther back along the wagon road. A better remnant occurs at the Sweeny
mill on the east side of the mouth of Government Gulch. The Prichard
KELLOGG SYSTEM OF RIVER TERRACES 521
slate rises 40 feet above the Modern floodplain and the original surface
of the terrace at the north edge was about 20 feet higher. The uneroded
surface rises toward the south at first 2 degrees and then steeper on the
slope leading up to the next terrace. The deposit seems to comprise
several feet of coarse cobbly and even bouldery gravel and over this ordi-
nary gravelly alluvium. This is overlaid, near the foot of the slope
leading to the next terrace on the south, by a bed of non-pebbly silt
several feet thick.
This is the youngest of a series of gravel-capped rock benches and has
no particular significance, as it merely marks a local vicissitude in the
down-cutting of the valley. There are traces of the same terrace farther
down the valley, but this is not a prominent terrace horizon and will not
be considered in the further discussion of the subject.
TWO-HUNDRED-FOOT TERRACE
This terrace is well developed along the south side of the valley from
Kellogg to Grouse Creek as a series of flats separated by the broad
eanyon-shaped valleys of Deadwood and Government creeks and by sev-
eral narrow gulches. Bedrock generally rises in the terrace till within
30 to 40 feet of its surface. In the most easterly flat (back of the Kel-
logge hospital) the first bed over the bedrock appears to abound in water-
worn boulders, many of which are 18 inches in longest diameter. This
is a much coarser river deposit than any seen lower. Above this there is
a light brown sand and silt with scattered cobbles, but not much fine
gravel. The uppermost part of the deposit is largely a hght brown
sandy silt. The remarkable feature of this terrace is the boulders scat-
tered over its surface, apparently weathered out from the upper part of
the deposit. They are not numerous, but widely distributed.
Besides the local quartzites there is an unusually large percentage of
igneous rocks, including greenish crystallines that might have been de-
rived from dikes in the drainage basin of the river, a granite of doubtful
occurrence in the basin, and a pink quartzite not known from the Belt
rocks of the region. The largest boulder, which has a maximum diame-
ter of 30 inches, consists of a porphyritic granite, resembling the monzo-
nite near Gem. These boulders reach an altitude of 250 feet above the
river or 2,500 feet above the sea. No boulders were observed on the next
flat west (which is 200 yards wide), probably because of the thick brush,
and near Deadwood Gulch the horizon of the granite boulders is buried
under an old alluvial fan of Deadwood Creek. Government Creek has
trenched across the terrace a steep-walled canyon about 175 yards wide
522 0. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
and 150 feet deep. This is cut through the gravel ‘into the Prichard
slate.
The gravel terrace on which the Kellogg cemetery is situated is 250
to 300 feet above the river and its surface slopes 5 degrees toward the
north. There is apparently a distinct channel in the bedrock under the
terrace; it is separated from the present river channel by a ridge of
Prichard slate. This slate rim-rock ridge, cut by numerous transverse
gulches and canyons, is present between the old and new channels for
about 214 miles east from the cemetery. The original filling of the old
channel by river gravel apparently long preceded the development of
the 200,foot terrace. An important remnant of the latter, occupied
by a ranch about a mile above Kellogg, has a granite boulder nearly 3
feet long, several smaller granite boulders and cobbles of several varie-
ties of granitic rocks. They have an altitude of about 300 feet above the
river or 2,650 above the sea. A small remnant of the gravel of the 200-
foot terrace occurs on the north side of the valley at Kellogg.
This terrace certainly presents some interesting problems, the chief
of which are the origin and mode of transportation of the granite
boulders; but we must get acquainted with more facts concerning the
terraces of the region before we can discuss them.
SIX-HUNDRED-FOOT TERRACE
The principal remnant of this terrace, about 600 yards long, parallel
to the valley, and 300 yards wide, is occupied by the Page ranch, imme-
diately west of the valley of Milo Creek. The surface is quite undulat-
ing because of much erosion, but the unconsolidated material in the
small ridges is at least 40 to 50 feet thick. The water-worn boulders
that weather out around the borders of the terrace are chiefly of local
quartzites and no granite or other igneous rocks have been seen among
them. My impression is that the lower part of the deposit is very coarse
and includes boulders 3 feet in length. Elsewhere the gravel of this
terrace is inclined to be relatively fine, and probably the boulder deposit
under the Page ranch was formed near the mouth of a tributary valley.
It is a characteristic of this terrace that its inner border is usually ob-
scured by debris from the neighboring mountain slopes. 7
The nearly even crested ridge at the surface of the deposit in the old
buried channel east of Elk Creek Valley is 50 feet higher than the Page
ranch. The corresponding ridge over the gravel in the old channel im-
mediately west of the canyon of Big Creek has a flat of considerable
extent at a level of about 550 feet above the river, but the highest por-
tion of the deposit is 700 feet above the river. I agree with Calkins that
EE —
KELLOGG SYSTEM OF RIVER TERRACES 523
the old channel was filled to a depth of 500 feet. The characteristic
feature of the deposit is its relative fineness, there being much rather
fine well-worn gravel and much sand. ‘The old channel, whose floor at
Kellogg was about 100 feet above the present river level, emerges into
the present river valley on the western side of the Kellogg cemetery.
On the south side of the deep channel a much shallower channel was
eroded in the bedrock and filled with gravel. A small remnant of this
deposit caps a knoll on the ridge immediately east of Government Gulch
at the same altitude as the Page ranch. In fact the 600-foot terrace
marks the floor of the valley at the completion of the deep valley filling.
ELEVEN-HUNDRED-AND-FIFTY-FOOT TERRACE
The chief remnant of this terrace is on a narrow spur between Milo
and Elk creeks, about a mile south of Kellogg. In a flat of several acres
extent the gravel may be 50 or 100 feet deep. It is relatively coarse and
abounds in cobbles. This terrace is the highest of the Kellogg system,
and probably represents a valley floor that was broader than in any sub-
sequent stage and was bordered by high mountains, not much less rugged
than at the present day.
- Calkins has pointed out that the general uniformity ot elevation of
the high ridges of the Coeur d’Alene Mountains suggests a dissected
peneplain at about 6,000 feet of altitude, but I do not consider the evi-
dence to be sufficiently strong to be worthy of confidence. The South
Fork of the Coeur d’Alene River excavated at Kellogg a valley about
4,000 feet deep. The 1,150-foot terrace marks a local vicissitude in the
deepening of this valley and has no particular significance otherwise.
Then the river aggraded this deep valley until it was filled with gravel,
sand, and silt to a depth of 500 feet. The valley was then much wider
than at any subsequent stage and the river flowed near its northern side.
A change in conditions caused it to actively erode the valley floor. East
of Kellogg as far as Big Creek the new channel is largely cut in Prichard
slate and indicates considerable age for the 600-foot terrace. When the
new valley had been cut down 400 to 450 feet, it was floored by a rela-
tively coarse alluvium 30 to 40 feet thick. Then the boulders of granite
and other igneous rocks were introduced and scattered over the valley
floor. After that the river deepened the new valley 250 to 350 feet,
partly in gravel but chiefly in Prichard slate. It then aggraded the
valley to a height about 30 feet above the present river level, then nearly
removed this new filling and finally deposited the Modern alluvium.
It is to be noted that the river tended to cut each canyon beneath the
northern portion of the floor of the next higher canyon—that is, to mi-
594 O. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
grate northward. This might have been due to a progressive northward
tilting of the country, but I believe it had a different cause. In the
vicinity of Kellogg the mountains on the south of the valley are much
higher and more abrupt than those on the north. As a consequence the
debris that worked down from them and the gravel deposits that came
out of the gulches were much stronger than those from the north and
forced the river toward the north. It is significant that up and down
the valley where this distinction between opposite sides of the valley
breaks down the terrace remnants are no longer practically confined to
the south side.
TERRACES EAST OF KELLOGG REGION
The 600-foot terrace is represented by gravel at an elevation of 700
feet above the river on the first ridge east of Big Creek, a small remnant
on the next ridge east, and a gravel deposit at 650 feet a little over a
mile east of the mouth of Big Creek. A small area of gravel on the
ridge west of T'wo-mile Creek, at an elevation of 500 feet above the river,
is probably a remnant of the deposit under the terrace. One and one-
half miles east of Osburn the old valley is obstructed by a gravel de-
posit at least several hundred feet thick, compelling the river to pass
through a short section of new valley on the south. It reaches 550 feet
above the river. There is much fine gravel and near the highest point
an excavation shows yellow and buff sand. No boulders of granite or
other igneous rocks were seen in connection with the deposit. Though
much eroded, the gravel was not cut down enough to permit the 200-
foot terrace level to pass through the old valley. The great width of the
present valley at Osburn is due to the fact that there the old and new
valleys coincide.
Remnants of the 200-foot terrace occur at 350 feet above the river on
the first ridge east of Big Creek, at 300 feet on the west side of Terror
Gulch, and at 300 feet in a gently rolling gravel flat on the east side of
Terror Gulch. No boulders of granite or other igneous and metamor-
phic rocks were observed in connection with them. This is especially
remarkable in the case of the last remnant, which is: of sufficient extent
to be occupied by a farm, whose broad fields and piles of boulders along
the fences make conditions unusually favorable for observation. It is
evident that the granite boulders on the 200-foot terrace terminate about
a mile east of Kellogg, and that they were not derived from some point
up the valley. This makes their presence more remarkable.
The 1,150-foot terrace stage may be represented by an extensive gravel
deposit, reaching an elevation of 1,250 feet above the river about 114
:
— oe eS eee
TERRACES EAST AND WEST OF KELLOGG REGION 525
miles north of Wallace, and by the higher part of a long narrow gravel
deposit mapped as capping a ridge between Nine Mile and Canyon
ereeks. A group of terrace gravel deposits along the south side of the
valley from Mullan east only attain an altitude of several hundred feet
above the river.and can not be directly compared with the Kellogg
system, as there is too long an interval between.
TERRACES WEST OF KELLOGG REGION
Patches of old river gravel on the first ridge west of Government
Gulch represent. the 600-foot-terrace horizon. A more extensive rem-
nant near Corrigan Gulch has been eroded into a system of gently
rounded ridges, consisting mainly of a moderately fine gravel, though
some cobble beds appear locally. There is in the topography a strong
suggestion of an old channel crossing several of the neighboring rock
ridges, and this is probably the result of erosion partially reopening an
old channel. ‘ The valley floor at the completion of the deposit was at
least half a mile wide. |
On the northern border of this rolling gravel country there are two
remnants of the 200-foot terrace. They are on a level with a sag, 500
yards wide, that leads from Corrigan Gulch to Pine Creek Valley. The
gently undulating floor of the sag is underlaid by a deposit of apparent
river gravel, with an occasional small boulder of granite or other igneous
rocks. A deposit of well rounded, moderately fine river gravel that ex-
tends up the slope on the south to at least 100 feet higher than the gap
probably represents the gravel under the 600-foot terrace. This gap is
in line with a narrower but otherwise similar gap between Pine Creek,
and Kingston. Another gravel-floored gap occurs between Kingston
and Cataldo. They are evidently sections of the deep old channel that
were filled to a depth of 500 feet and partly reexcavated since. The
South Fork of the Coeur d’Alene River has a new course on the north of
the old valley from the mouth of Corrigan Creek to near Cataldo. The
new valley between Pine Creek and Enaville at the mouth of the North
Fork is a narrow crooked rocky gorge separated from the old valley by
a quartzite ridge that may attain an elevation of 600 feet above the river.
The first railroad built in the region followed the old valley in prefer-
ence to this gorge. Between Enaville and Kingston the river occupies
the old valley of the North Fork, but below Kingston it passes through
a series of gorges that are a little narrower, much deeper, and steeper
walled, and hence more youthful in appearance than the corresponding
portions of the old valley.
526 O. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
On a rock bench 125 feet above the river at the mouth of Pine Creek
a thin sheet of light brown sandy silt has scattered over it many cobbles
and small boulders up to 2 feet in length of quartzite and igneous rocks,
including the varieties of granite and basic crystallines usual to the 200-
foot terrace. An 8-inch boulder is of fine-grained gneiss. The bouldery
deposit extends up the slope back of the rock bench to at least 50 feet
above it. Igneous material constitutes at least 25 per cent of all cobbles
and boulders over 3 inches in diameter. No fine gravel appears.
The old river valley between Pine Creek and Kingston is about 500
yards wide. The northern part of its floor is a shallow U-shaped trough °
about 400 feet wide, under which there is a bed of argillaceous material
abounding in rock fragments of all sizes up to small boulders. Most of
them are of local material, largely Cataldo quartzite,* in an angular and
subangular condition. There are some water-worn boulders and cobbles
of quartzite, but the most characteristic portion of the material is the
igneous rocks. Various varieties of granite and diorite are common.
There are basic crystallines, fine-grained gneisses, and pegmatites. Many
of the well rounded, dark gray quartzite pebbles have probably come with
the igneous rocks. When I first discovered this deposit in the summer —
of 1909, I was impressed by its having some glacial characteristics, and
I even thought I found traces of glacial striation on some of the sub-
angular rock fragments. In fact on my last visit I found a 214-inch
quartzite fragment apparently faceted and scratched on two sides and
less clear scratches on other pebbles. However, as they occur on the
slope of an old railway cut now used for a wagon road, I am willing to
ignore these apparently glacially striated stones.
In a 20-foot cut the boulder clay is underlaid by a succession of thin
beds of horizontally stratified fine argillaceous sand and silt of blue
gray, reddish brown, yellowish brown, and white colors. This I believe
belongs to the deep valley filling. On the south of the valley several
nearly flat-topped ridges of Prichard slate are crossed by a gentle de-
pression. They probably represent the rock bench under the ‘south por-
’The term ‘Cataldo quartzite’ is temporarily applied to a member of the Belt series
of formations, which was not recognized by Ransome and Calkins in their report on the
Cceur d’Alene district, as it is apparently poorly represented in that district. It consists
chiefly of heavy beds, in part cross-bedded, of lilac-colored medium-grained quartzite,
differing in appearance from any quartzite above the Prichard. With this are beds of
greenish, finer-grained sericitic rock. Its thickness is at least 1.000 feet. It evidently
underlies the Prichard slate. Beginning a little above the mouth of Pine Creek, it is
exposed over a great area, thence nearly to the station of Rose Lake. It also occurs
near the town of Tekoa, in Washington, and it is my impression that it will be found
generally along the border of the Archean gneisses and granites, it being apparently the
basal member of the Belt series; it probably corresponds to the Creston quartzite of
Daly. Its outcrops have a light gray color and it gives rise to a stony sterile soil.
TERRACES WEST OF KELLOGG REGION 527
tion of the 600-foot terrace. Curiously, granite boulders occur in the
shallow valley between these ridges at about the level of the summit in
the gap. Large angular fragments of granodiorite near the summit of
the railroad grade are probably the result of blasting several boulders at
least 4 feet long.
A narrow terrace about 150 feet above the river, southwest of Kings-
ton, has many cobbles and small boulders of granite and other igneous
rocks and represents the 200-foot terrace. One granite boulder is 4 feet
long. There is one subangular 14-inch fragment of coarse gneiss (with
plates of white mica one-half inch long) of a decidedly Archean aspect.
A 40-inch granite boulder is imbedded in the soil 300 or 350 feet above
the river. At 500 or 600 feet above the river there is a shallow saddle
crossing a ridge in line with similar saddles on ridges east and west,
doubtless representing a partially reexcavated shallow channel under
_ the southern portion of the 600-foot terrace. Gravel continues to the
top of a small rounded peak, 600 or 700 feet above the river. [rom its
top one can see many ridges of similar height, whose summits roughly
outline the floors of broad valleys extending down the river and up its
two forks. The so-called “old valley” is the deep channel that was filled
to a depth of at least 500 feet to the level of these broad valley floors.
The main river shifted to the north side of the broad valley, and when
it cut down again it encountered buried rock ridges, through which it
excavated the gorges of the new valley.
The section of the old valley between Kingston and Cataldo is about
300 yards wide at its narrowest part and its floor is about 150 feet above
the river at Cataldo. The uppermost deposit near the summit is a bed
of subangular local debris, local conglomerate, water-worn cobbles, and
small boulders and the usual sprinkling of granite and other foreign
rocks, including gneiss and mica schist. On the surface igneous rocks
constitute 10 to 25 per cent of all boulders and cobbles over 3 inches in
diameter. On the western slope we get below the gravel bed, and the
road bed imperfectly exposes a very fine-grained orange-colored non-
pebbly silt. However, boulders continue to be scattered over the surface.
In an orchard there is a boulder of granodiorite 9 feet long, 8 feet wide,
and projecting 414 feet above the soil. (The mountain behind is of
quartzite.) Certainly this huge boulder was not brought by ordinary
river action. I can only conceive of ice as the agency that brought it to
its present position over a soft silt bed.
Farther down the slope the silts are exposed in a railway cut to a
thickness of 18 feet. They are extremely fine grained, finely laminated,
and absolutely non-pebbly. The colors are bright, mostly pink and yel-
528 O. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
low, with Bae red, brown, orange, and cream color. In a railway cut
about 1144 miles below Cataldo the bulk of the material is an extremely
fine silt of white color, though orange, pink, and yellow tints appear in
places. It is made up of subangular grains of colorless minerals, chiefly
quartz. Lindgren also entertained this view. See Professional Paper No. 27, U. S. Geol. Sur-
vey Pub., 1904,
VALLEYS OF CLEARWATER COUNTRY, IDAHO 533
merges with the lava plateau surface, but my impression is that in a
general way it does. At any rate, the mountains which were visited by
me are of Archean granites, gneisses, schists, etcetera, and distinctly rise
above the lava plateaus as they do above the old valley floors. Hence
the presumed peneplain represented by the crests of the higher ridges is
much older than the lava. The river crosses the plateau region in a
deep, narrow, rocky canyon whose general appearance suggests an age
similar to that of the canyon in the Newsome Creek region. ‘The walls
are generally of basalt, but in places older rocks appear under it, indi-
cating that the lava overlies a hilly surface. ‘Tributary streams have
corresponding canyons. There is evidence that, in addition to the can-
yon cutting, there has been erosion on the plateau surface to a depth in
places of several hundred feet.
PLAINS AND VALLEYS OF EASTERN WASHINGTON
The eastern Washington and Idaho wheat country, as seen from an
isolated mountain north of Tekoa, in Whitman County, Washington,
appears to be a sharply undulating plain, characterized by rounded hills
rather than long, broad swells. The range of altitude between the main
hill crests and the streams in the narrow valleys may average several
hundred feet. In the distance the hilltops merge into an apparent plain,
though not an absolutely level one. It is broken by a prominent peak,
Steptoe Butte, and by several lesser elevations in the vicinity. At Gar-
field the country is more sharply wrinkled, but the hills do not much
exceed 100 feet in height. The soil is dark brown in color and free
from fragments larger than grains of sand. The subsoil is the light
brown siltlike material produced by the decomposition of basalt. Fresh
railroad cuts near Tekoa show 20 to 40 feet depth of this material.
Dark brown basalt appears in low bluffs in some of the valleys. It is
to the great depth of the fine and relatively homogeneous residuum of
the basalt that the hills owe their smooth contours. The topography is
like that of a long-eroded, loess-covered upland region in the Mississippi
Basin.
This great “plain,” which is a plain by reason only of the small range
of altitude of its hilltops, passes into the reentrants between the spurs
of the Coeur d’Alene and Clearwater groups of mountains on the east.
The line of demarkation between the plain and the mountains, as seen
from such elevations as the mountain near Tekoa, is a sharp one, but at
closer range the undulations of the plain merge into the greater undu-
lations of the mountains. The mountain north of Tekoa consists of
584 0. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
hard gray quartzite, apparently Cataldo. Other western spurs of the
Coeur d’Alene Mountains are evidently of the metamorphic rocks, at
least in their higher parts. Without a detailed study, I can not say how
high the basalt rises on the flanks of the quartzite mountains, but I think
it is true that in a general way the undulating plain of the wheat coun-
try represents the original lava plain and the mountains which rise above
its eastern border are of older rocks that were never lava-covered.
The new Oregon-Washington Railway and Navigation Company’s cut-
off between Spokane and Harrison leaves Coeur d’Alene Lake in a canyon
cut in lava, which it presently leaves and traverses the gently rolling
plateau surface. Then it ascends through a range of low hills in which
the cuttings are in granitic rock, and comes out on a broad, gently rolling
plain which seems to merge into the great lava plain of eastern Wash-
ington. The Mica Range rises abruptly on the northern side of the
plain; the railroad descends to the broad valley of the Spokane River
through a narrow, crooked valley cut in light gray micaceous rock.
Between Harrison and Tekoa the railroad ascends one of the canyons
cut into the lava near Coeur d’Alene Lake to a low ridge on the eastern
border of the great lava plain, and thence descends into a shallow valley
excavated in the lava on the western slope from the divide. I have no
doubt that the lava about the south end of Cceur d’Alene Lake consists
of the same sheets as underlie the eastern Washington wheat country;
in other words, that the uppermost gravel of the 600-foot terrace of the
Coeur d’Alene Valley may be practically the same stratigraphic horizon
as the highest basalt sheet in the.Tekoa region.
The Great Northern Railway west of Spokane climbs out of the valley
on to the lava plateau on the south, and traverses its gently undulating
surface at altitudes mostly between 2,300 and 2,500 feet above sealevel.
From Harrington (altitude, 2,167 feet) the rolling plain descends
westward to about 1,300 feet at Wilson Creek, and thence for over 40
miles there is no material descent. The railroad is generally below the
level of the rolling plain, in shallow valleys and small canyons which
increase in number and depth as the Columbia River bluff is approached.
Many of these small valleys are bordered by basalt bluffs, but the higher
divides are smooth and must have a deep soil, for they are largely under
cultivation. Finally the railroad descends into the canyon-like valley
of the Columbia River, crossing the stream at an altitude of 588 feet.
The Columbia River lava appears to be upturned on the west side of the
river, but soon gives place to older rocks.
All over the Columbia Basin the essential features are: A pro-
nouncedly undulating surface, with broad smooth ridges or small
7
—— a
_—s
——— lr
=.) oe
—
PLAINS AND VALLEYS OF EASTERN WASHINGTON 535
rounded hills, in which the lava is decayed to great depth, and stony
tracts and basalt bluffs along the streams and main valleys. There are
few extensive flats, and such as occur are floodplains of the streams or
areas in which the decomposed basalt has been swept away down to
some especially resistant lava sheet. The latter is probably the origin
of a relatively flat plain, about 20 miles from Spokane, on the Palouse
branch of the Northern Pacific Railroad, made up of very low flat-topped
rocky tables of basalt separated by broad swales, many of which have
shallow lakes in the rainy season. The larger streams, such as the Co-
lumbia, Spokane, and Snake rivers, generally flow in steep-walled valleys
or canyons trenched beneath the floor of the uplifted and tilted basin
plain except where, in the west central portion of the basin, the plain
descends nearly to the level of the Columbia River. On the north and
east sides outliers of older mountains rise like monadnocks from the
plain; but I am not certain of the relation between the Cascade Range
of central Washington and the plain of the Columbia Basin.
The Columbia River (Yakima) lava has been shown by Smith, Mer-
riam,° Sinclair, and others to be mainly of early Miocene age, as that
term is used by the students of vertebrate paleontology, although else-
where in the Pacific Coast country the outpouring of basalt continued
into the Pliocene period. ‘The highest sheet in the basin is probably
middle Miocene in age. The earlier lavas may not have attained such
an elevation along the eastern border of the basin as to have affected the
drainage of the valleys in the Idaho mountains; hence the deep valley
filling under the 600-foot terrace in the Coeur d’Alene Valley may be
entirely middle Miocene in age. The gravel of the 1,150-foot terrace at
Kellogg may be rather early Miocene. There may have been an interval
between the close of the volcanism and the orographic disturbance
which, by tilting the lava plain, inaugurated the erosion of the canyons.
The larger canyons, as already pointed out in the case of the Clearwater,
are comparable with the Pleistocene canyons of the California moun-
tains and probably of the same age. They make it reasonable to attribute
the uplift and tilting of the lava plain to the period of orographic dis-
turbance of wide extent in the Pacific Coast i pee which opened the
Quaternary Era.
SUMMARY
The Tertiary history of the region discussed opens with the erosion of
deep, broad valleys in the Clearwater region of Idaho and deeper and
® Tertiary faunas of the John Day region. Bull. Dept. Geol., Univ. Cal., vol. 5, p. 193.
SXXVIII—BvLL. Geox. Soc. AM., Vou, 23, 1911
586 0. H. HERSHEY—TERTIARY AND QUATERNARY GEOLOGY
narrower valleys in the Cceur d’Alene Mountains (giving the latter the
unique distinction among western mountains of having been nearly as |
rugged in middle Miocene time as today), with a great low plain on the
west of the mountains. This plain was flooded with basalt lava, which
gradually rose against the western slope of the Idaho mountains, and
in the middle Miocene period so obstructed the Coeur d’Alene Valley
that a lake was formed beyond the lava barrier and the deep old valley
filled with sediment to a depth of 500 feet. At the close of the Pliocene
period the Idaho mountains were uplifted, the lava plain tilted south-
westerly, and the streams began to cut new canyons. When the Coeur
d’Alene River had trenched its new valley to a depth of about 400 feet,
a glacier advanced across the valley somewhere below Lane and formed
a lake of very short duration, in which floated icebergs laden with glacial
debris. At this time probably between two-thirds and three-fourths of
the Pleistocene period had passed. When the ice retreated, the river
cut its valley 100 to 350 feet deeper, locally forming river terraces.
Near the end of the Pleistocene period alpine glaciers formed in the
Bitter Root Mountains of Montana and Idaho and ran short distances
down the valleys. Valley trains of over-wash gravels led down the main
valleys, such as the Saint Regis in Montana and the South Fork of the
Coeur d’Alene in Idaho. Then the ice largely melted away from the
high mountains and the valley trains were nearly removed by erosion.
Finally, the glaciers advanced again, though to a less distance than
formerly. Their valley trains are largely buried under the Modern
alluvium except that of the Spokane Valley. This obstructed the Coeur
d’Alene Valley and formed the present Coeur d’Alene Lake. The lake
was originally a little higher than at present, as evidenced by the bed of
sand in the city of Coeur d’Alene. At the opening of the Recent period
the glaciers disappeared and the rivers began to build up the Modern
floodplains, including the delta of the Coeur d’Alene River.
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 537-562 NOVEMBER 9, 1912
DEFLATIVE SCHEME OF THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN
ARID CLIMATE?
BY CHARLES R. KEYES
(Presented before the Society December 29, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
TN ee Sno Ge ais sleksa wb Gje dis Guhiev Cav kw okeek Vaan ect cveeuves Bae
Controlling erosional agents under diverse climatic conditions....,....... 53¢
Mecparavion Of rock materials for eroSion. ...6......00002 cde deseccee B39
Effectiveness of water action in a moist climate..................... 540
Meimance Of wind-scour in a dry Climate: ..... 00. cnc ce cc ensecce 540
Peeemooe. re Scoring in a glacial climate. ..... 02... ccc cece c ween 541
Poemtons Of Slacial and arid erosion CONGITIONS. .... 0... 2 eee ccc cette 542
ee NTE TEHIRE CMO PUEL ERY 2 C25 ee bis aco «cu ec chs osc uh sav ceweee ce cesar 543
Contrasted characteristics of arid and humid initial conditions... .......... 543
Sarcraee offered to sculpturing agencies. ..... 0... ccc c ceed cece nccecce 543
Pempeceaent Tivers Of GESErt CTEZIONS. ... 2... cc cc meee sein ccc cece 544
Dre aIE PT AINASE TCALULES. «ls oc ie ee ole gee wees ee ens eveacecs 545
eNO ED USSG Gels 2 dealer dsc wa esd dee eb em ews aie ded ce cewea 545
PP eEr CPC ASITAT WAS cil. bce cess Geta cs cccuscvcss Ba Nd thes 546
Detter: TeALUDTeS TNGCr APIGITY . 6. oc es eee ee wee eee ceecccwce 548
Contrasted features of arid and humid topographic juvenility............ 548
SPRINT COCUET ALY: DOSUUIALCON, o.. oicccn ee cso cc cae eg cantececenaces 548
eee rid Stee TOF GENATION.... 0.0.05 wes teas cceccccccescs 549
REED C URE ESIETY SINE SUASC. . oe ke cules hie wale os ele nc ewe dene sccew us 550
Certain characteristic deflative features................. SS AOR, EA 551
Certain peculiarities of arid youth................. & Saas aie ee boa eas 551
RI CNR ANT TULL ele ciaie'n ni 40s, oui a em he chew ajd.c W,0 bo si ncajaiwee'e ela we nie'e « 554
Meeaeeraves CONTSeE Gl GEVEIODMENE. .2 6 cise coc ccc ce wean cdaw eet ceucs 554.
Ce sati Teaimres UNGER GENATION. 6. occa ow cae be eies seecwees 554
Development of original drainage lines in desert ranges.............. 555
IEaTCeEd RT TIE ZUICUSTRE PLY) > oo Ste S oc cic = ek'n dare godin dc whist eR Cc ce ewe ds com 557
Pence OL OIG ALC in GASErt FECIONS... oc cw cence ee cee men wccendan 559
MMRRRESRE CHET EOUGLOT I MEIOR «0 chapsr lah eel wading &. wide e owe tisla’n ane 8 wie v's o's Rwy 559
Topographic features of old age under deflation........... bios ise ga Sa 559
RES OTITIS TA GEGROOEE. a) 5 3c Ce cas ile vice os aoc a wfc une sce ys Sica oie 559
water Beno iM GESCrE TEPIONS... 2. ick ce cea cc asec tees enee 560
EINES coche eerie Gee tate el tiered Byala nes ca Vc e/k ok Ae Chea he Oak eee ae 562
1 Received by the Secretary of the Society March 25, 1912.
Read by title under the caption “Geographic cycle in an arid climate: Should its
development be by wind or water?’ December 29, 1911.
(537)
538 co. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
INTRODUCTORY
Since as ordinarily developed the scheme of the geographic cycle postu-
lates an upraised land surface exposed to stream action and other erosive
influences peculiar to a humid climate, its designation “normal scheme”
is perhaps as fitting as any other term possibly could be. The normal
plan, however, has had to be modified to meet two special conditions.
On the one hand it has been adapted to a glacial climate, and on the
other hand to an arid climate. A number of writers have recently de-
scribed these variations, but always with the essentials of the normal
scheme conspicuously before them.
In all of these considerations stream action or water alone is regarded
as the prime agency of regional leveling and lowering. ‘That there
should be need of distinctive treatment to meet the requirements of
those special conditions of climate where the snows of winter do not all
vanish in summer, and for those conditions of aridity where all basins
do not overflow and the surface drainage never reaches the sea, gives
rise to the query whether this solution of the problem actually obviates
the difficulties presented. There is at once invited a comparison of the
relative efficiencies of the several erosive processes under diverse climatic
conditions. |
One of the immediate results of such comparison is the suggestion
whether instead of attempting longer to fit closely the two so-called
special cases to a humid-climate standard we could not with great ad-
vantage recognize a different standard for each of the three sets of cli-
matic conditions. Would it not be indeed more logical to develop sepa-
rate cyclic phases along lines indicated by the effects of the dominant
erosional process for each particular climate? |
There is now no question but that in the past we have been prone to
attach far too much general importance to the special products of the
geologic processes as they operate in a humid climate and with which
we are most familiar. A direct consequence has been to overlook, often
almost completely, the workings of other geologic processes the effects of
which are really quite extensive. Perfect familiarity with provincial
facts and provincial conditions readily leads to too broad generalization.
That relative to which we are pleased to denominate normal climate
appears to be no exception to the rule.
The deflative scheme of an arid geographic cycle here outlined appears
to be abundantly supported by data recorded elsewhere. These facts are
set forth mainly in three recently published papers. Without reiterating
CONTROLLING EROSIONAL AGENTS 539
_ here what they contain they may be pertinently considered in connection
with the present discussion. Hence frequent reference is made directly
to them. The present paper is the fourth of a closely connected series
bearing especially on the arid regions of this country and the different
phases of its eolative development. In the first account is described the
remarkable rock-floors of the intermont plains of southwestern United
States and northern Mexico.? A second article, dealing with deflation
and the relative efficiencies of erosional processes under conditions of
- aridity, describes the salient relief features of an area to all appearances
now undergoing rapid denudation. The third memoir,* on mid-conti-
nental eolation, refers especially to a broad region where deposition of
wind-blown materials is believed to be taking place on a large scale. This
fourth statement is an argument for the development of the geographic
features in an arid region mule through means of wind-scour rather
than stream action.
CONTROLLING EROSIONAL AGENTS UNDER DIVERSE CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
PREPARATION OF ROCK MATERIALS FOR EROSION
Since the effects of erosion are made most conspicuous through the
removal of loose rock materials from the surface of the ground, the con-
dition in which the degradational agencies find this rock-waste becomes
a prime consideration. ‘To the breaking down of rock-masses so largely
influenced by climate the somewhat vague term “rock weathering” is ap-
plied. However, this term, familiar as it is, does not fully express the
exact manner in which the transformation from the rock to rock-waste
takes place.
The scheme of the normal geographic cycle premises moist-climate
conditions, whereby the breaking down of the rocks at the surface is
more largely chemical than mechanical. By implication at least the
effect is regarded as a universal one, and little notice is taken of possible
exceptions.
With greatest facility does chemical decay of rock-masses take place
under conditions of heavy rainfall and warm climate. Yet long ago
Von Richthofen® drew attention to the fact that in cold or in dry cli-
mates the rocks display few signs of chemical decay. Russell® further
emphasized this feature when he said “that rock decay appears to be the
2 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908, pp. 63-92.
3Ibid., vol. 21, 1910, pp. 565-598.
4Ibid., vol. 22, 1911, pp. 687-714.
5 Fiihrer fiir Forschungsreisende, p. 100. Berlin, 1886.
* Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 1, 1890, p, 134,
540 c.R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
direct result of normally wet climatic conditions. In cold or arid re-
gions the rocks are scarcely at all decayed.” The production of rock-
waste in desert lands through the process known as insolation is especially
considered in another place.* At the surface of the ground it is shown
to be very largely mechanical, hardly at all chemical in nature.
EFFECTIVENESS OF WATER ACTION IN MOIST CLIMATE
Those climatic conditions which tend to make of water action a most
effective erosive agent, that in a humid land make it appear to be the
sole process of general degredation, and that make it seem the only
universal erosional activity are the very conditions which tend to obscure
the effects of the erosional agencies which are most pronounced in a
glacial climate and in an arid climate. Attempt to ascribe all erosion
to stream action militates not so much against fact as it marks a dis-
tinctive period in the history of erosive thought. The composite effects
in humid as well as in both arid and glacial climates remain to be prop-
erly analyzed. The factor of relative efficiencies of each has to be deter-
mined in every region.
If water be the dominant erosional power in a moist climate it does
not necessarily follow that less water is the sole erosive force in either
dry or glacial climates.
DOMINANCE OF WIND-SCOUR IN A DRY CLIMATE
Notwithstanding the fact that during the past decade the wind in the
capacity of a potent agent of general erosion has come to be recognized
more and more universally, there still lingers a certain reluctance to
admit its effectiveness in specific cases or its high relative rank among
the degradational processes. Even in instances in which the climatie
conditions are such as almost to preclude water action, where the annual
rainfall is so small as to be almost negligible, stream work is still given
first place and wind work a very subordinate place.
That wind-scour in an arid land should be considered not only the
dominant erosional activity, but under the peculiarly favorable condi-
tions for its operations more potent and rapid in its effects than is
water action in a normal, wet country is a quite recent deduction, but
one which seems to be amply supported by many observations. More
fully to appreciate the enormous extent of eolation, it is necessary only
to peruse the later publications of certain astute observers who have
actually lived in desert lands, although in this country this subject has
not received the attention that it seems to deserve. Of these mention
7 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 21, 1910, p. 569.
.
a a
oh at ie
CONTROLLING EROSIONAL AGENTS 541
may be made of the work of Obruchew,®* in central Siberia; of Walther,®
in north Africa; of La Touche,’® in the western Rajputana, in India;
of Berg** and Ivechenko,"? in the region about the Sea of Aral and on
the Kirghiz steppes; of Passarge*® and of Davis,** in the South African
veldt; of Penck ;1° of Hundhausen,*® in southern France; of Barron,’
in eastern Egypt, and of Blackwelder,** in Wyoming.
Recent investigations in arid and semi-arid countries appear to dem-
onstrate beyond all shadow of doubt that as a denuding, transportive,
and depositional power the wind is not only fully competent to perform
such work, but that it is comparable in every way to water action in a
moist climate. As lately noted,’® it is significant that most of the broad
intermont plains of the Southwestern Desert, for instance, should be
areas of rapid degradation instead of aggradation, as is shown by their
remarkable rock-floors, that the little normal water action therein should
be confined to the loftier mountains, and that the general plains surface
should be so little affected by stream corrasion. General desert leveling
and lowering must find for their chief sculpturing agency something
other than stream action. All things considered, deflation, or wind-
scour, in arid lands not only appears to be the principal erosional
process, but water action surprisingly subordinate.
Under conditions of aridity the relative efficiencies of wind-scour and
water action may be roughly measured by the circumstance that the total
volume of rock-waste brought down by storm waters from a desert range
in a year may be removed by the winds in a single day. What general
erosion by means of water is in a wet climate, eolation is under condi-
tions of arid climate.
EXTENT OF ICE SCORING IN A GLACIAL CLIMATE
Erosion by ice under conditions of a true glacial climate is probably
not nearly so vigorous, widespread, or important as it has been thought
to be. Further, it may be questioned whether in the case of great conti-
nental ice-fields there is sufficient motion except near the melting mar-
8 Verh. Imp. min. Gesellsch., St. Petersburg, vol. xxxiii, 1895, p. 260.
® Das Gesetz d. Wiistenbildung im Gagenwart u. Vorseit, 1900.
10 Mem. Geol. Survey India, vol. xxxy, 1902, p. 10.
Pédologie for 1902, p. 37.
2 Ann. géol. min. Russie, vol. vii, pt. i, 1904, p. 43.
13 Zeitsch. d. deuts. geol. Gesellsch., vol. lvi, Protokol, 1904, p. 193.
14 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 17, 1906, p. 435.
15 American Journal of Science (4), vol. xix, 1905, p. 167.
16 Globus, vol. cx, 1906, p. 46.
1% Topography of Sinai, western portion, 1907, p. 17.
18 Journal of Geology, vol. xvii, 1909, p. 429.
1? Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol, 21, 1910, p, 587.
p42. Cc. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
gins to produce notable erosion effects. In the adaptation of the normal
humid-climate scheme of the geographic cycle to that of a glacial climate
the conditions postulated have not been those of a truly glacial climate,
but those of a mountainous region where Eri are present, which is
a very different thing.
The marked distinction between mountain glaciers and continental
glaciers, or inland-ice fields, is fundamental. This is especially empha-
sized by Hobbs.2° Physiographically this distinction is far-reaching.
The climate in the one case is not a glacial climate at all. The vigor
and extent of ice scoring is more than commensurate with that which is
displayed by the other. If anything, the absolute amount of abrasion is
very much less in the last mentioned instance.
Continental glaciers seem to present conditions that are essentially
desert conditions. The advancement of the ice-margin is probably more
rapid through the constant outward drifting of the fine dry arctic snows
than by any general motion of the ice itself. Recent observations in
Greenland and Antarctica seem to leave little doubt of the existence of
anticyclone areas over these inland-ice fields. Nansen2* and Peary”? in
particular call attention to it in the north, while Shackleton** furnishes
complete evidence of the existence of a South Polar anticyclone, which
20 years before had been advocated by Murray.** The drifting of the
arctic snows is in all respects identical with the shifting of desert dusts
and sands.
Formulated strictly according to boreal conditions and not on what is
really a humid-climate basis, the commonly recognized scheme of a geo-
graphic cycle in a truly glacial climate needs radical revision. It may
be that the glacial cycle could be with great advantage regarded as an
arid cycle.
RELATIONS OF GLACIAL AND ARID Eroston ConpDITIoONsS
In the paper read before the Geological Society in 19087 I inciden-
tally compared the most striking effects of deflation in the desert with
those of the winter blizzard on our northern prairies, where fine ice-dust
and ice-sands take the place of mobile comminuted rock-waste. Were it
possible to extend the blizzard a week or a month, or repeat it at short
intervals for 4 longer period instead of a single day, the general plana-
* Characteristics of existing glaciers, 1911, p. 6.
“ First Crossing of Greenland, vol. ii, 1890, p. 496.
Geographical Journal, vol. x, 1898, p. 233.
* Heart of the Antarctic, vol. ii, 1910, p. 18.
*4 Geographical Journal, vol. iii, 1898, p. 1.
* Bull. Geol. Soc, America, vol. 21, 1910, p. 582.
SS -
RELATION OF GLACIAL AND EROSION CONDITIONS 543
tion effects might be soon rendered quite conspicuous and even the eolic
erosion of the protruding rock hills might soon appear appreciable.
The association of the origin of the continental glaciers with eolic
activities is no doubt more intimate and far-reaching in its physio-
graphic bearing than might be at first glance supposed. During a
greater part of the year arctic conditions are essentially desert condi-
tions. The identity and nature of the rock weathering in the two cli-
mates has been already noted. The peculiar dry, powdery character of
arctic snows are comparable in all respects to the fine dusts and sands
of arid regions. In both instances the main effects of the wind on the
loose materials are the same. Until the dry snows, through partial melt-
ing, consolidate into ice, they remain in the same condition as desert
dusts before they become exposed to moisture. That the one should
accumulate into vast continental ice-fields and the other into vast even-
surfaced mantles of continental sedimentaries is a fact which strictly
accords with the theoretic expectations of eolic action.
It appears that considerably over one-half of the land area of the
globe is profoundly affected by eolic agencies. Murray’® estimates that
not less than one-fifth of the land surface is occupied by desert. At
least another one-fifth is subject to greater or less accumulations of con-
tinental deposits of one sort or another in which wind-borne dusts form
no inconsiderable part.?” Perhaps another one-fifth is or was within
recent geological times covered by snow-fields and physiographically is
to be considered as truly desert as the Sahara.
ESsENTIAL FEATURES OF ARIDITY
The peculiarities of an arid climate are generally described in terms
of normally humid conditions. Contrasted with those of moist climate
they have been lately especially characterized by Davis.?* With particu-
lar reference to southwestern United States they have also been briefly
noted by me.*® ‘To these papers further reference is subsequently made.
CONTRASTED CHARACTERISTICS OF ARID AND HUMID INITIAL STAGES
SURFACE OFFERED TO SCULPTURING AGENCIES
Although the earth’s crust with any structure, any form, and any alti-
tude is postulated in the beginning for the normal or moist geographic
eycle, the ideal and most complete cycle demands a recently upraised
% Science, n. s., vol. xvi, 1890, p. 106.
2 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 22, 1911, p. 688.
28 Journal of Geology, vol. xiii, 1905, p. 382.
2 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 21, 1910, p. 568.
544 co. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
peneplain. Singularly enough, no large peneplain is known that still
remains near the baselevel with respect to which it was worn down.
On the hypothesis of regional lowering and leveling by stream action,
great and even unsurmountable difficulties are at once met with in at-
tempting to explain satisfactorily the larger relief features of deserts.
Under conditions of aridity and with wind-scour as the chief denuding
power, there need be no recent regional uplifting in order to initiate the
arid cycle of erosion. The affected area may be an old plain of pene-
plain-like aspect, or it may be a vast plains surface frequently inter-
rupted by mountain ridges. Whether it could be ever an area occupied
entirely by lofty mountains is very questionable. Altitude, however, is
practically a negligible factor. The initial heights of some deserts were
doubtless several thousands of feet above sealevel. In view of the possi-
bility of desert-leveling, the flat-topped Bural-bas-tau and the associated
plateau-like highlands in the Tian Shan range in Turkestan need recon-
sideration, as Davis well observes. Because of the strong possibility of
its formation above baselevel in a region of inland drainage, Friederich-
sen®® expresses objection to regarding it as a once low-lying peneplain,
as urged both by Davis** and Huntington.** In southwestern United
States, as represented by the remnantal plateau of the Mesa de Maya,
the initial surface of the desert of that region must have been at least
8,000 to 10,000 feet above sealevel. The high South African deserts
offer other examples.
On the other hand, desert lowering by the wind goes on below the
level of normal peneplanation, not perhaps indefinitely below normal
baselevel, provided the sea be kept out, as urged by Penck,** but some
little distance below sealevel, until stopped by ground-water level, as ap-
parently in the cases of the Death and Imperial valleys, in California.
By deflation an arid cycle could be initiated on an old peneplain without
any change in elevation.
The objections to ascribing a possible initiation of an arid cycle in a
mountainous region I have already pointed out.**
ANTECEDENT RIVERS OF DESERT REGIONS
On the basis of the normal cycle, the drainage features, or rather the
lack of them, in arid regions appear utterly inexplicable. Elevation of
surface, which is so all important in the introduction of a new cycle in
30 Petermann’s Mitteilungen, vol. xlix, 1903, p. 136.
31 Appalachia, vol. x, 1904, p. 277.
82 Carnegie Institution Publications, No. 26, 1905, p. 157.
83 American Journal of Science (4), vol. xix, 1905, p. 167,
54 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 21, 1910, p. 589,
———
| oe
CONTRASTED CHARACTERISTICS OF ARID AND HUMID STAGES 545
the moist climate, should in a dry climate have little direct influence if
an eolic hypothesis be followed. This inference all observations seem
to support.
The only evidences of antecedent drainage persisting against regional
deformation and aridity are presented by the few very largest rivers
which have their headwaters beyond arid limits and merely cross the
desert on their way to the sea. They receive little or no augmentation
to their waters within the area of the dry region. Entirely apart from
the desert should these through-flowing streams be considered. The Rio
Colorado, the Rio Grande, and the Rio Pecos in the arid country of
southwestern: United States, the Nile in northeastern Africa, and simi-
lar rivers really exert small influence in the general lowering of the
lands through which they pass. In the cases of all other streams which
in a humid climate would be classed as antecedent rivers all vestiges
would be soon lost with the initiation of the arid cycle. Their disap-
pearance would be not only because they had merely dried up, but for
the reason that their entire valleys had blown away.
CONSEQUENT DRAINAGE FEATURES
Consequent drainage, which according to the humid-climate idea must
prevail, is in several respects peculiar. It is doubtful whether it should
be called consequent drainage at all. It is certainly not consequent
drainage as it is understood in a moist-climate region. In a high-lying
mountainous desert, such as is displayed in the province already noticed
and in the Mexican tableland, whatever drainage there may be is mainly
of the sheetflood order.** Even the streams coming down from the moun-
tains tend to assume this character as soon as they reach the plains of
the piedmont, as has been so graphically described by McGee.**
Certain peculiarities presented by these streams of the mountains are
more fully discussed further on.
CENTRIPETAL DRAINAGE
The development of the present so-called consequent drainage of arid
regions may not be necessarily, as has been urged, through the withering
away of the lower reaches of streams belonging to a previous moist cycle.
Neither may the independent centripetal systems belong to as many
basins of initial deformation; that they should so belong is a necessary
deduction of the moist-climate hypothesis. On the basis of an arid cli-
mate and a development of intermont basins through deflation instead
*® Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908, p. 78.
%° Bull. Geol. Soc, America, vol. 8, 1897, p. 87.
546 c.R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN. ARID CLIMATE
of through recent deformation, a very different explanation is made
possible and probable.
If it be postulated that the high-lying surface of such a region as the
northern Mexican tableland, already referred to, was at the beginning
of the arid cycle a plain, an upraised peneplain possibly; that its major
folding and faulting were quite ancient, mainly prior to peneplanation,
and this seems highly probable ;** that the present intermont plains rep-
resent the belts of weak rock undergoing vigorous deflation, as their
rock-floors indicate, and that in consequence the mountain belts of re-
sistant rock are now rapidly being brought into stronger and stronger
relief, as all observation goes to show, centripetal drainage must be ad-
vancing and expanding as the mountain ranges become relatively higher.
Such drainage systems are growing rather than withering.
MIGRATION OF BASINAL WASH
General misconception has long prevailed concerning the derivation
and composition of the basin soils of arid regions. It is frequently
stated that the smooth intermont plains are formed by the wash from
their highland rims. The valleys of the Great Basin are notable ex-
amples. Concerning this region this view has been expressed by nearly
every one who has written on the geology of this district during the past
30 years. The best statement of this impression is that by Russell.*§
Even so late as the past year an eminent geographer*® has seriously em-
phasized this old notion. Enormous depths are attributed to the wash
in the central parts of these intermont basins. Estimates of 3,000 to
4,000 feet are not infrequent. The contiguous mountain ranges are con-
sidered as “buried up to their shoulders.” This conclusion is the direct
result of applying the normal humid-climate principles to such regions.
In accordance with the same principles the sides of each basin often to
the mountain crests are regarded as initial slopes of local deformation,
which lead the wash of the local sporadic rains toward the central de-
pression, whose lowest point serves as the baselevel for the basin. With
this interpretation the facts do not seem very well to agree. Expected
verification of hypothesis in the field is not only not realized, but there
is complete surprise at its manifest invalidity.
The arroyos, or drainage channels of the desert ranges, do not appear
to be the notable wash carriers that they are sometimes thought to be.
Plain with beveled rock-floor and mountain with bare rocky sides sharply
87 Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci., vol. xiii, 1908, p. 221.
38 Geological Magazine, decade iii, vol. vi, 1889, p. 242.
89 Harper’s Magazine, vol. cxxiii, 1911, p. 54.
CONTRASTED CHARACTERISTICS OF ARID AND HUMID sTAGES 547
meet, and the great, thick, alluvial fans which one expects to encounter
on every hand as the intermittent streams leave the highlands, are gener-
ally found to be singularly inconsequential. In place of huge fans miles
in areal extent, hundreds of feet in thickness, and cubic miles in volume,
which one is led to anticipate, their usual size and importance are almost
ridiculously insignificant. Instead of vast extent and great bulk, exami-
nation shows that in a few days a steam-shovel and a train of cars could
often remove every vestige down to bedrock.
The fact of the absence of thick wash accumulations in the central
parts of many, if not of the majority, of intermont basins is strangely
at variance with the assumption that the highland rims of bolson plains
are eventually carried down by the rains and permanantly deposited in
the lowest depressions. It appears that not only are many of these inter-
mont plains not deeply covered by washed-in rock-waste, but that they
are only veneered with soil.t° The exceptionally dry Mojave Basin, in
southeast California, seems to be a good example, if there be one, of an
intermont plain so situated as to receive centrally the wash from a lofty
rim because it is bounded on one side by the high wooded Sierra Nevada
and on another side by the Sierra Madre. Moreover, the various low
desert ranges within its boundaries are among the best instances known
of “lost” or “buried” mountains. Yet nowhere in all of this desert is
it more clearly shown that the basin floor is not deeply covered by rock-
waste. Not only do the mountains and hills display the beveled edges
of the strata beneath, but many square miles of its plains surface, even
in its central part, are so thinly covered by soil that the underlying rocks
are everywhere well exposed. The bedrock surface is, as I have else-
where shown,** itself an even plain. This fact was long ago brought out
in the geological descriptions of the region before its true significance
was understood. Hershey*? is especially explicit on this point, and more
recently Baker** gives additional data of the same sort.
The records of deep drill-wells put down in various portions of arid
America are often interpreted in support of the hypothesis that the
intermont basins are deeply filled with rock-waste recently brought in
by the rains. When critically examined, these drill-logs are found to be
very misleading. In the majority of cases the great part of a drill-sec-
tion is discovered to be in but slightly indurated Tertiary or Cretaceous
or even Carboniferous deposits. Citing a specific instance: It was
49 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908, p. 63.
“Trans. American Inst. Mining Eng., vol. xl, 1909, p. 697.
42.Univ. California Pub., Bull. Dept. Geol., vol. iii, 1902, p. 4.
© Tbid., vol. vi, 1911, p. 3383.
548 o.R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
claimed for the deep well at Albuquerque, New Mexico, that its 2,000
feet of depth were entirely in wash materials, whereas later, more care-
ful and discriminating examination of the data clearly showed that
scarcely 200 feet of the entire depth could be so considered. Similarly,
certain deep drill-holes in southern Arizona are now known to have pene-
trated mainly tilted Tertiary beds instead of enormously thick wash
deposits of quite recent date.
INITIAL RELIEF FEATURES UNDER ARIDITY
As already mentioned, there are two relief extremes on which an arid
climate may be considered as imposed. They are a plain and a moder-
ately mountainous surface. For obvious reasons a region of lofty moun-
tains seems to be precluded. In the first instance the region is essen-
tially a peneplain, although deprived of its streams. - In the second case
there is considerable diversity of relief, but no sharp, local contrasts
such as are presented in a moist country in the beginning of a new cycle
of erosion.
CONTRASTED FEATURES OF ARID AND MOIST TOPOGRAPHIC JUVENILITY
CONDITIONS GENERALLY POSTULATED
As the early stage of the normal geographic cycle is commonly re-
garded, the relief is ordinarily and rapidly increased by the incision of
consequent valleys from the trunk rivers that flow to the sea. In the
early stage of the arid cycle the relief is considered, on the hypothesis
of water action, to be slowly diminished by the removal of waste from
the highlands and its deposition on the lower gentler slopes and on the
basin beds of all of the separate centripetal drainage systems. In con-
sequence all the local baselevels are thought to rise, and the areas of
deposition are given a nearly level central floor of fine waste. Streams,
floods, and lakes, then, are made the chief agencies in giving form to the
ageraded basin floors, as well as to the dissected basin margins in the
early stage of the cycle. In illustration the Great Basin is commonly
pointed out. The winds are sometimes conceded to have some impor-
tance, but in the youthful stage wind-blown hollows are claimed to be
not likely to be formed. For the normal headward growth of many sub-
sequent streams it is explained that in the arid cycle such streams have
smaller opportunity for development because all the belts of weak
structure under the basin deposits are buried out of reach.
Clearly these statements are the result of deduction based on the con-
sideration of conditions as they prevail in a moist climate rather than
of generalization supported by long continued observations in a dry cli-
CONTRASTED FEATURES OF TOPOGRAPHIC JUVENILITY 549
mate. One of the most serious objections to the development of desert
landscapes by water action is the utter discordance between the necessary
consequences of the moist-climate hypothesis and the facts actually
observed.
YOUTHFUL ARID STAGE UNDER DEFLATION
On the basis of wind-scour action little that is ordinarily postulated
for the early stage of the geographic cycle really obtains. The potency
of water-work is found to be very greatly overestimated. The perma-
nency of the deposits transported by the rains from the highland rims
to the central lowlands of the intermont plains seems fanciful. The ris-
ing of the local baselevels appears to be poorly supported by facts. The
development of drainage systems nowhere agrees with direct observation.
In the early stage of the arid cycle the relief seems to be rapidly in-
ereased by the hollowing out of broad flat-bottomed troughs or basins,
laterally bordered by steep-sided, sharp-ridged mountain ranges. The
air-streams accomplishing this work are hundreds of miles wide instead
of a few hundreds of feet, as in the case of rivers; consequently the sur-
face worked over is comparable to the channels of broad, shallow streams.
Sharply incised topography so characteristic of humid lands is, there-
fore, impossible. General lowering is controlled partly by the propor-
tions of weak and resistant rocks, partly by the extent and frequency of
the faulting and other deformations of all previous time. Local condi-
tions are sufficiently variable to enable the general lowering process to
go on independently in the different basins, and the general leveling
goes on also regardless of the relations of the denuded surface to sealevel.
From the very beginning plains-forming is the most characteristic fea-
ture of desert-leveling. As the mountains become higher and higher
normal water action increases on their sides, imparting to them some-
thing of the appearance of stream-graved surfaces. The relatively scant
amounts of waste materials brought down and spread out from time to
time at their bases are so rapidly removed by the winds that there is at
any one time little actual accumulation. Rarely do sporadic cloud-
bursts carry notable quantities of the finer waste into the centers of the
larger basins, there eventually to constitute thick deposits. Moving
sand dunes are momentary phenomena. Permanent deposition of the
finer waste goes on only beyond the boundaries of the desert in the
bordering semi-arid belts or in the adjoining seas.
In the case of the youthful relief stage in a normally humid land its
maturity is commonly regarded as approaching when dissection has gone
on until the major drainage divides have lost some of their height and
sharpness of outline and all elevations have begun to assume a notably
550 c.R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
rounded aspect. In a dry climate, under ordinarily favorable conditions
for deflation, the same general effects hold true, only in a somewhat
different way. Of the positive relief features only the basinal rims can
be properly considered. In place of the floor of each basin being intri-
cately dissected by a ramifying system of more or less deep stream val-
leys, the effects produced in an arid country are as if all valleys of the
more familiar lowlands of a humid land were everywhere filled. In
order to picture more vividly the broader physiographic features of
moist lands, this very procedure is indeed fancied.
With the ideal conception, facts ascertained for the northern Mexican
tableland, for instance, seem fully to accord. Hypsometric differences
of a mile are not unusual, and these are made possible by the great thick-
nesses of weak rocks brought by profound faulting into juxtaposition
with extensive hard masses. In this region after the removal of the
enormous thicknesses of soft materials from the broad belts of weak
rocks the sharp ranges of hard mountain rock appear to be just begin-
ning to have their summits notably worn off. |
The effect of unlike initial tectonics on the arrangement of the local
relief forms at successive stages is pointed out by Davis.** Contrasting
a relief of coarse pattern with that of finer type, the region of central
Asia is compared with that of western America. In the case of the first
the vast even plains of eastern and western Turkestan are separated by
a single broadly. uplifted mountain belt; in the arid region of south-
western United States many short lofty ranges stud the general plains
surface. ;
IDEAL TYPE OF EARLY ARID STAGE
The Great Basin, oftenest drawn on in illustration of the youthful
stage of relief under influences of aridity, appears to represent a devel-
opment of a‘considerable later type of desert topography. The facial
expression of the northern Mexican tableland and of the desert regions
of southern Arizona and of Sonora seem better to display what is to be
expected of the features of this stage after exposure to the protracted
arid conditions. With the deflative idea in mind, this region has re-
ceived more attention than any other in this country. Moreover, its
deformational periods are definitely fixed.
Throughout this broad area the alternation of hard and weak rock-
belts is of the fine-pattern type. On this account features are presented
which enable critical determinations to be made. In one respect the
entire region is exceptionally peculiar; the resistant terranes are all .
segregated at the bottom of the stratigraphic column and the weak rocks
“ Journal of Geology, vol. xiii, 1905, p. 384.
ea |
=
>
.
CONTRASTED FEATURES OF TOPOGRAPHIC JUVENILITY 551
in great thickness at the top. The principal faulting and folding, on a
gigantic scale, is quite ancient—long antedating the last great and re-
cent epeirogenic upraising. With the initiation of the present arid
cycle the whole area appears to have been a plains surface with small
contrasts of relief—a peneplain to all intents and purposes. As this
tract is now about to enter on its mature stage, the extremes of relief
presented are between 5,000 and 6,000 feet. Almost ideal conditions
and features of arid youth prevail.
CERTAIN CHARACTERISTIC DEFLATIVE FEATURES
The stage of arid youth presents certain physiographic features more
perfectly than are shown at any other period of geographic development.
These features it seems impossible to ascribe to an origin by water
action. They are characteristics which point most conclusively to wind-
scour as the sole erosive agent in dry climates. Nowhere outside of
desert tracts are there known elevated plains of vast extent and even
surface.*® Only in the arid region do the mountains attain an isolation
such as is not approached even by the ideal monadnock ; most appropri-
ately the Germans designate the effect the Inselberglandschaft.*® The
complete encirclement of mountain by plain finds no counterpart in
moist countries.*?
A noteworthy feature of desert ranges is a general absence of the foot-
hills so inseparably associated with mountains that they are usually
looked on as essential elements. Under conditions of aridity plain meets
mountain sharply.*® The beveled rock-floor of many intermont plains
throughout the dry regions is explicable on no known activity of water
action in such situations.*® Existence of isolated plateau plains rising
abruptly out of the general plains surface far from any sight of running
water is an anomaly met with only in the desert.°° Notable absence of
distinct waterways in the desert basins, even when they have high gra-
_dients, bespeaks the utter impotency of water as an erosive agent in an
arid climate.®!
CERTAIN PECULIARITIES OF ARID YOUTH
The statement that rock-floors are of common occurrence in the
intermont plains of southwestern United States has been recently chal-
4 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908, p. 63.
46 Naturwiss. Wochenschr., n. s., vol. iii, 1904, p. 657.
#7 Journal of Geology, vol. xvi, 1908, p. 434.
48 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1907, p. 572.
#Tbid., p. 573.
50 Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci., vol. xiii, 1908, -p. 221.
51 American Geologist, vol. xxxiv, 1904, p. 160.
XXXIX—BULL, Grou. Soc, AM., Vou, 28, 1911
552 c.R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
lenged, especially by Tolman.®? This writer particularly emphasizes the
conditions as they impress him around Tucson, in the Santa Cruz Val-
ley, in Arizona, as affording conclusive proofs that the plains floor is
not a beveled rock surface, but a vast accumulation of wash materials
from the contiguous mountains. As is often the case, it appears that in
this instance the illustration is not well chosen; that too much depend-
ence has been placed on general impressions and not enough on critical
observation. As I remember this locality it presents some unusually
good examples of the planed rock-floor but slightly covered by soil.
Bearing directly on this point, the neighborhood of the desert laboratory,
near Tucson, is particularly instructive. In full corroboration of this
statement McGee** notes that Tolman’s “great ideal aprons of colluvial
material were really so tenuous as to be entirely worn through in a three-
inch deep path leading up to the Tucson Desert laboratory.”
It is difficult to see, in view of the numerous recorded observations by
many able investigators, why there should be any serious questioning of
the existence of a rock-floor in bolsons unless it militate a time-tattered
theory. Such planed basins are, to be sure, unlooked for features, and
on a moist-climate hypothesis wholly impossible. There is, however, a
constantly growing record of rock-floored bolsons. I have recently called
attention to some of these features as they are presented in northern
Mexico,** in Arizona,®* in southern California,®*® and in Nevada.®* Me-
Gee*® describes similar phenomena in the Sonoran region of Mexico. In
that remarkably dry tract, known as the Mojave Desert, Hershey®® makes
like observations, which Baker®® quite lately fully corroborates. In ex-
tensive and systematic searches for underground water supplies for rail-
way purposes conducted by me for roads already in operation and lines
surveyed in the Southwest during the year 1902 and years following, it
was long a constant surprise to find bedrock so thinly covered by soils.
One of the most remarkable difficulties in railway construction on the
smooth desert plains is the frequent encounter of bedrock in projected
grade cuts of only a few feet.
Other arid regions display the rock-floored plains. I well remember
so long ago as 1897, during some of the excursions of the Seventh Inter-
52 Journal of Geology, vol. xvii, 1909, p. 136.
5&3 Communication.
* American Journal of Science (4), vol. xv, 1903, p. 207.
55 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908, p. 63.
*® Trans. American Inst. Mining Eng., vol. xl, 1909, p. 695.
5? Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 21, 1910, p. 543.
58 Ipid., vol: 8, 189%.) p. si.
8° Univ. California Pub., Bull. Dept. Geol., vol. iii, 1902, p. 4,
© Ibid., vol. vi, 1911, p. 863.
ee =
*
* 479 ST Seas he Ss,
CONTRASTED FEATURES OF TOPOGRAPHIC JUVENILITY 553
national Geologic Congress, with what utter astonishment I noted in so
many localities on the steppes of southern Russia and on the Kirghiz
steppes the rock-floor exposed in situations where water could not pos-
sibly have operated. Persian deserts left me with similar new impres-
sions. When a little later I had occasion to visit the Saharan region, the
bedrock peeping out from under the soils and sands of the Nubian and
Lybian deserts convinced me then and there that the true explanation
lay not in any phase of water action, for here the annual rainfall was
less than one inch. The leveling and general lowering of arid tracts it
seemed must be attributable mainly to eolic action, if not to the winds
alone. Peneplanation without the aid of water became as real to me then
as was peneplanation by means of water.
The alleged enormous depths of basinal wash as reported from time to
time in deep well drillings have been already discussed. In all of these
eases which I have personally investigated there manifestly have been
mistaken for wash materials a great thickness of the little indurated
Tertiary beds. In several such instances the Tertiary bedrocks were
standing on end and the surface wash was but a few feet in thickness ;
in other cases the drill began in soft Cretaceous strata and there were
reported nearly 2,000 feet of “wash.” I do not doubt but there are in
many localities wash deposits of considerable thicknesses; but it is also
evident that before the usual data, and especially well-logs furnished by
the average driller, are to be implicitly depended on they shall have to be
eritically examined anew in the light of recent determinations.
At a distance and on the hypothesis of normal water action we de-
ductively should expect transferrence of the rock-waste from a basin-rim
to central intermont depression. In the absence of direct stream con-
nection with other and lower basins, we likewise should expect great ac-
cumulations of finer waste in the middle portions of the higher basins.
On a basis of deflation thick basinal deposits are inexplicable; thin soil
coverings are demanded. By wind the relief of an arid basin does not
appear to be slowly diminished in the beginning by the removal of waste
from the highlands and its deposition on the lower gentle slopes or on
the basin-bed. In the case of the latter the presence of a rock-floor but
thinly veneered by soils seems to be the strongest evidence that the basin
itself is being rapidly lowered, not raised. The median line of a basin
can hardly be regarded, therefore, a local baselevel of stream action.
In another place** I have shown that the geologic work of the ephem-
eral streams, sporadic sheetfloods,-and transitory playas of arid plains
®% Bull, Geol. Soc, America, vol, 19, 1908, p, 78.
554 oc. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
is not comparable to the water action of moist climates, but that it is as
idle as the shifting by the winds of the sands of the seashore. The finer
rock-waste disturbed by these agencies is soon borne away by the winds
as other soils of the desert. On the evaporation of the broad, thin sheet
of storm waters producing playas the bottom muds curl up in thin leaves
and are blown away. Playas and similar mud-flats of the arid basins
must be considered as areas of rapid denudation and only temporary
areas of relatively inconsequential aggradation.*®
That subsequent streams in a strictly arid region have so small a
chance for development does not appear to be due so much to the fact
that the weak substructure of the intermont plains is deeply covered by
waste as it is to the more obvious fact that there is not sufficient rainfall
to form such streams.
MATURE STAGE OF ARID RELIEF
DEDUCTIVE COURSE OF DEVELOPMENT
In the modification of the normal geographic cycle to meet the new con-
ditions imposed by an arid climate, several features are especially note-
worthy. For the mature stage it is postulated that the continued erosion
of the highlands and divides and the continued deposition in the basins
produce a coalescence of local drainage systems, headwater erosion of
consequent and subsequent streams, and aggradation of higher basins
favoring this change; that a beginning is made of the confluence and
integration of drainage lines which, when fully developed, characterize
maturity ; that when the drainage established across a former divide has
a strong fall an impulse of revival and deeper erosion makes its way
across the aggraded floor of the higher basin, which becomes dissected
with bad-land expression; that this dissected floor then is smoothed at a
lower level, and that in the last mentioned case the large areas of rock-
floor are laid bare. Wind action is given a very subordinate place. In
support of these distant deductions I have never found any evidence.
MATURE ARID FEATURES UNDER DEFLATION
The strongest contrast between the mature relief characteristics of
normally moist lands and those of the desert under the influences of arid
climate lies in the complete adjustment of consequent and subsequent
streamways in the one case and the total absence in the other. The
drainage integration which the moist country normally undergoes finds -
in arid lands no such intricate counterpart.
62 Bull. Geol. Soc. America, vol. 19, 1908, p. 84.
—— ee eee
MATURE STAGE OF ARID RELIEF 555
Of the larger relief features which distinguish maturity in a humid
climate none is more conspicuous than a notable rounding of the sharp
interstream tracts, hills, and divides and their rapid lowering. In an
arid climate this same tendency is even more pronounced. The land-
scape effect, I take it, is perhaps nowhere so typically developed as in the
Great Basin. With the vast planation effects displayed in the intermont
areas of this region the sojourner at first is apt to get the erroneous im-
pression so often described, that mountains are there buried up to their
shoulders in their own debris. The idea long held that a mountainous
tract of interior drainage may be reduced to a plain by the double process
of wearing down of the ranges and the filling up of the basins seems not
to be very well supported by the latest observations.
The unmistakable deflative features already noted in connection with
the discussion of the relief of arid youth are even more pronounced in
arid maturity. No known effects of rainfall and stream action can pos-
sibly produce the larger features of the relief expression which a region
as extensive as the western American dry tract presents; the work accom-
plished is too prodigious, the time too infinitely long, the space affected
too vast. Only by means of the wind under especially favorable circum-
stances could effects such as we see today be reasonably accomplished.
Deflation seems the only explanation which is at all satisfactory.
DEVELOPMENT OF ORIGINAL DRAINAGE LINES IN DESERT REGIONS
The origin and growth of drainage lines, such as they are, in desert
regions under conditions of general aridity is an aspect of erosion which
has not, so far as I know, received the critical notice that it appears to
deserve. This want of special attention to this single point has done
more than anything else to mislead all who have traveled through the
mountainous arid tract of America regarding the real ineffectiveness of
stream action. Particularly deluding have been the impressions gained
in such lands as those of our western country. In many mountainous
belts of that region there is, indeed, an apparent approach to stream
effects as they are known in humid climates. Upon this really quite
restricted and peculiarly modified effect of normal water work has been
based the usual scheme of the arid cycle.
In its broader relations stream action in the mountain belts of arid
regions admits of an interpretation of origin wholly different from that
commonly held. For example, in the arid region of the northern Mexi-
ean tableland it is perfectly conceivable—and I have already set forth the
data in support of the idea®**—that between the initiation of the present
6& Journal of Geology, vol. xvii, 1909, p. 31.
556 Cc. R. KEYES
THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
arid cycle and the attainment of the mature stage into which that region
is Just about to enter the broad belts of weak Cretaceous rocks have been
removed to depths of 5,000 feet and over. If at the beginning of the
cycle of aridity the original surface were a plain, as there appear to be
strong reasons®* for believing, the present lofty mountain ranges must
have differentially developed through the more rapid deflation of the
belts of weak rock now forming the areas of intermont plains; for, as is
well known, the stratigraphy of the region is remarkable in that the re-
sistant rocks are mainly segregated in the lower part of the geologic
column and the weak rocks are confined to the upper portion.
As the mountains rear their forms more and more above the general
plains surface, while the latter is being gradually lowered through defla-
tion, they finally become local rain-provokers of some small influence.
During the period of arid youth the streams developed on the mountain
slopes become slowly larger and larger and longer and longer until now,
as the region is about to enter into its maturity, they attain their maxi-
mum size and efficiency. The mountains are now their loftiest, their
sides are steepest, into them the intermont plains are encroaching deep-
est. The moisture gathering about them is greater in amount than at
any time before or than will be afterwards. The mountain watercourses
reach their greatest extension notwithstanding the fact that they carry
relatively little water, are intermittent in character, and their lower
reaches seldom pass beyond the foot of the ranges. Instead of being
headwater remnants of extensive stream systems which have long since
withered away under the influences of arid climate, as is a necessary
consequence of the adapted normal cycle hypothesis, they must be re-
garded as original streams coming into being as the differential relief
effects of regional deflation became more and more pronounced. With
the advancement of physiographic maturity these streams must begin to
wither, and as senile relief approaches they must with few exceptions
undergo complete obliteration.
It is the custom to consider all water action upon the desert ranges as
normal stream erosion in the process of dissecting recently upraised
orographic blocks. This hypothesis seems to fall at once when it is con-
sidered that the major faulting of the mountain blocks is, as already
stated, mainly very ancient, and not modern, as it has been so long as-
sumed to be.
Certain effects of general deflation have greatly contributed to impart-
ing to the mountain sides the infantile aspects of stream work. As re-
cently suggested,®* the locus of maximum lateral deflation in the desert
6 Proc. Iowa Acad. Sci., vol. xiii, 1908, p. 221.
6 Science, n. s., vol. xxix, 1909, p. 753.
MATURE STAGE OF ARID RELIEF 557
ranges is their base, where plain sharply meets mountain without the
intervention of foothills. The hard mountain rock is encroached upon
at the level of the general plains surface as the sea gnaws away a line of
its bordering cliffs, until, in many instances at least, the surface of the
intermont plain extends into the mountain blocks distances of several
miles. No more astonishing revelation was ever experienced by one who,
on first entering the arid region of the West thoroughly believing in the
prevailing theory of basin-range structure, was compelled to admit the
facts so clearly presented that the sharp, straight line of meeting of
mountain and plain was not a faultscarp at all, and that the major line
of displacement was usually situated several miles out on the basin plain.®
If the deflative hypothesis of regional desert-leveling and lowering be
accepted we have in the desert ranges a stream type hitherto unrecognized.
The streams of this class have no history previous to the youthful stage
of the present arid cycle; they have no prospect of relations with streams
of any later cycle. Their birth, their span of life, their extinguishment
are definitely circumscribed. They are the only. existing streams we
know of that do not have some sort of inherited relations with the waters
of previous geographic cycles. They are the only streams the complete
life histories of which may be distinctly traced at every stage. They are
the only streams where origin is clearly fixed in time and sharply limited
in space.
DURATION OF ARID MATURITY
The period of transition from arid youth to arid old age must be ex-
ceedingly brief. Compared with the corresponding stage of the normal
moist-climate cycle it is almost ephemeral. So short is it that it can
hardly be recognized as a distinct stage. Strongly supporting this con-
clusion are recent observations in New Mexico, Arizona, and Sonora.
As the broad belts of weak rocks, previously profoundly faulted, undergo
through deflative influences the enormous denudation so manifest on every
hand, the effect is not only rapidly to wear them down, but the narrower
belts of resistant mountain rock are also encroached on as the latter are
brought into stronger and stronger relief. In the case of the region just
mentioned, where thicknesses of upward a mile have been removed, the
hard masses of mountain rock have been eaten into at the base of the
ranges for distances of 3 to 5 miles, and even more. ‘There is thus left
a lofty central ridge with precipitous slopes rising out of the plains as
voleanic isles out of the sea.
Titles as the Organs, the Needles, the Castle Domes, and the Eagle
Tails, locally applied to some of the desert ranges, well express the strik-
® Science, n, s., vol. xxxiii, 1911, p, 466,
558 co. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
ing topographic aspects of the landscape. A generalized cross-section,
based on the geologic structure of the Sierra de los Caballos, in New
Mexico, indicates the common relations of relief and tectonics (figure
1). The perfect independence of .the two are fully discussed in another
10000 A.TT .
‘Cretaceous:
Sandstones-
\Limestones|
FicgurE 1.—Passing of arid Youth: Rim of a Desert Basin
place.6*? Another good example of the final mural ridge is that of the
Palomas range, in southwestern Arizona, standing above the main moun-
tain block more than 1,000 feet (figure 2).
After the youthful stage here repre-
sented the upper remnantal portion of
the mountain block is rapidly removed
and reduced to a low, rounded mound
projecting but shghtly above the level
of the general plains surface. Trans-
formation from youth to old age 1s
quick, decisive, complete. The appar-
ently graded plains on either side of
the old ridge gives it the aspect of a
worn-down mountain buried to its
shoulders in the waste of its own sub-
FIGURE Te Ee ae stances. In the case of the Caballos,
already mentioned, the rock-floor of the
plains is not confined merely to the higher parts of the piedmont slopes,
as has been explained by Davis,** but extends for 30 miles across the
intermont plain of the Jornada del Muerto to the next desert range to
the east—the Sierra San Andreas.®
8 Bull. Geol. Soe. America, vol. 21, 1910, p. 543.
88 Journal of Geology, vol. xiii, 1905, p. 387.
6° U. S. Geol. Survey Water Supply and Irrigation Papers, No. 123, 1905, p. 12.
|
:
vale ~~ oes ee Se a er ae ee i“
=
ee ee eee eee ee
PREVALENCE OF OLD AGE IN DESERT REGIONS ibe
The Great Basin appears to be a region long subjected to deflative
influences that is passing through the mature stage.
PREVALENCE OF OLD AGE IN DESERT REGIONS
POSTULATED CHARACTERISTIOS
According to the normal standard adapted to arid conditions, topo-
graphic old age begins to set in when a general reduction of the high-
- lands gives rise to a notable decrease in rainfall and consequently stream
action, and the process of drainage disintegration commences to pre-
dominate. Only at this time is wind-scour admitted to be at all effective.
TOPOGRAPHIC FEATURES OF OLD AGE UNDER DEFLATION
The drainage features of the latter part of the arid cycle may be en-
tirely neglected. Topographic expression alone can be considered. Com-
pared with that of maturity, there are scarcely any contrasts of relief.
Desert lowering will be much slower because weak rocks will have been
already largely removed. There is greater homogeneity of texture and
_ hardness in the older rocks than in the more recently formed sediments,
and consequently less opportunity for marked differential effects.
The prevailing relief expression in arid lands must necessarily be that
of old age. The rapidity with which the several parts of an arid region
passes through the different relief stages depends partly on the strati-
graphic segregation of the hard as well as the soft rocks, partly on the
character of the deformation, partly on the nature of the geotectonic
_ pattern, and partly on the degree of aridity. Thus it is that under the
same climatic conditions a certain provincial difference in the tectonics
of the Mexican tableland, the Great Basin, and the Colorado plateau of
Arizona permits the first to represent arid youth, the second arid ma-
turity, and the third arid old age.
BASELEVEL OF EOLIAN EROSION
The remarkable plains-forming tendency of deflation in dry regions is
one of its main characteristics.*° As already noted, the plain is the domi-
nant relief feature from the very beginning of the arid geographic cycle;
in a humid climate it only becomes notably developed at the very end.
When Passarge™! was conducting his investigations in the South African
deserts he long had difficulty in understanding how it was possible under
conditions of arid climate for general planation of vast tracts to go on
without regard to sealevel, since the wind was thought to have no base-
level of erosion. So long as the waters of the sea are kept out, Penck™?
argued that deflation could go on indefinitely below sealevel.
7 Popular Science Monthly, vol. Ixxiv, 1909, p. 23.
7 Zeitsch, d. deut. geol. Gesellsch., vol. lvi, Protokol, 1904, p. 191.
560 c. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
There appears to be, as recently shown,** a downward limit even to
desert-leveling and eolic excavation. The ground-water level in each
structurally inclosed basin must finally put a stop to wind-scour by keep-
ing the surface above it moist, giving rise either to salinas or forming a
basin into which sporadic storm waters find a long resting place.**
In illustration, many of the salinas of the dry region of western
America might be enumerated. The lakes of Death and Imperial val-
leys, both below sealevel, in southern California; the basin of Lake Eyre,
in Australia, the Sea of Aral, and other similar bodies of water in arid
Asia are most notable. On a somewhat smaller scale are many of the
lakelets of the Mexican tableland. Of these the Sandoval, the Hueco,
the Casa Grande, and the Mapimi bolsons are best known.*? The first
of these*® is the highest and driest bolson of the Mexican tableland
within the boundaries of the United States. Its surface is 6,000 feet
above the sea. Its center is occupied by a great chain of dry and bitter
lakes. In all of its vast area and during a period of 400 years since the
earliest occupation of the country by Europeans only two small springs
of potable water were known within its confines. Recently it was in-
ferred from the general character of the broad basin, its geologic struc-
ture, and the location of the two springs, that ground-water level at cer-
tain places must be very close to the surface. Proceeding on this hy-
pothesis, several test wells were put down and the inferences found to be
correct. At once there was excavated an area of several acres in extent
for reservoir purposes. Now there stands a fine large body of soft water,
the surface of which comes within a few feet of that of the surrounding
plain. Around the lakelet a prosperous town has sprung up.
Depressions of the Saharan region appear to be downwardly arrested
by ground-water level. Beadnell,“* in describing the Kharga oasis, ex-
plains the presence of lake beds in the hollow by the uncovering of
impervious clay strata and the consequent exposure of the surface-water
sandstone with its artesian supphes. Long ago Lyons‘ called attention
to similar phenomena in the Nile Valley, but the springs thus let loose
were regarded by him as increasing local erosion.
NorMAL WATER ACTION IN DESERT REGIONS
The derivation of the larger relief features of the arid regions through
means of deflation does not necessarily preclude all normal sculpturing
72 American Journal of Science (4), vol. xix, 1905, p. 167.
73 Journal of Geology, vol. xvii, 1909, p. 661.
7™ American Journal of Science (4), vol. xvi, 19038, p. 377.
7 Bull. Geol. Soe. America, vol. 19, 1908, p» 91.
7 Journal of Geology, vol. xvi, 1908, p. 434.
77 Geological Magazine, n. s., decade v, vol. vi, 1909, p. 476.
78 Quart. Jour. Geol. Soc. London, vol. 1, 1894, p. 531.
a ae
i
ns.
NORMAL WATER ACTION IN DESERT REGIONS 561
by water. The extent and character of water action are fully considered
later. From the very nature of the special climatic conditions imposed
by aridity, it follows that the erosional effects of the aqueous agencies
must be reduced far below what is commonly expected of them. It is
customary to regard desert landscapes as examples of normal water cor-
rasion identical in origin with those of moist climates except that it is
perhaps somewhat less rapid. In the present connection the importance
of water action in matters of landscape details is not questioned; but
the very secondary influence of stream corrasion in its broader operations
is premised, and as a general erosional agency the dominance of wind-
scour is recognized. Quantitative data on the relative efficiencies of the
two processes are at hand and they are discussed at length in another
place. Here the general results need be only briefly anticipated.
Water action in desert regions assumes three distinctive aspects: That
produced by the through-flowing rivers, that of the intermittent torren-
tial arroyos of the mountains, and that of the rare and brief sheet-
floods. It is the second of these phases which mainly attracts the atten-
tion of the sojourner from less parched parts of the world. With a
natural proneness to extend his moist-climate conceptions, the impres-
sion is at first gained that nowhere else is there so eloquent attest of
energetic storm work as is presented on the desert ranges. Indeed the
dominant characteristic of the arid sierras is notable ruggedness. It is
apparently the same type of ruggedness which in moist-climate countries
is by general consent ascribed to vigorous stream work on a recently
upraised mountain tract.
Preconceived notions concerning general erosional effects under moist-
climate conditions can not be in toto successfully transplanted to arid
lands. The sharp meeting of plain and mountain without the interven-
tion of foothills is certainly not a marked characteristic of water sculp-
turing in the mountains of moist climates. With much less amount of
water involved, how may it be plausibly converted into a conspicuous
feature in dry regions? The Castle Domes, Eagle Tails, Harquahalas,
and Plomas ranges of southwestern Arizona are notable examples. In
cliffs, picachos, minor and major crests they rise steeply out of the gen-
eral plains surface. Yet the annual rainfall of this district is less than
3 inches. Instead of being distinctive forms produced solely by water
action, there appear to be nowhere else so conspicuous illustrations of
general undercutting of hard masses of mountain rock by the wind armed
with sharp sands and aided by insolation. The locus of maximum lateral
deflation action, as has been recently shown,” is at the level of the general
7 Science, n. s., vol. xxix, 1909, p. 752.
562 Cc. R. KEYES—THE GEOGRAPHIC CYCLE IN AN ARID CLIMATE
plains surface, and this is constantly lowering. This feature is especially
well shown in the Caballos and Plomas ranges (figures 1 and 2). On
the basis of water action alone, the most inexplicable feature of desert
configuration has always been how around the periphery of a mountain
block a broad, perfect plain is produced, while in the middle a lofty,
rugged mountain ridge exists. In the light of the changed angle at
which the facial expression of the desert ranges is viewed, the alleged evi-
dences of energetic storm work have to be critically examined anew.
Bearing directly upon this point, it is not without great interest to note an
expression of opinion by the late S. F. Emmons, than whom no one was
probably more familiar with the arid regions of the West during a period
covering more than 40 years. In the spring of 1903, when he was pay-
ing me a fortnight’s visit at Socorro, he remarked that he was completely
nonplussed that the desert mountain ranges should present such youthful
topography on so huge a scale, and yet display so little evidence of ade-
quate means with which to accomplish it; and he further stated, concern-
ing the unsatisfactory character of all existing explanations, that in all
his long experiences in the West this feature was the most puzzling of
any which he had encountered or which had ever confronted geologists.
At that time I had already followed the aqueous development of the relief
features of the region to its necessary and wholly inadequate conclu-
sions, and I had already begun to grasp the fundamental significance
of the rock-floors of the arid intermont plains and the tremendous effi-
ciency of wind-scour upon dry rock surfaces. Near the conclusion of the
long discussions which this view aroused, Mr. Emmons dropped the state-
ment that the conception was too new for him to grasp all at once, but
that he believed that there was great merit in the wind explanation. It
was, however, a full lenstrum before he told me one day that he had come
to believe that the only, adequate solution of the vexed problem would be
through means of the wind and not water.
RECAPITULATION
The larger geographic features of deserts appear to find no adequate
explanation of their origin by any known method of stream corrasion.
For them wind-scour alone satisfactorily accounts. The necessary con-
sequences of a strictly deflative hypothesis for the genesis of desert land-
scapes is everywhere amply supported by recently recorded observations.
The geographic cycle in an arid climate is logically developed by consid-
ering wind action and not water action as the prime erosional process.
For topographic detail important water action of normal character is not
precluded.
ta Pk
7 : ore
,
if
’
>
~
.
.
’
¥
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 34
FIGURE 1.—MORAINE ON NORTH-FLOWING STREAM: ZANE HILLS
“ae:
“2
i: oa
> ©
(hig
FIGURE 2.—MORAINE OF FORMER LAKE SELBY GLACIER, KOBUK VALLEY
MORAINES IN NORTHWESTERN ALASKA
BULLETIN OF THE CEOLOCICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 563-570, PLS. 34-36 NOVEMBER 9, 1912
GLACIATION IN NORTHWESTERN ALASKA
BY PHILIP S. SMITH?
(Read before the Society December 28, 1911)
CONTENTS
, Page
eG er ee er ee rr CK ewe Ce ee 563
RE SENE SLltie eo aly aie Sk d's hz Melee Gade boa oe ie kes cd dae aein 563
IN i os Gin dak Fe ok a oldu bee 4 ctw ees Rien mink. Werk maal § 566
I rcs, cee coe hvena's ane dn 0 we ele ale ae oh ee pid Ee er 8 567
INTRODUCTION
The observations here recorded were made in the course of geologic
investigations dealing primarily with the mineral resources of Alaska
and were, therefore, incidental rather than the main objects of research.
For this reason, as well as from the fact that the phenomena are highly
complex, the present paper aims at little more than the presentation of
some of the scattered observations that indicate the types of features
recognized, leaving the coordination and the detailed working out of the
Pleistocene-Recent history to the future.
~Koyuxuxk-Kopuk REGION
In the Koyukuk-Kobuk region shown in figure 1 the eenter of ice
occupation in the past was the highlands to the north of the Kobuk,
but the Zane Hills near the Koyukuk show evidences of past glaciation
in the form of the valleys and in small moraines similar to that of
figure 1, plate 34, which has a steep ice contact slope on the south or
up-valley side. ‘Too little is known of the real heart of the range north —
of the Kobuk to allow a full statement of its character, put it is prob-
able that in the Kobuk drainage there are at present no large glaciers.
In the past, however, glaciation of the valley type was pronounced, and
has markedly modified the topography and left deposits characteristic
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society March 5, 1912.
Published by permission of the Director of the U. S. Geological Survey.
(563)
P. S. SMITH—GLACIATION IN NORTHWESTERN ALASKA
564
foaang [BOLSO[OOH “Gg * AQ poystaany oseg
DYSD)V Usazsany sou fo Wn fo dv hsoqnunjday—T aang
zi6r
SO[UA OOL Cy) oo ov 0z 0 «oO
ost
KOYUKUK-KOBUK REGION 565
of glaciers. Cirques, U-shaped troughs, and overdeepened valley floors
and oversteepened valley slopes bear witness to past glaciation. In the
lowland of the Kobuk Valley are moraines in places over a hundred feet
high which mark former fronts of valley glaciers tributary to the Kobuk
(figure 2, plate 34). The relation of these moraines to the gravel fill-
ing of the Kobuk is not definitely proved, but they seem to rise above
the general level with steep, north-facing slopes, and merge more or less
uninterruptedly toward the south with the general surface of the low-
land. ‘These moraines are particularly prominent opposite the mouths
of the larger valleys, as, for instance, those of the Ambler, Selby, Maune-
luk, and Kogoluktuk.
It is believed that practically all the glacial ice that reached the main
Kobuk Valley originated in the mountains to the north of the Kobuk,
and, after flowing down the largér tributary valleys, on entering the
Kobuk lowland expanded into lobes both east and west. Perhaps various
lobes coalesced and a continuous Kobuk glacier was formed; but it seems
as though the ice in the Kobuk Valley must have been dominantly stag-
nant rather than a vigorously eroding agent, and its effect was rather to
obstruct earlier drainage than greatly to erode the previous topography.
As an instance of the obstruction of the glacial drainage may be in-
stanced the drainage across the hills south of the Kobuk, east of Lake
Selby. The details of the history of the changes have not been worked
out, but it is believed that before the period of glaciation the Lockwood
Hills formed the Koyukuk-Kobuk divide. With the advent of glacia-
tion, however, the lobes of ice from the Endicott Mountains obstructed
the westward drainage of the Kobuk and lakes back of the ice barriers
were produced. For instance, the Lake Selby glacier is known to have
formed a barrier in front of the mapped lake in the Kobuk lowland, and
it is believed that éarlier it extended across the valley so that a lake was
formed upstream—that is, east of the barrier. As the lake rose, its
surface at last reached the elevation of -the lowest sag across the Lock-
wood range and spilled over. The channel thus formed was eroded
rapidly until a narrow gorge was cut down to an elevation of 800 to
1,000 feet above sealevel. Evidence of the high level of the lake is shown
by gravel terraces and irregular gravel deposits up to an elevation of nearly
1,000 feet above the Kobuk, or 1,400 feet above the sea. The narrow-
ness of the gorge and the character and relation of the deposits point to
the conclusion that the erosive agency was water rather than ice.
With the unblocking of westward drainage by the retreat of the Lake
Selby glacier it appears that a lower gap was uncovered in the place now
marked by Pah River. Downstream the large Ambler glacier still ob-
566 P. S. SMITH—GLACIATION IN. NORTHWESTERN ALASKA
structed westward drainage, and it is by no means improbable that the
Kogoluktuk and Mauneluk glaciers also crossed the Kobuk lowland and
abutted on the hills to the south.. It is possible that the Pah River pass
‘was previously occupied by a south-flowing stream during the approach
to maximum glaciation, but the records are so indistinct that they were
not discovered. Suffice to say that the large terraces from 200 to 300
feet above the Kobuk seem directly referable to this stage.
With the further retreat of glaciation the Ambler obstruction was
removed and a westward discharge permitted. I¢ is difficult, however,
to explain why the transverse south-flowing drainage byway of the Pah,
having been established, was abandoned and the present northward
course acquired. Possibly the cause is to be found in the unblocking of
the western part of the Kobuk Valley by the retreat of the Ambler
glacier; but the whole explanation is undoubtedly concerned with a
number of correlated incidents. For instance, the glaciation of the
north and east sides of the Zane Hills undoubtedly had an effect on the
southward discharge. Thus, although it is believed that the Zane Hills
glaciers never extended far from the front of the range, they probably
fed a large amount of waste into the Hogatza lowland. ‘This condition,
with the diminution in the amount: of water in the Kobuk and the un-
blocking of the former Kobuk Valley, may have so interacted that a
reversal of drainage through capture was made possible.
ALATNA RIVER
In the Alatna River basin there is evidence not only of past glaciation,
but even active glaciers were found in 1911. The existing glaciers are
only 1 to 2 miles in length and are located in the high granite peaks to the
west of the central part of the Alatna Valley. Figure 1, plate 35, shows
the serrate ridges in the background and one of the glaciers. The ele-
vation of the foot of the glacier is about 3,000 feet above the sea and the
higher points are from 4,000 to 5,000 feet above the valley floor.
That the present glaciers are but the shrunken remnants of once more
sizeable ones is evident from the topography and deposits at many places
in the upper Alatna Valley. Topographically recognizable moraines are
practically absent throughout the Alatna Valley, but resorted deposits
containing layge angular boulders, apparently ice-transported, are found
at many places. In the central part of the valley a deposit of blue clay
is formed of glacial rock flour, Ice-transported erratics and outwash
gravel deposits have been found up to an elevation of 2,300 feet above
the existing main stream. On the northern divide of the valley head-
ing in the glaciers, at an elevation of over 2,500 feet above the stream,
BULL. GEOL. SOC. AM. VOL. 23, 1911, PL. 35
FIGURE 1.—RIDGES AND GLACIER, ALATNA RIVER VALLEY
FIGURE 2.—OUTWASH PLAINS AND UPLAND LAKE, UPPER NOATAK VALLEY
ALATNA RIVER GLACIER AND OUTWASH PLAINS OF NOATAK VALLEY
ALATNA RIVER 567
is an angular block of granite more than 10 feet in shortest dimension,
perched on exposed schist bedrock in such relations that it could only
have been brought and deposited by a glacier heading in essentially the
Same region as the existing glaciers and of at least five times as large
size.
Truncated spurs with triangular facets and steep slopes form the
characteristic features in the upper Alatna Valley. In the central part
of the Alatna Valley, Lake Takahoela marks a glacially overdeepened
part of the old valley, and the ridge separating the lake from the river
shows well-marked lea and stoss slopes developed on the roches moun-
tonnées. The whole form of this part of the valley shows that it has
been caused by a larger agent than running water, and has then been
partly filled in so that the existing streams show patterns discordant
with that of the valley.
Some ice from drainage basins now separated from the Alatna entered
the latter valley during the maximum period of glaciation. Thus Men-
denhall notes that the pass between the Keokuk and the Alatna was occu-
pied by ice, and he states: |
“Along Help-me-Jack Creek, in the Middle Alatna Valley, drainage changes ©
have taken place that are best explained by glacial action. The direct topo-
graphic continuation of the Upper Help-me-Jack Creek Valley is eastward into
the Alatna by the pass which leads to the latter stream in the vicinity of Rapid
City, but Help-me-Jack Creek at present leaves this broad open way, turns to
the south at right angles to its logical course, and reaches the Alatna at
Beaver City. Such a course probably was originally a spillway for glacial
waters, and in it Help-me-Jack Creek became intrenched while the more
northerly outlet was still occupied by ice.” ”
Another pass to the east of the main Alatna River, near Lake Taka-
hoela, served also as a spillway for both ice and water. This place is
picturesquely known by the natives as Akabloouk, which means “day-
light through the hills.” It is a broadly open saddle, with an elevation
of about 400 feet above the Alatna, and was formerly occupied by a drain-
age diverted to Malamute River, a tributary of the Alatna, when south-
ward drainage was obstructed by the Help-me-Jack or Takahoela gla-
ciers. ‘The details, however, of the glacial and post-glacial history have
not been worked out and many of the stages are obscure.
Noatak BASIN
In the high hills at the head of the Noatak are many small glaciers
similar in general character to those in the Alatna Valley. None of these
2W. C. Mendenhall: Professional Paper No. 10, U. S. Geol. Survey, p, 46.
XL—BULL. GEOL. Soc. AM., VOL, 23, 1911
568 P. S. SMITH—GLACIATION IN NORTHWESTERN ALASKA
was examined in detail, and as heavy fog masked the highest hills all
the time we were in this region, those seen were probably only a few of
those actually there. Although of no great size, the varied forms, from
steep cliff glaciers to massive domes of snow and ice, add much to the
picturesqueness of the scenery in the headwater region. Many of.the
unexplored side valleys tributary to the Noatak farther down stream
seemed promising places to look for existing glaciers, but none was seen
west of longitude 157.
Evidence of past glaciation and glacio-fluviatile conditions are abun-
dant throughout the Noatak basin. In fact, the main source of danger
in canoeing was due to the great boulders derived from the enormous
outwash deposits of glacio-fluviatile origin that have been transected by
the river. Boulders of all sizes, from hundreds of tons down, were
found, some in the river and others just emerging from the gravel de-
posits. These large, glacially transported boulders seemed in the main
to have been derived from the tributary valleys and not to have come
from the valley of the main stream.
The deposits in which they occur were in the main of water-rounded
and assorted material, with stratification usually more or less evident.
The outwash deposits form broad gravel plains rising a hundred or more
feet above the river. On the upland surface of these flats are ‘lakes at
many places but slightly incised below the general level. Figure 2,
plate 35, shows a portion of the Noatak Valley where one of these up-
land lakes has nearly been drained by the lateral erosion of the stream
when it was slightly above the level of the present Noatak, which appears
to the right. The gravel bluffs here are about 100 feet high, but out-
wash deposits of well worn gravels near this place have been traced up
to an elevation of about 900 feet above the river.
The canyon of the Noatak is another of the features that is probably
in a measure connected with the glacial and glacio-fluviatile history of
the region. ‘The river at this place has abandoned a well opened out
valley and has cut a narrow gorge 3 miles long from 500 to 700 feet
deep across a former spur of hard rocks. Plate 36 shows the topography
in the vicinity of the canyon. ‘The former valley, now occupied by lakes,
4 in the background, with the present canyon partly visible in the fore-
sround. A large stream joins the Noatak a short distance below the
canyon, and the cause of the diversion is believed to have been the ad-
vance of a glacier down this valley and the blocking of the former course
of the Noatak by ice deploying from this valley. The canyon is dis-
tinctly a feature carved by running water, and was not eroded by ice, so
that the explanation of its origin assumes that the waters impounded
NOANVO AVLVON SHI JO ALINIOIA AHL NI AHdVudSOdOL
98 ‘Id ‘LL6L ‘8% “1OA “Wy “OOS "1039 ‘11Ng
NOATAK BASIN 569
behind the ice-barrier from the tributary valley escaped along the south-
ern margin of the ice, and had so intrenched its course before the barrier
was removed that it did not resume its course on the disappearance of
the ice. Gravels up to an elevation of 700 feet above the Noatak River
in the canyon have been observed on the hill slopes and bear witness to
the former high level of the drainage.
Farther down the Noatak, near the point where it makes the big bend
to the east, are deposits and topography that may have been formed by
glacial activity. Northwest of this place is a broadly open gap not over
500 feet above the sea, that appears to have been formerly the direct
course of the Noatak to the Arctic Ocean. Instead, however, of follow-
ing this course, the river has abandoned this gravel-filled lowland, has
swung southward and then eastward, and transected a range of hills
1,500 to 2,000 feet in elevation. On the slopes of the hills to an eleva-
tion of at least 700 feet above the river are gravel deposits. Near the
bend before mentioned is distinct knob-and-kettle topography. The
depressions are now occupied by small ponds from 100 to 200 feet above
the Noatak.
The knob-and-kettle topography, the obstruction of direct westward
drainage, the course of the Noatak across the topographic trend, and the
presence of high gravels all point to a relatively recent change in topogra-
phy, the cause of which is not known. Although unsupported by direct
evidence, a possible working hypothesis to explain the diversion of the
Noatak and the formation of the high levels is that glacial ice, occupy-
ing a part at least of the Arctic Ocean basin, obstructed the former west-
ward discharge of the Noatak and caused outlets south and east of the
ice-front to be utilized. According to this assumption, these outlets were
uncovered only after lakes had been formed and their surface level raised
many hundred feet. After this drainage had been established and had
been intrenched, return to its former course may have been prevented by
the glacial outwash deposits that would have accumulated in the old
valley. It is also possible that the till reported by Hershey* near Kot-
zebue and the peculiar position and outline of Hotham Peninsula may
have been formed at the eastern margin of the ice that obstructed the
Noatak, rather than at the western front of a glacier from the Kobuk,
for it seems almost certain that ice did not come down the Kobuk below
the Kallareechuk.
It is realized that the above is little more than a speculation and re-
quires much more corroborative evidence than is at hand before it can be
30, H. Hershey: Journal of Geology, vol. 17, pp. 83-91.
570: P. S. SMITH—GLACIATION IN NORTHWESTERN ALASKA
seriously considered. If, however, past conditions are to be interpreted
in the light of the present, it requires no great stretch of the imagination
to picture the polar ice, which now bars this coast from nearly the middle
of September to almost the first of July, having been proportionally as
much more extensive in the past as the now vanished alpine glaciers un-
doubtedly were.
i i ee a
BULLETIN OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
VOL. 23, PP. 571-686 NOVEMBER 26, 1912
STRATIGRAPHY OF THE COAL FIELDS OF NORTHERN
CENTRAL NEW MEXICO?
BY WILLIS T. LEE
(Presented before the Society December 27, 1911)
CONTENTS
Page
me SEO ATCOS CXAMING. 25. cs. sc cece ss cee cnet ecewes Masa aie hia Toe 571
ESRD A AMEIA 2 5 VS NS ds euaa'd Shy wie ea" sO eee ee ars Galblweha ate 572
GM CESEeMment Of TESUIHS: . 5 ok osc ss os a wae kg eee ees eweunuawe 574
RES ANEE MEPEES ES Mn Sie EN aris aid bd ee kk Oe Bele Rene os bette 575
ELT Sah Sg RE a dene a 583
AIEEE SE PERRI Rr ope ens oe, crys oe Peake a ald aia e sehen boat wi WE Le haee ee 583
DCIS RBEEE Sot t abe 9 ah ake ee. 2 igi pele Sbhw Siete tes ou PS wave de 595
IE ete Rs et EA eS Ghee 2 a che vive metal vieeld.o8 iS Se ew odacal 594
EE ETSI IM SNEDE =e Sie cre a e Staie’ c's Sa fav had dels wlerwie A b-eie a oc ered e 598
I Sr ie MN aay ie dm koe akg Aiwa eee o'ccdeie'a 607
NEE MEMEMESINULIOVEL Ss Sos cs fans no wc cw ae ewe a ee ee we ee ok Cie eee 607
Penatr ItCr TORMAROHS: ..00 0 eb lie ele cade cacdewccees 608
eta ENG FALOTY SEGLION . cot Lic cnd os cla wage cn ee eee Ceti wee cee 610
REIN 3 SETISADILUGIOSTIT EW a sae ew nls nln! ata ov oie mle wu «odin sc elec cas bee 612
ET EA ah CC lin gf wat oh'a wg Cais win bia deo) aoe ea 4c 615
ETE gay lal gal Re a Dd a ee A 615
I eds re he ee ae Saale whe a wlure aia a'a'ceee aa ake sub ofan ee 619
0 ae 0 ea ema eee oes! ok Aig sie ci ife a ate ob Ewes ale he 622
AMEE ad sect ey tee ne ate ae ete ac ven Sid cs aiden ne Gni'ew Spay Salas ola me oyna 629
PIR Pens Fe Re Ree Lk Sig a ke Ch wiee ow ea © aes kt Se Rae 633
ND er oo kr OY) de ddan ocrain.a'e'a bags. ee w(s.0.9'0 « 642
PRISE eee he ee ci ie os calee a ee ansivddecdecsadene 659
LocaTION OF AREAS EXAMINED
The areas in which the observations forming the basis of this paper
were made lie in central and northern New Mexico, around the southern
end of the main mass of the Rocky Mountains. The region includes the
1 Manuscript received by the Secretary of the Society May 28, 1912.
This paper was presented under the title ‘Correlation of rocks in the isolated coal
fields around the southern end of the Rocky Mountains in New Mexico.”
Published by permission of the Director of the U. 8. Geological Survey.
XLI—BULL. Geo. Soc, Am., Vou, 23, 1911 (571)
572 w.T. LEB—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
eastern part of the San Juan Basin, known also as the San Juan River
region (107),? from the Colorado-New Mexico line southward to Cabe-
zon, and the smaller fields to the southeast, namely, the Rio Puerco,
Tijeras, Hagan, and Cerrillos coal fields. Observations were also made
near Durango, in southwestern Colorado, in the type area of the Mesa-
verde formation. In addition to the observations made in these fields
during the summer of 1911, some of the unpublished results previously
obtained in the Raton coal field are used. ‘The location of the area de-
scribed is indicated on the accompanying sketch map, figure 1.
PuRPOSE OF INVESTIGATION
The purpose of this investigation was to determine the relation of the
coal-bearing rocks east of the Rocky Mountains, in southern Colorado
and northern New Mexico, to the coal-bearing rocks similarly located
west of these mountains. The reason for undertaking it may be briefly
stated as follows: Until recently the coal-bearing rocks in the Raton
Mesa region east of the mountains were supposed ‘to constitute a single
formation, and this was correlated with the Laramie of the Denver Basin.
However, a few years ago it was shown that the so-called Laramie of
this region consists of two formations separated by an unconformity rep-
resenting a time break of considerable magnitude, and that each forma-
tion was characterized by an extensive and well preserved flora. The
flora of the lower formation, according to Doctor Knowlton, seems to
prove that it is older than recognized Laramie, while that of the upper
formation proves that this formation is post-Laramie in age.
West of the mountains, in the San Juan Basin, two coal-bearing for-
mations occur in the upper part of the Cretaceous series. The younger .
one, at the top of the Cretaceous, has been. correlated somewhat doubt-
fully with the Laramie, and the older one, or Mesaverde, is of Montana
age and is separated from the “Laramie” by a thick formation of marine
shale—the Lewis. .
These two large areas of coal-bearing rocks—the Raton Mesa region
and the San Juan River region—are situated on opposite sides of the
Rocky Mountains, only 90 miles apart, but, unfortunately, none of the
Cretaceous rocks extend continuously around the mountains to connect
these two principal areas, so that continuous tracing of formations from
one to the other is impossible. However, certain small isolated coal fields
at the southern end of the main range of the mountains help to bridge
2The references to the publications cited in this paper are indicated by numerals,
which correspond with those in “Bibliography and Notes” on pp. 659-686,
4
PURPOSE OF INVESTIGATION 573
the gap. Furthermore, assuming, as is often done, that the first great
uplift of the mountains occurred at the end of Cretaceous time, the
post-Cretaceous unconformity found in the Raton Mesa region should be
recognizable on the western slope and the post-Cretaceous formations
east of the mountains should have recognizable counterparts on the
western slope.
Coalfields
* 028 (Tiga G02 ae
eh mf ay Yip : DS 1 .
gee one” “oe Y/
edr 2
ee ‘
FIGURE 1.—Map of Part of New Mevico, showing Location of Coal Fields
The type of locality of the Mesaverde formation and the Lewis shale
is in southwest Colorado, in the northern part of the San Juan Basin,
where the Mesaverde is known to lie above shale that contains marine
fossils of Pierre age, but relatively little has heretofore been known of
the fossils contained in the Mesaverde, the Lewis, or the “Laramie” of
‘this basin. In order, therefore, to correlate the formations east of the
mountains, where good collections of both leaves and shells had been
37
.
574 w.tT. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
made, with those west of the mountains, it was necessary to make collec-
tions from these three formations, as well as from the shale below the
Mesaverde. This was done in all of the coal fields visited, and care was
exercised to locate the collections as definitely as possible in measured
sections.
PRELIMINARY STATEMENT OF RESULTS
The stratigraphic succession of the formations and their relation to
each other were determined in each of the fields examined. The fossil
plants collected have been examined by F. H. Knowlton and the fossil
shells by T. W. Stanton. The correlations are based on the stratigraphic
sequence of the formations, on lithologic resemblances, and on the fossils.
Some of the propositions advocated in this paper may be regarded as
essentially proved, others as fairly well sustained, while some are ad-
vanced only as working hypotheses.
Among the propositions that are regarded as essentially proved are:
(1) The thick shaale—the Mancos—below the principal coal-bearing
formation in the southeastern part of the San Juan Basin is represented
by a shale of similar character and essentially equivalent age in each of
the smaller fields as far east as Galisteo. Although the top of this shale
varies slightly in age from place to place, it represents a once continuous
formation extending from the San Juan Basin eastward to some un-
known distance beyond Galisteo.
(2) The principal coal-bearing rocks of the San Juan Basin—the
Mesaverde formation—are represented by. similar rocks in each of the
smaller fields near the southern end of the Rocky Mountains, and
although both the upper and the lower limits of the formation may vary
somewhat in age from place to place, the coal-bearing rocks heretofore
known as Laramie in these smaller fields are of essentially the same age
as the Mesaverde of the San Juan Basin.
Among the propositions which may be regarded as probably true,
although less well sustained than those noted above, are:
(1) The Mancos shale of the southeastern part of the San Juan
Basin is essentially equivalent in age to the shale originally described as
Mancos.
(2) The Mesaverde formation of the southeastern part of the San
Juan Basin is lithologically similar to the original Mesaverde, but is
thicker and may include rocks slightly younger than the typical Mesa-
verde. |
(3) The base of the Mesaverde of the Rio Puerco field, as represented
by the Punta de la Mesa sandstone, is several hundred feet lower in the
:
|
ee a, *
——— lr
-_ Ee
STATEMENT OF RESULTS 575
section than the base of that formation farther north. The Punta de la
Mesa sandstone seems to be equivalent to a sandstone which in the vicin-
ity of Cabezon occurs in the Mancos shale 500 feet or more below the base
of the coal-bearing rocks—Mesaverde—of the San Juan Basin.
(4) -The fossil plants from the so-called “Laramie” of the San Juan
Basin indicate that this formation may be older than the Laramie of the
Denver Basin.
(5) The flora of the coal-bearing rocks below. the unconformity in
the Raton field is similar to that of the Mesaverde, and tends to make
that formation the time-equivalent of the Mesaverde. It has a less
striking resemblance to the flora of the so-called “Laramie” of the San
Juan Basin, which Doctor Knowlton regards as older than Laramie.
On the other hand, the fauna of the shale immediately below the coal-
bearing rocks of the Raton field is similar to that of the Lewis shale, and
tends to correlate the older coal-bearing rocks with the “Laramie” of the
San Juan Basin.
(6) Unconformities, representing erosion that probably took place
after the close of the Cretaceous period, are found in all of the coal fields
described in this paper. So far as is now known, this erosion originated
in the post-Cretaceous uplift of the Rocky Mountains, but cut deeper in
some places than in others, and persisted in some places longer than in
others.*
Previous INVESTIGATIONS
‘In another section of this paper will be found a complete annotated
list of the principal publications consulted during its preparation. Where
practicable, the data that may be found useful in gaining a proper under-
standing of the geologic relations here discussed are enumerated. Among
these publications there are many that give little new information, but
are devoted principally to discussion or to reviews of papers previously
published, and a few that have furnished practically all of the geologic
information hitherto known. An attempt is made below to give a brief
historic account of these investigations and place in chronologic order
the principal contributions made toward an understanding of the geo-
logic relations and age of the coals of central and western New Mexico
and the rock formations with which they are associated. Most of those
®The results presented in this paper are so largely dependent on paleontology that
more than ordinary credit should be given to Dr. T. W. Stanton, who identified the
invertebrates and assisted the writer in other ways, and to Dr. F. H. Knowlton, who
identified the fossil plants and placed at the writer’s disposal a large volume of infor-
mation not yet published, but which has a strong bearing on the problems of correlation.
576 W.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
relating to the Raton field have been omitted, for they will appear in
another paper which is nearly completed.
Dr. A. Wislizenus (3) visited the gold fields south of Cerrillos in July,
1846, and although he makes no mention of coal in the Cerrillos field he
observed the petrified wood that occurs in the Galisteo sandstone near
the coal beds in this field, and states that coal occurs on the Rio Puerco
in rocks supposed to be equivalent in age to those in the Cerrillos field.
About two months later Lieutenant Abert (1) visited the Cerrillos field
and found coal on one of the tributaries of Galisteo Creek. He also
found coal on the Rio Puerco and collected fossils from rocks associated
with the coal beds at Poblozon, a few miles north of San Ygnacio. Ac-
cording to J. W. Bailey, (2) these fossils proved the Cretaceous age of
the coal-bearing rocks.
In 1849 James H. Simpson (4) visited the coal beds on the Rio Puerco
at the eastern margin of the San Juan Basin northeast of Cabezon, and
at several places farther west. Later, in 1853, Jules Marcou (6) reports
coal “at Los Lunas and several other points on the Puerco,” and com-
pares the coal-bearing rocks with those of the Cerrillos field.
Wilham P. Blake (9) examined the anthracite of this field in 1857,
and also some coal in the Carboniferous formation near Santa Fe. He
was inclined at this time to regard the Cerrillos anthracite as Carbon-
iferous. A year later, in 1858, J. S. Newberry visited Santa Fe and
secured samples of this anthracite, but did not visit the mine until the
following year. He found coal beds near Fort Defiance, at the southern
extremity of the San Juan Basin, in rocks which he referred to the Cre-
taceous, and others farther west, at Moqui, which he referred to the
Jurassic. In 1859 he visited the Cerrillos coal field and examined both
the anthracite and the “lignite” near Cerrillos and referred both to the
Cretaceous. The full account of his investigation was not published
until 1876, although a preliminary announcement of some of his coneclu-
sions was made in 1871.
In 1865 R. E. Owen (11) and E. T. Cox visited both the Cerrillos
and the Rio Puerco coal fields, They referred the Cerrillos anthracite to
the Carboniferous. In 1867 John L. Le Conte (13) visited the Cerrillos
field and secured fossil leaves from the coal measures. From the evi-
dence of these fossils he referred the coal beds to the Cretaceous, but
placed them well down in the Cretaceous series. He regarded them as
older than the “Marshall formation” or Laramie of the Denver basin.
He also reports the occurrence of coal on the Rio Puerco west of Albu-
querque. A year later he (15) reported the occurrence of coal near
j
)
PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS 577
Tijeras and referred again to the occurrence of coal in the Cerrillos and
Rio Puerco fields, and near Tierra Amarilla in the San Juan Basin.
In 1869 Hayden (19), after a brief visit to the Cerrillos coal field,
referred the coal beds to the Tertiary, basing his conclusion on the fossil
plants which he found in abundance and which were later examined by
Lesquereux. In 1870 Raymond (16) published a description of the coal
beds of the Cerrillos and other coal fields, treating them from an eco-
nomic standpoint. The following year Newberry (17) published a brief
statement to the effect that the anthracite near Cerrillos is of Cretaceous
age, and in 1872 Lesquereux (18) followed with descriptions of the fossil
plants that had been collected from the Cerrillos coal measures and re-
ferred the beds containing them to the Tertiary, as Hayden had done
three years before. A year later, 1873, (21) he correlated the Cerrillos
coal beds with others which he regarded as Tertiary, notably with those
at Raton, New Mexico (which have recently been shown to consist of
two formations somewhat widely separated in time), and with the coal
measures near Canyon City, Colorado, the age of which is still debatable.
In the same article he refers to the coal measures in the Tijeras field,
and also to coal near San Felipe—doubtless at the northern end of the
Hagan field.
During the controversy over the geologic age of the “lignitic group” of
Hayden, which raged in the early seventies, several more or less obscure
references were made to the coal beds of northern New Mexico, but too
little was known of them to. bring them seriously into the controversy.
Many of these are noted in the list of publications on pages 659-686,
but need not be mentioned here, inasmuch as the character of the infor-
mation contained is indicated by the notes.accompanying the titles of the
papers.
During the years 1871 to 1873, inclusive, certain explorations were
made in regions west of the 100th meridian, including the areas de-
scribed in this paper. Several geologists were connected with these
explorations and published, in the Wheeler reports and elsewhere, many
facts of interest regarding the coal measures of New Mexico. Loew (30)
mentions the occurrence of “Cretaceous lignite beds” in the San Juan
Basin near Nacimiento, and Cope (26) also published in 1874 a descrip-
tion of the coal measures exposed farther north in the same basin along
the tributaries of the Chama River and elsewhere, in which he shows that
marine rocks of Cretaceous age occur above the coal beds. These are
evidently the Mesaverde coals of northwestern New Mexico, and the
marine rocks above them constitute the Lewis shale of later writers,
578 Ww. 'T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
Apparently Cope either did not find the “Laramie” of this region at this
time or did not separate it from the overlying Tertiary rocks.
Again, in 1875, Loew (41) describes the “Cretaceous” coal beds near
Nacimiento, and also those farther south on the Rio Puerco near San
Ygnacio (42), as well as those in the Cerrillos and Tijeras coal fields.
Analyses are given of the bituminous coal from Nacimiento and of the
anthracite from Placer Mountain in the Cerrillos field. About the same
time Stevenson presented a paper apparently not published until the fol-
lowing year, in which he mentions the Galisteo formation, and Cope (39)
criticized the paper, stating that the Galisteo sandstone is Triassic in age
(probably misled by the color of the rocks). The same error seems to
have been made by others, for several contemporaneous writers refer to
great numbers of petrified trees in the Trias of the Cerrillos region,
whereas no rocks now admitted to be of Triassic age occur in this region,
and all of the petrified wood known to the present writer is in the Galis-
teo sandstone. It does not appear from the literature that Cope actually
visited the Cerrillos coal field at this time, as his route was from Santa
Fe to the Sandia Mountains west of the field, but his descriptions are
such as to indicate that he regarded the coal beds which he evidently
knew lay east of his route as belonging in the Cretaceous, at least as
high as number 4 (Pierre), inasmuch as his diagram (36) shows the
occurrence of number 4 stratigraphically below the horizon where the
coal is now known to occur. However, Stevenson (53) states that Cope
referred the coal to Cretaceous number 3. In this same paper (36) Cope
describes, in considerable detail, the coal measures west of Nacimiento
Mountains. He referred the coal beds, which later writers have called
Mesaverde, to Cretaceous number 3 (Niobrara), and found above them
fossils which he regarded as indicative of Cretaceous number 4 (Pierre),
which apparently is the Lewis shale, later described as occurring above
the Mesaverde coal measures in this region. In another paper Cope (38)
.gives a graphic section of both Cretaceous and Tertiary formations, in
which he indicates a covered area between his Cretaceous number 4 and
the overlying Puerco formation.
In 1874 Cope (23) announced that he had found dinosaur bones
which, in his opinion, proved that Hayden’s “lignitic group” was Cre-
taceous in age, and Hayden (28) replied that he admitted the Cretaceous
age of some of the coal beds of Utah, Arizona, and western New Mexico;
also, Newberry asserted that he had proved the coal beds of New Mexico
to be Cretaceous by the discovery of marine fossils above them (28 and
32), and that all of the plant-bearing coal beds in New Mexico are of
Ee
_— — yw?
PREVIOUS INIVESTIGATIONS 579
Cretaceous age, but Lesquereux (49) tried to strengthen his reference of
the coal beds to the Tertiary by the evidence of the fossil plants.
In 1876 ‘the delayed publication (44) of Newberry’s account of his
expedition with Macomb in 1859 appeared, and with it Meek’s (43) de-
scription of the fossil shells collected by Newberry during that expedi-
tion. The coal beds of the Cerrillos field and those of the San Juan
Basin are referred to “Middle Cretaceous,” which, according to New-
berry’s classification, make them equivalent in time to the Niobrara.
Cope (45) followed a year later with a paper, in which he referred these
same coal beds, west of Nacimiento and Gallinas Mountains, to Cretace-
ous number 3, which, as just explained, is equivalent to the upper part
of Newberry’s “Middle Cretaceous.” About a year later a striking ex-
ample of the difference of opinion existing between the authorities of
that time appeared when Lesquereux (49) included in his Tertiary flora
plants from the coal measures of the Cerrillos field which Newberry
(44) had previously referred to “Middle Cretaceous.”
In 1877 Hayden’s Atlas of Colorado was published and doubtless had
great influence on such investigations as were later made in New Mexico.
The mapping was extended southward over the area near Monero, de-
scribed in this paper. By inspection it appears that the Colorado for-
mation of this Atlas includes the shale both above and below the main
eoal beds which Newberry and Cope had referred to Cretaceous number
3. These are the coal] beds which Schrader (100) later mapped as Mesa-
verde. The Atlas map shows the occurrence of a considerable develop-
ment of so-called Fox Hills rocks in this region overlain by Wasatch. It
is not clear what this “Fox Hills” is intended to represent, unless it be
the very thin “Laramie” which occurs at Dulce and the massive sand-
stones of the post-“Laramie” formation, which is now known to lie un-
conformably on the “Laramie” in the vicinity of Dulce.
In 1878 and 1879-J. J. Stevenson examined the Cerrillos coal field and
published (51) a preliminary account, in which he refers the coal-bearing
rocks to the Laramie. At a time when such wide differences of opinion
existed, as is indicated above, it would seem especially difficult to find
the truth. Furthermore, Stevenson had worked east of the mountains
in the Canyon City field and in the Raton Mesa region in beds which,
by common consent, were called Laramie. Although some geologists had
referred the Cerrillos coal beds to Cretaceous number 3 (Niobrara) and
others had regarded them as younger than this, but still somewhat
older than those of the Raton Mesa, Canyon City, and Denver fields,
there seems to have been a general assumption at this time that the coal
580. Ww. T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO °
beds of all these fields were of practically the same age, so that when
those of the more northerly fields were called Laramie it was quite nat-
-ural that Stevenson should extend the name to the Cerrillos field without
presenting as clear evidence of age as could be desired. Thus, while
Stevenson correlated the coal beds of the Cerrillos field with the so-called
“Laramie farther north, he held that the Laramie was Cretaceous. In
other words, his Laramie was equivalent to the upper part of Hayden’s
Fox Hills group. In 1881 (52 and 53) the full account of Stevenson’s
investigation appeared, and although the coal beds are referred definitely
to the Laramie, a step was taken toward their present reference to the
Mesaverde when he reported (52, page 371) the occurrence of marine
and brackish water fossils from “high up in the Laramie.” It should be
noted in passing that Stevenson’s “Laramie” included not only the coal-
bearing rocks, but many, if not all, of the younger rocks that other
writers have described as Galisteo. The descriptions in his several papers
on the Galisteo region, his maps of the region (54, number 77 (B), and
number 78 (A)), and his cross-section (52 and 53, page 341, figure 49)
leaeve no room for doubt that his “Laramie” includes the rocks of both
the Mesaverde and the Galisteo formations of the present paper.
For several years after Stevenson’s investigation little new informa-
tion was gained concerning the coal measures of central and western New
Mexico, but several more or less definite references to them are found in
the literature. Cope, who was interested in the Tertiary vertebrates of
northwestern New Mexico, makes mention of the underlying coal beds
(55), which he refers, in part at least, to the Laramie. The coal beds of
Gallinas Mountains are shown as occurring below “Fox Hills” (57), and
the Puerco and Laramie are included under “post-Cretaceous,” although
Cope explains in the text that the Puerco belongs in the “Tertiary rather
than the post-Cretaceous.”
Little work was done on the coal-bearing rocks of New Mexico during
the nineties, although Stevenson (69) visited the Cerrillos coal field
again in 1896 and added a little to the information that he had already
given. However, observations were being made by Cross, Spencer, and
others in southwestern Colorado that were destined to have a notable
influence on the investigations of the New Mexico coal-bearing rocks.
In 1898 Spencer (73) announced that rocks of Benton, Niobrara, and
Pierre age in southwestern Colorado are not divisible on lithologic
grounds, and that massive sandstones occur higher in the section which
might prove to contain equivalents of both Fox Hills and Laramie. This
was followed a year later (75) by the La Plata folio, in which Cross
names the coal-bearing rocks Mesaverde, the shale between them and the
—
PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS 581
Dakota Mancos, and the shale overlying them Lewis. The younger coal-
bearing rocks, or “Laramie,” occur in this region beyond the limits of
the La Plata folio, thus making a section of the Cretaceous rocks which
has become the standard for southwestern Colorado and northern New
- Mexico.
While the work just referred to was in progress in southwestern Colo-
rado a series of independent investigations was being carried on by C. L.
Herrick, then president of the University of New Mexico, and by others
associated with him. They were not in close touch with other investi-
gators, and although their work yielded much valuable information the
results have not received the attention they deserve. In 1898 Herrick
(72) published a preliminary paper, describing some of the Cretaceous
rocks near Albuquerque, and two years later a more elaborate report on
_ this region appeared, in which he, in collaboration with Johnson (77),
described the stratified rocks extending from the Rio Puerco to the Cer-
rillos coal field. Much valuable information was given regarding the
Cretaceous rocks below the coal beds, and the coal-bearing rocks were
shown on fossil evidence to be of the same age in the Rio Puerco, Hagan,
Tijeras, and Cerrillos coal fields and to be older than the Laramie. They
were referred to the Fox Hills. This paper was followed in 1903 by one
- from D. W. Johnson (83), in which the geology of the Cerrillos region
is described in detail. The coal measures were referred to the Fox Hills,
and a somewhat extensive Pierre fauna was found in the shale below the
coal; also a somewhat extensive Benton fauna was found near the bot-
tom of this shale formation, but no fossils characteristic of the Niobrara
were obtained. Evidence was found in some places of a commingling of
Benton species with some that he regarded as characteristic of the Pierre.
The work of Herrick and Johnson was not extended to correlate in any
way the rocks described by them with those described by Cross and others
in southwestern Colorado, and their results, proving that the coal beds of
central New Mexico are older than Laramie, seem not to have gained
acceptance, for as late as 1907 Campbell (103), in writing of the coal
beds of the Cerrillos and Hagan fields, states that “it is highly probable
that they are Laramie.”
In. 1905 work was begun on the coal fields of New Mexico which has
resulted in a series of publications leading up to our present knowl-
edge of the coal fields. Schrader (100) traced thé Mesaverde and “Lara-
mie” formations from southwestern Colorado, where Cross had estab-
lished their stratigraphic relations, eastward along the northern border
of the San Juan Basin and southward to the Gallinas Mountains. Far-
ther south the “Laramie” was not identified and the coal-bearing rocks
582 Ww. T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
are described as “Upper Montana—relation to the Mesaverde unknown.”
This was followed in 1907 with a paper by Shaler (105), who traced the
formations of southwestern Colorado around the western margin of the
San Juan Basin.
In 1908 a paper was published by Shimer and Blodgett (109) which
aids materially in correlating the coal measures of the Rio Puerco field
with those of the San Juan Basin. These observers collected fossils at
several localities between the two coal fields from the fossil-bearing zones
that had been described by Herrick and Johnson as occurring in the
shale below the coal beds of the Rio Puerco field.
A year later, 1909, Gardner (110) referred Schrader’s “Upper Mon-
tana group” of the southeastern part of the San Juan Basin to the
Mesaverde and found the Lewis shale and the “Laramie” coal beds
higher in the section. This was followed by two papers from the same
writer (116 and 117) in which these correlations were strengthened.
In 1905 the present writer began making observations in New Mexico,
and in the following year (97) announced the discovery of bones of
Triceratops in rocks younger than the coal measures near Engle, New
Mexico, about 150 miles south of the area described in the present paper.
These rocks have a conspicuous basal conglomerate that was later found
to le unconformably on the coal-bearing rocks.* In this and in a later
paper (104) these rocks were provisionally correlated with the Galisteo
sandstone of the Cerrillos coal field, and there in turn with the post-Lara-
mie beds found elsewhere, which were at that time and still are by some
geologists regarded as being of late Cretaceous age. The next step taken
by the writer in this study was in 1908, when he discovered an uncon-
formity announced in 1911 (111) in the Raton coal field of New Mexico.
The coal-bearing rocks previously referred to the Laramie were found to
be separated by this unconformity into two formations, the upper one of
which was correlated on fossil evidence with the post-Laramie rocks of
the Denver Basin, while the lower one contains a flora that is regarded
as older than Laramie. In 1910 the writer, assisted by J. B. Mertie,
spent the field season in tracing the coal-bearing formations around the
Raton and Trinidad coal fields and in studying their relations to each
other and to neighboring formations. A preliminary announcement of
results was made (119), in which it was shown that the unconformity is
readily traceable in all parts of these two fields. A large amount of evi-
dence was collected bearing on the structural relations and the geologic
age of these two coal-bearing formations, but the information is not yet
* Personal communication from Mr. Max W. Ball.
-_— =>
LS? See ee
PREVIOUS INVESTIGATIONS 583
in form for publication. The greater part of the evidence of age is de-
rived from fossil plants which are being studied by Dr. F. H. Knowlton.
Although his study of them is by no means complete, it has progressed
far enough to indicate that, in his opinion, the plants of the upper for-
mation are undoubtedly of post-Laramie age, and that those of the lower
formation are older than recognized Laramie.
During the summer of 1911 the writer carried on the investigations
described in this paper in an attempt to correlate the formations of the
Raton Mesa region with those of the coal fields south and west of the
Rocky Mountains. A preliminary statement of results was given at the
Washington meeting of the Geological Society of America, in which it
was shown that the evidence derived from the study of stratigraphy, of
fossil plants, and of fossil shells all agree in correlating the coal beds
of the Cerrillos, Hagan, and Rio Puerco coal fields with the Mesaverde
formation of the southeastern part of the San Juan Basin, and that the
fossil plants associated with these coal beds are essentially the same as
those found in the coal-bearing formation below the unconformity in the
Raton Mesa region.
After the present paper was in type, but before it went to press, the
writer, in company with T’. W. Stanton, made some examinations in the
Rio Puerco field and along the eastern margin of the San Juan Basin
from Cabezon to Monero, principally for the purpose of determining the
relations of the coal-bearing rocks in the southeastern part of the San
Juan Basin to the typical Mesaverde in the northern part of this basin.
The results of this work cannot be embodied in the present paper, but it
may be briefly stated (1) that at least the lower part of the coal-bearing
rocks at Cabezon is essentially equivalent to the Mesaverde as represented
at Monero, which in turn is the undoubted equivalent of the original
Mesaverde, and (2) that these same rocks seem to be equivalent in age
to the middle and upper portions of the coal-bearing rocks in the Rio
Puerco field: in other words, that the base of the Mesaverde in the Rio
Puerco field, as represented by the Punta de la Mesa sandstone, is lower
in the section by several hundred feet than the base farther north, and
that these several hundred feet of sandstone and sandy shale are equiva-
lent in age to the upper part of the Mancos near Cabezon.
GEOLOGIC FORMATIONS
THE TYPE SECTION
In 1899 Whitman Cross (75) published a section of the Cretaceous
rocks that has become the standard for southwestern Colorado and west-
ern New Mexico. This section divides the Cretaceous into Dakota sand-
584. w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
stone, Mancos shale, which is equivalent in age to Benton, Niobrara, and
a part of Pierre; Mesaverde formation, Lewis shale, “Pictured Cliffs
sandstone,” and “Laramie” formation. The “Pictured Cliffs sandstone”
may be regarded as the basal sandstone of the “Laramie” formation. The
Animas formation, lying unconformably on the “Laramie,” was corre-
lated with the post-Laramie formations of the Denver Basin, which were
then generally referred to the Cretaceous, but which have recently been
referred to the Tertiary by G. B. Richardson (122).
This subdivision of the Cretaceous finds its latest expression in a sec-
tion measured by J. H. Gardner, a few miles east of Durango, for use in
a folio now in preparation. At the writer’s solicitation Doctor Gardner
has prepared the section for use in this paper as follows:
Section of Cretaceous Rocks measured on Florida River near Durango, Colo-
rado (except the Wasatch, which was measured farther East)
(Data furnished by J. H. Gardner)
d Feet In. Feet In.
Sandstone, massive ledges, coarse-grained,
- tan-colored, with thin beds of shale..... 80
Sandstone alternating with beds of shale... 70
Sandstone, massive, tan-colored............ 20
Shale, variegated and thin sandstone....... 100
Sandstone, massive, coarse-grained, gray... 30
Shale, eray..and. Grab.) 0) ses bene eee eee Coes 50
Sandstone, tan-colored, coarse-grained, with
lenses of colored quartz and chert, average
bDIFd-Cge IN SLAC Eh 4 cc's wcle we eects with te eae 20
Shale, variegated with lenticular beds of
Wasatch as brown and gray sandstone............ wee 400
determined Shale, variegated with benches of gray sand-
by vertebrate stone and thin ferruginous sandstone and
remains. Sandy: Staley ' Meas. at Jee Be leveiee ence ee 660
(Section Sandstone, massive, soft, gray.......... wen ene
measured. on.) Shale, varierated 20 ssc Gs.06 Ooh aa ae ee 50
east side of Sandstone, massive, coarse-grained, dark-
Ignacio gray but locally purplish-brown.......... 4
Quadrangle. ) Shale, variegated with brown, reddish, gray
and drab, with thin beds of brown and
GTAY. SANGSEOBES V/s aS de eee See 325
Shale, brownish and reddish, with lenses of
| conglomeratic sandstone; pebbles of col-
ored quartz and chert chiefly... .,.-.°...0.% 85.
Shale, yellowish amd. STay.- wc sc wee ecctwasac 50
Sandstone with small pebbles of quartz.... 1
Shale, yellowish, drab and gray........... 60
Shale, tan-colored and reddish at the base,
containing Platanus reynoldsii Newb. ?
OT THe PASE sis 04s win une aie nls dee ome Ree 250
2,275
——=_
i ee le
ad UE oe
Animas
formation
F
|
SECTION OF CRETACEOUS ROCKS
(Lithologiec contrast. Unconformity not per-
ceptible. )
| Sandstone, massive, tan-colored, micaceous
with greenish igneous debris, alternating
WIth “VellOwWICh GeMles fields cian oa cas ewe ke
Shale, brown, drab, gray, and some reddish.
Sandstone, tan-colored, alternating with
heavy beds of brown, greenish, drab, and
yellowish shale, containing Ficus sp. ? and
Cornus sp. 109 feet from the top and
Artocarpus lessigiana (Lesq.) Kn.; and
Nyssa ? racemosa ? Kn. 275 feet from the
TETSU Oe oaiaee 2 oa eine nai aie aiete cide iae a as
Sandstone, greenish-gray, with small igne-
ous pebbles one-quarter inch in diameter
Wh: FEECRHIAT ZONES Ook cid ac cue bevevscne
Shale and sandstone, greenish, locally con-
PC RNe 32S S02 Vids aie siehetn'e! Flax 4 pie ers & ua
SNP ECCINIS ES Sass cis at Soe cs «cad oid elaa
Sandstone, greenish and pink, with pebbles
of schist and quartzite chiefly; pebbles
eM OEM ROMER oo ce ticles eS sk oss ee gale a 8%
PEO PRCOMASNS Ge Ske ocd ee onde we ee eek wae
Sandstone, greenish-gray, coarse, friable....
Shaie, greenish, and conglomeratic sandstone
Peri PT OACEOUS ee 6 oe Se ac a dra ns
SM EAB RES AWE SSS Ol ek oS estilo ws aes
Mee en POMRRE EES oe Se ioce a oles ok ee wie we 's o 0.0
Shale, greenish, with silicified wood.......
Sandstone, gray and ferruginous, with sand-
MIOHIe CONETOHIONG os tus os Se Ole be ee
Sandstone, argillaceous, with andesite and
other igneous pebbles and tuffs..........
Sandstone and shale with igneous matrix
BATRGEy SDEUBIGN Wy erties aie ieee awk cea
Shale, greenish and purple................
Sandstone, yellowishriasccra.fececccctiass
Shale, greenish, purple and bluish.........
Sandstone, massive, poorly consolidated,
yellowish-white, and cross-bedded ; contains
Ficus planicostata Lesq. at the base......
Sandstone, argillaceous, and some _ shale;
IPMCGUS WIAGEIE 4 4 Seas kde dba eee sees
Tuff, coarse fragments of various composi-
Shale, reddish, alternating with dark con-
glomerate and sedimentary debris........
Tuff, reddish and pink, coarse-grained......
Feet
=] Cl
1 ©
a
855
12
28
In.
586 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
Animas
formation
“Laramie”
|
|
Feet In.
Sandstone, brown, fine-grained, with round
Sandstone = CONCrELIONS. ..24...seeie se tine © ae 8
Shale, irregularly bedded, gray, friable..... rf
Sandstone, brown, coarse-grained, igneous
ITAA ER to ve ce Sw elu eiete dae eee +
Sandstone, yellowish and locally reddish... . is
Sandstone, drab-colored weathers reddish,
IONEOUS ANAUTIX. «is. Seo eee ee eee oe 15
(Unconformity by erosion, and discordance
of dip.)
Shale, yellowish, with sometimes a white
sandstone near the top............ ReFeke sane 50
Shale, drab-colored with some thin sandstone 100
Sandstone, massive, light colored.......... 20
Shale, tater and 2 Tray.o ee. 2.0 ce wie Oe een eke 90
Sandstone; Massive, Sor, wray. 4 peepee 12
Shale and soft sandstone containing at the
base Unio holmesianus White; Unio sp. ;
Corbicula sp.; Corbula subtrigonalis M. &
H.; Vulotoma thompsoni White; Gonio-
basis ? sp.; Campeloma ? sp. (U. S. G. S.
locality: NOs (6063) te xe oe Se ey ae 20
Sandstone, massive, rather hard, gray...... 20
Shale, brownish, and thin, soft sandstone... 320
Sandstone, friable, gray....... matte ski area
Sandstone, brown, containing Brachyphyllum
macrocarpum Newb. and Sequoia reichen-
bachi (Gein.) Heer (U. S. G. S. locality
INGOs RO4G 2 ae SRA eS ch Mensa’ cielo 2
SANGStOMES! SLAW AN itoms ok donee hicnnh el See eee 1D
Shale and some thin sandstone. ........... 30
Shale and thin sandstone, containing Se-
quoia reichenbachi (Gein.) Heer; Carpi-
tes sp.; Juglans sp.; Salix sp.? (U.S. G.S8.
locality. -No.: 5463) uc, dace eee 19
Ooal shed sess sate Le ake eel stan egret ee cake 1
Shale-and: thin sandstone. . 36 eiegedc ae 10
Sandstone, soft in several beds........ eo
Saale 6 tie enchkstrs Dek beta ad fk eee eee 8
Conml: Ped NG. oat 5 eee eee ce 3
Shale, carbOnaceousiiin. ds ia... cnseuee 15
Coal) HG: 222k pose URN aia oe oie Sie ee
Shale dark! and Gra bru. nis oeciicne oe 20
Sandstone, massive, gray with ecaleare-
ous layer NEA DASE eid sow esis erowtan 50
Sandstone and shale, containing Pholas ?
sp.; Goniobasis 2? sp.; Campeloma ?
Feet In.
2,091
8
“Laramie”
|
|
SECTION OF CRETACEOUS ROCKS
sp.; Viviparus sp. (U. S. G. S.
locality No. 6064) 438 feet above the
base and fossil plants at the base....
Shale, containing both fresh water and
brackish water invertebrates as fol-
lows: Unio brachyopisthus White;
Unio holmesianus White; Unio, 2 un-
described (?) species; Spherium sp. ;
Martesia ? sp.; Viviparus sp.; Com-
peloma ? sp.; Tulotoma thompsoni
White; Ostrea sp.; Corbicula sp., re-
lated to C. subelliptica M. & H.; Cor-
bicula sp.; Corbula sp.; Melania sp.;
(U. S. G. S. locality Nos. 6071, 6072,
and 6074), and fossil plants Viburnum
marginatum Lesq.? (U. S. G. S.
locality No. 5454)............ EP
ere T ce Nosy (ae ee ores aleee Ss, Vis wheels ae be a als
Shale and thin sandstone, containing, 15
feet from the top, Ostrea sp.; Anomia
sp.; Modiola laticostata White; Cor-
bula subtrigonalis M. & H.? (U. S.
G. S. locality No. 6065) ; 20 feet from
the base are the fossil plants Sequoia
reichenbachi (Gein.) Heer; Quercus
sp., and at the base both shells and
plants, Anomia sp.; Corbula subtri-
gonalis M. & H.?; Cypris ? sp.; Me-
lania sp. (U. S. G. S. locality No.
6068), and Brachyphyllum macro-
carpum Newb.; Geinitzia formosa
Heer; Sequoia reichenbachi (Gein.)
Heer (U. S. G. S. locality No. 5451).
RAC Fe nce) aon era ee BAR Ss ee ae
XLII—Bu tt. Gro. Soc. Am., Vou. 23, 1911
Feet In,
150
10
42).-2
50
587
Feet In,
588 Ww. T., LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
“Taramie”
Lewis
Mesaverde
7
Pictured Cliffs Sandstone
Sandstone, gray, massive, top of “Pic-
tured. Cliffs sandstone,’ containing
both invertebrates and plants: Ostrea
sp.; Inoceramus barabini Mort.;
Cardium speciosum M. & H.; Tellina
scitula M. & H.; Anomia sp.; Corbula
subtrigonalis M. & H.? (U. S. G. S.
locality Nos. 6067, 6069, 6070), and
Geinitzia formosa Heer? Abietites
dubius Lesq. (U. S. G. S. locality
Nos. 5446 and 5448)..........02.0.-
Shalexdrab colored?..o2«ic22 he. ee eee
Shale, carbonaceous and coaly.........
shale: ‘drab Colored: .tjc5 ad Shi. Seeds ae
Sandstone, massive, Qray.......esseees
Sandstone, massive, gray with some
alternating shale beds, bottom of
“Pictured Cliffs sandstone,” contain-
ing at the base Ostrea sp.; Inoceramus
sp.; Corbula sp.; Odontobasis ? sp.
(U. S. G. S. locality No. 6066).......
Transition sandy shale with beds of
sandstone 6 inches to 1 foot thick....
Sandstone, massive, light gray.........
Shale and. ‘SANGSLONE. \..c «cle nein pos ete
Sandstone, massive, gray..........+.-
WOal WEG sc cain eielsinm aw 6's oie sh aie eco eet eee
Shale and. ‘Sandstone. soos seen e cee
Coal streak sometimes present here.
Sandstone, massive, gray, containing
Ficus lanceolata PoEIOBD. ou k ca ek oe ee
Feet In.
10
Feet In.
oo4
1,600
422 10
ee a ae —— ;
SECTION OF CRETACEOUS ROCKS 589
Feet In. Feet In.
( Shale with transitional beds of thin sand-
Mancos | _ stone and shale at the top, containing
1 Gryphea newberryi Stanton, 60 feet above
[ the base, 1,200 to 2,000 feet thick........ 1,600+
1,600+
Sandstone, massive, gray, quartzose........ 20
Shale, dark and gray, with local thin coal
Dakota and beds and some shaly sandstone.......... 40
sandstones at | Sandstone, massive, gray, quartzose........ 50
base of Shale and thin sandstone with local car-
Mancos bonaceous layers and thin coal beds...... 100
Sandstone, massive, gray, quartzose....... 15
ed 225
MUR AR oc iarverasetdgat atv a.ne Rta a 8 sis: Fie ux acs. ak 9,698 11
In order to correlate the formations described from central New
Mexico with those of the Durango region, the writer made a somewhat
hasty trip to Durango, where the Cretaceous formations are well exposed
along the Animas River. Careful search was made for fossils in the
Mesaverde, Lewis, and “Laramie.” None were found in the Lewis, and
the Mesaverde was found to be barren in many places, although a few
shells and poorly preserved fossil leaves were found in it. Half a mile
west of Twin Buttes, at the mouth of the gulch, entering Lightner Creek
from the west, several fossil plants were found, but most of them are too
poorly preserved to be specifically identified. They are Hquisetum sp.,
Sequoia reichenbacht (Gein.) Heer, Fern, Quercus sp., Quercus n. sp.,
Palm, and Ficus sp. (United States Geological Survey, locality No.
6043). In this gulch, half a mile farther west, Baculites anceps var.
obtusus Meek was found above the main coal beds. A single palm,
Geonomites sp., very similar if not identical with a species common in
the lowest coal formation of the Raton coal field, was found on the dump
of an old mine in the Mesaverde coal, which opens in the gulch about 1
mile south of the Durango smelter, and on the dump of another mine in
Horse Gulch, in the same coal measures, about half a mile east of Du-
rango, Ficus lanceolata Heer and Ficus sp. were found. The fossil leaves
seemed to be confined to very restricted zones closely associated with the
coal. Baculites anceps var. obtusus Meek was found in the Mesaverde
above the coal in several places near Durango. Such limited observa-
tions as were made in this region gave the impression that the Mesaverde
is here essentially a marine formation. This observation seems to be
verified by the work of other geologists. Fossils collected from this for-
mation several years ago and identified by Doctor Stanton are as follows;
590 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
Mesaverde Fossils collected by Robert Forrester in southwestern Colorado
Anchura newberryi Meek Lucina sp.
Acteon intercalaris Meek Lunatia sp.
Baculites anceps val. obtusus Meek Odontobasis sp.
5 compressus Say Ostrea subtrigonalis E. & S.
Callista deweyi M. & H. Pinna sp.
Cardium belluluwm Meek Panopea sp.
3 speciosum M. & H. Placenticeras intercalare M. & H.
Dentalium sp. Serpula sp.
Fusciolaria sp. Spheriola sp.
Fusus sp. Turritella sp.
Inoceramus barabini Morton
The coal-bearing formation above the Lewis shale, near Durango, has
somewhat generally been regarded as Laramie because of its stratigraphic
position. These beds were found to be very fossiliferous in some places.
Some of the fossils throw doubt on the Laramie age of the formation,
but for the purposes of this paper it will be called “Laramie” in order
to avoid introducing a new name. Doctor Gardner found several fossils
in it and these are named in the foregoing section. The best collection
obtained from it by the writer contains both plants and invertebrates.
They were found in the west wall of Animas Canyon, half a mile south
of Carbon Junction, about 200 feet above the lowest or principal bed of
coal. A few fossil leaves were collected from lower horizons in the same
formation near this locality by J. A. Taff in 1906, and by J. H. Gardner
in 1909. In order to make the flora of this locality complete, these have
been included in the following list and are marked thus (*):
Fossils collected on or near the Animas River, in the Durango Region, Colorado
(Plants, United States Geological Survey, Locality No. 6044)
Ficus speciosissima Ward *A bietites dubius Lesq.
Ficus trinervis Kn. *Brachyphyllum macrocarpum Newby.
Ficus lanceolata Heer *Carpites sp.
Ficus sp. (8-nerved, narrow) *Geinitzia formosa Heer
Quercus 0. Sp. *Sequoia reichenbachi (Gein.) Heer
Geonomites sp.
(Shells, United States Geological Survey, Locality No. 7197)
Unio holmesianus White Tulotoma thompsoni White?
“sp. related to U. aldrichi White Campeloma? sp. ;
[oS Viviparus sp.
Neritina sp.
yy —--
FOSSILS FROM THE CRETACEOUS FORMATIONS 591
In commenting on the age of these fossils, Doctor Knowlton says of
the plants: |
“Notwithstanding the fact that this collection is from rocks generally re-
garded as of Laramie age, there is not a single species in it that suggests the
Laramie (of the Denver Basin). It is the same flora as that at Point of
Rocks, Wyoming, and so far as I can see is of the same age, namely, Montana.”
The shells collected by the writer are beautifully preserved, but they
are of fresh-water species. Doctor Stanton says of them:
“y consider this a Laramie fauna. The unios are Lance types and the gas-
tropods are of types that range from Mesaverde to Lance.”
- In addition to the fossils named above, a number of invertebrates have
been collected from the “Laramie” of southwest Colorado by Robert For-
rester (113, page 274) and J. A. Taff. Their collections have been
joined with those made by the writer and by Doctor Gardner to make
the following list, which includes all of the invertebrates known from
the “Laramie” of southwest Colorado. The marine forms come from the
Pictured Cliffs sandstone and the brackish water forms from the lower
part of the shaly portion of the “Laramie” formation, although many
of the latter occur above the principal coal bed. The fresh-water forms
are from higher horizons:
Fossil Invertebrates of the “Laramie” Formation of southwest Colorado
Anomia sp. related to A. micronema Martesia? sp.
Meek Melania wyomingensis Meek?
Anomia sp. “ sp.
Campeloma? sp. Modiola laticostata White
Cardium speciosum M. & H. Neritina sp.
Corbicula sp. related to C. subelliptica Ostrea sp.
M. & H. Phosas? sp.
Corbicula occidentalis M. & H. Spherium sp.
= sp. Tellina scitula M. & H.
Corbula undifera Meek Tulotoma thompsoni White
a subtrigonalis M. & H. Unio holmesianus White
or sp. * brachyopisthus White
Cypris? sp. “ verrucosiformis Whitfield ?
Goniobasis? sp. “sp. related to U. aldrichi White
Inoceramus barabini Morton “sp. undescribed, possibly 2 species
Inoceramus sp. Viviparus sp.
The relation of the so-called Laramie to the younger formations ex-
posed along the Animas River is not yet satisfactorily determined. Sev-
eral hundred feet above the horizon of the fossils collected by the present
writer there is a distinct change in lithology. A hard, massive, cliff-
592 ow... LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
making sandstone rests with uneven base on shale, and in the lower part
of this sandstone was found a large bone, apparently a shoulder-blade.
Only a small part of the bone was secured, and on examination it proved
to be a Dinosaur bone, but no more definite identification was possible.
This sandstone was not observed over a wide enough area to assert that
it rests unconformably on the “Laramie,” but the abrupt change in
lithology and the uneven base of the sandstone suggest that it may be
the lowest of the Tertiary formations. The presence in it of a Dinosaur
and its position below the Animas formation, which has usually been
regarded as equivalent in age to the Denver formation, suggests the pos-
sibility that the sandstone may be the time equivalent of the Arapahoe
formation of the Denver Basin. This sandstone does not seem to be
present on Florida River, where Doctor Gardner measured his section,
unless the white sandstone at the top of the “Laramie” of that section,
which is not always present, represents it.
The Cretaceous formations of the Durango region and their age rela-
tions are shown in tabular form below. The member and zone names
. used first in the Rio Puerco field have been added to this table, and also
the Tertiary formation, so that the table expresses the age relations of
all of the fields described in the following pages. With the exception
of the Animas beds, there is no doubt of the Tertiary age of the rocks
above the “Laramie” in the San Juan Basin. In the other fields de-
scribed rocks of similar appearance and composition hold the same strati- —
graphic position, but their Tertiary age has not been proved. A massive
sandstone, probably equivalent to the Pictured Cliffs sandstone member,
was observed near Dulce and at the southern outcrop of the “Laramie”
of the San Juan Basin northwest of Cabezon. The Punta de la Mesa
sandstone member is the base of the Mesaverde in the Rio Puerco field.
A similar sandstone occurs at the base of this formation in all the other
fields described. The Cephalopod zone was first described in the Rio
Puerco field, but was recognized also in the Hagan and Cerrillos fields.
The Concretion (Septaria) zone was described first from the Rio Puerco
field (77) as occurring “sometimes above and sometimes below” the Tres
Hermanos sandstone. It seems to be of doubtful value as a horizon
marker beyond the limits of the Rio Puerco field. The Tres Her-
manos sandstone is typically developed in the Rio Puerco field, but is
readily recognized in the Tijeras, Hagan, and Cerrillos fields, and is
probably represented throughout the San Juan Basin. The Gastropod
zone is best developed in the Rio Puerco field. It is sparingly fossilifer-
ous in the Cerrillos and Hagan fields, and in the Tijeras field is repre-
——— ee lLLClL OU
° end
AGE RELATIONS OF THE CRETACEOUS FORMATIONS 593
sented by limestone concretions from which no fossils have yet been
collected.
Table showing the Age Relations of the Cretaceous Formations of central and
western New Mewico and southwestern Colorado
‘Systems Groups Formations Zones and members
Galisteo of
Cerrillos field
and Tertiary
formations
of
San Juan
Basin
a
Tertiary
‘¢ Laramie ”’
‘*Pictured Cliffs sandstone’’ member
Lewis
shale
Montana .
_Mesaverde
Cretaceous Punta de la Mesa sandstone member*
aq | 7 7 7| Cephalopod
= fephalopod zone
ae
QM
WM
3°
Colorado o—-—- ? ae
x Concretion (Septaria) Zone
_ .
Ay Tres Hermanos sandstone member
----- Gastropod zone
Dakota
sandstone
DAKOTA SANDSTONE
A quartzose sandstone locally conglomeratic occurs at the base of the
Cretaceous series in northern New Mexico. No fossils have been found
* The Punta de la Mesa sandstone at its type locality in the Rio Puerco field is here
placed at the base of the Mesaverde, inasmuch as it is the lowest sandstone of the coal-
bearing formation. However, it seems to be the age equivalent of a part of the Mancos
shale as developed farther north.
594 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
in it, but because of its stratigraphic position and its lithologic character
it is referred to the Dakota. |
The so-called Dakota sandstone east of the Rocky Mountains in Colo-
rado consists of two plates of sandstone separated by a thin shale. This
shale, together with the underlying plate of sandstone, has been proved
to be of Lower Cretaceous age, leaving only the upper plate in the Da-
kota (92 and 121). The writer has observed similar relations as far
south as Las Vegas, New Mexico. However, no rocks of Lower Creta-
ceous age are known to exist west of the mountains unless the Morrison
be of Lower Cretaceous age and the sandstone between the Morrison and
the lowest shale of the Mancos constitutes the Dakota of this paper. This
sandstone was found in all of the coal fields here described, and the few
observations made on it are presented in the section of this paper de-
voted to the presentation of details of the areas examined.
MANCOS SHALE
The Mancos shale of central New Mexico includes the rocks, mainly
shale, above the Dakota sandstone and below the basal sandstone of the
Mesaverde. According to Schrader (100), Gardner (110 and 116), and
others who have traced the Cretaceous formations from the Durango
region eastward and southward through the San Juan River region into
the area described in this paper, this formation is essentially equivalent
to the Mancos of southwest Colorado (75). The present writer exam-
ined it at three localities in the San Juan Basin, namely, at Durango, in
southwest Colorado; at Monero, and at Cabezon, in New Mexico. It is
continuously exposed between Cabezon and the Rio Puerco field, but east
of the Rio Puerco it disappears under a cover of Tertiary and Quater-
nary sand and gravel in the Rio Grande Valley, and nothing is known
there of its occurrence and extent. East of the Rio Grande the surface
is occupied by Paleozoic and older rocks of the Sandia Mountain block,
on the eastern slope of which the Mancos and younger rock formations
reappear, so little changed from their appearance on the Rio Puerco that
even without the aid of fossils it would be difficult to believe that they
were not once continuous between the two fields. But this similarity in
the lithology and stratigraphic succession is confirmed by the fossils con-
tained in them and leaves little room for doubt that the sea in which the
Mancos shale was deposited extended from the San Juan Basin eastward
over the Hagan-Cerrillos region.
When detailed observations are made on the Mancos of central and
western New Mexico it will probably be subdivided into at least three
formations, but for the purposes of this paper it will be preferable to
THE MANCOS SHALE 595
avoid the introduction of new names and to refer to the subdivisions as
zones and members, using the names adopted by Herrick and Johnson
(77) as follows:
The Gastropod zone occurs near the base of the Mancos in a shale for-
mation 35 to 100 feet thick. In the shale are lenses and concretions of
earthy limestone which contain great numbers of fossils in the Rio
Puerco field. This shale is readily recognized in the other coal fields
here described, but the fossils contained in it elsewhere are not so numer-
ous as they are on the Rio Puerco. In the Cerrillos field it contains thin
beds of coal near the base and in the Rio Puerco field carbonaceous shale.
It seems probable that this may be the horizon of some of the so-called
Dakota coal of the southwest.
Above this shale is a series of yellow sandstones about 150 feet thick on
the Rio Puerco and thinner in some of the other fields. It thickens west-
ward and thins toward the east. Herrick and Johnson called it the T'res
Hermanos sandstone, and this name may be used to designate the zone
of yellow sandstone that occurs near the base of the Mancos in all of the
fields described in central New Mexico west of the mountains. It seems
to represent some of the sandstones of Benton age which are coal-bearing
in western New Mexico.
The principal part of the Mancos shale occurs above the Tres Harmanos
sandstone. It is a more or less homogeneous shale 1,200 to 2,000 feet
thick in the Durango region, about 1,000 feet thick in the Rio Puerco
field, and considerably thicker in the fields east of the Rio Grande. It is
not divisible lithologically into Benton, Niobrara, and Pierre, but the fos-
sils contained in it prove that it contains time equivalents of the Benton,
probably the Niobrara, and some of the Pierre. Two zones of fossiliferous
concretions have been described within this shale in the Rio Puerco field,
but it is not known how definitely they can be recognized in other fields
and their value as horizon markers is doubtful. A Concretion (Septaria)
zone occurs in the Rio Puerco field (77) in close association with the Tres
Hermanos sandstone. This zone was recognized by Shimer and Blodgett
(109) in several places between the Rio Puerco field and Cabezon, but
its occurrence east of the Rio Grande is doubtful. A Cephalopod zone
(77) occurs in the Rio Puerco field 600 feet or more stratigraphically
above the Concretion zone. It is characterized by great numbers of
limestone concretions containing cephalopods and other shells. This zone
seems to be fairly persistent throughout the Rio Puerco coal field and to
be recognizable in many places between this field and Cabezon. East
of the Rio Grande a zone of concretions containing the fauna of the
Cephalopod zone occurs about 700 feet above the base of the Mancos
596 W.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
shale and seems to be the time equivalent of the Cephalopod zone of the
Rio Puerco field. The fauna of the Cephalopod zone occurs in some of
the concretions formerly supposed to indicate the Concretion (Septaria)
zone, and there seems to be confusion regarding the latter zone. It is
probable that some of the two invertebrates described from the latter
belong to the Cephalopod zone.
The determination of the place at which the top of the Mancos should
be drawn in the time scale involves some difficult questions. In its type
area in southwestern Colorado this shale includes at its top rocks of
Pierre age (73). The shale below the coal-bearing rocks in the Cerrillos
field seems to have the same range, but in the Rio Puerco region fossils
indicative of Benton age occur near the top of the shale. According to
Mr. Schrader and Doctor Gardner, previously quoted, the Mancos shale
was traced from the Durango region east and south to Cabezon. But as
has formerly been stated, the upper part becomes sandy farther south,
and in the Rio Puerco field is not readily separated from the overlying
Mesaverde.
Kast of the Rio Grande the Mancos shale is much thicker than it is in
the Rio Puerco field. .At Hagan it has a measured thickness of 2,116
feet. A characteristic Benton fauna occurs in the lower 700 feet or
more of this shale, but the upper part contains fossils that range
upward through the Mesaverde. The few fossils found at the top of
the Mancos near Hagan were close to the basal sandstone of the Mesa-
verde, but in the Cerillos field this fauna seems to extend downward
200 feet or more into the shale. In this latter field the Mancos has
a measured thickness of 2,402 feet. The lower part of it is clearly of —
Benton age and some of the rocks are probably of Niobrara age. The
upper part contains a great number of fossils that belong in the fauna
of the Lower Montana. This occurrence of Montana fossils below the
Mesaverde necessitates the reference of the rocks containing them to a
horizon near the base of the Pierre. In order to bring out more clearly
the fact that the Mancos shale on the Rio Puerco is faunally similar to
only the lower part of this shale farther east, the fossils from the lower
part are listed separately from those of the upper part, although all
belong to the same formation.
The fossil invertebrates of the Mancos are included with those of the
Mesaverde and the Lewis in the following table, and their general dis-
tribution is indicated therein. Unfortunately, a great many of the spe-
cies have never been described, and their names as published in the table
are of little value in correlation. However, in a report on the fossils
= Durango Cabezon Rio Puerco Tijeras Hagan Rogers Omera
Ye pee Feet Feet Feet pm Feet, Feet Feet
FT 4307
Po Animas and Wasatch rte 3790
~.. formations 5
he Vertical scale / en 2
$ 6063 ig 0 500 100Feet | P6030). ? ge
Ba SSS He Je a /
3 P 5463 hee ‘a a | 5 ) 2
E - 11090 ay ro he e |<
S |§ 6064 ae ? ay gis
= (Sau = é " 2 |°
2 |p Stba mal - i é |
S 6065 a / 1854 ‘; /
m | & | Pssst see y . |
a ‘ 3 6087 te ees SS aac sane ‘Feet ice
oS Pictured Cliffs sandstone 900°" ---" | $ 7189 793
= CPOE aaa eee T Dy ae FG
<4 hee een 200 P 6034 400+ 468, | S 5
Ss se ) iss
5 pr ecie BAP oe Scat sgl gi ee eRe ee ete Pee OR Re Be Sy ee le ae eee ; \3@
¢ a“ 777 1|§ 3532 S 7180,
es v $ 7190 ee S 7164 | |
by ea ee S 7165 |
” S 7166
. 2 ro 1328 753 3 S 7181
z, 5 1600 am P 6038 Ee Moss
per alae a | | os
H oe S 7186] .-"”
' 4 7
< Pe jaws =
“ Punta-de ‘la Mesa
= Me --~~ sandstone § 3514 2250
e F tS TB 8.3519 1971 wo.
rat a ep eS
a 47 ee eo ae : 1345 .
Es ne: $2195| Cephalopod zone "ten 6 es
> g 423 ae ge al cae eevee ae
gE a a 910+ eo oneal eeeeaa ~~~--1S 3542
as Ke S 3541
8 2 ee 100 miles ~— 35 miles 35 miles 12 miles 10 miles 18 miles
31> 1600+ |
a oy) Coneretion (Septaria) zone | | a
= oe Pe | a a Let, Stem 20 JB NEP
i AOR es | EAI Ss ici Seeeeetenees Coy, OO Knee SOR me fT
S 7189 = Fossil shells in U. S. G. S. collections
P 6034 = Fossil plants in U. S. G. S. collections
Ficur® 2.—Oorrelation of Formations in New Mewzico Coal Fields
a a. Li Mn ae — eee ee ee Oe ee, ee Oe eee a es = 8 —— . a -
598 Ww. TT. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL‘FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
collected by the writer, T. W. Stanton makes the following statement,
covering both the Mancos and the Mesaverde fauna:
“The distribution of the faunas agrees with the field determination that the
coal-bearing rocks of the Cerrillos, Hagan, Tijeras, and Rio Puerco fields
[also those of the Cabezon region] all belong to one formation. In the Tijeras
and Rio Puerco fields the marine fauna associated with the coal occurs in
rocks overlying part of the coal beds as well as immediately beneath them [as
described by Mr. Lee, who collected the fossils]. This fauna is closely related
to the Cretaceous faunas of the Gulf and Atlantic borders and is especially
related to the fauna which occurs a short distance beneath the coal at San
Carlos near the Rio Grande in western Texas. It apparently does not extend
far northward, the most northern point at which it has been found being in
the neighborhood of Cabezon. It is, of course, true that there are some similar
and perhaps a few identical species in the Montana group faunas of Colorado
and more northern areas, but the general association of forms and most of the
species are entirely different. Its horizon is that of the lower part of the
Montana group not far above the horizon of the Austin and the Niobrara, and
hence apparently somewhat lower than the upper part of the Mancos as devel-
oped in southwestern Colorado. -It is my judgment, therefore, that the base of
the coal-bearing rocks in the central New Mexican fields mentioned is lower,
perhaps by several hundred feet, than the base of the Mesaverde in the neigh-
borhood of Durango, Colorado. It is worthy of note that Mr. Lee’s collections
show a good development of the Benton fauna in the beds underlying those
containing the fauna associated with the coal, and this Benton fauna is, with
some additions, essentially the same that occurs in the lower 400 feet of the
Mancos shale in its type area, and also in the Benton east of the mountains in
Colorado.”
MESAVERDE FORMATION
The Mesaverde consists principally of sandstone, shale, and coal. It is
423 feet thick near Durango, Colorado, and about the same at Monero,
New Mexico, but is very much thicker farther south. Most of the sand-
stone is yellow and occurs in beds, some of which are massive and thick,
alternating with shale. In some places the sandstone is more or less
lenticular and contains irregular masses of impure limestone with great
numbers of marine invertebrates. Some of the shale also contains marine
fossils. These rocks of marine origin alternate with those containing
beds of coal and fossil plants.
Fossils were collected from the Mesaverde at many localities. Those
collected where the sections were measured are denoted by the lot
numbers, which identify them in the collections of the United States
Geological Survey, and the same numbers are placed in the generalized
sections, figure 2, to mark the horizons from which they came. The
localities where they were collected are also indicated by the same num-
bers on the accompanying map. Those collected at a distance from the
DISTRIBUTION! OF CRETACEOUS INVERTEBRATES 599
T able of 1 Distribution of Cretaceous Invertebrates from southern Colorado and
northern New Mezico
Identified by T. W. Stanton
ao)
Mancos ez
Mo)
Mesaverde 2 12's
Be} Ete
Lower Upper 2 ae
3
8 z
3 yu =| o
a > mq w | 2 =
peo Sg p> a ee a Co a ee
SIM IASO;/MIO/ASO/HM Ll Alia
Pata Shoe Gri shone 9 | LOn bine
Actwon intercalaris Meek..........|... Se aie oe fede cc. cile BP INS, L Aa hers Stake Se
Actwon sp. (several undescribed
0 ee ee SSA oe Ot eee ? So ee ee
PRCGHEMOCETOS 2 SP... occ cn cee es cee Wey eRe SB pw hl owcelt ai rite Sak Fa ee
ee eee ee DEETA loom ~ faces x Ses ee ee
mncnire 7; ustjormis White non Meek.| X |...|...).0-|s.efocclere|eeclecel(oeeles lee
Anchura newberryi Meek..........|... Rat Pein Moker oP RICE [Ate MOST ea ltewceidin « SileeRE TIA
Anchura sp. (several species)...... MR See to crane De Fie Mites lhenomel 8 ov fe ths ee
Ancyloceras Sp~..... bh were ota Net aa aK
Anisomyon patclliformis M. reese oars DEES Fe we Tse
TS) (a Fe an t Fan
Ser St eR ean x pa ee Be > a a to dae
_ .. 2) + 26 SS ae ee x ? er? ee a en x
Rs een mks 2s ie tees] en a [eitieWelaleae RADE wit pa, + A ka el
Avicula gastrodes Meek........... aN el eet MOS a ae WER | See Pca
Avicula linguiformis B. & S.......|---|---|e-- 7 SY lee (ee er eeed eee ae Ba sr
renee ch er ee Paige see Pelee Meaerma| oes on | See Ea x
Baculites anceps var. obtusus Meek|..-|...|.-- secliae ef af K | K fone x abe
meer MIGFLOH.:) .. cc - fl cndew tlie isi a, nae Uy. <4 CS erat cae Sree) Oe
STE SSIES SAY oe trop aie hses oo I> @ o|'eqehe «steer PREY eiintesa tia.’ <
ee gracilis Shumard......... ih Spey irene ame eae, | WG Tae Piety a poe 2) |e (a
"i BREE OEY 5 wich Ss ease: u've ate «(oe 2 ee eed ees eed eed oo oe x | X
ee oo see als REP Ee 1 eee ph ten Be oP ne a ne ne ey oa ga
Sommer aciveyt, Mi & He. oc. cle [eee |ee foeeleeedees x vee Sata lbei=
PENIUCUIN «oe oe. cou re ok ow cle ee = + [ound ee a [eauews MK ]eselees sales
Camptonectes symmetrica Herrick
SE ee ee x ey Meee To eieery eae
Cardium bellulum Meek........... A) PP io eB la yon YOR (Se Ss a 8 ier ene
Beer OT ie A ok is Loe alo cs (owicla s cheon > Se a et ya eae
be sp. (several specieés)....... Ks | omstsee| (ORS) PG te Ra te. LON bso atmos
2) SE ee erened (aed Fae Pema PRN es ze pee oh eT ied eae
SCE | ee ee a a fee lee ces aay ape Miche ee
Se x hes an. re
Coilopoceras colleti Hyatt Ree es Lenid RO | Pe a ae x chi «Oe Soir yt Panta
EM yin ho Weel. Poche bon Racked. x Khe
TE oo ise nic oo b'O% bnw' eda a et x me) ONS ee as Ay ee
Cr assatellites cimarronensis White..|...|... ee es a Ay FP. x
Shumardi Meek.. ae UD Sa P aa 6 'a L Aere pe ae) Pe
~ Rho ahah fr ets 5a GPs nat ow ditto: x ? EE as hae ie fat
Cucullea asian Vwi OS site! ine « Melita hin a bei sie [Seely x x PRE Leathe ae LW Neale bes » x
UMTUNETIW SP... ..ccccecccccceccte pa ee eee x “ Se ROS Pe foie: ‘
Ee en Rey rece ree On) onl Mr Le er see Ran Time boiaclace a heae
Exogyra columbella Meek.......... eS AE Ahad ote ON hateraban ttm 7 ‘
~ ponderosa Roemer. ......0d..slecelecclecs GL OO Sec alomeie ds! octets
600 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
Table of Distribution of Cretaceous Invertebrates—Continued
Mancos Fe
Mesaverde Zz 2=
, Lower Upper 8 ae
|] |
3
s 6
S e S 8
a/e1ole|s |-2) 84 aie
Z2\S/4/Sl/8/Sl/AlSl|e)e/4le
1 21314151617 | 8 | Sasa
EGOGYTA SP... 2.022 e ees eececccces Spay er nee * } och. fc)
Fasciolaria (Piestochilus) sp....... el ee ee ee eee ee
PASCIGIASTE SD Sis acy Sane ot hee Cape Net) itieat, 8 eee 7 fT...
Wish: Seales... Ola cocci te nee oie cee Ros hee: Sete 9% a ear
Nish ‘vertebme so. 7... Sst << oes ee De OM, FOE Bale (st ee ff _ ye eee
PUSUS (SE. Sete ee ae eee ao a PRR Beta: Pree! ie 4 he 1. cig re ae
GErvithopSs 2 SD.2 55 en Sc Se eee OG ese nie we BP tec
Gryphea newberryi Stanton........ a ea ae oe x :
GYTORES (BB. y mare oes a a
“¢ trinervis Kn : sPactaasie tee eee eee . Te Be
CRETE | Tol Roy Roms CNG < Shu SMa pee iy) 0! Sauk te Saad eee
ANGUAGE SP 0:3 ccece 0/0 kia ree eee oes eels a Se eee eee
Syncycionemea rigida I. & Me coos ook csi aoe oe eee ee oe
ce SDiis e's eas s bia cuseeate beac A EE bee ete eee eee
x
be oblongus: Meek 2.0). cast ets oon ee eee
M OGAOUG SP Fe ye iots fase Watatcs eRe ew tole eee Rie ge nae ae eee
Cardi: speciosa: Moi Hee nie Bia akc aide ais ee eee
Pinna Tahest, WHI tiie oneness cals orecin bee Seas he eee ee eee
Trigonarca (Breviarca) epigua M: & Hi... i ee sec cece ene
Lucinga occitentanhs: CMorton) occ. 2ece s cece caweee sn cena ee
Thetis cireutaris Me & Boe Pees bo ae ee ee ee
PYTATUSUCMSDE Soak Hea lek 0 Cae REE Ee wae Ge ee eee eee
PCARRD ic he Sova es bth Kin Rib nial sos epahauelee Ss ape Se Geen ae ee
RE GCUIOT SD e ip aicea SO Ce wae eters So ee ee ee ee
LAOpistha Undale Ma Rec. 5. .0asie xt ek sk ae me se oleic ele ere
EMT IST 6 in x Se Ses es las SS ee ee ak nla CE Re eee
ae tee Rk
Te PR eR DS
x xX XK XK X
2S. Pa OPER. oh
ACTED: Sao stye bik stave les eee ne es Sieea oe ede ene Sl cen Oebecere
ELTON CEGED stn San Belcan a la sion castes ee Aa Roane aoe eee ee
BOCuUIIeS OVUGTES SAV Oe es cee ews eh Aes Oe eee hn ee 2 ee
ss COULPFESSUS: Says o2 Oe aletare’e <,Macd ele che ahers were levi siarkietens
xxxXxxXxxXxXxxXxXXXX
sé macercaiare.. Mo>& Hoss e.ks io ets oe ee eee
Eigh) “SCHIES oy nee ee a oh aw ako he When oe oc tae ate ciel ee
There is above the Lewis shale a series of rocks not less than 1,000
feet thick, somewhat shaly in the lower part, where a thin bed of coal
occurs, but consisting principally of massive sandstone more or less con-
glomeratic throughout. Apparently some of the older geologists referred
this whole series to the Laramie. Others referred some of it to the Lara-
mie and some to the Tertiary. Schrader (100) described the lower or
coal-bearing portion as “Laramie,” and proved, by tracing the beds, that
it is identical with the “Laramie” of the Durango region. The following
DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS: MONERO AND DULCE 617
fossil plants were found by the present writer a few feet above the coal
both north and south of the railroad near Dulce:
Fossil Plants collected from the “Laramie” near Dulce, New Mexico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 6042)
(Those marked (*) occur also in the “Laramie” near Durango, Colorado)
*Brachyphyllum macrocarpum Newb.
*Sequoia reichenbachi (Gein.) Heer
Cunninghamites sp.?
*Geimitzia formosa Heer.
Palm (same as species at Point of Rocks)
Ficus planicostata ? Lesq. (Same as species at Point of Rocks)
*Ficus n. sp. (8-nerved)
*Ficus lanceolata Heer
Zizyphus n. sp.
~The flora is essentially the same as that described from the “Laramie”
of the Durango section, and confirms the statement that the beds are of
the same age. It also strengthens Doctor Knowlton’s opinion, previously
quoted, that the beds may be older than Laramie, inasmuch as two of the
species are found at Point of Rocks, Wyoming, in a formation regarded
as older than Laramie, and others are found in the Mesaverde at the
localities farther south, described in this paper. In commenting on these
plants, Knowlton says: “Their age is essentially Montana and not Lara-
mie. If uninfluenced by their apparent stratigraphic position, I should
incline to place them in the Mesaverde, but since they are above Lewis
they obviously can not be Mesaverde, though they can be—and in my
opinion are—still Montana.”
The writer found no invertebrates in the “Laramie” near Dulce, but
J. H. Gardner collected some from this formation near Pagosa Junction,
about 15 miles northwest of Dulce. They are as follows:
Fossils collected in southeast One-quarter, Section 19, Township 34 North,
Range 4 West, near Pagosa Junction, Colorado, 5 feet above
Laramie (?) Coal Number 1
Ostrea subtrigonalis EB. & SS. Corbicula cytheriformis M. & H.
Anomia sp. cf. A. micronema Meek Corbula undifera Meek
The rocks above the Lewis shale in the Dulce area, referable to the
Cretaceous, are only about 225 feet thick, including the basal sandstone,
which is 60 feet thick. A section of them and of the rocks underlying
them was measured in the steep canyon wall about a mile northwest of
Dulce. At this locality a conglomerate that varies greatly in thickness
618 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
and character within short distances rests unconformably on the coal-
bearing rocks. For about 75 feet above this basal conglomerate the rock
is variable in lithologic character and consists of friable, granular sand-
stone and shale, irregularly intermingled, and in it are many lenses and
irregular masses of conglomerate. The whole mass is dark colored and
gives the impression of being the erosional product of a mass of dark-
colored igneous rock. The suggestion is offered that this formation may
represent the Animas formation of the Durango region, although its
stratigraphic position would tend to make it somewhat older than the
Animas.
Section of Rocks measured about one Mile Northwest of Dulce, New Mexico
Feet
Sandstone, conglomeratic, Drown: . ..<.205.6 52.4 eek sk ae 2 80+
Sandstone, slightly shaly, with greenish tint at base; massive, yellow
ADOVE] |S ab oS Rhare ares GE eas ale wiv S 21d apa Se eas Wee ee 44
Shale -and ‘sandstone, yellow vc We ssc wes ba eete te 2 oe eee 121
Sandstone, shaly; greenish. voc 00... Ss awe cee ces cece eee eee 6
Conglomerate with pebbles, principally of chert, up to one-half inch
MN GIAMELCT ois es haw 0 es che ee eta oe Siete ereie eee ete ereioin ic Rlete tee 12°
Sandstone, shaky, (gray... O06 0 Sake see ee Le ee ee at
Conglomerate with chert pebbles up to three-quarters inch in diameter 28
Shale; Sandy, ¥ellow o.%jo.55 wile eres eetereteye Seale ele a 8
Sandstone; WHC. eck arelcrare wl cise ook ec ae aete sree eee ee 3
Shale, sandy, yellow . 2. 0.0% ss'Gai ees. 5 6 8 we ws o's Re oats 6 er anaes Oe 10
Conglomerate with chert pebbles up to three-quarters inch in diameter 38
Shale, sandy, Fellow oo73 az oe Pek, wie FS meen who S eww fetatin he wee eae 18
Sandstone, massive, coarse-grained, yellow..............ccccecnccce ‘ 66
Shaie, ‘sandy, dark-colored: «is cclhc s dae nists Sas Rise weed i oR yAl
Sandstone; friable; dark-colored: i020)... 0.22%. wa.s% as seu ae 46
Sandstone, coarse-grained, conglomeratic, with pebbles mostly of chert
up to ar inéh or more in’diameter......52.....4 Je. e. » ss ee 6
(Unconformity by erosion. )
Shale, sandy, carbonaceous; contains fossil leaves (U. S. G. S. locality
INO. GO42) ee Os Scan 2S nck 2 Oe Des rege oe ACA 83
Coal, ‘coke; and. intruded igneous rock... o/c. sts 2s 2s bee Se 8
Sandstone, coarse-erained, light-colored... 02... .2.:.. 0626 e.se toe eee 66
Shale, ‘SAREY os sotieels oo Se hte ee Fe eae oe 8
Sandstone, massive, light-colored. ... 2. 5.0 vases «= is cu oe wien ee 60
Shale (Lewis), fossiliferous (U. S. G. S. locality Nos. 7200 and 7201). 300+
The writer found no fossils in rocks above the unconformity, but other
geologists seem to have been more fortunate. J. H. Gardner, who is
familiar with this region, has, at the writer’s request, furnished the fol-
lowing information in a letter dated December 26, 1911:
DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS: CABEZON 619
“T have carried a reconnaissance survey around the north side of the San
Juan Basin and have done the détails of the Ignacio folio which lies to the
west but on the rim of the same basin. There is no doubt in my mind, based
on reconnaissance mapping and lithological similarity, that the beds to which
you refer (those above the unconformity) are Animas. . . . The heavy
conglomerate beds at the base of the Animas are in the form of a lentil which
thins out away from the Animas Valley. The beds above this consist of tan-
colored and greenish shale alternating with coarse-grained, tan-colored sand-
stone containing grains of igneous origin. . . . The beds which are intruded
with sills along the canyon and cross-cut by dikes (the upper 461 feet of the
foregoing section) are of the same nature and apparently connect with the
upper beds of the Animas. They are older than the Puerco and Torrejon,
and contain remains of Triceratops.”
CABEZON
The writer made few observations between Dulce and Cabezon, a dis-
tance of about 90 miles. Doctor Gardner (116) correlated the rock for-
mations exposed near Cabezon with those of the Durango region and gave
them the same names, namely, Mancos, Mesaverde, Lewis, and “Lara-
mie.” ‘The correlation is based on the work of tracing the outcrops of
these formations around the San Juan Basin from their type locality in
southwest Colorado. ‘They are described as more or less continuously
exposed on the west and south sides of the basin, but for a short distance
west of Nacimienta Mountains they are covered by overlapping Tertiary
rocks. However, in spite of the great length of outcrop around the basin
to the west and the area of obscured outcrops on the east side, Doctor
Gardner seems to have felt confident that the formations near Cabezon
are to be correlated directly with those of the Durango section. He col-
lected fossils from both the Lewis shale and the Mesaverde formations.
They are among the United States Geological Survey collections and
have been identified by T. W. Stanton. Two collections were obtained
from the Lewis as follows:
Invertebrates collected by J. H. Gardner from about 100 Feet below the Top of
the Lewis Shale about 6 Miles Southeast of Raton Spring, New Mezico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 4455)
Ostrea sp. Liopistha undata M. & H.
Cardium speciosum M. & H. Lunatia sp.
Legumen sp. Melania? sp.
Invertebrates collected from the Lewis Shale by J. H. Gardner two and one-
half Miles Southeast of Cuba, New Mexico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 4452)
Inoceramus barabini Morton Placenticeras intercalare M. & H.
Baculites compressus Say
XLIV—BULL. Grou, Soc. AM., Vou. 23, 1911
620 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
His Mesaverde fossils, collected near Cuba, are as follows:
Invertebrates collected'near the Base of the Mesaverde Formation, three-
quarters of a Mile North of Copper City, New Mexico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 4453)
Nucula sp. Volutoderma sp.
Cucullea sp. Acteon sp.
Arca sp. Baculites anceps var. obtusus Meek
Cardium sp. Placenticeras intercalare M. & H.
Cyprimeria? sp. Placenticeras sp.
Liopistha undata M. & H. Heliococeras sp.
Mactra sp. Scaphites sp. related to S. larveformis
Gyrodes sp. M. & H.
Pyrifusus? sp.
While in the field the present writer assumed that the Mesaverde age
of the coal measures near Cabezon was established, and bis purpose in
visiting this locality was to collect fossils from the Mesaverde for the
purpose of correlating with it the coal-bearing rocks which in the fields |
farther east contain similar fossils. A large number of petrified logs and ~
stumps of trees were found in the lower part of the Mesaverde north of
Cabezon, and leaf impressions occur in the same beds, but most of these
were too poorly preserved for identification. However, beautifully pre-
served leaves were found in a thin layer of fine-grained sandstone about
400 feet above the lowest bed of coal. The locality is about 5 miles
northwest of Cabezon, in a steep bluff half a mile north of a small arti-
ficial lake. The species collected are as follows:
Fossil Plants collected from the Mesaverde Formation, North 43 Degrees West
from Cabezon Butte
(United States Geological Survey locality number 6038)
Ficus speciosissima Ward
Ficus n. sp. (8-nerved)
Dryopteris Dp. sp. (Same species found in lower group of coal
beds at Canyon City, Colorado)
Dyospyros sp.
Ficus 0. sp.
Myrica sp.
Eucalyptus sp.
Dombeyopsis? sp.
Two or three undescribed dicotyledons
Fragments of palm leaves were found 50 to 100 feet above the bed
yielding these plants, but no fragment was found with the parts necessary
for the identification of species. Still higher in the formation, at the
\
DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS: CABEZON 621
east end of Chacra Mesa, several conifers of the species Abietites dubius
Lesq. were found.
Two small collections of shells were made from the Mancos shale near
Cabezon. One was obtained from the sandy layers at the top of the for-
mation in the transitional zone between the Mancos and the basal sand-
stone of the Mesaverde. They were found at the point where the wagon
road leading northwestward from Cabezon crosses the top of the Mancos
shale. They are as follows:
Fossils from the Top of the Mancos Shale, Northwest of Cabezon
(United States Geological Survey locality number 7194)
Ostrea elegantula Newberry ? Mactra sp., related to M. formosa M.
Anomia sp. & H.
Pinna sp. Corbula sp.
Cardium sp. Gyrodes sp.
Cyprimeria sp. Act@won sp.
Tellina sp. Placenticeras sancarlosense Hyatt
Liopistha undata M. & H.?
The second collection was obtained from the low hill back of the town:
of Cabezon at a horizon several hundred feet below the top of the Mancos
shale. The rocks containing them are somewhat sandy, and this fact may
serve to explain the resemblance of the fauna to that yielded by the sand-
stones of the Mesaverde. The fossils are as follows:
Fossil Shells collected at Cabezon, New Mexico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 7195)
Exzogyra@ sp. Gyrodes sp.
Anomia sp. Volutomorpha sp.
Avicula linguiformis BE. & §S. Volutoderma ? sp.
Inoceramus barabini Morton? Liopeplum sp.
Mytilus sp. Pyrifusus ? sp.
Cucullea sp. Placenticeras sancarlosense Hyatt?
Crassatellites ? sp. Stantonoceras pseudocostatum Johnson?
Cyprimeria sp. Lamna sp. (shark’s teeth)
From a study of fossils collected from the Mancos, in the vicinity of
Cabezon, Shimer and Blodgett (109, page 58) arrived at the conclusion
that the shale was of Benton age. They found many Benton species asso-
ciated with a few which they regarded as belonging to the Pierre fauna.
However, the exact horizons of their collections are not known to the
present writer, and it is possible that they may be somewhat lower than
the horizons at which the fossils named above were found. In the light
of the more recent investigations, Doctor Stanton is of the opinion that
622 w.tT. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
these fossils belong to the fauna occurring in the coal measures in the
Rio Puerco field, which in turn are referred by him to the lower part of
the Montana.
Shimer and Blodgett describe the Mancos shale from several localities
between Cabezon and the Rio Puerco field. They report a characteristic
Benton fauna from low in the shale corresponding to the Concretion
(Septaria) zone of Herrick and Johnson, and a separate fauna from
higher in this shale supposed to correspond in general with the Caphalo-
pod zone of Herrick and Johnson. ‘The upper zone of these writers con-
tains a large number of Benton species, together with a few which they
regard as characteristic of the Pierre (see 109). Their work serves to
connect the formations observed near Cabezon with those of the Rio
Puerco field, for although the Mesaverde is not continuous between the
two fields the Mancos is continuous and the overlying Mesaverde occurs
in Prieta Mesa and probably also at Cabezon Butte, so that there are only
three short breaks in its continuity between the large area occupied by
this formation in the San Juan Basin and the smaller area in Rio Puerco
field.
RIO PUERCO FIELD
Aside from brief references in the accounts of early explorations to the
occurrence of coal, the first geologic information of the Rio Puerco coal
field was given by Herrick and Johnson (77). The various zones de-
scribed by them and the fossils contained in each zone are named in the
notes of the annotated list of publications (77) in the latter part of this
paper. These zones were found convenient for use by the present writer
and are here used in a quotational way.
The Cretaceous rocks of this field dip toward the east, the degree of
dip varying greatly from place to place, and disappear under a cover of
Tertiary and Quaternary rocks in the Rio Grande Valley. A section
showing the main features of the Cretaceous rocks below the Mesaverde
was measured near San Francisco. The line along which the measure-
ments were made extends across the gently dipping rocks from the Da-
kota (?) outcrop northwest of San Francisco to Punta de la Mesa farther
to the south. ‘The fossils collected from the several horizons are named
in the section:
Section of Rocks measured in the Rio Puerco Coal Field near San Francisco,
New Mevzico
Feet
Sandstone, massive, yellow (Punta de la Mesa sandstone or base of
MeS&VETUE) |. s'nis vos koe 6 ws nem e alek's & Guin nadine aie oe ee ee eee 77
Shale, sandy-8t top. co io ss os ke wee we cee he esl cetera eae 240+
Limestone, shaly, containing Ostrea lugubris Conrad and Coilopoceras
colleti Hyatt (U. S. G. S. locality No. 533) 5) eee 10+
DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS: RIO PUERCO FIELD 623
Feet
ee a a OS ene ere Ruarals oine are\c wue'e Weamiewe Sens oe kod 50
Shale with limestone concretions (Cephalopod zone) containing Pinna
petrina White?; Pecten sp.; Trigonarca sp.; Isocardia sp.; Veniella ?
sp.; Cardium sp.; Turritella sp.; Volutoderma sp.; undetermined
gastropods; Metoicoceras sp. related to M. swallovi (Shumard) ;
meroscoceras sp. (U.S. G. S. locality No: 3520) 2.0... cee ccc ween’ 10+
Shale. In the lower part were found Ostrea sp.; Avicula gastrodes
Meek; Pinna petrina White; Veniella sp.; Pholadomya sp.; Twrri-
tella sp. related to 7’. whitei Stanton; Metoicoceras sp. (U. S. G. S.
locality No. 7191). The fossils were collected at some distance from
the line of measurement of the section and may possibly belong to
RITES (ANI S oC Scie dea ew ea nl be we die ws wd Reldie aleve owe eon 600+
Sandstone, shaly, with impure limestone in lenses and concretions.
(This sandstone and the limestone concretions above and below it
seem to constitute the Concretion (Septaria) zone of Herrick and
Johnson.) It contains Ostrea sp.; Hxogyra columbella Meek;
Anomia sp.; Avicula gastrodes Meek; Cardium sp.; Legumen sp. ;
Pecten sp.; Pinna petrina White; Isocardia sp.; Liopistha (Psilo-
mya) sp.; Anchura sp.; Prionotropis sp.; Acanthoceras ? sp. (U. S.
ate INOS. (192 ANG Sib) «5 cane cece cence e eee eucmecannes 50
Shale alternating with layers of yellow sandstone.................. 78
Shale, carbonaceous, dark-colored; has general aspect of the shale
associated with the coal beds of the Mesaverde in this field...... 2
Sandstone, coarse-grained above, shaly below; weathers to irregular,
rounded masses; contains Halymenites similar to H. major Lesq.,
worm borings, and a variety of indefinite markings.............. 25
Shale, dark-colored (Gastropod zone), containing Ostrea sp.; Exogyra
columbella Meek; Camptonectes symmetrica Herrick and Johnson;
Plicatula sp.; Gervilliopsis ? sp.; Pinna petrina White; Pinna sp.;
Liopistha (Psilomya) sp.; Arca sp.; Trigonarca sp.; Cardium sp.;
Lucina sp.; Turritella sp.; Anchura fusiformis White non Meek;
Anchura sp.; Cinulia ? sp.; Serpula sp. (U. 8. G. S. locality Nos.
RE SITE SUPER Po eo Sn ig cea 0 oda we Walco ue sla nb wees eue 35
Sandstone, soft, friable; contains small pebbles, principally of quartz
TERR ne See laa ate oi ele. Sina asa 2 Sieck ow alk Stee e's an viele ale 5
Me RYU a's onc s wie ant aoe cu ea awe ats Caldne éwadin eet wae aa eee s 8
(Abrupt change in lithology.)
Sandstone, coarse-grained, gray to pink; varies greatly from place to
place in thickness, composition, and color. This sandstone has the
stratigraphic position of the Dakota, but its color and variable char-
re NEP COIVe. OF MGETIOON. clic sh adn sc ca cece seas nvanes wewes 100
Sandstone and shale, variegated (Morrison).
1,290
Two collections of fossils were made east of the Rio Puerco about 3
miles north of San Francisco. The first is from a zone of limestone con-
cretions that seems to occupy a horizon about 50 feet above the top of the
624 w.T. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
Tres Hermanos sandstone. The following species were collected at this
locality :
Fossil Shells collected East of the Rio Puerco, about 3 Miles North of San
Francisco, New Mezico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 7204)
Ostrea sp. Turritella sp.
Pinna petrina White Prionotropis sp.
Cardium sp. Metoicoceras sp.
Lunatia sp. Coilopoceras colleti Hyatt
The second collection is from an exposure about half a mile east of the
first and estimated to be stratigraphically higher by about 100 feet. The
strata here dip very slightly to the east and the rocks are covered with
soil in most places. The shells collected at the higher horizon are as
follows:
Shells collected East of the Rio Puerco, about 3 Miles North of San Francisco,
New Mexico
(United States Geological Survey locality number 7193)
Ostrea lugubris Conrad Baculites gracilis Shumard?
Anomia sp. Prionocyelus wyomingensis Meek
Inoceramus fragilis H. & M. Scaphites warreni M. & H.
Anchura sp. Ptychodus sp. (fish teeth)
Anisomyon ? sp.
These fossils seem to indicate horizons several hundred feet above the
base of the Mancos, namely, near the Caphalopod zone, whereas their
apparent position as observed in the field is near the base of the Mancos
about 500 feet below the Caphalopod zone. It is possible that the rocks
have been faulted, so that the position of this zone in the section is de-
ceptive, but no indication of faults with displacement of more than 25
feet was noted near these localities. |
More detailed investigation of the Mancos from Rio Puerco westward
is necessary before its subdivisions and their relations to each other and
to neighboring formations are properly understood. The rocks dip at
low angles and broad grassy valleys occur at the outcrops of the shale.
The rocks are faulted and warped in some parts of this field, and it is
difficult to find a place where there is no liability of error in measuring
the shale in these broad valleys. Furthermore, the fauna is not so well
known that the vertical range of all the species can be confidently given.
A section measured by Darton (114, page 60) near Laguna, at the
southwestern extremity of the area shown on the accompanying map, is
DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS: RIO PUERCO FIELD 625
given. The fossils seen indicate a position near the base of the Mancos
about the horizon of the Tres Hermanos sandstone, and yet they occur
above a body of shale much thicker than any reported elsewhere below
this sandstone.
Section of Part of Cretaceous Rocks 2 Miles Northeast of Laguna, New Mezico
Measured by N. H. Darton
Feet
SOE Satan's: «a's Se iided i, denial worn e a Cite Meee ki le iw aie, a) @oese ai Stata ett We Shetae 2%
0 su His ad GEC ieee o eid sie aim.d bite, Wh he, abel 25
oe eave calc saie ald also « diaks nies cnare GER Ste ONE'S bn'au Win’ aim misread, a0) 4 Alea an 60
ssanastone, buff, massive, moderately soft.........-.ccccccscesceccess 40
Shale with sandstone layers, very fossiliferous; contains Hxogyra colum-
bella Meek ; Gryphea'sp.; probably a variety of G. newberryi; Avicula
gastrodes Meek?; Cardium sp.; Panopea sp.; Turritella sp.; Rostel-
eM IsrOUeT INGE Sp.; ANG: FUSUS SP «swe 'w wis 6 sisperse ons ak on Fe mean wawsine fs
nernacnive:. Nard, LONG, DUG yo. 5 sae s.s.ie o.6 0100.00 oieh wind’ 'ns 50 0 /q > 40
Shale, dark gray to gray-green, sandy layers fossiliferous; contains
Ezxogyra columbella Meek; Pecten sp.; Pinna petrina White; Inoce-
ramus ? sp.; Leda sp.; Cardium sp.; Lucina? sp.; Isocardia n. sp.;
Cyprimeria? sp.; Corbula sp.; Liopistha (Psilomya) concentrica Stan-
ton; Turritella whitei Stanton; Tritonium Kanabense Stanton; Actwon
Poems Sp.; Turrilites? sp., or Heterocerads Sp......cccaacascsees 60
EE PTET ST CET BRESEDV 5 oe oa ec le a ave wip aie ais 6, a0, she ac a 'e.eie bin eRe tee ee 5
Sandstone, white, massive, part coarse................ SSE ES, ear aes 80
Shale, greenish gray, sandy above......... pA AS Ci 9, panel ears Ai 235
rat E BUEL, TWASSIVG oo cia. caw ace ce cm ese eadnedeees mae Ss ad what 2 40
Ee oa ins 1G /s tan eee u thé aie aia'<'u sa wjeraye whace’« ¢ eve CoN uheas «6 30
eae ei OL, CFeLICCOUS) . oe ice ce ca vac ewes cee vevecsetess
oh) ee a Pe etd date Hebe a trek o we dine: 4 sina wa's Fie ata tiie: « 490
No place was found where a complete detailed section of the Mesaverde
formation of the Rio Puerco field could be measured. The beds are well
exposed in only a few places, and where they are exposed some of them
are warped to such an extent that it is difficult to trace individual beds
for any considerable distance, and others are faulted so that certain beds
are duplicated; also, some of the upper part of the formation seems to
have been removed by erosion previous to the deposition of the overlying
Tertiary rocks, inasmuch as the lowest bed observed in the Tertiary is a
conglomerate. A generalized section was measured east of the Rio
Puerco, about 3 miles north of San Ygnacio, where many fossils were
collected. A section of the upper part of the coal-bearing rocks was
measured in detail about a mile farther north by L. C. Chapman, who
was assisting the writer in doing the field work. This has been incor-
porated in the general section below. Where the section was measured,
626 w.T,. LEE—STRATIGRAPHY OF COAL FIELDS OF NEW MEXICO
faulting has occurred in a way that renders the relation of the Mesaverde
to the Tertiary open to question; but near the northern end of the Rio
Puerco field an exposure was found of rocks undisturbed by faulting
where the basal conglomerate of the Tertiary with pebbles of quartzite
up to 6 inches in diameter rests on the Mesaverde.
Section of Mesaverde Rocks measured near San Ygnacio, New Mexico
Feet Inches
Sandstone, locally conglomeratic, and shale (Tertiary) poorly
consolidated, vari-colored, with reds predominating below and
milder shades above (many hundreds of feet).................
Probable unconformity...... PDN ne mci Sg BBs 5
Shale with thin beds of coal; absent in some places.............. 0-10
Sandstone, massive, yellow, calcareous, and shaly in some places;
contains Ostrea sp., Anomia sp., Inoceramus sp. (thick-shelled) ;
Cucullea sp.; Cardium sp. (large form) ; Cardiwm sp. (slender
form) ; Tellina sp.; Cyprimeria sp.; Liopistha undata M. & H.?;
Corbula sp.; Mactra sp., related to M. formosa M. & H.; Mactra
sp. (large form) ; Dentalium sp.; Gyrodes sp.; Physa ? sp.; Volu-
tomorpha novimexicana Herrick & Johnson; Pyropsis sp.; Ac-
twon ?sp.; Scapnites sp., related to S. nodosus Owen; Placen-
ticeras sancarlosense Hyatt?; Placenticeras planum Hyatt? (U.
S:.-G.7S. locality ING TISO ee sean ek cuca erage cre ete ae a ee 300+
Shale, sandy, containing Brachyphyllum ? sp.; Ficus n. sp. (3-
nerved type) ; Salix ? sp.; Ficus ? sp. (large leaf) (U. S. G. S.
locality No; GOSE)s oe 8 SoS Sa Sos Sete Oe eee 9
Shale; carbonaceous £007 S ie ic reise tae ee Bie en Skee Oe ee AE ‘
Coal tea. o Oia Bh TESS Bee lee ee Ge eon ween beats at ee af 1
Shale; carbonaceouse soc he eae en le oe da win era OI Ce ee 7
Sandstomes sete £924 See See re inien I ss eee Oe ee ee 8 -
Shale, CarbOnaceOus oe Vine oe we es ee ks Sikes Oe ee ee eee 2 6
COA so can ts Ses ae nol eee AUS eo Riclo Me oa bs Bun oua'e wel « Ooe eRe ie fe ¥ ¢
Shale; “CarbOnacéoussek ores oe hee: oe oo obs eee ores ee oe 3 6
SanGSt@nes tars ta hele see eka See sw EES els od sie ate tye aie ate See ris
COa] m ihe Rice Races sie tis iat bac wares Sie dele'k eos Ree ee oh a
Shale, -CaRDOMACCOUS ss sae ahs Cae « od 2% Asie SRM eb ele ee ee 7 ie
GOAT is. spaneie eine toll ate ale aalls ie WPS 69s 40 Swe Sie elle sae Ne a 6
Shale, CAFDOMACEOUS As os sche s coke ware & alee ecwie’ 4 ote elm che GER OR eee 10 a
Coal ereakts et ele ec oc we en bc be ree eee oe he eee * 2
Shale, -Carbonaceousei ns cms OWok bes bala tly ic 6. J ee 2 6
SANGSEODE 125 chee yes Wie NU otel ew Hie po ole eaca Sib e me, peels See STE eee if
Shale 25 veiling win site ee i eee ae © Ace bow» oe Oa Re 6 *
COST, Seis Setete tere a ridin bcs. vo epee ws bic 6 wle:a ied alta denen ie 5
Shale, CarboMBceous). 5.5 dyn hs oc 2 i's a wane wae bisieiae sc ah eo eee 3 6
Coal Ree eles are Bie: oe ose Se was Caleta cove Cate ne 2
Shale, Sa@Mgyinc é «2 were evs Meta we Wide bia le’o eualecdeg Rigtetatae APRESS 2 6
COB aes a hag eben ew k GR lech in Jes wo ole nel ead el te Ree 1
M
my
ah
2
mM
9
B
Qu
|
fan)
DESCRIPTIVE DETAILS: RIO PUERCO FIELD
627
Feet Inches
EN Ee Ce oak tale tk < cos & oR a SURI Kiewit WoW blew ha a vo walew ee 2
aN GOO. 4 RE pela, wats; Bio's Mee vee sere 1
EP PERPEENAS oie tah v's Sh > a ares ee ee ee ees ee
cs SB. Soc sO Re eo a goa eowatios. HK fans [ ewe] aaa] s = «faecal
Sertiaia. Siro) > on Ree een ola OR dc dha Wheel Ge ee X |...) 50 -)e eee
NORETIONE BN. 6 Es RSE ce eek a CO saat ee we luant X Jann oan
Stantonoceras pseudocostatum
Johnson. .|...]..-|.-.1 2? -}<..1 X fe. }. 2 ole ee
Syncyclonema rigida H. & M.......)...|... ya ee eee ee -
SURCYCIONEMAIE SBIs Oe Recreate Red eee eon x} Ke
TOs SCURRI Mi ie A. ee AS Ce on MP ee
“yo CPUSBec tetas. ffs Sa eiseeeee Meier 4 os Bea Gas fre = =| + 0's] sim =e ie
a SSB. Geb Pe Elec ate ie ene hk SE AER en gh cn Mente Mc wa eee <~ 10 Seas
Thetis. circul@nis,M..& > Hic esc nccs~ Pas al oes RR ne « <.ils Je
Trigonarca (Breviarca) exigua
“ce
SMe ak Seieiiae eet ee ls ee JCSReeS o|. » =| sn t
SINCLAER, W. J.; Contributions to geo-
logic theory and method...... . 86, 262
= ss lh Ch CT
A el ey
INDEX TO VOLUME 23 757
Page
Sincuair, W. J., Correlation and paleo-
geography discussed by........... 85
—;Some Glacial deposits east of Cody,
Wyoming and their relation to the
Pleistocene erosional history of the
Rocky Mountain region........ pO ar gi
S1oux FALLs and vicinity, Bluff sec-
BRON Ree ee eae arte tol «! cacy'sfe’ sires: oe 136- 144
oe --—, Lerrace or bench sections. .
— — — —, Topography of............
wn section, Pleistocene formation of |
1!
— — — —, ’ Table OL GlEVATIONS.\ 4.05. ite
1
1
Sk1ou, Invention and explanation ‘of
SMITH, PHILIP S.; Glaciation in north-
Rear, AUASKS ow 6 os kc be 44, 563-570
SMitTH, W. S. TANGIER, elected Coun-
ellor Cordilleran Section......... 70_
—; Origin of the sandstone at the State
‘prison near Carson City, Nevada... 73
—, Orthoclase as a vein mineral dis-
CETILSISURTEL TNE ao og
SoutH American mammals; W.B. Scott. 85
sSouTH DaKkora, Pleistocene of Sioux
Hips an) VICINITY... ons. we 125-154
SPENCER, J. W., Closing phase of gla-
ciation in New York discussed by.
sere
; Covey Hill revisited... 36, 471-475, T-
—, —’ Discussion of Nebraskan and Kan-
SLOT CUSTRAR ee rr 47
—j; Hanging valleys and their pre-Gla-
cial equivalents in New York.....
47, 477-485
—, Post-Glacial erosion and oxidation
HS DS S1S0 ol 0 arr 47, 739
—, Stability of the Atlantic coast dis-
WESSEL 0 ee nn em 49. (Al
Spurr, J. E.; Investigation of the Me-
Sool OPES eee ener oe
STANLEY-BROWN, JOSEPH, elected Editor
Geological Society for 1912.......
STANTON. T. W.; Age of Yukon-Alaska
See a ae Pe etree te AS coe ye AS at baie ete 337
—; Fossiliferous conglomerates’ dis-
PURSE en) ty ce Bes sak had eyo. dl oh et 83
— quoted on Mancos and Mesaverde
METIS PME el Sik ciie's oh seco Cee ee aie ey ehes 598
STAUFFER, CLINTON R.; Oriskany sand-
Brones tor (Ontario. ......5.. 83, ofl-aiD
Streep Rock Lake, Geology of; Andrew
0. LUD ee ere 36; 722
— —series, Fossils of lower limestone
to) Ca One le ee e 46, 723
SEERA K.S. Lull... .4.7....h.. 211
STEGOSAURUS, Remarkable skeleton of.. 87
STEPHENSON, L. W., Reference to state-
ment made on coastal ee investi-
PORIDSTEPEREDY Cha ais fot ( e'=],c5m o) ale Mave ad sacs 82
Stosp, G. W., Delta deposits ieee aad
< (
Cie. oe (ew bw aise as « ew eS oo ye « 9 eo
Pie eb a @ 6 6 « ¥ 4 wee « «16 ee se 6 sree eo
by
STRATIGRAPHIC study of the Appala-
chians and central States with ref-
erence to the occurrence of oil and — _
gas; George H. Ashley........ ST. 725
STRATIGRAPHY of the coal fields of
northern central New Mexico; Wil-
RDS) ie ukahes sh gads & aoe" 571-686
Surss, Epwuarp. Congratulatory cable-
gram at annual dinner sent to. 47
— Secretary reports letters rec ceived in 4
answer to cablegram to.......... 47
SYLVANIA sandstone, W. H. Sherze is
ee 437
Page
SYMPOSIUM on ten years’ progress in
vertebrate paleontology ; R. 8S. Bass-
Ler, SACLE TALY’. oho ud waktes crane 85, 155-266
Tarr, R. §., quoted on origin of the
Great. Lakes! DASin. 2) )5,s 0 abate 479
— and LAWRENCE MARTIN; Glacial de-
posits of the continental type in
MATS IEE: , Rather o\tiia-tor aitgle, dice dade eatin 44, 729
TATONIC question, Arthur Keith on new
exidemed! in "the. | wi cee csi ee 35, 720
TaybLor, F. B., Closing phase of glacia-.
tion in New York discussed by.. 47
; Recent studies of the moraines of
Ontario and western New York. 46
TEMPERATURES in the United States,
List of underground
P.O > aes a0 8 6a oie
TENNESSEE (east), Onyx deposits in. 37, 739
TERM, An experiment in the invention’
EG sew aie Je ape anaes Rae ana any bee 115
TERMS over phrases, The advantage of. 112
THRTIARIES, Correlation of American. 234
TERTIARY and later formations, New
Mexiconand Colorado uci jal avie ele 607
aternary geology (some) of
western Montana, northern Idaho,
and eastern Washington; Oscar H.
PVT SIT Gy seb ones cre are: hg meee 75, 517-535
— deposits in the Pacific coast and .
basin regions of North America,
Correlation jof thes cls .cueeow oe 74
2 ——OLsOahw : C. Hi. Hiteheock. 2. 6. (ai
— faunas of the John Day region, Ref-
QEOMEQU TON, 5 iaa,d 28a Oana ate oe a eae 535
— (the middle American), State of our
Knewiedee: fis ccc glettys big a at eioe
PR URGRGE As: Fe. S., Tail <> deravccd uiwenhees 208
Topp, J. E.; Pre-Wisconsin channels in
southeastern South Dakota and
northeastern Nebraska.. 46, 463-470
;South Dakota Geological Survey,
FVETETEMGe: | TOs sees. Skt aces dose
Pena Nevada, Mineral associations
A bape Fores and Lucero: their structure
and relations to other plateau
plains of the desert; Charles R.
ISGVOS Ge erature Ore Anger ac 50, 713-718
eres) LAO CAD LOMA GL airs cei areloiaite. alkene xt Goat kuere 715
TRUE, F. W.; Marine mammals.... 85, 197
TYRRELL, J. B., Glacial investigations in
Minnesota in 1911 discussed by. 46, 733
UInTA Basin Eocene, Notes and slides of
TERE fae Se She NSO eae a eR cehe ic naruue
Utricu, E. O., quoted on Caney Ere
of OKA oOmas sik is aera ehs 458, 459
—, The Medina of Ontario discussed by. 83
; The Ozearieiamn thane. as eittec eee ek 84
Units of geological classification, Sug-
gestions as to definitions of terms
used in designating.............. 12
UPHAM, WARREN, Glacial investigations
in Minnesota in 1911 discussed by.
46, 734
VALLEYS and plains, Bastern Washing-
TOTS gS whan yeuotasetibreia ssa Beararas ava. che eet ale 533
VAN Horn, F. R., Paragenesis of the
Zeolites discussed by.......... 38, 727
VAUGHAN, T. WAYLAND: Coastal plain
investigations conducted by the
United -States and State Geological
SUP VERA. € ait oeWik a dietohchein ke ereiena one Zz
—, D. F. MacDonald introduced by.... 82
—, Geological section Isthmus of Pan-
Bs. CUSGUSREO. Uw sievaielc sy pecs katte 82
758
BULLETIN
Page
VAUGHAN, T. WAYLAND; Physical condi-
tions under which organic and
chemically precipitated limestones
STE. LOrMed. Soll esas oe ae 82
VERTEBRATE paleontologists, Formations
named and described by.......... 262
-—— paleontology, Symposium on the ten
years’ progress in. 32s OD, 2oa-260
VERTEBRATES of the Pleistocene, Estab-
lishment of faunal divisions among :
Ue? 2) 2. eo es ee ee a eso Seeeer aes 7
48, 447-455, 743
VoLCANOES of Hawaii, Succession in :
AEE OV LDE ofc. che oe ala re es 747
WaALcoTT, CHARLES D.; Fossils of lower
limestone of Steep Rock series. 46, 723
= IS We “True introduced Dy¥a= 2<.. +. 85
—:Middle Cambrian crustaceans from
British Columbias 2/35 2 Wace sis s 6 84
—, Secretary Smithsonian Institution,
Paleontological Society welcomed by.
—. The Ozarkian fauna discussed by..
—, W. H: Houmes; and H.C. RizER,
Committee on Powell National
Pea at IS ee ares sy inte ew chet fe 45
WASHINGTON, Henry S.: Suggestion for
mineral nomenclature......... 51, 729
—, Plains and valleys of eastern...... 533
WATKINS GLEN and its pre-Glacial
GQUIVAIORE So [ose antes oe So to ies 483
WrLh Tecords, Ontario -5. -- ss. oe - = 375
WEAVER, CHARLES E.; Notes on the
pre-Glacial geology of the Puget
Sound + Dbasin ss. 6. ase ke os oie ee ee 75
WEBER, MAX, Reference to ‘“‘Die Sauge-
TERE” ZDOOKS TL GES a. as) cs ae Me Ssh ee 187
Wuerry, E. T., Delta deposits discussed
UNS i Ly Sie eho they ONS Sac ee 48, 745
WueETSTONE Gulf and its pre-Glacial
VEL RER Yas cote te sane scecunl reeua tence ciel a Pele 484
WESTGATE, L. G., and E. B. BRANSON;
Cenezoic history of the Wind River
Mountains, Wyoming........-.- 49, 739
WuHItTr, Davip: Characters of Cala-
mites inornatus Dawson.......... 88
—. Correlation of Paleozoic faunas dis-
CUSSEGE PV one - sens Sarees She cn atane 83
—. Delta deposits discussed by..... 48, 744
-— elected Second Vice- President Geo-
logical Society for 1912.......... 2
- Resins in Paleozoic coals...... 37, T28
Wuirtr, ISRAEL C., Discussion of origin
of sediments and coloring matter
of the eastern Oklahoma Red Beds
D¥i. occ tk ate Reeiee'S Gee ee 36, 724
——elected First Vice-President Geologi-
. Cal Society Lom Lees ova. < woke woe os 2
OF THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
Page
WHITNEY, J. D.; Report on iron ore of
Lake Superior region............ 317
WHITTLESEY, CHARLES; Iron ores of
Lake Superior result of segregation. 320
WILKIE, , of Palo Alto, California,
Tourmalines, benitoites, etcetera,
exhibited . by... < .:. 3 2.0. ass See
WILLIAMS, H. S.; Correlation of the
Paleozoic faunas of the Eastport
Quadrangle, Maine........ 83, 349-352
—, Paleontology of a voracious appe-
tite discussed by... .2.. =. esse e eee 83
WILLIS, BaILEy, quoted on the “Stra-
tigraphy and_ structure of the
Lewis and ivine ranges’’..... 690
WiLuiston, S. W.:; Evolutionary evi-
Gene... 6 as kes ee eee 86, 257
WINCHELL, A. N., J. Howard Mathews
introduced by aed os a eee 5
—. Memoir of Auguste Michel-Lévy by. 32
— — — Christopher Webber Hall by... 28
—: Progress of opinion as to the origin
of the iron ores of the Lake Supe-
bior’ Tevian=......— =o eee 1, 317-324
— +tSaponite, thalite, greenalite, and
ereenstone.. . . - Sonu see 1, 329-332
WiNpD River Mountains, Wyoming, kee
zoic history of. +. 122s eee 739
WiNpb-scour, Arid region of the South,
WeSES. 2 oo. cua cee eee 717
WISCONSIN drift and loess, Des Moines
section. .: : os kc 5. 0. st eee Gb
WoopwortH, J. B.; Boulder beds of the
Caney shale at Talihina, Oklahoma.
50, 457-462
-—, Coastal marshes south of Cape Cod
discussed by. ; . ...--.=. see 50, 742
—, Covey Hill revisited discussed by. 36, 722
—, Structure of the Helderberg Front
discussed by. .. .o..-.. =o 50, T47
WRIGHT, FRED. E. sranularity limits
in oeasra phat. microscopic work.
37, 726
WRIGHT, GEORGE FREDERICK, Pleisto-
eene formations and “loess” dis-
cussed) by. 2]. < ~= oe oan Sees
— ; Post-Glacial and ovxida-
47, 277-296
YUKON-ALASKA geological formations... 334
——_— international boundary, Area we
studies along: .. ... “c.<.s eee ~« bot
— plateau. .....<..~«. ++ = Spee 337
— and Alaska. Differential erosion and
conta in portions of... 333-345
ZEOLITES. Paragenesis of the. 223s 37
ZONES, New Mexico Gastropod, Tres
Hermanos sandstone, Septaria, and
Cephalopod. ......~=<.= o5seeeeee - 595
a De ee
THE GEOLOGICAL SOCIETY OF AMERICA
OFFICERS, 1912
President:
\ HerMAN L. FatrcH Ip, Rochester, N. Y.
Vice-Presidents :
IskAEL C. WHITE, Morgantown, W. Va.
Davip WuitTE, Washington, D. C.
Secretary:
EpMuND Otis Hovey, American Museum of Natural History, New York
City
Treasurer :
Witiram BuLiock CuiarRK, Baltimore, Md.
Editor:
JOSEPH STANLEY-Brown, Coldspring Harbor, Long Island, N. Y.
Inbrarian:
H. P. Cusuine, Cleveland, Ohio
Councillors:
(Term expires 1912)
J. B. WoopwortH, Cambridge, Mass.
C. S. Prosser, Columbus, Ohio
(Term expires 1913)
A. H. Purpug, Fayetteville, Ark.
Hernricu Riss, Ithaca, N. Y.
(Term expires 1914)
SAMUEL W. Bryer, Ames, Iowa
ArTHUR Keitu, Washington, D. C.
‘
tS